AISC 360 - Draft - 2021 02 05

AISC 360-xx
NOTE: The tracked revisions in this

draft indicate changes made to the first
public review draft of this document
dated August 3, 2020.
_________________________
Specification
for Structural Steel Buildings
_________________________
Public Review Draft dated February 5, 2021
Supersedes the Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

dated July 7, 2016 and all previous versions of this specification
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION

130 East Randolph Street, Suite 2000
Chicago, Illinois 60601-6204
2
AISC © XXXX
by
American Institute of Steel Construction
All rights reserved. This book or any part thereof must not be
FOR COMMITTEE
reproduced USEofONLY
in any form without the written permission the publisher.
The AISC logo is a registered trademark of AISC.
The information presented in this publication has been prepared by a balanced com-
mittee following American National Standards Institute (ANSI) consensus proce-
dures and recognized principles of design and construction. While it is believed to be
accurate, this information should not be used or relied upon for any specific applica-
tion without competent professional examination and verification of its accuracy,
suitability and applicability by a licensed engineer or architect. The publication of
this information is not a representation or warranty on the part of the American Insti-
tute of Steel Construction, its officers, agents, employees or committee members, or
of any other person named herein, that this information is suitable for any general or
particular use, or of freedom from infringement of any patent or patents. All repre-
sentations or warranties, express or implied, other than as stated above, are specifi-
cally disclaimed. Anyone making use of the information presented in this publication
assumes all liability arising from such use.
Caution must be exercised when relying upon standards and guidelines developed by
other bodies and incorporated by reference herein since such material may be modi-
fied or amended from time to time subsequent to the printing of this edition. The
American Institute of Steel Construction bears no responsibility for such material
other than to refer to it and incorporate it by reference at the time of the initial publi-
cation of this edition.
Printed in the United States of America
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, xxxx,2022

Public Review Draft Dated February 5, 2021
Front-1
1 Symbols
2
3
4 Definitions for the symbols used in this standard are provided here and reflect the
5 definitions provided in the body of this standard. Some symbols may be used and
6 defined multiple times throughout the document. The section or table number shown
7 in the right-hand column of the list identifies the first time the symbol is used in this
8 document. Symbols without text definitions are omitted.
9
10 Symbol Definition Section
11
12
13 ABM Area of the base metal, in.2 (mm2) .......................................................J2.4
14 Ab Nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or threaded part, in.2 (mm2) ....J3.6
15 Ab Nominal body area of undriven rivet, in.2 (mm2).................... App. 5.3.2a
16 Ac
5, EW
Area of concrete, in.2 (mm2) ....................................................... I2.1bI1.5
21
17 Ac Area of concrete slab within effective width, in.2 (mm2) ................... I3.2d
18 Ac Area of concrete in filled composite member, in.2 (mm2) ................... I4.2
Y VI
19
20
Ae
Ae
20
Effective area, in.2 (mm2) ................................................................... E7.2
Effective net area, in.2 (mm2) ................................................................ D2
AR E
21 Ae Effective net area as defined in Section D3, in.2(mm2) ........................J4.1

22 Ae Summation of the effective areas of the cross section based on the reduced
U IC R
23 effective widths, be, de or he, or the area as given by Equations E7-6 or E7-
24 7, in.2 (mm2) ..........................................................................................E7
25 Aev Effective area subjected to shear, in.2 (mm2) .......................................J4.3
BR BL
26 Afc Area of compression flange, in.2 (mm2) ............................................. G2.2

27 Afg Gross area of tension flange, calculated in accordance with Section B4.3a,
28 in.2 (mm2).......................................................................................... F13.1
FE PU
29 Afn Net area of tension flange, calculated in accordance with Section B4.3b,
30 in. 2 (mm2) ......................................................................................... F13.1
31 Aft Area of tension flange, in.2 (mm2) ..................................................... G2.2
ED FT
32 Ag Gross area of angle, in.2 (mm2) ...................................................... F10.2

33 Ag Gross area of member, in.2 (mm2) .................................................... B4.3a
34 Ag Gross area of eyebar body, in.2 (mm2) ............................................... D6.1
AT A
35 Ag Gross area of composite member, in.2 (mm2) .................................... I2.1a

D DR
36 Agv Gross area subject to shear, in.2 (mm2) ................................................J4.2

37 An Net area of member, in.2 (mm2) ...................................................... B4.3b
38 Ant Net area subject to tension, in.2 (mm2) .................................................J4.3
39 Anv Net area subject to shear, in.2 (mm2)....................................................J4.2
40 Apb Projected area in bearing, in.2 (mm2) ..................................................... J7
41 As Area of steel section, in.2 (mm2) ......................................................... I1.5
42 Asa Cross-sectional area of steel headed stud anchor, in.2 (mm2) ............. I8.2a
43 Asf Area on the shear failure path, in.2 (mm2).......................................... D5.1
44 Asr Area of continuous reinforcing bars, in.2 (mm2) ................................ I2.1a
45 Asr Area of developed longitudinal reinforcing steel within the effective width
46 of the concrete slab, in.2 (mm2) ....................................................... I3.2d.2
47 Asw Area of steel plates in the direction of in-plane shear, in.2 (mm2) ....... I1.5
48 At Net area in tension, in.2 (mm2) ..................................................... App. 3.4
49 AT Nominal forces and deformations due to the design-basis fire defined in
50 Section 4.2.1 ............................................................................. App. 4.1.4
51 Av Shear area of the steel portion of a composite member. The shear area for
52 a circular section is equal to 2As/π, and for a rectangular section is equal
53 to the sum of the area of webs in the direction of in-plane shear, in.2 (mm2)
54 ............................................................................................................. I4.2
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

Front-2
55 Aw Area of web, the overall depth times the web thickness, dtw, in.2 (mm2)
56 ........................................................................................................... G2.1
57 Aw Area of web or webs, taken as the sum of the overall depth times the web
58 thickness, dtw, in.2 (mm2) ...................................................................... G4
59 Awe Effective area of the weld, in.2 (mm2) ..................................................J2.4
60 Awel Effective area of longitudinally loaded fillet welds, in.2 (mm2) ...........J2.4
61 Awet Effective area of transversely loaded fillet welds, in.2 (mm2) ..............J2.4
62 A1 Loaded area of concrete, in.2 (mm2) ................................................... I6.3a
63 A1 Area of steel concentrically bearing on a concrete support, in.2 (mm2) . J8
64 A2 Maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that is geometri-
65 cally similar to and concentric with the loaded area, in.2 (mm2)............ J8
66 B Overall width of rectangular HSS main member, measured 90° to the
67 plane of the connection, in. (mm) ........................................... Table D3.1
68 Bb Overall width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate, measured 90°
69 to the plane of the connection, in. (mm) ............................................ K1.1
70 Be Effective width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate for local
71 yielding of the transverse element, in. (mm) ..................................... K1.1
72 Bep 5, EW
Effective width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate for punching
21
73 shear, in. (mm) ....................................................... K1.1
74 B1 Multiplier to account for P-δ effects ....................................... App. 8.21.1
Y VI
75 B2
20
Multiplier to account for P-Δ effects ...................................... App. 8.21.1
76 C HSS torsional constant ....................................................................... H3.1
AR E
77 C Compressive force due to unfactored dead load and live load, kips (kN)
U IC R
78 .................................................................................. App. 4.3.2b

79 Cb Lateral-torsional buckling modification factor for nonuniform moment di-
80 agrams when both ends of the segment are braced ................................ F1
81 Cf Constant from Table A-3.1 for the fatigue category .................... App. 3.3
BR BL
82 Cm Equivalent uniform moment factor assuming no relative translation of

83 member ends ........................................................................ App. 8.2.11.2
FE PU
84 Cr Reduction factor for shear rupture on pin-connected members ......... D5.1

85 Cv1 Web shear strength coefficient........................................................... G2.1
86 Cv2 Web shear buckling coefficient ........................................................ G2.2
87 Cw Warping constant, in.6 (mm6) ................................................................E4
ED FT
88 C1 Coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of encased composite com-

89 pression member ................................................................................ I2.1b
AT A
90 C2 Edge distance increment, in. (mm) ........................................... Table J3.5

D DR
91 C3 Coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of filled composite com-

92 pression member ................................................................................ I2.2b
93 D Diameter of round HSS, in. (mm) ................................................... B4.1b
94 D Heated perimeter of the beam, in. (mm) ................................. App. 4.3.2b
95 D Heated perimeter of the column, in. (mm) .............................. App. 4.3.2a
96 D Inside heated perimeter of the gypsum board, in. (mm) ......... App. 4.3.2a
97 D Outside diameter of round HSS, in. (mm) ............................... Table D3.1
98 D Outside diameter of round HSS main chord member, in. (mm) ........ K1.1
99 D Outside dimension for square columns, or least outside dimension for rec-
100 tangular columns, in. (mm) .................................................... App. 4.3.2b
101 D Nominal dead load, kips (N) .............................................................. B3.9
102 D Nominal dead load rating ........................................................ App. 5.4.12
103 Db Outside diameter of round HSS branch member, in. (mm) ............... K1.1
104 Du A multiplier that reflects the ratio of the mean installed bolt pretension to
105 the specified minimum bolt pretension ................................................J3.8
106 E Modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa) ... Table B4.1b
107 E(T) Modulus of elasticity of concrete at elevated temperature, ksi (MPa)
108 .................................................................................. App. 4.2.3b
1.5
109 Ec Modulus of elasticity of concrete = wc fc′, ksi

Front-3
1.5
110 ( 0.043wc fc′ , MPa) ......................................................................... I2.1b
111 Ec(T) Shear modulus of elasticity of steel at elevated temperature, ksi (MPa)
112 .................................................................................. App. 4.2.3b
113 Es Modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa) .............. I2.1b
114 EIeff Effective stiffness of composite section, kip-in.2 (N-mm2) ............... I2.1b
115 F(T) Engineering stress at elevated temperature, ksi (MPa) ........... App. 4.2.3b
116 Fc Available stress in main chord member, ksi (MPa) ........................... K1.1
117 Fca Available axial stress at the point of consideration, determined in accord-
118 ance with Chapter E for compression or Section D2 for tension, ksi (MPa)
119 ................................................................................................ H2
120 Fcbw, Fcbz Available flexural stress at the point of consideration, determined in ac-
121 cordance with Chapter F, ksi (MPa) ..................................................... H2
122 Fcr Buckling stress for the section as determined by analysis, ksi (MPa) ......
123 ........................................................................................................... H3.3
124 Fcr Critical stress, ksi (MPa)........................................................................E3
125 Fcr Lateral-torsional buckling stress for the section as determined by analysis,
126
5, EW
ksi (MPa) .......................................................................................... F12.2
21
127 Fcr Local buckling stress for the section as determined by analysis, ksi (MPa)
128 ............................................................................................... F12.3
Y VI
129 Fcr Critical buckling stress for steel element of filled composite members, ksi
20
130 (MPa) I6.2b
AR E
131 Fe Elastic buckling stress, ksi (MPa) ..........................................................E3

132 Fel Elastic local buckling stress determined according to Equation E7-5 or an
U IC R
133 elastic local buckling analysis, ksi (MPa) .......................................... E7.1

134 FEXX Filler metal classification strength, ksi (MPa) .....................................J2.4
135 Fin Nominal bond stress, ksi (MPa) ........................................................ I6.3c
136 FL Nominal compression flange stress above which the inelastic buckling
BR BL
137 limit states apply, ksi (MPa) ............................................................... F4.2

138 Fn Critical buckling stress for steel element of filled composite members, ksi
FE PU
139 (MPa)…. ............................................................................................ I2.2b

140 Fn Nominal stress, ksi .................................................................................E3
141 Fn Nominal tensile stress, Fnt, or shear stress, Fnv, from Table J3.2, ksi (MPa)
ED FT
142 ..................................................................................................J3.6
143 FnBM Nominal stress of the base metal, ksi (MPa) ........................................J2.4
144 Fnt Nominal tensile stress from Table J3.2, ksi (MPa) ..............................J3.6
AT A
145 Fnt Nominal tensile strength of the driven rivet from Table A-5.3.1, ksi (MPa)
D DR
146 ......................................................................................... App. 5.3.2a

147 Fnt(T) Nominal tensile strength of the bolt, ksi (MPa) ...................... App. 4.2.3b
148 F′nt Nominal tensile stress modified to include the effects of shear stress, ksi
149 (MPa) ..................................................................................................J3.7
150 Fnv Nominal shear stress from Table J3.2, ksi (MPa) ................................J3.6
151 Fnv Nominal shear strength of the driven rivet from Table A-5.3.1, ksi (MPa)
152 ................................................................................................ App. 5.3.2a
153 Fnv(T) Nominal shear strength of the bolt, ksi (MPa) ........................ App. 4.2.3b
154 Fnw Nominal stress of the weld metal, ksi (MPa) .......................................J2.4
155 Fnw Nominal stress of the weld metal in accordance with Chapter J with no
156 increase in strength due to directionality of the load for fillet welds,
157 ksi (MPa) ............................................................................................ K5
158 Fp(T) Proportional limit at elevated temperature .............................. App. 4.2.3b
159 FSR Allowable stress range, ksi (MPa) ............................................... App. 3.3
160 FTH Threshold allowable stress range, maximum stress range for indefinite de-
161 sign life from Table A-3.1, ksi (MPa).......................................... App. 3.3
162 Fu Specified minimum tensile strength, ksi (MPa) .................................... D2
163 Fu Specified minimum tensile strength of a steel headed stud anchor, ksi
164 (MPa) ................................................................................................ I8.2a

Front-4
165 Fu Specified minimum tensile strength of the connected material, ksi

166 (MPa) .................................................................................................J3.10
167 Fu Specified minimum tensile strength of HSS chord member material, ksi
168 (MPa) ................................................................................................. K1.1
169 Fu(T) Specified minimum tensile strength at elevated temperature, ksi (MPa) ...
170 .................................................................................. App. 4.2.3b
171 Fub Specified minimum tensile strength of HSS branch member material, ksi
172 (MPa) ................................................................................................. K1.1
173 Fy Specified minimum yield stress, ksi (MPa). As used in this Specification,
174 “yield stress” denotes either the specified minimum yield point (for those
175 steels that have a yield point) or specified yield strength (for those steels
176 that do not have a yield point) ........................................... Table B4.1b
177 Fy Specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used, ksi (MPa)
178 E3
179 Fy Specified minimum yield stress of the column web, ksi (MPa).........J10.6
180 Fy Specified minimum yield stress of HSS main chord member material,
181 ksi (MPa) ........................................................................................... K1.1
182 Fy(T) 5, EW
Specified minimum yield stress of steel at elevated temperature, ksi (MPa)
21
183 .................................................................................. App. 4.2.3b
184 Fyb Specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch member or plate material,
Y VI
185 20
ksi (MPa) ........................................................................................... K1.1
186 Fyf Specified minimum yield stress of the flange, ksi (MPa) ..................J10.1
AR E
187 Fysr Specified minimum yield stress of reinforcing steel, ksi (MPa) ....... I2.1b
U IC R
188 Fyst Specified minimum yield stress of the stiffener material, ksi (MPa) .........
189 ........................................................................................................... G2.4
190 Fyw Specified minimum yield stress of the web material, ksi (MPa) ....... G2.3
191 G Shear modulus of elasticity of steel = 11,200 ksi (77 200 MPa) ...........E4
BR BL
192 G(T) Shear modulus of elasticity of steel at elevated temperature, ksi (MPa)
193 .................................................................................. App. 4.2.3b
194 Gc Shear modulus of concrete, ksi (MPa) ................................................. I1.5
FE PU
195 H Ambient temperature thermal capacity of the steel column, Btu/ft °F

196 (W/kJ m K) ............................................................................. App. 4.3.2a
197 H Flexural constant ....................................................................................E4
ED FT
198 H Maximum transverse dimension of rectangular steel member, in. (mm) ...
199 ........................................................................................................... I6.3c
AT A
200 H Total story shear, in the direction of translation being considered, pro-
201 duced by the lateral forces used to compute ΔH, kips (N) .... App. 8.1.32.2
D DR
202 H Overall height of rectangular HSS chord member, measured in the plane
203 of the connection, in. (mm) ................................................................ K1.1
204 Hb Overall height of rectangular HSS branch member, measured in the plane
205 of the connection, in. (mm) ....................................................... K1.1
206 I Moment of inertia in the plane of bending, in.4 (mm4) ........... App. 8.12.1
207 Ic Moment of inertia of the concrete section about the elastic neutral axis of
208 the composite section, in.4 (mm4) ........................................................ I1.5
209 Is Moment of inertia of steel shape about the elastic neutral axis of the com-
210 posite section, in.4 (mm4) ......................................................... I1.5
211 Isr Moment of inertia of reinforcing bars about the elastic neutral axis of the
212 composite section, in.4 (mm4) ............................................................ I2.1b
213 Ist Moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners about an axis in the web center
214 for stiffener pairs, or about the face in contact with the web plate for single
215 stiffeners, in.4 (mm4) .................................................................... G2.4
216 Ist1 Minimum moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners required for develop-
217 ment of the full shear post buckling resistance of the stiffened web panels,
218 Vr = Vc1, in.4 (mm4) ............................................................................ G2.4
219 Ist2 Minimum moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners required for develop-
220 ment of web shear buckling resistance, Vr = Vc2, in.4 (mm4) ............. G2.4

Front-5
221 I x, I y Moment of inertia about the principal axes, in.4 (mm4) .........................E4
222 Iy Moment of inertia about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4) ................................... F2.2
223 Iyeff Effective out-of-plane moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4) ............. App. 6.3.2a
224 Iyc Moment of inertia of the compression flange about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4)
225 ............................................................................................................ F4.2
226 Iyt Moment of inertia of the tension flange about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4) .......
227 ................................................................................................ App. 6.3.2a
228 J Torsional constant, in.4 (mm4) ...............................................................E4
229 K Effective length factor ...........................................................................E2
230 Kc Ambient temperature thermal conductivity of the concrete, Btu/hr ft °F.
231 (W/m K) ............................................ App. 4.3.2a
232 Kc Thermal conductivity of concrete or clay masonry unit, Btu/hr-ft-°F (W/m
233 K) ............................................ App. 4.3.2a
234 Kx Effective length factor for flexural buckling about x-axis .....................E4
235 Ky Effective length factor for flexural buckling about y-axis .....................E4
236 Kz Effective length factor for torsional buckling about the longitudinal axis .
237 ...............................................................................................................E4
238 L 5, EW
Interior dimension of one side of a square concrete box protection, in.
21
239 (mm) .................................................................................. App. 4.3.2a
240 L Length of member, in. (mm) .............................................................. H3.1
Y VI
241 L 20
Laterally unbraced length of member, in. (mm) ....................................E2
242 L Laterally unbraced length of element, in. (mm) ...................................J4.4
AR E
243 L Length of span, in. (mm) ........................................................ App. 6.3.2a

U IC R
244 L Length of member between work points at truss chord centerlines, in.
245 (mm) ......................................................................................................E5
246 L Nominal live load, kips (N) ............................................................... B3.9
247 L Nominal live load rating ......................................................... App. 5.4.12
BR BL
248 L Nominal occupancy live load, kips (N) .................................... App. 4.1.4
249 L Height of story, in. (mm) .......................................................... App. 7.3.2
250 Lb Length between points that are either braced against lateral displacement
FE PU
251 of compression flange or braced against twist of the cross section, in.
252 (mm) ................................................................................................... F2.2
253 Lb Laterally unbraced length of member, in. (mm) ............................... F10.2
ED FT
254 Lb Length between points that are either braced against lateral displacement
255 of the compression region, or between points braced to prevent twist of
AT A
256 the cross section, in. (mm) ................................................................ F11.2

257 Lb Largest laterally unbraced length along either flange at the point of load,
D DR
258 in. (mm) .............................................................................................J10.4

259 Lbr Unbraced length within the panel under consideration, in. (mm) ..............
260 .................................................................................................. App. 6.2.1
261 Lbr Unbraced length adjacent to the point brace, in. (mm). ............ App. 6.2.2
262 Lc Effective length of member, in. (mm) ...................................................E2
263 Lc Effective length of member for buckling about the minor axis, in. (mm) .
264 ...............................................................................................................E5
265 Lc Effective length of built-up member, in. (mm) ................................... E6.1
266 Lcx Effective length of member for buckling about x-axis, in. (mm) ...........E4
267 Lcy Effective length of member for buckling about y-axis, in. (mm) ...........E4
268 Lcz Effective length of member for buckling about longitudinal axis, in. (mm)
269 ...............................................................................................................E4
270 Lc1 Effective length in the plane of bending, calculated based on the assump-
271 tion of no lateral translation at the member ends, set equal to the laterally
272 unbraced length of the member unless analysis justifies a smaller value,
273 in. (mm) ............................................................................... App. 8.1.22.1
274 Lin Load introduction length, determined in accordance with Section I6.4, in.
275 (mm) ............................................................................................. I6.3c

Front-6
276 Lp Limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of yielding, in. (mm)
277 ..................................................................................................... F2.2
278 Lr Limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic lateral-
279 torsional buckling, in. (mm) ............................................................... F2.2
280 Lr Nominal roof live load ............................................................ App. 5.4.21
281 Lv Distance from maximum to zero shear force, in. (mm) ........................ G5
282 Lx, Ly, Lz Laterally unbraced length of the member for each axis, in. (mm) .........E4
283 MA Absolute value of moment at quarter point of the unbraced segment, kip-
284 in. (N-mm) ............................................................................................. F1
285 MB Absolute value of moment at centerline of the unbraced segment, kip-in.
286 (N-mm) ................................................................................................. F1
287 MC Absolute value of moment at three-quarter point of the unbraced segment,
288 kip-in. (N-mm)....................................................................................... F1
289 Mc Available flexural strength, φMn or Mn/Ω, determined in accordance with
290 Chapter F, kip-in. (N-mm) ................................................................. H1.1
291 Mc Available Design flexural strength, determined in accordance with Sec-
292 tion I3, kip-in. (N-mm) ........................................................................... I5
293 Mc 5, EW
Allowable flexural strength, determined in accordance with Section I3,
21
294 kip-in. (N-mm)........................................................................................ I5
295 Mc-ip Available strength for in-plane bending, kip-in. (N-mm) ........ Table K4.1
Y VI
296 Mc-op
20
Available strength for out-of-plane bending, kip-in. (N-mm) . Table K4.1
297 Mcr Elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, kip-in. (N-mm) .............. F10.2
AR E
298 Mcx Available lateral-torsional strength for major axis flexure determined in
U IC R
299 accordance with Chapter F using Cb = 1.0, kip-in. (N-mm) .............. H1.3
300 Mcx Available flexural strength about x-axis for the limit state of tensile rup-
301 ture of the flange, φMn or Mn/Ω, determined according to Section F13.1,
302 kip-in. (N-mm)...................................................................................... H4
BR BL
303 Mcx, Mcy available flexural strength, φM n or M n Ω , determined in accordance Field Code Changed
304 with Chapter F, kip-in. (N-mm) ....................................................... H3.2 Field Code Changed
FE PU
305 Mlt First-order moment using LRFD or ASD load combinations, due to lateral
306 translation of the structure only, kip-in. (N-mm) .................... App. 8.21.1
307 Mmax Absolute value of maximum moment in the unbraced segment, kip-in. (N-
ED FT
308 mm)........................................................................................................ F1
309 Mmid Moment at middle of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm).......... App. 1.3.2c
310 Mn Nominal flexural strength, kip-in. (N-mm)............................................ F1
AT A
311 Mn Nominal flexural strength due to yielding at ambient temperature deter-

D DR
312 mined in accordance with the provisions in Section F2.1, kip-in. (N-mm)
313 .................................................................................. App. 4.2.4e
314 Mnt First-order moment using LRFD or ASD load combinations, with the
315 structure restrained against lateral translation, kip-in. (N-mm)App. 8.21.1
316 Mp Plastic moment, kip-in. (N-mm) ........................................... Table B4.1b
317 Mp Moment corresponding to plastic stress distribution over the composite
318 cross section, kip-in. (N-mm) ....................................................... I3.4b
319 Mpf Plastic moment of a section composed of the flange and a segment of the
320 web with a depth, de, kip-in. (N-mm) ................................................ G2.3
321 Mpm Smaller of Mpf and Mpst, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................................ G2.3
322 Mpst Plastic moment of a section composed of the end stiffener plus a length of
323 web equal to de plus the distance from the inside face of the stiffener to
324 the end of the beam, except that the distance from the inside face of the
325 stiffener to the end of the beam shall not exceed 0.84tw E Fy for calcu-
326 lation purposes, kip-in. (N-mm) ....................................................... G2.3
327 Mr Required second-order flexural strength using LRFD or ASD load combi-
328 nations, kip-in. (N-mm) ......................................................... App. 8.1.12
329 Mr Required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, us-
330 ing LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ..................... H1.1

Front-7
331 Mr Required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Section I1.5,

332 using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ...................... I5
333 Mr Required flexural strength of the beam within the panel under considera-
334 tion using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ..................
335 ................................................................................................ App. 6.3.1a
336 Mr Largest of the required flexural strengths of the beam within the unbraced
337 lengths adjacent to the point brace using LRFD or ASD load combina-
338 tions, kip-in. (N-mm)……………………. ............................. App. 6.3.1b
339 Mbr Required flexural strength of the brace, kip-in. (N-mm) ........ App. 6.3.2a
340 Mro Required flexural strength in the HSS chord member at a joint, on the side
341 of joint with lower compression stress, kip-in. (N-mm) .. Table K2.1K1.3
342 Mr-ip Required in-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load
343 combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................................. Table K4.1
344 Mr-op Required out-of-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD
345 load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ......................................... Table K4.1
346 Mrx Required flexural strength at the location of the bolt holes, determined in
347 accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, pos-
348 5, EW
itive for tension and negative for compression in the flange under consid-
21
349 eration, kip-in. (N-mm) .......................................................... H4
350 Mrx,Mry Required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, us-
Y VI
351 20
ing LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ..................... H3.2
352 Mu Required flexural strength at elevated temperature, determined using the
AR E
353 load combination in Equation A-4-1, kip-in. and greater than 0.01Mn (N-
U IC R
354 mm) .................................................................................. App. 4.2.4e

355 My Moment at yielding of the extreme fiber, kip-in. (N-mm) ..... Table B4.1b
356 My Yield moment corresponding to yielding of the tension flange and first
357 yield of the compression flange, kip-in. (N-mm)............................... I3.4b
BR BL
358 My Yield moment about the axis of bending, kip-in. (N-mm) .................. F9.1
359 My Yield moment calculated using the geometric section modulus, kip-in. (N-
360 mm) ............................................................................................... F10.2
FE PU
361 Myc Yield moment in the compression flange, kip-in. (N-mm) ................. F4.1
362 Myt Yield moment in the tension flange, kip-in. (N-mm).......................... F4.4
363 M1′ Effective moment at the end of the unbraced length opposite from M2, kip-
ED FT
364 in. (N-mm) .............................................................................. App. 1.3.2c

365 M1 Smaller moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm) .....................
AT A
366 ............................................................................ F13.5App. 1.3.2c

367 M2 Larger moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm) .......................
D DR
368 ............................................................................ F13.5App. 1.3.2c

369 Ni Notional load applied at level i, kips (N) ......................................... C2.2b
370 Ni Additional lateral load, kips (N) ............................................... App. 7.3.2
371 Ov Overlap connection coefficient .......................................................... K3.1
372 Pa Required axial strength in chord using ASD load combinations, kips (N)
373 ................................................................................................. Table K2.1
374 Pbr Required end and intermediate point brace strength using LRFD or ASD
375 load combinations, kips (N) ...................................................... App. 6.2.2
376 Pc Available compressive strength, φPn or Pn/Ω, determined in accordance
377 with Chapter E, kips (N) ....................................................... H1.1
378 Pc Available tensile strength, φPn or Pn/Ω, determine in accordance with
379 Chapter D, kips (N)............................................................................ H1.2
380 Pc Available compressive strength in plane of bending, kips (N) .......... H1.3
381 Pc Available tensile or compressive strength, φPn or Pn/Ω, determined in ac-
382 cordance with Chapter D or E, kips (N) ............................................ H3.2
383 Pc Available axial strength for the limit state of tensile rupture of the net sec-
384 tion at the location of bolt holes φPn or Pn/Ω, determined in accordance
385 with Section D2(b), kips (N) .......................................................... H4

Front-8
386 Pc Allowable axial strength, determined in accordance with Section I2, kips
387 (N)........................................................................................................... I5
388 Pc Design axial strength, determined in accordance with Section I2, kips (N)
389 I5
390 Pc Available axial strength, φPn or Pn/Ω, determined in accordance with Sec-
391 tion I1.5, kips (N)................................................................................... .I5
392 Pcy Available compressive strength out of the plane of bending, kips (N) ......
393 ........................................................................................................ H1.3
394 Pe Elastic critical buckling load determined in accordance with Chapter C or
395 Appendix 7, kips (N) ......................................................................... I2.1b
396 Pe story Elastic critical buckling strength for the story in the direction of translation
397 being considered, kips (N) .......................................... App 8.1.32.2
398 Pe1 Elastic critical buckling strength of the member in the plane of bending,
399 kips (N) ............................................................................... App. 8.2.11.2
400 Plt First-order axial force using LRFD or ASD load combinations, due to lat-
401 eral translation of the structure only, kips (N) ........................ App. 8.21.1
402 Pmf Total vertical load in columns in the story that are part of moment frames,
403 5, EW
if any, in the direction of translation being considered, kips (N) ...............
21
404 ............................................................................................. App. 8.1.32.2
405 Pn Nominal axial strength, kips (N) .......................................................... D2
Y VI
406 Pn
20
Nominal compressive strength, kips (N) ...............................................E1
407 Pn Nominal compressive strength at ambient temperature determined in ac-
AR E
408 cordance with Section E3, kips (N) ........................................ App. 4.2.4e
U IC R
409 Pno Nominal axial compressive strength of zero length, doubly symmetric, ax-
410 ially loaded composite member, kips (N) .......................................... I2.1b
411 Pno Available compressive strength of axially loaded doubly symmetric filled
412 composite members, kips (N) I2.2b
BR BL
413 Pno Nominal axial compressive strength without consideration of length ef-
414 fects, kips (N) ............................................................................ I2.1bI6.2a
415 Pns Cross-section compressive strength, kips (N) ................................... C2.3
FE PU
416 Pnt First-order axial force using LRFD and ASD load combinations, with the
417 structure restrained against lateral translation, kips (N).......... App. 8.1.12
418 Pp Nominal bearing strength, kips (N) ....................................................... J8
ED FT
419 Pp Plastic axial compressive strength, kips (N) ...................................... I2.2b

420 Pr Largest of the required axial strengths of the column within the unbraced
AT A
421 lengths adjacent to the point brace, using LRFD or ASD load combina-
422 tions, kips (N) ........................................................................... App. 6.2.2
D DR
423 Pr Required axial compressive strength using LRFD or ASD load combina-
424 tions, kips (N) .................................................................................... C2.3
425 Pr Required axial strength of the column within the panel under considera-
426 tion, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N) ............ App. 6.2.1
427 Pr Required second-order axial strength using LRFD or ASD load combina-
428 tions, kips (N) ......................................................................... App. 8.1.12
429 Pr Required compressive strength, determined in accordance with Chapter
430 C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N) ........................ H1.1
431 Pr Required tensile strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using
432 LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N) ...................................... H1.2
433 Pr Required axial strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using
435 Pr Required axial strength of the member at the location of the bolt holes,
436 determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load com-
437 binations, positive in tension and negative in compression, kips (N) ........
438 .............................................................................................................. H4
439 Pr Required axial strength, determined in accordance with Section I1.5, using
440 LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N) ........................................... I5
441 Pr Required external force applied to the composite member, kips (N) .........

Front-9
442 ........................................................................................................... I6.2a

443 Pr Required axial strength using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N)
444 ...........................................................................................................J10.6
445 Pro Required axial strength in the HSS chord member at a joint, on the side of
446 joint with lower compression stress, kips (N) .................. Table K2.1K1.3
447 Pstory Total vertical load supported by the story using LRFD or ASD load com-
448 binations, as applicable, including loads in columns that are not part of the
449 lateral force-resisting system, kips (N) ................................ App. 8.1.32.2
450 Pu Required axial strength in chord using LRFD load combinations, kips (N)
451 Table K2.1
452 Pu Required axial strength in compression using LRFD load combinations,
453 kips (N) .................................................................................. App. 1.3.2b
454 Pu Required compressive strength at elevated temperature, determined using
455 the load combination in Equation A-4-1, kips (N) ................ App. 4.2.4e
456 Py Axial yield strength of the column, kips (N) ....................................J10.6
457 Qct Available tensile strength, determined in accordance with Section I8.3b,
458 kips (N) .............................................................................................. I8.3c
459 Qcv 5, EW
Available shear strength, determined in accordance with Section I8.3a,
21
460 kips (N) .............................................................................................. I8.3c
461 Qf Chord-stress interaction parameter ...................................................J10.3
Y VI
462 Qg 20
Gapped truss joint parameter accounting for geometric effects .................
463 ................................................................................................. Table K3.1
AR E
464 Qn Nominal shear strength of one steel headed stud or steel channel anchor,
U IC R
465 kips (N) .............................................................................................. I3.2d

466 Qnt Nominal tensile strength of steel headed stud anchor, kips (N) ......... I8.3b
467 Qnv Nominal shear strength of steel headed stud anchor, kips (N) ........... I8.3a
468 Qrt Required tensile strength, kips (N) .................................................... I8.3b
BR BL
469 Qrv Required shear strength, kips (N) ...................................................... I8.3c

470 F Inside heated perimeter of the gypsum board, in. (mm) ......... App. 4.3.2a
471 R Fire resistance, minutes........................................................... App. 4.3.2a
FE PU
472 R Fire-resistance rating of column assembly, hours .................. App. 4.3.2a

473 R Fire endurance at equilibrium moisture conditions, minutes .. App. 4.3.2a
474 R Radius of joint surface, in. (mm) .............................................. Table J2.2
ED FT
475 Ra Required strength using ASD load combinations ............................. B3.2

476 RFIL Reduction factor for joints using a pair of transverse fillet welds only .....
AT A
477 ..................................................................................................... App. 3.3

478 Rg Coefficient to account for group effect ............................................. I8.2a
D DR
479 RM Coefficient to account for influence of P-δ on P-Δ ............. App. 8.2.21.3
480 Rn Nominal strength ............................................................................... B3.1
481 Rn Nominal bond strength, kips (N) ....................................................... I6.3c
482 Rn Nominal slip resistance, kips (N) .........................................................J1.8
483 Rn Nominal strength of the applicable force transfer mechanism, kips (N) ...
484 ............................................................................................................. I6.3
485 Rn Nominal strength of the connected material, kips (N) .......................J3.10
486 Rnwl Total nominal strength of longitudinally loaded fillet welds, as determined
487 in accordance with Table J2.5, kips (N) ..............................................J2.4
488 Rnwt Total nominal strength of transversely loaded fillet welds, as determined
489 in accordance with Table J2.5 without the increase in Section J2.4(b), kips
490 (N) ...............................................................................................J2.4
491 Rn Nominal yielding strength at ambient temperature determined in accord-
492 ance with Section D2, kips (N) ............................................... App. 4.2.4e
493 Ro Fire endurance at zero moisture content, minutes.................... App.4.3.2a
494 Rp Position effect factor for shear studs ................................................. I8.2a
495 Rpc Web plastification factor, determined in accordance with Section
496 F4.2(c)(6) ............................................................................................ F4.1
497 Rpg Bending strength reduction factor....................................................... F5.2

Front-10
498 RPJP Reduction factor for reinforced or nonreinforced transverse partial-joint-

499 penetration (PJP) groove welds .................................................. App. 3.3
500 Rpt Web plastification factor corresponding to the tension flange yielding
501 limit state ............................................................................................ F4.4
502 Ru Required tensile strength at elevated temperature, determined using the
503 load combination in Equation A-4-1 and greater than 0.01Rn, kips (N) ....
504 .................................................................................. App. 4.2.4e
505 Ru Required strength using LRFD load combinations ........................... B3.1
506 S Elastic section modulus about the axis of bending, in.3 (mm3) ........... F7.2
507 S Largest clear spacing of the ties, in. (mm) ......................................... I1.6b
508 S Nominal snow load, kips (N) .................................................... App. 4.1.4
509 Sc Elastic section modulus, in.3 (mm3) .................................................... F9.4
510 Sc Elastic section modulus to the toe in compression relative to the axis of
511 bending, in.3 (mm3) ........................................................................... F10.3
512 Se Effective section modulus determined with the effective width of the com-
513 pression flange, in.3 (mm3) .................................................................. F7.2
514 Sip Effective elastic section modulus of welds for in-plane bending, in.3
515 5, EW
(mm3) .................................................................................................... K5
21
516 Smin Minimum elastic section modulus relative to the axis of bending, in.3
517 (mm3) .................................................................................................. F12
Y VI
518 Sx 20
Elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3) ................ F2.2
519 Sx Minimum elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3) .......
AR E
520 .......................................................................................................... F13.1

U IC R
521 Sop Effective elastic section modulus of welds for out-of-plane bending, in.3
522 (mm3) .................................................................................................... K5
523 Sxc, Sxt Elastic section modulus referred to compression and tension flanges, re-
524 spectively, in.3 (mm3) ............................................................. Table B4.1b
BR BL
525 Sy Elastic section modulus taken about the y-axis, in.3 (mm3) ................ F6.1
526 T Elevated temperature of steel due to unintended fire exposure,°F (°C) .....
527 .................................................................................. App. 4.2.4d
FE PU
528 Ta Required tension force using ASD load combinations, kips (kN) .......J3.9
529 Tb Minimum fastener pretension given in Table J3.1, kips or Table J3.1M,
530 kips (kN) ..............................................................................................J3.8
ED FT
531 Tc Available torsional strength, φTn or Tn/Ω, determined in accordance with

532 Section H3.1, kip-in. (N-mm) ............................................................ H3.2
AT A
533 Tcr Critical temperature in °F (°C)................................................ App. 4.2.4e

534 Te Equivalent thickness of concrete or clay masonry unit,
D DR
535 in accordance with ACI 216.1, in. (mm)................................. App. 4.3.2a

536 Tn Nominal torsional strength, kip-in. (N-mm) ...................................... H3.1
537 Tr Required torsional strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, us-
538 ing LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm) ..................... H3.2
539 Tu Required tension force using LRFD load combinations, kips (kN) .....J3.9
540 U Shear lag factor ..................................................................................... D3
541 U Utilization ratio ........................................................................ Table K2.1
542 Ubs Reduction coefficient, used in calculating block shear rupture strength ....
543 .............................................................................................................J4.3
544 Up Stress index for primary members ............................................... App. 2.2
545 V′ Nominal shear force between the steel beam and the concrete slab trans-
546 ferred by steel anchors, kips (N) ........................................................ I3.2d
547 Vbr Required shear strength of the bracing system in the direction perpendic-
548 ular to the longitudinal axis of the column, kips (N) ............... App. 6.2.1
549 Vc Available shear strength, φVn or Vn/Ω, determined in accordance with
550 Chapter G, kips (N)............................................................................ H3.2
551 Vc1 Available shear strength calculated with Vn as defined in Section G2.1 or
552 G2.2. as applicable, kips (N).............................................................. G2.4

Front-11
553 Vc2 Available shear buckling strength, kips (N)....................................... G2.4

554 Vn Nominal shear strength, kips (N) .......................................................... G1
555 Vr Required shear strength in the panel being considered, kips (N) ....... G2.4
556 Vr Required shear strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using
558 V r′ Required longitudinal shear force to be transferred to the steel or concrete,
559 kips (N) ............................................................................................... I6.1
560 W Nominal weight of steel shape, lb/ft (kg/m) ........................... App. 4.3.2a
561 W′ Total weight of steel shape and gypsum wallboard protection, lb/ft (kg/m)
562 ............................................................................................. App. 4.3.2a
563 Yi Gravity load applied at level i from the LRFD load combination or ASD
564 load combination, as applicable, kips (N) ........................................ C2.2b
565 Z Plastic section modulus taken about the axis of bending, in.3 (mm3) ........
566 ............................................................................................................ F7.1
567 Zb Plastic section modulus of branch taken about the axis of bending, in.3
568 (mm3) ................................................................................................ K4.1
569 Zx Plastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3) ... Table B4.1b
570 Zy 5, EW
Plastic section modulus taken about the y-axis, in.3 (mm3) ................ F6.1
21
571 a Clear distance between transverse stiffeners, in. (mm)..................... F13.2
572 a Constant determined from Table A-4.3.4 ............................... App. 4.3.2b
Y VI
573 a
20
Distance between connectors, in. (mm) .............................................. E6.1
574 a Shortest distance from edge of pin hole to edge of member measured par-
AR E
575 allel to the direction of force, in. (mm) .............................................. D5.1

U IC R
576 a Half the length of the nonwelded root face in the direction of the thickness
577 of the tension-loaded plate, in. (mm) ........................................... App. 3.3
578 a′ Weld length along both edges of the cover plate termination to the beam
579 or girder, in. (mm) ............................................................................ F13.3
BR BL
580 aw Ratio of two times the web area in compression due to application of major
581 axis bending moment alone to the area of the compression flange compo-
FE PU
582 nents F4.2

583 b Full width of leg in compression, in. (mm)....................................... F10.3
584 b Largest clear distance between rows of steel anchors or ties, in. (mm)
ED FT
585 ............................................................................................. I1.6a

586 b Width of compression element as shown in Table B4.1, in. (mm) .... B4.1
587 b Width of the element, in. (mm) ........................................................... E7.1
AT A
588 b Width of compression flange as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm)

D DR
589 ............................................................................................................ F7.2

590 b Width of the leg resisting the shear force or depth of tee stem, in. (mm)
591 .............................................................................................................. G3
592 b Width of leg, in. (mm) ...................................................................... F10.2
593 bcf Width of column flange, in. (mm) .....................................................J10.6
594 be Effective width, in. (mm).................................................................... E7.1
595 be Effective edge distance for calculation of tensile rupture strength of pin-
596 connected member, in. (mm) ............................................................. D5.1
597 bf Width of flange, in. (mm) .................................................................. B4.1
598 bfc Width of compression flange, in. (mm) .............................................. F4.2
599 bft Width of tension flange, in. (mm) ...................................................... G2.2
600 bl Length of longer leg of angle, in. (mm) .................................................E5
601 bp Smaller of the dimension a and h, in. (mm)....................................... G2.4
602 bs Length of shorter leg of angle, in. (mm) ................................................E5
603 bs Stiffener width for one-sided stiffeners; twice the individual stiffener
604 width for pairs of stiffeners, in. (mm) ..................................... App. 6.3.2a
605 c Distance from the neutral axis to the extreme compressive fibers, in. (mm)
606 ......................................................................................... App. 6.3.2a
607 cc Ambient temperature specific heat of concrete, Btu/lb °F (kJ/kg K) ........

Front-12
608 ......................................................................................... App. 4.3.2a

609 c1 Effective width imperfection adjustment factor determined from Table
610 E7.1 ..................................................................................................... E7.1
611 d Depth of section from which the tee was cut, in. (mm) .......... Table D3.1
612 d Depth of tee or width of web leg in tension, in. (mm) ........................ F9.2
613 d Depth of tee or width of web leg in compression, in. (mm) ............... F9.2
614 d Nominal diameter of fastener, in. (mm)...............................................J3.3
615 d Full depth of the section, in. (mm).................................................... B4.1a
616 d Depth of rectangular bar, in. (mm) ................................................... F11.1
617 d Diameter, in. (mm) ................................................................................ J7
618 d Diameter of pin, in. (mm) .................................................................. D5.1
619 db Depth of beam, in. (mm) ....................................................................J10.6
620 db Nominal diameter (body or shank diameter), in. (mm) ............... App. 3.4
621 dc Depth of column, in. (mm) ................................................................J10.6
622 de Effective width for tees, in. (mm) ....................................................... E7.1
623 dh Nominal hole diameter plus 1/16 in. (2 mm), in. (mm) .......................J4.3
624 dm Density of the concrete or clay masonry unit, lb/ft3 (kg/m3) .. App. 4.3.2a
625 dsa 5, EW
Diameter of steel headed stud anchor, in. (mm) .................................. I8.1
21
626 dtie Effective diameter of the tie bar, in. (mm) ......................................... I1.6b
627 e Eccentricity in a truss connection, positive being away from the branches,
Y VI
628 20
in. (mm) ............................................................................................. K3.1
629 emid-ht Distance from the edge of steel headed stud anchor shank to the steel deck
AR E
630 web, in. (mm)..................................................................................... I8.2a

U IC R
631 fc′ Specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa) ....................... I1.3
632 fc′(T) Specified compressive strength of concrete at elevated temperature, ksi
633 (MPa) .................................................................................. App. 4.2.3b
634 fra Required axial stress at the point of consideration, determined in accord-
BR BL
635 ance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi (MPa)
636 ................................................................................................... H2
637 frbw. frbz Required flexural stress at the point of consideration, determined in ac-
FE PU
638 cordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi
639 (MPa) ................................................................................................... H2
640 frv Required shear stress using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi (MPa)
ED FT
641 .............................................................................................................J3.7
642 g Transverse center-to-center spacing (gage) between fastener gage lines,
AT A
643 in. (mm) ........................................................................................... B4.3b

644 g Gap between toes of branch members in a gapped K-connection, neglect-
D DR
645 ing the welds, in. (mm) ...................................................................... K3.1

646 h Width of compression element as shown in Table B4.1, in. (mm) .... B4.1
647 h Depth of web, as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm) ......................... F7.3
648 h Clear distance between flanges less the fillet at each flange, in. (mm)
649 ........................................................................................................... G2.1
650 h For built-up welded sections, the clear distance between flanges, in. (mm)
651 ................................................................................................ G2.1
652 h For built-up bolted sections, the distance between fastener lines, in. (mm)
653 ................................................................................................ G2.1
654 h Width resisting the shear force, taken as the clear distance between the
655 flanges less the inside corner radius on each side for HSS or the clear dis-
656 tance between flanges for box sections, in. (mm) ................................. G4
657 h Flat width of longer side, as defined in Section B4.1b(d), in. (mm) .. H3.1
658 h Total nominal thickness of Type X gypsum wallboard, in. (mm) .............
659 ............................................................................................. App. 4.3.2a
660 h Thickness of the concrete cover, measured between the exposed concrete
661 and nearest outer surface of the encased steel column section, in. (mm)...
662 .................................................................................. App. 4.3.2a
663 h Thickness of sprayed fire-resistant material, in. (mm) ........... App. 4.3.2a

Front-13
664 hc Twice the distance from the center of gravity to the following: the inside
665 face of the compression flange less the fillet or corner radius, for rolled
666 shapes; the nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the inside
667 faces of the compression flange when welds are used, for built-up sections,
668 in. (mm) ............................................................................................. B4.1
669 he Effective width for webs, in. (mm) ..................................................... E7.1
670 hf Factor for fillers ..................................................................................J3.8
671 ho Distance between flange centroids, in. (mm) .........................................E4
672 hp Twice the distance from the plastic neutral axis to the nearest line of fas-
673 teners at the compression flange or the inside face of the compression
674 flange when welds are used, in. (mm) ............................................. B4.1b
675 h1 Concrete slab thickness above steel deck, in. (mm)................. App. 4.3.2f
676 h2 Depth of steel deck, in. (mm) .................................................. App. 4.3.2f
677 k Distance from outer face of flange to the web toe of fillet, in. (mm).........
678 ...........................................................................................................J10.2
679 kc Coefficient for slender unstiffened elements ........................... Table B4.1
680 ksb Retention factor depending on bottom flange temperature, T, as given in
681 5, EW
Table A-4.2.4 .......................................................................... App. 4.2.4d
21
682 kds Directional strength increase factor .....................................................J2.4
683 kE, ky, kp Retention factors ..................................................................... App. 4.2.3b
Y VI
684 ksc 20
Slip-critical combined tension and shear coefficient ..........................J3.9
685 kv Web plate shear buckling coefficient ................................................ G2.1
AR E
686 l Actual length of end-loaded weld, in. (mm) ........................................J2.2

U IC R
687 l Length of connection, in. (mm) ............................................... Table D3.1

688 la Length of channel anchor, in. (mm)................................................... I8.2b
689 lb Bearing length of the load, measured parallel to the axis of the HSS mem-
690 ber (or measured across the width of the HSS in the case of loaded cap
BR BL
691 plates), in. (mm) ................................................................................ K2.1

692 lb Length of bearing, in. (mm) ................................................................... J7
693 lc Clear distance, in the direction of the force, between the edge of the hole
FE PU
694 and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material, in. (mm) ..........
695 ...........................................................................................................J3.10
696 le Total effective weld length of groove and fillet welds to HSS for weld
ED FT
697 strength calculations, in. (mm).............................................................. K5

698 lend Distance from the near side of the connecting branch or plate to end of
AT A
699 chord, in. (mm) ................................................................................. K1.1

700 lov Overlap length measured along the connecting face of the chord beneath
D DR
701 the two branches, in. (mm) ................................................................ K3.1

702 lp Projected length of the overlapping branch on the chord, in. (mm) ... K3.1
703 l1 Largest upper width of deck rib, in. (mm) ............................... App. 4.3.2f
704 l2 Bottom width of deck rib, in (mm) App. 4.3.2f
705 l3 Width of deck upper flange, in (mm) App. 4.3.2f
706 m Equilibrium moisture content of concrete by volume, % ....... App. 4.3.2a
707 m Moisture content of the concrete slab,% .................................. App. 4.3.2f
708 n Number of braced points within the span ............................... App. 6.3.2a
709 n Threads per inch (per mm) .......................................................... App. 3.4
710 nb Number of bolts carrying the applied tension ......................................J3.9
711 ns Number of slip planes required to permit the connection to slip .........J3.8
712 nSR Number of stress range fluctuations in design life ....................... App. 3.3
713 p Inner perimeter of concrete or clay masonry protection, in. (mm) ............
714 ..................................................................................... App. 4.3.2a
715 p Pitch, in. per thread (mm per thread) ........................................... App. 3.4
716 pb Perimeter of the steel-concrete bond interface within the composite cross
717 section, in. (mm) ................................................................................ I6.3c
718 pc Concrete density, lb/ft3 (kg/m3) .............................................. App. 4.3.2a
719 r Radius of gyration, in. (mm) ..................................................................E2

Front-14
720 r Retention factor depending on bottom flange temperature .... App. 4.2.4d
721 ra Radius of gyration about the geometric axis parallel to the connected leg,
722 in. (mm) .................................................................................................E5
723 ri Least Minimum radius of gyration of individual component, in. (mm)
724 ............................................................................................................ E6.1
725 ro Polar radius of gyration about the shear center, in. (mm) ......................E4
726 rt Effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional buckling. For I-shapes
727 with a channel cap or a cover plate attached to the compression flange,
728 radius of gyration of the flange components in flexural compression plus
729 one-third of the web area in compression due to application of major axis
730 bending moment alone, in. (mm) ........................................................ F4.2
731 rx Radius of gyration about the x-axis, in. (mm)........................................E4
732 ry Radius of gyration about y-axis, in. (mm) .............................................E4
733 rz Radius of gyration about the minor principal axis, in. (mm) .................E5
734 s Longitudinal center-to-center spacing (pitch) of any two consecutive bolt
735 holes, in. (mm) ................................................................................. B4.3b
736 st Largest clear spacing of the ties, in. (mm) ......................................... I1.6b
737 t 5, EW
Distance from the neutral axis to the extreme tensile fibers, in. (mm) .....
21
738 ................................................................................................ App. 6.3.2a
739 t Plate thickness, in. (mm).................................................................... I1.6a
Y VI
740 t
20
Thickness of wall, in. (mm) ................................................................ E7.2
741 t Thickness of angle leg, in. (mm) ...................................................... F10.2
AR E
742 t Width of rectangular bar parallel to axis of bending, in. (mm) ......... F11.1
U IC R
743 t Thickness of connected material, in. (mm) ........................................J3.10

744 t Thickness of plate, in. (mm) .............................................................. D5.1
745 t Total thickness of fillers, in. (mm).......................................................J5.2
746 t Design wall thickness of HSS member, in. (mm) .............................. B4.2
BR BL
747 t Design wall thickness of HSS main chord member, in. (mm) ........... K1.1
748 t Thickness of angle leg or tee stem, in. (mm) ........................................ G3
FE PU
749 tb Design wall thickness of HSS branch member or thickness of plate, in.
750 (mm) ................................................................................................ K1.1
751 tbi Thickness of overlapping branch, in. (mm) ............................. Table K3.2
752 tbj Thickness of overlapped branch, in. (mm) .............................. Table K3.2
ED FT
753 tcf Thickness of column flange, in. (mm) ...............................................J10.6

754 tf Thickness of flange, in. (mm) ............................................................. F3.2
AT A
755 tf Thickness of the loaded flange, in. (mm)...........................................J10.1

D DR
756 tf Thickness of flange of channel anchor, in. (mm) .............................. I8.2b

757 tfc Thickness of compression flange, in. (mm) ........................................ F4.2
758 tp Thickness of tension loaded plate, in. (mm) ................................ App. 3.3
759 tsc Thickness of composite plate shear wall, in. (mm)............................ I1.6b
760 tst Thickness of web stiffener, in. (mm) ...................................... App. 6.3.2a
761 tw Thickness of web, in. (mm) ................................................................ F4.2
762 tw Smallest effective weld throat thickness around the perimeter of branch or
763 plate, in. (mm)....................................................................................... K5
764 tw Thickness of channel anchor web, in. (mm) ...................................... I8.2b
765 tw Thickness of column web, in. (mm) ..................................................J10.6
766 w Width of cover plate, in. (mm) ......................................................... F13.3
767 w Weld sizeSize of weld leg, in. (mm) ..................................................J2.2b
768 w Subscript relating symbol to major principal axis bending ................... H2
769 w Width of plate, in. (mm) .......................................................... Table D3.1
770 w Leg size of the reinforcing or contouring fillet, if any, in the direction of
771 the thickness of the tension-loaded plate, in. (mm) ..................... App. 3.3
772 wc Weight of concrete per unit volume (90 ≤ wc ≤ 155 lb/ft3 or
773 1 500 ≤ wc ≤ 2 500 kg/m3) ........................................................... I2.1bI1.5
774 wr Average width of concrete rib or haunch, in. (mm) ........................... I3.2c
775 x Subscript relating symbol to major axis bending ............................... H1.1

Front-15
776 xa Bracing offset distance along x-axis, in. (mm) ......................................E4

777 xo, yo Coordinates of the shear center with respect to the centroid, in. (mm) ......
778 ...............................................................................................................E4
779 x Eccentricity of connection, in. (mm) ....................................... Table D3.1
780 y Subscript relating symbol to minor axis bending............................... H1.1
781 ya Bracing offset distance along y-axis, in. (mm) ......................................E4
782 z Subscript relating symbol to minor principal axis bending .................. H2
783 Δ First-order interstory drift due to the LRFD or ASD load combinations,
784 in. (mm) .................................................................................... App. 7.3.2
785 ΔH First-order interstory drift, in the direction of translation being considered,
786 due to lateral forces, in. (mm) ................................................... App. 8.1.3
787 Ω Safety factor ....................................................................................... B3.2
788 ΩB Safety factor for bearing on concrete ................................................. I6.3a
789 Ωb Safety factor for flexure ......................................................................... I5
790 Ωc Safety factor for compression ................................................................. I5
791 Ωc Safety factor for axially loaded composite columns .......................... I2.1b
792 Ωd Safety factor for direct bond interaction ............................................ I6.3c
793 Ωt 5, EW
Safety factor for steel headed stud anchor in tension ......................... I8.3b
21
794 Ωsf Safety factor for shear on the failure path ......................................... D5.1
795 ΩT Safety factor for torsion ..................................................................... H3.1
Y VI
796 Ωt
20
Safety factor for tension..................................................................... H1.2
797 Ωt Safety factor for tensile rupture ............................................................ H4
AR E
798 Ωv Safety factor for shear .......................................................................... G1

U IC R
799 Ωv Safety factor for steel headed stud anchor in shear ........................... I8.3a
800 β Length reduction factor given by Equation J2-1 ................................J2.2b
801 β Width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to chord diameter for round HSS;
802 the ratio of overall branch width to chord width for rectangular HSS .......
BR BL
803 ................................................................................................ K1.1

804 βT Overall brace system required stiffness, kip-in./rad (N-mm/rad) .............
FE PU
805 ..................................................................................... App. 6.3.2a

806 βbr Required shear stiffness of the bracing system, kip/in. (N/mm) ................
807 .................................................................................................. App. 6.2.1
ED FT
808 βbr Required flexural stiffness of the brace, kip/in. (N/mm) ........ App. 6.3.2a
809 βeff Effective width ratio; the sum of the perimeters of the two branch mem-
810 bers in a K-connection divided by eight times the chord width ......... K1.1
AT A
811 βeop Effective outside punching parameter ..................................... Table K3.2

D DR
812 βsec Web distortional stiffness, including the effect of web transverse stiffen-
813 ers, if any, kip-in./rad (N-mm/rad).......................................... App. 6.3.2a
814 βw Section property for single angles about major principal axis, in. (mm) ...
815 .......................................................................................................... F10.2
816 Δ First-order interstory drift due to the LRFD or ASD load combinations,
817 in. (mm) .................................................................................... App. 7.3.2
818 ΔH First-order interstory drift, in the direction of translation being considered,
819 due to lateral forces, in. (mm) ................................................... App. 8.2.2
820 γ Chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half the diameter to the wall
821 thickness for round HSS; the ratio of one-half the width to wall thickness
822 for rectangular HSS ................................................................... K3.1K1.1
823 ε(T) Engineering strain at elevated temperature, in./in.(mm/mm).. App. 4.2.3b
824 εcu(T) Concrete strain corresponding to fc′(T) at elevated temperature,
825 in./in.(mm/mm) ............................................ App. 4.2.3b
826 εp(T) Engineering strain at the proportional limit at elevated temperature,
827 in./in.(mm/mm) ....................................................................... App. 4.2.3b
828 εu(T) Ultimate strain at elevated temperature, in./in.(mm/mm) ....... App. 4.2.3b
829 εy(T) Engineering yield strain at elevated temperature, in./in.(mm/mm)............
830 ..................................................................................... App. 4.2.3b

Front-16
831 ζ Gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the branches of a gapped K-con-
832 nection to the width of the chord for rectangular HSS....................... K3.1
833 η Load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular HSS; the ratio of
834 the length of contact of the branch with the chord in the plane of the con-
835 nection to the chord width ........................................................ K3.1K1.1
836 θ Angle between the line of action of the required force and the weld longi-
837 tudinal axis, degrees.............................................................................J2.4
838 θ Acute angle between the branch and chord, degrees ................. K3.1K1.1
839 λ Width-to-thickness ratio for the element as defined in Section B4.1 .........
840 ............................................................................................................ E7.1
841 λpf Limiting width-to-thickness ratio for compact flange, as defined in Table
842 B4.1b .............................................................................................. F3.2
843 λpw Limiting width-to-thickness ratio for compact web, as defined in Table
844 B4.1b .............................................................................................. F4.2
845 λp Limiting width-to-thickness ratio (compact/noncompact) ..... Table B4.1b
846 λr Limiting width-to-thickness ratio (noncompact/slender) ....... Table B4.1b
847 λr
5, EW
Limiting width-to-thickness ratio (nonslender/slender)as defined in Table
21
848 B4.1a ............................................................................... E7.1Table B4.1a
849 λrf Limiting width-to-thickness ratio for noncompact flange, as defined in Ta-
Y VI
850 ble B4.1b ............................................................................................. F3.2
20
851 λrw Limiting width-to-thickness ratio for noncompact web, as defined in Table
AR E
852 B4.1b F4.2

μ
U IC R
853 Mean slip coefficient for Class A or B surfaces, as applicable, or as estab-

854 lished by tests.......................................................................................J3.8
855 ρw Maximum shear ratio within the web panels on each side of the transverse
856 stiffener……………………………………………. ......................... G2.4
BR BL
857 ρsr Minimum reinforcement ratio for longitudinal reinforcing ................. I2.1
858 τb Stiffness reduction parameter ............................................................ C2.3
859 φ Resistance factor ................................................................................ B3.1
FE PU
860 φB Resistance factor for bearing on concrete .......................................... I6.3a

861 φb Resistance factor for flexure ................................................................... I5
862 φc Resistance factor for compression .......................................................... I5
ED FT
863 φc Resistance factor for axially loaded composite columns ................... I2.1b
864 φd Resistance factor for direct bond interaction ..................................... I6.3c
AT A
865 φsf Resistance factor for shear on the failure path .................................. D5.1
D DR
866 φT Resistance factor for torsion .............................................................. H3.1

867 φt Resistance factor for tension .............................................................. H1.2
868 φt Resistance factor for tensile rupture ..................................................... H4
869 φt Resistance factor for steel headed stud anchor in tension .................. I8.3b
870 φv Resistance factor for shear ................................................................... G1
871 φv Resistance factor for steel headed stud anchor in shear ..................... I8.3a
872 Ω Safety factor ....................................................................................... B3.2
873 ΩB Safety factor for bearing on concrete ................................................. I6.3a
874 Ωb Safety factor for flexure ......................................................................... I5
875 Ωc Safety factor for compression ................................................................. I5
876 Ωc Safety factor for axially loaded composite columns .......................... I2.1b
877 Ωd Safety factor for direct bond interaction ............................................ I6.3c
878 Ωt Safety factor for steel headed stud anchor in tension ......................... I8.3b
879 Ωsf Safety factor for shear on the failure path ......................................... D5.1
880 ΩT Safety factor for torsion ..................................................................... H3.1
881 Ωt Safety factor for tension..................................................................... H1.2
882 Ωt Safety factor for tensile rupture ............................................................ H4
883 Ωv Safety factor for shear .......................................................................... G1
884 Ωv Safety factor for steel headed stud anchor in shear ........................... I8.3a

Front-17
885 ρw Maximum shear ratio within the web panels on each side of the transverse
886 stiffener……………………………………………. ......................... G2.4
887 ρsr Minimum reinforcement ratio for longitudinal reinforcing ................. I2.1
888 θ Angle between the line of action of the required force and the weld longi-
889 tudinal axis, degrees.............................................................................J2.4
890 θ Acute angle between the branch and chord, degrees ......................... K3.1
891
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

Front-18
892 GLOSSARY
893
894
895 Notes:
896 (1) Terms designated with † are common AISI-AISC terms that are coordinated be-
897 tween the two standards development organizations.
898 (2) Terms designated with * are usually qualified by the type of load effect, for ex-
899 ample, nominal tensile strength, available compressive strength, and design flex-
900 ural strength.
901 (3) Terms designated with ** are usually qualified by the type of component, for
902 example, web local buckling, and flange local bending.
903
904 Active fire protection. Building materials and systems that are activated by a fire
905 to mitigate adverse effects or to notify people to take action to mitigate ad-
906 verse effects.
907
5, EW
Allowable strength*†. Nominal strength divided by the safety factor, Rn/Ω.
21
908 Allowable stress*. Allowable strength divided by the applicable section property,
909 such as section modulus or cross-sectional area.
Y VI
910 Anchor bolt. See anchor rod.
20
911 Anchor rod. A mechanical device that is either cast in concrete or drilled and
AR E
912 chemically adhered, grouted or wedged into concrete and/or masonry for the
913 purpose of the subsequent attachment of structural steel.
U IC R
914 Applicable building code†. Building code under which the structure is designed.
915 Approval documents. The structural steel shop drawings, erection drawings, and
916 embedment drawings, or where the parties have agreed in the contract docu-
917 ments to provide digital model(s), the fabrication and erection models. Ap-
BR BL
918 proval documents may include aA combination of drawings and digital mod-
919 els also may be provided.
FE PU
920 ASD (allowable strength design)†. Method of proportioning structural compo-

921 nents such that the allowable strength equals or exceeds the required strength
922 of the component under the action of the ASD load combinations.
ED FT
923 ASD load combination†. Load combination in the applicable building code in-
924 tended for allowable strength design (allowable stress design).
925 Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). Organization, political subdivision, office
AT A
926 or individual charged with the responsibility of administering and enforcing

D DR
927 the provisions of this Specification.

928 Available strength*†. Design strength or allowable strength, as applicable.
929 Available stress*. Design stress or allowable stress, as applicable.
930 Average rib width. In a formed steel deck, average width of the rib of a corruga-
931 tion.
932 Beam. Nominally horizontal structural member that has the primary function of
933 resisting bending moments.
934 Beam-column. Structural member that resists both axial force and bending mo-
935 ment.
936 Bearing (local compressive yielding)†. Limit state of local compressive yielding
937 due to the action of a member bearing against another member or surface.
938 Bearing-type connection. Bolted connection where shear forces are transmitted
939 by the bolt bearing against the connection elements.
940 Block shear rupture†. In a connection, limit state of tension rupture along one
941 path and shear yielding or shear rupture along another path.
942 Bolting assembly. An assembly of bolting components that is installed as a unit.
943 Bolting component. Bolt, nut, washer, direct tension indicator, or other element
944 used as a part of a bolting assembly.

Front-19
945 Box section. Square or rectangular doubly symmetric member made with four
946 plates welded together at the corners such that it behaves as a single member.
947 Braced frame†. Essentially vertical truss system that provides resistance to lat-
948 eral forces and provides stability for the structural system.
949 Bracing. Member or system that provides stiffness and strength to limit the out-
950 of-plane movement of another member at a brace point.
951 Branch member. In an HSS connection, member that terminates at a chord mem-
952 ber or main member.
953 Buckling†. Limit state of sudden change in the geometry of a structure or any of
954 its elements under a critical loading condition.
955 Buckling strength. Strength for instability limit states.
956 Built-up member, cross section, section, shape. Member, cross section, section
957 or shape fabricated from structural steel elements that are welded or bolted
958 together.
959 Camber. Curvature fabricated into a beam or truss so as to compensate for de-
960 flection induced by loads.
961 Charpy V-notch impact test. Standard dynamic test measuring notch toughness
962 5, EW
of a specimen.
21
963 Chord member. In an HSS connection, primary member that extends through a
964 truss connection.
Y VI
965 20
Cladding. Exterior covering of structure.
966 Cold-formed steel structural member†. Shape manufactured by press-braking
AR E
967 blanks sheared from sheets, cut lengths of coils or plates, or by roll forming
U IC R
968 cold- or hot-rolled coils or sheets; both forming operations being performed
969 at ambient room temperature, that is, without manifest addition of heat such
970 as would be required for hot forming.
971 Collector. Also known as drag strut; member that serves to transfer loads be-
BR BL
972 tween floor diaphragms and the members of the lateral force-resisting system.
973 Column. Nominally vertical structural member that has the primary function of
974 resisting axial compressive force.
FE PU
975 Column base. Assemblage of structural shapes, plates, connectors, bolts and rods
976 at the base of a column used to transmit forces between the steel superstruc-
977 ture and the foundation.
ED FT
978 Combined method. Pretensioning procedure incorporating the application of a

979 prescribed initial torque or tension, followed by the application of a pre-
AT A
980 scribed relative rotation between the bolt and nut.

981 Compact section. Section that can reach the plastic moment before local buck-
D DR
982 ling occurs as defined by the element width- to- thickness ratio less than or
983 equal to λp.
984 Compact composite section. Filled composite section that can reach the plastic
985 axial compressive strength or plastic moment before local buckling of the
986 steel elements occurs as defined by the steel element width-to-thickness ra-
987 tios less than or equal to λp.
988 Compartmentation. Enclosure of a building space with elements that have a spe-
989 cific fire endurance.
990 Complete-joint-penetration (CJP) groove weld. Groove weld in which weld
991 metal extends through the joint thickness, except as permitted for HSS con-
992 nections.
993 Composite. Condition in which steel and concrete elements and members work
994 as a unit in the distribution of internal forces.
995 Composite beam. Structural steel beam in contact with and acting compositely
996 with a reinforced concrete slab.
997 Composite component. Member, connecting element or assemblage in which
998 steel and concrete elements work as a unit in the distribution of internal
999 forces, with the exception of the special case of composite beams where steel

Front-20
1000 anchors are embedded in a solid concrete slab or in a slab cast on formed
1001 steel deck.
1002 Composite plate shear wall. Composite wall comprised of structural steel plates,
1003 ties, steel anchors, and structural concrete acting together.
1004 Concrete breakout surface. The surface delineating a volume of concrete sur-
1005 rounding a steel headed stud anchor that separates from the remaining con-
1006 crete.
1007 Concrete crushing. Limit state of compressive failure in concrete having reached
1008 the ultimate strain.
1009 Concrete haunch. In a composite floor system constructed using a formed steel
1010 deck, the section of solid concrete that results from stopping the deck on
1011 each side of the girder.
1012 Concrete-encased beam. Beam totally encased in concrete cast integrally with
1013 the slab.
1014 Connection†. Combination of structural elements and joints used to transmit
1015 forces between two or more members.
1016 Construction documents. Written, graphic and pictorial documents prepared or
1017 5, EW
assembled for describing the design (including the structural system), loca-
21
1018 tion and physical characteristics of the elements of a building necessary to
1019 obtain a building permit and construct a building.
Y VI
1020 20
Contract documents. The documents that define the responsibilities of the parties
1021 that are involved in bidding, fabricating, and erecting structural steel. These
AR E
1022 Contract documents normally include the design documents, the specifica-
U IC R
1023 tions, and the contract.

1024 Cope. Cutout made in a structural member to remove a flange and conform to
1025 the shape of an intersecting member.
1026 Cover plate. Plate welded or bolted to the flange of a member to increase cross-
BR BL
1027 sectional area, section modulus or moment of inertia.

1028 Cross connection. HSS connection in which forces in branch members or con-
1029 necting elements transverse to the main member are primarily equilibrated
FE PU
1030 by forces in other branch members or connecting elements on the opposite

1031 side of the main member.
1032 Cyclic loading. Repeated transient loading of sufficient frequency and magnitude
ED FT
1033 of stress, which if unmitigated by design, results in cracking and progressive

1034 failure, in other words, fatigue.
AT A
1035 Design. The process of establishing the physical and other properties of a struc-
1036 ture for the purpose of achieving the desired strength, serviceability, dura-
D DR
1037 bility, constructability, economy and other desired characteristics. Design

1038 for strength, as used in this Specification, includes analysis to determine re-
1039 quired strength and proportioning to have adequate available strength.
1040 Design-basis fire. Set of conditions that define the development of a fire and the
1041 spread of combustion products throughout a building or portion thereof.
1042

Front-21
1043 Design documents. The graphic and pictorial portions of the contract documents
1044 showing the design, location, and dimensions of work. These documents
1045 generally include, but are not necessarily limited to, plans, elevations, sec-
1046 tions, details, schedules, diagrams, and notes. Where the parties have agreed
1047 in the contract documents to provide digital model(s), a dimensionally accu-
1048 rate 3D digital model of the structure that conveys the structural steel re-
1049 quirements given in AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
1050 Bridges, Section 3.1. A combination of drawings and digital models also
1051 may be provided. Design drawings, design model, or a combination of draw-
1052 ings and models. In this Specification, reference to these design documents
1053 indicates design documents that are issued for construction as defined in
1054 Section A4.
1055 Design drawings. Graphic and pictorial portions of the design documents show-
1056 ing the design, location and dimensions of the work. Design drawings gener-
1057 ally include, but are not necessarily limited to, plans, elevations, sections, de-
1058 tails, schedules, diagrams, and notes.
1059 Design model. Three-dimensional digital model of the structure that conveys the
1060 5, EW
structural steel requirements as specified in Section A4.
21
1061 Design load†. Applied load determined in accordance with either LRFD load
1062 combinations or ASD load combinations, as applicable.
Y VI
1063
20
Design strength*†. Resistance factor multiplied by the nominal strength, φRn.
1064 Design wall thickness. HSS wall thickness assumed in the determination of sec-
AR E
1065 tion properties.

U IC R
1066 Diagonal stiffener. Web stiffener at column panel zone oriented diagonally to the
1067 flanges, on one or both sides of the web.
1068 Diaphragm†. Roof, floor or other membrane or bracing system that transfers in-
1069 plane forces to the lateral force-resisting system.
BR BL
1070 Direct bond interaction. In a composite section, mechanism by which force is

1071 transferred between steel and concrete by bond stress.
1072 Distortional failure. Limit state of an HSS truss connection based on distortion
FE PU
1073 of a rectangular HSS chord member into a rhomboidal shape.

1074 Distortional stiffness. Out-of-plane flexural stiffness of web.
1075 Double curvature. Deformed shape of a beam with one or more inflection points
ED FT
1076 within the span.

1077 Double-concentrated forces. Two equal and opposite forces applied normal to
AT A
1078 the same flange, forming a couple.

1079 Doubler. Plate added to, and parallel with, a beam or column web to increase
D DR
1080 strength at locations of concentrated forces.

1081 Drift. Lateral deflection of structure.
1082 Effective length factor, K. Ratio between the effective length and the unbraced
1083 length of the member.
1084 Effective length. Length of an otherwise identical compression member with the
1085 same strength when analyzed with simple end conditions.
1086 Effective net area. Net area modified to account for the effect of shear lag.
1087 Effective section modulus. Section modulus reduced to account for buckling of
1088 slender compression elements.
1089 Effective width. Reduced width of a plate or slab with an assumed uniform stress
1090 distribution which produces the same effect on the behavior of a structural
1091 member as the actual plate or slab width with its nonuniform stress distribu-
1092 tion.
1093 Elastic analysis. Structural analysis based on the assumption that the structure
1094 returns to its original geometry on removal of the load.
1095 Elevated temperatures. Heating conditions experienced by building elements or
1096 structures as a result of fire which are in excess of the anticipated ambient
1097 conditions.

Front-22
1098 Encased composite member. Composite member consisting of a structural con-

1099 crete member and one or more embedded steel shapes.
1100 End panel. Web panel with an adjacent panel on one side only.
1101 End return. Length of fillet weld that continues around a corner in the same
1102 plane.
1103 Engineer of record. Licensed professional responsible for sealing the design doc-
1104 uments and specifications.
1105 Erection documents. The field-installation or member-placement drawings that
1106 are prepared by the fabricator to show the location and attachment of the in-
1107 dividual structural steel shipping pieces. Where the parties have agreed in the
1108 contract documents to provide digital model(s), a dimensionally accurate 3D
1109 digital model produced to convey the information necessary to erect the struc-
1110 tural steel, which may be the same digital model as the fabrication model.
1111 Erection documents may include aA combination of drawings and digital
1112 models also may be provided.
1113 Expansion rocker. Support with curved surface on which a member bears that is
1114 able to tilt to accommodate expansion.
1115 5, EW
Expansion roller. Round steel bar on which a member bears that is able to roll to
21
1116 accommodate expansion.
1117 Eyebar. Pin-connected tension member of uniform thickness, with forged or ther-
Y VI
1118 20
mally cut head of greater width than the body, proportioned to provide ap-
1119 proximately equal strength in the head and body.
AR E
1120 Fabrication documents. The shop drawings of the individual structural steel ship-
U IC R
1121 ping pieces that are to be produced in the fabrication shop. Where the parties
1122 have agreed in the contract documents to provide digital model(s), a dimen-
1123 sionally accurate 3D digital model produced to convey the infor-mation nec-
1124 essary to fabricate the structural steel, which may be the same digital model
BR BL
1125 as the erection model. Fabrication documents may include aA combination

1126 of drawings and digital models also may be provided.
1127 Factored load †. Product of a load factor and the nominal load.
FE PU
1128 Fastener. Generic term for bolts, rivets or other connecting devices.
1129 Fatigue†.Limit state of crack initiation and growth resulting from repeated ap-
1130 plication of live loads.
ED FT
1131 Faying surface. Contact surface of connection elements transmitting a shear

1132 force.
AT A
1133 Filled composite member. Composite member consisting of an HSS or box sec-
1134 tion filled with structural concrete.
D DR
1135 Filler metal. Metal or alloy added in making a welded joint.

1136 Filler. Plate used to build up the thickness of one component.
1137 Fillet weld reinforcement. Fillet welds added to groove welds.
1138 Fillet weld. Weld of generally triangular cross section made between intersecting
1139 surfaces of elements.
1140 Finished surface. Surfaces fabricated with a roughness height value measured in
1141 accordance with ANSI/ASME B46.1 that is equal to or less than 500.
1142 Fire. Destructive burning, as manifested by any or all of the following: light,
1143 flame, heat or smoke.
1144 Fire barrier. Element of construction formed of fire-resisting materials and
1145 tested in accordance with an approved standard fire resistance test, to
1146 demonstrate compliance with the applicable building code.
1147 Fire resistance. Property of assemblies that prevents or retards the passage of
1148 excessive heat, hot gases or flames under conditions of use and enables the
1149 assemblies to continue to perform a stipulated function.
1150 First-order analysis. Structural analysis in which equilibrium conditions are for-
1151 mulated on the undeformed structure; second-order effects are neglected.

Front-23
1152 Fitted bearing stiffener. Stiffener used at a support or concentrated load that fits
1153 tightly against one or both flanges of a beam so as to transmit load through
1154 bearing.
1155 Flare bevel groove weld. Weld in a groove formed by a member with a curved
1156 surface in contact with a planar member.
1157 Flare V-groove weld. Weld in a groove formed by two members with curved
1158 surfaces.
1159 Flashover. Transition to a state of total surface involvement in a fire of combus-
1160 tible materials within an enclosure.
1161 Flat width. Nominal width of rectangular HSS minus twice the outside corner
1162 radius. In the absence of knowledge of the corner radius, the flat width is
1163 permitted to be taken as the total section width minus three times the thick-
1164 ness.
1165 Flexibility. The ratio of the displacement (or rotation) to the corresponding ap-
1166 plied force (or moment), which and it is the inverse of the stiffness.
1167 Flexural buckling†. Buckling mode in which a compression member deflects lat-
1168 erally without twist or change in cross-sectional shape.
1169 5, EW
Flexural-torsional buckling†. Buckling mode in which a compression member
21
1170 bends and twists simultaneously without change in cross-sectional shape.
1171 Force. Resultant of distribution of stress over a prescribed area.
Y VI
1172 20
Formed steel deck. In composite construction, steel cold formed into a decking
1173 profile used as a permanent concrete form.
AR E
1174 Fully-restrained moment connection. Connection capable of transferring mo-

U IC R
1175 ment with negligible rotation between connected members.

1176 Gage. Transverse center-to-center spacing of fasteners.
1177 Gapped connection. HSS truss connection with a gap or space on the chord face
1178 between intersecting branch members.
BR BL
1179 Geometric axis. Axis parallel to web, flange or angle leg.

1180 Girder filler. In a composite floor system constructed using a formed steel deck,
1181 narrow piece of sheet steel used as a fill between the edge of a deck sheet
FE PU
1182 and the flange of a girder.

1183 Girder. See Beam.
1184 Gouge. Relatively smooth surface groove or cavity resulting from plastic defor-
ED FT
1185 mation or removal of material.

1186 Gravity load. Load acting in the downward direction, such as dead and live loads.
AT A
1187 Grip (of bolt). Thickness of material through which a bolt passes.
1188 Groove weld. Weld in a groove between connection elements. See also AWS
D DR
1189 D1.1/D1.1M.
1190 Gusset plate. Plate element connecting truss members or a strut or brace to a
1191 beam or column.
1192 Heat flux. Radiant energy per unit surface area.
1193 Heat release rate. Rate at which thermal energy is generated by a burning mate-
1194 rial.
1195 High-strength bolt. An ASTM F3125/F3125M or F3148 bolt, or an alternative
1196 design bolt that meets the requirements in RCSC Specification Section 2.13.
1197 Horizontal shear. In a composite beam, force at the interface between steel and
1198 concrete surfaces.
1199 HSS (hollow structural section). Square, rectangular or round hollow structural
1200 steel section produced in accordance with one of the product specifications
1201 in Section A3.1a(b).
1202 Inelastic analysis. Structural analysis that takes into account inelastic material
1203 behavior, including plastic analysis.
1204 Initial tension. Minimum bolt tension attained before application of the required
1205 rotation when using the combined method to pretension bolting assemblies.
1206 In-plane instability†. Limit state involving buckling in the plane of the frame or
1207 the member.

Front-24
1208 Instability†. Limit state reached in the loading of a structural component, frame
1209 or structure in which a slight disturbance in the loads or geometry produces
1210 large displacements.
1211 Introduction length. The length along which the required longitudinal shear
1212 force is assumed to be transferred into or out of the steel shape in an encased
1213 or filled composite column.
1214 Issuing entity. Any party on a project that issues structural design documents and
1215 specifications provided by the engineer of record.
1216 Issued for construction. The engineer of record’s designation that the design doc-
1217 uments and specifications are authorized to be used to construct the steel
1218 structure depicted in the design documents and specifications, and that these
1219 design documents and specifications incorporate the information that is to
1220 be provided per the requirements of Section A4.
1221 Joint†. Area where two or more ends, surfaces, or edges are attached. Catego-
1222 rized by type of fastener or weld used and method of force transfer.
1223 Joint eccentricity. In an HSS truss connection, perpendicular distance from chord
1224 member center-of-gravity to intersection of branch member work points.
1225 5, EW
k-area. The region of the web that extends from the tangent point of the web and
21
1226 the flange-web fillet (AISC k dimension) a distance 12 in. (38 mm) into the
1227 web beyond the k dimension.
Y VI
1228 20
K-connection. HSS connection in which forces in branch members or connecting
1229 elements transverse to the main member are primarily equilibriated by forces
AR E
1230 in other branch members or connecting elements on the same side of the
U IC R
1231 main member.

1232 Lacing. Plate, angle or other steel shape, in a lattice configuration, that connects
1233 two steel shapes together.
1234 Lap joint. Joint between two overlapping connection elements in parallel planes.
BR BL
1235 Lateral bracing. Member or system that is designed to inhibit lateral buckling or
1236 lateral-torsional buckling of structural members.
1237 Lateral force-resisting system. Structural system designed to resist lateral loads
FE PU
1238 and provide stability for the structure as a whole.

1239 Lateral load. Load acting in a lateral direction, such as wind or earthquake ef-
1240 fects.
ED FT
1241 Lateral-torsional buckling†. Buckling mode of a flexural member involving de-

1242 flection out of the plane of bending occurring simultaneously with twist
AT A
1243 about the shear center of the cross section.

1244 Leaning column. Column designed to carry gravity loads only, with connections
D DR
1245 that are not intended to provide resistance to lateral loads.

1246 Length effects. Consideration of the reduction in strength of a member based on
1247 its unbraced length.
1248 Lightweight concrete. Structural concrete with an equilibrium density of 115
1249 lb/ft3 (1 840 kg/m3) or less, as determined by ASTM C567.
1250 Limit state†. Condition in which a structure or component becomes unfit for ser-
1251 vice and is judged either to be no longer useful for its intended function (ser-
1252 viceability limit state) or to have reached its ultimate load-carrying capacity
1253 (strength limit state).
1254 Load†. Force or other action that results from the weight of building materials,
1255 occupants and their possessions, environmental effects, differential move-
1256 ment, or restrained dimensional changes.
1257 Load effect†. Forces, stresses and deformations produced in a structural compo-
1258 nent by the applied loads.
1259 Load factor. Factor that accounts for deviations of the nominal load from the
1260 actual load, for uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load into a
1261 load effect and for the probability that more than one extreme load will occur
1262 simultaneously.

Front-25
1263 Load transfer region. Region of a composite member over which force is directly
1264 applied to the member, such as the depth of a connection plate.
1265 Local bending** †. Limit state of large deformation of a flange under a concen-
1266 trated transverse force.
1267 Local buckling**. Limit state of buckling of a compression element within a
1268 cross section.
1269 Local yielding**†. Yielding that occurs in a local area of an element.
1270 LRFD (load and resistance factor design)†. Method of proportioning structural
1271 components such that the design strength equals or exceeds the required
1272 strength of the component under the action of the LRFD load combinations.
1273 LRFD load combination†. Load combination in the applicable building code in-
1274 tended for strength design (load and resistance factor design).
1275 Main member. In an HSS connection, chord member, column or other HSS mem-
1276 ber to which branch members or other connecting elements are attached.
1277 Member imperfection. Initial displacement of points along the length of individ-
1278 ual members (between points of intersection of members) from their nomi-
1279 nal locations, such as the out-of-straightness of members due to manufactur-
1280 5, EW
ing and fabrication.
21
1281 Mill scale. Oxide surface coating on steel formed by the hot rolling process.
1282 Moment connection. Connection that transmits bending moment between con-
Y VI
1283 20
nected members.
1284 Moment frame†. Framing system that provides resistance to lateral loads and
AR E
1285 provides stability to the structural system, primarily by shear and flexure of
U IC R
1286 the framing members and their connections.

1287 Negative flexural strength. Flexural strength of a composite beam in regions with
1288 tension due to flexure on the top surface.
1289 Net area. Gross area reduced to account for removed material.
BR BL
1290 Nominal dimension. Designated or theoretical dimension, as in tables of section

1291 properties.
1292 Nominal load†. Magnitude of the load specified by the applicable building code.
FE PU
1293 Nominal rib height. In a formed steel deck, height of deck measured from the
1294 underside of the lowest point to the top of the highest point.
1295 Nominal strength*†. Strength of a structure or component (without the resistance
ED FT
1296 factor or safety factor applied) to resist load effects, as determined in accord-
1297 ance with this specification.
AT A
1298 Noncompact section. Section that is not able to reach the plastic moment before
1299 inelastic local buckling occurs as defined by element width- to- thickness
D DR
1300 ratio greater than λp and less than or equal to λr.

1301 Noncompact composite section. Filled composite section that is not able to reach
1302 the plastic axial compressive strength or plastic moment due to insufficient
1303 confinement of the infill concrete, as defined by the steel element width-to-
1304 thickness ratio greater than λp and less than or equal to λr.
1305 Nondestructive testing. Inspection procedure wherein no material is destroyed
1306 and the integrity of the material or component is not affected.
1307 Notch toughness. Energy absorbed at a specified temperature as measured in the
1308 Charpy V-notch impact test.
1309 Notional load. Virtual load applied in a structural analysis to account for desta-
1310 bilizing effects that are not otherwise accounted for in the design provisions.
1311 Out-of-plane buckling†. Limit state of a beam, column or beam-column involv-
1312 ing lateral or lateral-torsional buckling.
1313 Overlapped connection. HSS truss connection in which intersecting branch
1314 members overlap.
1315 Panel brace. Brace that controls limits the relative movement of two adjacent
1316 brace points along the length of a beam or column or the relative lateral dis-
1317 placement of two stories in a frame (see point brace).

Front-26
1318 Panel zone. Web area of beam-to-column connection delineated by the extension
1319 of beam and column flanges through the connection, transmitting moment
1320 through a shear panel.
1321 Partial-joint-penetration (PJP) groove weld. Groove weld in which the penetra-
1322 tion is intentionally less than the complete thickness of the connected ele-
1323 ment.
1324 Partially restrained moment connection. Connection capable of transferring mo-
1325 ment with rotation between connected members that is not negligible.
1326 Percent elongation. Measure of ductility, determined in a tensile test as the
1327 maximum elongation of the gage length divided by the original gage length
1328 expressed as a percentage.
1329 Pipe. See HSS.
1330 Pitch. Longitudinal center-to-center spacing of fasteners. Center-to-center spac-
1331 ing of bolt threads along axis of bolt.
1332 Plastic analysis. Structural analysis based on the assumption of rigid-plastic be-
1333 havior, that is, that equilibrium is satisfied and the stress is at or below the
1334 yield stress throughout the structure.
1335 5, EW
Plastic hinge. Fully yielded zone that forms in a structural member when the
21
1336 plastic moment is attained.
1337 Plastic moment. Theoretical resisting moment developed within a fully yielded
Y VI
1338 20
cross section.
1339 Plastic stress distribution method. In a composite member, method for determin-
AR E
1340 ing stresses assuming that the steel section and the concrete in the cross sec-
U IC R
1341 tion are fully plastic.

1342 Plastification. In an HSS connection, limit state based on an out-of-plane flexural
1343 yield line mechanism in the chord at a branch member connection.
1344 Plate girder. Built-up beam.
BR BL
1345 Plug weld. Weld made in a circular hole in one element of a joint fusing that
1346 element to another element.
1347 Point brace. Brace that prevents limits lateral movement or twist independently
FE PU
1348 of other braces at adjacent brace points (see panel brace).

1349 Ponding. Retention of water due solely to the deflection of flat roof framing.
1350 Positive flexural strength. Flexural strength of a composite beam in regions with
ED FT
1351 compression due to flexure on the top surface.

1352 Pretensioned bolt. Bolt tightened to the specified minimum pretension.
AT A
1353 Pretensioned joint. Joint with high-strength bolts tightened to the specified min-
1354 imum pretension.
D DR
1355 Properly developed. Reinforcing bars detailed to yield in a ductile manner before
1356 crushing of the concrete occurs. Bars meeting the provisions of ACI 318,
1357 insofar as development length, spacing and cover are deemed to be properly
1358 developed.
1359 Prying action. Amplification of the tension force in a bolt caused by leverage
1360 between the point of applied load, the bolt, and the reaction of the connected
1361 elements.
1362 Punching load. In an HSS connection, component of branch member force per-
1363 pendicular to a chord.
1364 P-δ effect. Effect of loads acting on the deflected shape of a member between
1365 joints or nodes.
1366 P-Δ effect. Effect of loads acting on the displaced location of joints or nodes in a
1367 structure. In tiered building structures, this is the effect of loads acting on
1368 the laterally displaced location of floors and roofs.
1369 Quality assurance. Monitoring and inspection tasks to ensure that the material
1370 provided and work performed by the fabricator and erector meet the re-
1371 quirements of the approved construction documents and referenced stand-
1372 ards. Quality assurance includes those tasks designated “special inspec-
1373 tion” by the applicable building code.

Front-27
1374 Quality assurance inspector (QAI). Individual designated to provide quality as-
1375 surance inspection for the work being performed.
1376 Quality assurance plan (QAP). Program in which the agency or firm responsible
1377 for quality assurance maintains detailed monitoring and inspection proce-
1378 dures to ensure conformance with the approved construction documents
1379 and referenced standards.
1380 Quality control. Controls and inspections implemented by the fabricator or erec-
1381 tor, as applicable, to ensure that the material provided and work performed
1382 meet the requirements of the approved construction documents and refer-
1383 enced standards.
1384 Quality control inspector (QCI). Individual designated to perform quality control
1385 inspection tasks for the work being performed.
1386 Quality control program (QCP). Program in which the fabricator or erector, as
1387 applicable, maintains detailed fabrication or erection and inspection proce-
1388 dures to ensure conformance with the approved design documents, specifi-
1389 cations, and referenced standards.
1390 Reentrant. In a cope or weld access hole, a cut at an abrupt change in direction
1391 5, EW
in which the exposed surface is concave.
21
1392 Registered design professional in responsible charge. A registered design pro-
1393 fessional engaged by the owner or the owner’s authorized agent to review
Y VI
1394 20
and coordinate certain aspects of the project, as determined by the authority
1395 having jurisdiction, for compatibility with the design of the building or struc-
AR E
1396 ture, including submittal documents prepared by others, deferred submittal

U IC R
1397 documents, and phased submittal documents.

1398 Required strength*†. Forces, stresses and deformations acting on a structural
1399 component, determined by either structural analysis, for the LRFD or ASD
1400 load combinations, as applicable, or as specified by this specification or
BR BL
1401 Standard.
1402 Resistance factor, φ†. Factor that accounts for unavoidable deviations of the
1403 nominal strength from the actual strength and for the manner and conse-
FE PU
1404 quences of failure.

1405 Restrained construction. Floor and roof assemblies and individual beams in
1406 buildings where the surrounding or supporting structure is capable of resist-
ED FT
1407 ing significant thermal expansion throughout the range of anticipated ele-
1408 vated temperatures.
AT A
1409 Reverse curvature. See double curvature.

1410 Root of joint. Portion of a joint to be welded where the members are closest to
D DR
1411 each other.

1412 Rupture strength†. Strength limited by breaking or tearing of members or con-
1413 necting elements.
1414 Safety factor, Ω†. Factor that accounts for deviations of the actual strength from
1415 the nominal strength, deviations of the actual load from the nominal load,
1416 uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load into a load effect, and
1417 for the manner and consequences of failure.
1418 Second-order effect. Effect of loads acting on the deformed configuration of a
1419 structure; includes P-δ effect and P-Δ effect.
1420 Seismic force-resisting system. That part of the structural system that has been
1421 considered in the design to provide the required resistance to the seismic
1422 forces prescribed in ASCE/SEI 7.
1423 Seismic response modification factor. Factor that reduces seismic load effects to
1424 strength level.
1425 Service load combination. Load combination under which serviceability limit
1426 states are evaluated.
1427 Service load†. Load under which serviceability limit states are evaluated.

Front-28
1428 Serviceability limit state†. Limiting condition affecting the ability of a structure
1429 to preserve its appearance, maintainability, durability, comfort of its occu-
1430 pants, or function of machinery, under typical usage.
1431 Shear buckling†. Buckling mode in which a plate element, such as the web of a
1432 beam, deforms under pure shear applied in the plane of the plate.
1433 Shear lag. Nonuniform tensile stress distribution in a member or connecting el-
1434 ement in the vicinity of a connection.
1435 Shear wall†. Wall that provides resistance to lateral loads in the plane of the wall
1436 and provides stability for the structural system.
1437 Shear yielding (punching). In an HSS connection, limit state based on out-of-
1438 plane shear strength of the chord wall to which branch members are attached.
1439 Sheet steel. In a composite floor system, steel used for closure plates or miscel-
1440 laneous trimming in a formed steel deck.
1441 Shim. Thin layer of material used to fill a space between faying or bearing sur-
1442 faces.
1443 Shop drawings. Drawings of the individual structural steel shipping pieces that
1444 are to be produced in the fabrication shop.
1445 5, EW
Sidesway buckling (frame). Stability limit state involving lateral sidesway insta-
21
1446 bility of a frame.
1447 Simple connection. Connection that transmits negligible bending moment be-
Y VI
1448 20
tween connected members.
1449 Single-concentrated force. Tensile or compressive force applied normal to the
AR E
1450 flange of a member.

U IC R
1451 Single curvature. Deformed shape of a beam with no inflection point within the
1452 span.
1453 Slender-element section. Section that is able to only reach a strength limited by
1454 local buckling of an element defined by element width-to-thickness ratio
BR BL
1455 greater than λr.

1456 Slender-element composite section. Filled composite section that is able to only
1457 reach a nominal axial or flexural strength limited by local buckling of a steel
FE PU
1458 element, and by not adequately confining the infill concrete to reach the con-
1459 fined compressive strength, as defined by the steel element width-to-thick-
1460 ness ratio greater than λr.
ED FT
1461 Slip. In a bolted connection, limit state of relative motion of connected parts prior
1462 to the attainment of the available strength of the connection.
AT A
1463 Slip-critical connection. Bolted connection designed to resist movement by fric-

1464 tion on the faying surface of the connection under the clamping force of the
D DR
1465 bolts.
1466 Slot weld. Weld made in an elongated hole fusing an element to another element.
1467 Snug-tightened joint. Joint with the connected plies in firm contact as specified
1468 in Chapter J.
1469 Specifications. The portion of the construction documents and the contract doc-
1470 uments that consist of the written requirements for materials, standards, and
1471 workmanship.
1472 Specified minimum tensile strength. Lower limit of tensile strength specified for
1473 a material as defined by ASTM.
1474 Specified minimum yield stress†. Lower limit of yield stress specified for a ma-
1475 terial as defined by ASTM.
1476 Splice. Connection between two structural elements joined at their ends to form
1477 a single, longer element.
1478 Stability. Condition in the loading of a structural component, frame or structure
1479 in which a slight disturbance in the loads or geometry does not produce large
1480 displacements.
1481 Steel anchor. Headed stud or hot rolled channel welded to a steel member and
1482 embedded in the concrete of a composite member to transmit shear, tension
1483 or a combination of shear and tension, at the interface of the two materials.

Front-29
1484 Stiffened element. Flat compression element with adjoining out-of-plane ele-
1485 ments along both edges parallel to the direction of loading.
1486 Stiffener. Structural element, typically an angle or plate, attached to a member to
1487 distribute load, transfer shear or prevent buckling.
1488 Stiffness. Resistance to deformation of a member or structure, measured by the
1489 ratio of the applied force (or moment) to the corresponding displacement (or
1490 rotation).
1491 Story drift. Horizontal deflection at the top of the story relative to the bottom of
1492 the story.
1493 Story drift ratio. Story drift divided by the story height.
1494 Strain compatibility method. In a composite member, method for determining the
1495 stresses considering the stress-strain relationships of each material and its
1496 location with respect to the neutral axis of the cross section.
1497 Strength limit state†. Limiting condition in which the maximum strength of a
1498 structure or its components is reached.
1499 Stress. Force per unit area caused by axial force, moment, shear or torsion.
1500 Stress concentration. Localized stress considerably higher than average due to
1501 5, EW
abrupt changes in geometry or localized loading.
21
1502 Stress range. The magnitude of the change in stress due to the application or
1503 removal of the applied cyclic load.
Y VI
1504 20
Strong axis. Major principal centroidal axis of a cross section.
1505 Structural analysis†. Determination of load effects on members and connections
AR E
1506 based on principles of structural mechanics.

U IC R
1507 Structural component†. Member, connector, connecting element or assemblage.

1508 Structural Integrity. Performance characteristic of a structure indicating re-
1509 sistance to catastrophic failure.
1510 Structural steel. Steel elements as defined in the AISC Code of Standard Practice
BR BL
1511 for Steel Buildings and Bridges Section 2.1.

1512 Structural system. An assemblage of load-carrying components that are joined
1513 together to provide interaction or interdependence.
FE PU
1514 Substantiating connection information. Information submitted by the fabricator

1515 in support of connections either selected by the steel detailer or designed by
1516 the licensed engineer working for the fabricator.
ED FT
1517 System imperfection. Initial displacement of points of intersection of members

1518 from their nominal locations, such as the out-of-plumbness of columns due
AT A
1519 to erection tolerances.

1520 T-connection. HSS connection in which the branch member or connecting ele-
D DR
1521 ment is perpendicular to the main member and in which forces transverse to
1522 the main member are primarily equilibrated by shear in the main member.
1523 Tensile strength (of material)†. Maximum tensile stress that a material is capable
1524 of sustaining as defined by ASTM.
1525 Tensile strength (of member). Maximum tension force that a member is capable
1526 of sustaining.
1527 Tension and shear rupture†. In a bolt or other type of mechanical fastener, limit
1528 state of rupture due to simultaneous tension and shear force.
1529 Tension field action. Behavior of a panel under shear in which diagonal tensile
1530 forces develop in the web and compressive forces develop in the transverse
1531 stiffeners in a manner similar to a Pratt truss.
1532 Thermally cut. Cut with gas, plasma or laser.
1533 Tie plate. Plate element used to join two parallel components of a built-up col-
1534 umn, girder or strut rigidly connected to the parallel components and de-
1535 signed to transmit shear between them.
1536 Toe of fillet. Junction of a fillet weld face and base metal. Tangent point of a
1537 fillet in a rolled shape.
1538 Torsional bracing. Bracing resisting twist of a beam or column.

Front-30
1539 Torsional buckling†. Buckling mode in which a compression member twists

1540 about its shear center axis.
1541 Transverse reinforcement. In an encased composite column, steel reinforcement
1542 in the form of closed ties or welded wire fabric providing confinement for
1543 the concrete surrounding the steel shape.
1544 Transverse stiffener. Web stiffener oriented perpendicular to the flanges, at-
1545 tached to the web.
1546 Tubing. See HSS.
1547 Turn-of-nut method. Procedure whereby the specified pretension in high-strength
1548 bolts is controlled by rotating the fastener component a predetermined
1549 amount after the bolt has been snug tightened.
1550 Unbraced length. Distance between braced points of a member, measured be-
1551 tween the centers of gravity of the bracing members.
1552 Uneven load distribution. In an HSS connection, condition in which the stress is
1553 not distributed uniformly through the cross section of connected elements.
1554 Unframed end. The end of a member not restrained against rotation by stiffeners
1555 or connection elements.
1556 5, EW
Unstiffened element. Flat compression element with an adjoining out-of-plane
21
1557 element along one edge parallel to the direction of loading.
1558 Unrestrained construction. Floor and roof assemblies and individual beams in
Y VI
1559 20
buildings that are assumed to be free to rotate and expand throughout the
1560 range of anticipated elevated temperatures.
AR E
1561 Weak axis. Minor principal centroidal axis of a cross section.

U IC R
1562 Weathering steel. High-strength, low-alloy steel that, with sufficient precautions,
1563 is able to be used in typical atmospheric exposures (not marine) without
1564 protective paint coating.
1565 Web local crippling†. Limit state of local failure of web plate in the immediate
BR BL
1566 vicinity of a concentrated load or reaction.

1567 Web sidesway buckling. Limit state of lateral buckling of the tension flange op-
1568 posite the location of a concentrated compression force.
FE PU
1569 Weld access hole. An opening that permits access for welding, backgouging, or
1570 for insertion of backing.
1571 Weld metal. Portion of a fusion weld that has been completely melted during
ED FT
1572 welding. Weld metal has elements of filler metal and base metal melted in
1573 the weld thermal cycle.
AT A
1574 Weld root. See root of joint.

1575 Y-connection. HSS connection in which the branch member or connecting ele-
D DR
1576 ment is not perpendicular to the main member and in which forces transverse
1577 to the main member are primarily equilibrated by shear in the main member.
1578 Yield moment†. In a member subjected to bending, the moment at which the ex-
1579 treme outer fiber first attains the yield stress.
1580 Yield point†. First stress in a material at which an increase in strain occurs with-
1581 out an increase in stress as defined by ASTM.
1582 Yield strength†. Stress at which a material exhibits a specified limiting deviation
1583 from the proportionality of stress to strain as defined by ASTM.
1584 Yield stress†. Generic term to denote either yield point or yield strength, as ap-
1585 plicable for the material.
1586 Yielding†. Limit state of inelastic deformation that occurs when the yield stress
1587 is reached.
1588 Yielding (plastic moment)†. Yielding throughout the cross section of a member
1589 as the bending moment reaches the plastic moment.
1590 Yielding (yield moment)†. Yielding at the extreme fiber on the cross section of a
1591 member when the bending moment reaches the yield moment.
1592

Front-31
1593 ABBREVIATIONS
1594
1595 The following abbreviations appear in this Specification. The abbreviations are writ-
1596 ten out where they first appear within a Section.
1597
1598 ACI (American Concrete Institute)
1599 AHJ (authority having jurisdiction)
1600 AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction)
1601 AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute)
1602 ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
1603 ASCE (American Society of Civil Engineers)
1604 ASD (allowable strength design)
1605 ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)
1606 ASNT (American Society for Nondestructive Testing)
1607 AWI (associate welding inspector)
1608
1609 5, EW
AWS (American Welding Society)
CJP (complete joint penetration)
21
1610 CVN (Charpy V-notch)
1611 ENA (elastic neutral axis)
Y VI
1612
20
EOR (engineer of record)
1613 ERW (electric resistance welded)
AR E
1614 FCAW (flux cored arc welding)

U IC R
1615 FR (fully restrained)

1616 GMAW (gas metal arc welding)
1617 HSLA (high-strength low-alloy)
1618 HSS (hollow structural section)
BR BL
1619 LRFD (load and resistance factor design)

1620 MT (magnetic particle testing)
FE PU
1621 NDT (nondestructive testing)

1622 OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration)
1623 PJP (partial joint penetration)
ED FT
1624 PNA (plastic neutral axis)

1625 PQR (procedure qualification record)
1626 PR (partially restrained)
AT A
1627 PT (penetrant testing)

D DR
1628 QA (quality assurance)

1629 QAI (quality assurance inspector)
1630 QAP (quality assurance plan)
1631 QC (quality control)
1632 QCI (quality control inspector)
1633 QCP (quality control program)
1634 RCSC (Research Council on Structural Connections)
1635 RT (radiographic testing)
1636 SAW (submerged arc welding)
1637 SEI (Structural Engineering Institute)
1638 SFPE (Society of Fire Protection Engineers)
1639 SMAW (shielded metal arc welding)
1640 SWI (senior welding inspector)
1641 UNC (Unified National Coarse)
1642 UT (ultrasonic testing)
1643 WI (welding inspector)
1644 WPQR (welder performance qualification records)
1645 WPS (welding procedure specification)

A-1
2 CHAPTER A
3 GENERAL PROVISIONS
4
5 This chapter states the scope of this Specification, lists referenced specifications,
6 codes and standards, and provides requirements for materials and structural design
7 documents.
8
9 The chapter is organized as follows:
10
11 A1. Scope
12 A2. Referenced Specifications, Codes, and Standards
13 A3. Material
14 A4. Structural Design Documents and Specifications Issued for Construc-
15 tion
16 A5. 5, EW
Approvals
21
17
18 A1. SCOPE
Y VI
19
20
20 The Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (ANSI/AISC 360), hereafter
AR E
21 referred to as this Specification, shall apply to the design, fabrication, erection,

U IC R
22 and quality of the structural steel system or systems with structural steel acting
23 compositely with reinforced concrete, where the steel elements are defined in
24 Section 2.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
BR BL
25 Bridges (ANSI/AISC 303), hereafter referred to as the Code of Standard Prac-

26 tice.
FE PU
27
28 This Specification includes the Symbols, the Glossary, Abbreviations, Chapters
29 A through N, and Appendices 1 through 8. The Commentary to this Specifica-
ED FT
30 tion and the User Notes interspersed throughout are not part of this Specifica-
31 tion. The phrases “is permitted” and “are permitted” in this document identify
AT A
32 provisions that comply with this Specification, but are not mandatory.
33
D DR
34 User Note: User notes are intended to provide concise and practical guidance
35 in the application of the Specification provisions.
36
37 This Specification sets forth criteria for the design, fabrication, and erection of
38 structural steel buildings and other structures, where other structures are defined
39 as structures designed, fabricated, and erected in a manner similar to buildings,
40 with building-like vertical and lateral load-resisting-elements.
41 Wherever this Specification refers to the applicable building code and there is
42 none, the loads, load combinations, system limitations, and general design re-
43 quirements shall be those in ASCE Minimum Design Loads and Associated
44 Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE/SEI 7).
45
46 Where conditions are not covered by this Specification, designs are permitted
47 to be based on tests or analysis, subject to the approval of the authority having
48 jurisdiction. Alternative methods of analysis and design are permitted, provided
49 such alternative methods or criteria are acceptable to the authority having juris-
50 diction.
51
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, xx, 2022

A-2
52 User Note: For the design of cold-formed steel structural members, the provi-
53 sions in the AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed
54 Steel Structural Members (AISI S100) are recommended, except for cold-
55 formed hollow structural sections (HSS), which are designed in accordance
56 with this Specification.
57
58 1. Seismic Applications
59
60 The AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings (ANSI/AISC 341)
61 shall apply to the design, fabrication, erection, and quality of seismic force-
62 resisting systems of structural steel or of structural steel acting compositely
63 with reinforced concrete, unless specifically exempted by the applicable build-
64 ing code.
65
66 User Note: ASCE/SEI 7 (Table 12.2-1, Item H) specifically exempts struc-
67 tural steel systems in seismic design categories B and C from the requirements
68 in the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings if they are de-
69 signed according to this Specification and the seismic loads are computed us-
70
5, EW
ing a seismic response modification coefficient, R, of 3; composite systems are
21
71 not covered by this exemption. The Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel
72 Buildings do not apply in seismic design category A.
Y VI
73
20
74 2. Nuclear Applications
AR E
75
U IC R
76 The design, fabrication, erection, and quality of safety-related nuclear struc-

77 tures shall comply with the provisions of this Specification as modified by the
78 requirements of the AISC Specification for Safety-Related Steel Structures for
BR BL
79 Nuclear Facilities (ANSI/AISC N690).

80
81 A2. REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
FE PU
82
83 The following specifications, codes and standards are referenced in this Speci-
ED FT
84 fication:
85
86 (a) American Concrete Institute (ACI)
AT A
87 ACI 216.1-14 Code Requirements for Determining Fire Resistance of Con-

D DR
88 crete and Masonry Construction Assemblies

89 ACI 318-194 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and
90 Commentary
91 ACI 318M-194 Metric Building Code Requirements for Structural Con-
92 crete and Commentary
93 ACI 349-13 Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety-Related Concrete
94 Structures and Commentary
95 ACI 349M-13 Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety-Related Concrete
96 Structures and Commentary (Metric)
97
98 (b) American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
99 ANSI/AISC 303-2216 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
100 Bridges
101 ANSI/AISC 341-2216 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings
102 ANSI/AISC N690-12 Specification for Safety-Related Steel Structures for
103 Nuclear Facilities
104 ANSI/AISC N690s1-15 Specification for Safety-Related Steel Structures
105 for Nuclear Facilities, Supplement No. 1
106
107 (c) American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

A-3
108 AISI S100-16w/S2-20 North American Specification for the Design of

109 Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, with Supplement 2
110 AISI S310-20 North American Standard for the Design of Profiled Steel
111 Diaphragm Panels
112 AISI S923-20 Test Standard for Determining the Strength and Stiffness
113 of Shear Connections of Composite Members
114 AISI S924-20 Test Standard for Determining the Effective Flexural Stiff-
115 ness of Composite Members
116
117 (d) American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
118 ASCE/SEI 7-2216 Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for
119 Buildings and Other Structures
120 ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire
121 Protection
122
123 (e) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
124 ASME B18.2.6-190 Fasteners for Use in Structural Applications
125 ASME B46.1-019 Surface Texture, Surface Roughness, Waviness, and
126 Lay
5, EW
21
127
128 (f) American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)
Y VI
129
20
ANSI/ASNT CP-189-202011 Standard for Qualification and Certifica-
130 tion of Nondestructive Testing Personnel
AR E
131 Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A-202011 Personnel Qualifica-

U IC R
132 tion and Certification in Nondestructive Testing

133
134 (g) ASTM International (ASTM)
BR BL
135 A6/A6M-1914 Standard Specification for General Requirements for

136 Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
137 A36/A36M-1914 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
FE PU
138 A53/A53M-2012 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
139 Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ED FT
140 A193/A193M-2015 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless

141 Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Ser-
142 vice and Other Special Purpose Applications
AT A
143 A194/A194M-20a15 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy

D DR
144 Steel, and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High
145 Temperature Service, or Both
146 A216/A216M-1814e1 Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon,
147 Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service
148 A242/A242M-13(2018) Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-
149 Alloy Structural Steel
150 A283/A283M-1813 Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate
151 Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates
152 A307-14e1 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
153 Threaded Rod, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
154
155 User Note: ASTM A325/A325M are now included as a Grade within
156 ASTM F3125.
157
158 A354-17e211 Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy
159 Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners
160 A370-2015 Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Test-
161 ing of Steel Products

A-4
162 A449-14 Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs,
163 Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, Gen-
164 eral Use
165
166 User Note: ASTM A490/A490M are now included as a Grade within
167 ASTM F3125.
168
169 A500/A500M-2013 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
170 Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
171 A501/A501M-14 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and
172 Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
173 A502-03(2015) Standard Specification for Rivets, Steel, Structural
174 A514/A514M-18e114 Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength,
175 Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding
176 A529/A529M-1914 Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-
177 Manganese Steel of Structural Quality
178 A563-15 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
179 A563M-07(2013) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
180 (Metric)
5, EW
21
181 A568/A568M-19a15 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon,
182 Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-
Y VI
183
20
Rolled, General Requirements for
184 A572/A572M-185 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
AR E
185 Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel

U IC R

187 Structural Steel, up to 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point, with
188 Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
BR BL
189 A606/A606M-185 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,

190 High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Im-
191 proved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
FE PU
192 A618/A618M-04(2015) Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded

193 and Seamless High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing
ED FT
194 A668/A668M-20a15 Standard Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon

195 and Alloy, for General Industrial Use
196 A673/A673M-1707(2012) Standard Specification for Sampling Proce-
AT A
197 dure for Impact Testing of Structural Steel

D DR
198 A709/A709M-183a Standard Specification for Structural Steel for

199 Bridges
200 A751-2014a Standard Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
201 Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
202 A847/A847M-2014 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
203 Seamless High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Tubing with Improved
204 Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
206 Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and Self-
207 Tempering Process (QST)
208 A992/A992M-2011(2015) Standard Specification for Structural Steel
209 Shapes
210 A1011/A1011M-18a4 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
211 Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-
212 Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High
213 Strength
214 A1043/A1043M-184 Standard Specification for Structural Steel with Low
215 Yield to Tensile Ratio for Use in Buildings

A-5
216 A1065/A1065M-185 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Electric-

217 Fusion (Arc) Welded High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing in
218 Shapes, with 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point
219 A1066/A1066M-11(2015)e1 Standard Specification for High-Strength
220 Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate Produced by Thermo-Mechanical
221 Controlled Process (TMCP)
222 A1085/A1085M-153 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded
223 Carbon Steel Hollow Structural Sections (HSS)
224 C567/C567M-194 Standard Test Method for Determining Density of
225 Structural Lightweight Concrete
226 E119-2015 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
227 and Materials
228 E165/E165M-182 Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination
229 for General Industry
230 E709-15 Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination
231 F436/F436M-19-11 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
232 Inch and Metric Dimensions
233 F436M-11 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers (Metric)
234
5, EW
F606/F606M-194a Standard Test Methods for Determining the Mechani-
21
235 cal Properties of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners,
236 Washers, Direct Tension Indicators, and Rivets
Y VI
237
20
F844-1907a(2013) Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain
238 (Flat), Unhardened for General Use
AR E
239 F959/F959M-17a5 Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-

U IC R
240 Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners,
241 Inch and Metric Series
242 F959M-13 Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct
BR BL
243 Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners (Metric)

244 F1554-185 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and
245 105-ksi Yield Strength
FE PU
246
247 User Note: ASTM F1554 is the most commonly referenced specification
ED FT
248 for anchor rods. Grade and weldability must be specified.

249
250 User Note: ASTM F1852 and F2280 are now included as Grades within
AT A
251 ASTM F3125.

D DR
252
253 F3043-154e1 Standard Specification for “Twist Off” Type Tension Con-
254 trol Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Alloy Steel, Heat
255 Treated, 200 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
256 F3111-164 Standard Specification for Heavy Hex Structural
257 Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 200 ksi Min-
258 imum Tensile Strength
259 F3125/F3125M-19e215 Standard Specification for High Strength Struc-
260 tural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa)
261 and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric
262 Dimensions
263 F3148-17a Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolt As-
264 semblies, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 144 ksi Minimum Ten-
265 sile Strength, Inch Dimensions
266
267 (h) American Welding Society (AWS)
268 AWS A5.1/A5.1M:2012 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for
269 Shielded Metal Arc Welding
270 AWS A5.5/A5.5M:2014 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for
271 Shielded Metal Arc Welding

A-6
272 AWS A5.17/A5.17M:1997 (R201907) Specification for Carbon Steel

273 Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
274 AWS A5.18/A5.18M:201705 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes
275 and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
276 AWS A5.20/A5.20M:2005 (R2015) Specification for Carbon Steel Elec-
277 trodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding
278 AWS A5.23/A5.23M:2011 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
279 and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
280 AWS A5.25/A5.25M:1997 (R2009) Specification for Carbon and Low-
281 Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Electroslag Welding
282 AWS A5.26/A5.26M:20201997 (R2009) Specification for Carbon and
283 Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Electrogas Welding
284 AWS A5.28/A5.28M:20202005 (R2015) Specification for Low-Alloy
285 Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
286 AWS A5.29/A5.29M:2010 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes
287 for Flux Cored Arc Welding
288 AWS A5.32M/A5.32M:2011 Welding Consumables—Gases and Gas
289 Mixtures for Fusion Welding and Allied Processes
290
5, EW
AWS A5.36/A5.36M:20162 Specification for Carbon and Low-Alloy
21
291 Steel Flux Cored Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding and Metal
292 Cored Electrodes for Gas Metal Arc Welding
Y VI
293
20
AWS B5.1:2013-AMD1 Specification for the Qualification of Welding
294 Inspectors
AR E
295 AWS D1.1/D1.1M:202015 Structural Welding Code—Steel

U IC R
296 AWS D1.3/D1.3M:201808 Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel

297
298 (i) Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC)
BR BL
299 Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts, 20202014

300
301 (j) Steel Deck Institute (SDI)
FE PU
302 ANSI/SDI QA/QC-2011 Standard for Quality Control and Quality As-
303 surance for Installation of Steel Deck
ED FT
304
305 (k) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
306 UL 263, Edition 14m, Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction
AT A
307 and Materials, 2018

D DR
308
309 A3. MATERIAL
310
311 1. Structural Steel Materials
312
313 Material test reports or reports of tests made by the fabricator or a testing la-
314 boratory shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity with one of the
315 ASTM standards designations listed in Section A3.1a Table A3.1a, subject to
316 the grades and limitations listed. For hot-rolled structural shapes, plates, and
317 bars, such tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M; for sheets,
318 such tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM A568/A568M; for tubing
319 and pipe, such tests shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the
320 applicable ASTM standards listed above in Section A2 for those product
321 forms.
322
323 1a. ASTM Designations Listed Materials
324
325 Structural steel material conforming to one of the following ASTM specifica-
326 tions standard designations shown in Table A3.1a subject to the grades and

A-7
327 limitations listed are considered to perform as anticipated in the other provi-
328 sions of this Specification. is approved for use under this Specification:
329
330 (a) Hot-rolled structural shapes
331 ASTM A36/A36M
332 ASTM A529/A529M
333 ASTM A572/A572M
334 ASTM A588/A588M
335 ASTM A709/A709M, Grades 36 [250], 50 [345], 50S [345S], 50W
336 [345W], HPS 50W [HPS345W], QST 50 [QST345], QST 50S [QST345S],
337 QST 65 [QST450], QST 70 [QST485]
338 ASTM A913/A913M
339 ASTM A992/ A992M
340 ASTM A1043/A1043M
341
342 (b) Hollow structural sections (HSS)
343 ASTM A53/A53M Grade B
344 ASTM A500/A500M
345
5, EW
ASTM A501/A501M
21
346 ASTM A618/A618M
347 ASTM A847/A847M
Y VI
348
20
ASTM A1065/A1065M
349 ASTM A1085/A1085M
AR E
350
U IC R
351 (c) Plates

352 ASTM A36/A36M
353 ASTM A242/A242M
BR BL
354 ASTM A283/A283M

355 ASTM A514/A514M
356 ASTM A529/A529M
FE PU
357 ASTM A572/A572M

358 ASTM A588/A588M
ED FT
359 ASTM A709/A709M

360 ASTM A1043/A1043M
361 ASTM A1066/A1066M
AT A
362
D DR
363 (d) Bars

364 ASTM A36/A36M
365 ASTM A529/A529M
366 ASTM A572/A572M
367 ASTM A709/A709M
368
369 (e) Sheets
370 ASTM A606/A606M
371 ASTM A1011/A1011M SS, HSLAS, AND HSLAS-F
372

A-8
373
TABLE A3.1a
Listed Materials
Standard Designa- Allowable Grades / Other Limitations
tion Strengths
(a) Hot-Rolled Shapes
ASTM A36 / A36M –[a] –[b]
ASTM A529 / A529M Gr. 50 [345] or Gr. 55 [380] –
ASTM A572 / A572M Gr. 42 [290], Gr. 50 [345], Type 1, 2, or 3
Gr. 55 [380], Gr. 60 [415], or
Gr. 65 [450]
ASTM A588 / A588M – –
ASTM A709 / A709M, Gr. 36 [250], Gr. 50 [345],
Gr. 50S [345S], Gr. 50W
[345W], QST 50 [QST345],
–
QST 50S [QST345S], QST
65 [QST450], or QST 70
[QST485]
ASTM A913 / A913M Gr. 50 [345], Gr. 60 [415],
5, EW Gr. 65 [450], Gr. 70 [485], or –
21
Gr. 80 [550]
ASTM A992 / A992M – –
Y VI
20
ASTM A1043/A1043M Gr. 36 [250] or Gr. 50 [345] –
(b) Hollow Structural Sections (HSS)
AR E
ASTM A53 / A53M Gr. B –

U IC R
ASTM A500 / A500M Gr. A, Gr. B, Gr. C, or Gr. D –

ASTM A501 / A501M Gr. B ERW or seamless
ASTM A618 / A618M Gr. Ia, Gr. Ib, Gr. II, or Gr. III ERW or seamless
ASTM A847 / A847M – –
BR BL
ASTM A1065 / Gr. 50 [345] or Gr. 50W A572, A588, or A709

A1065M [345W] HPS 50W [345W]
FE PU
ASTM A1085 / Gr. A

–
A1085M
(c) Plates
ED FT
ASTM A36 / A36M – –

ASTM A283 / A283M Gr. C or Gr. D –
AT A
ASTM A514 / A514M See producer fabrica-

–
tion recommendations
D DR
ASTM A529 / A529M Gr. 50 [345] or Gr. 55 [380] –

ASTM A572 / A572M Gr. 42 [290], Gr. 50 [345], Type 1,2, or 3
Gr. 55 [380], Gr. 60 [415], or
Gr. 65 [450]
ASTM A588 / A588M – –
ASTM A709 / A709M Gr. 36 [250], Gr. 50 [345],
Gr. 50S [345S], Gr. 50W
[345W], HPS 50W
–
[HPS345W], HPS 70W
[HPS485W], or HPS 100W
[HPS 690W]
ASTM A1043 / Gr. 36 [250] or Gr. 50 [345]
–
A1043M
ASTM A1066 / Gr. 50 [345], Gr. 60 [415],
A1066M Gr. 65 [450], Gr. 70 [485], or –
Gr. 80 [550]
(d) Bars
ASTM A36 / A36M – –
ASTM A529 / A529M Gr 50 [345] or 55 [380] –
ASTM A572 / A572M Gr 42 [290], Gr. 50 [345],Gr. Type 1, 2, or 3
55 [380], Gr. 60 [415], or Gr.
65 [450]

A-9
374
375
TABLE A3.1a (continued)
Listed Materials
Standard Designa- Allowable Grades / Other Limitations
tion Strengths
ASTM A709 / A709M Gr. 36 [250], Gr. 50 [345],
50W [345W], HPS 50W –
[HPS345W],
(e) Sheet
ASTM A606 / A606M Gr. 45 [310] or Gr. 50 [345] Type 2, 4, or 5
ASTM A1011 / Gr. 30 [205] thru Gr. 80 [550] SS, HSLAS, HSLAS-F;
A1011M all types and classes
[a] Indicates there is no restriction applicable on grades/strengths
[b] Indicates there is no other limitation applicable
376
377
378 User Note: Plates, sheets, strips and bars are different products,; however, de-
379 sign rules do not make a differentiation between these products. The most com-
380 5, EW
mon differences among these products are their physical dimensions of width
21
381 and thickness.
382
Y VI
383 1b.
20
Unlisted Materials
AR E
384
385 Materials other than those listed in Table A3.1a are not prohibited for specific
U IC R
386 applications if the engineer determines that the material will perform as de-
387 fined by the other provisions of the Specification.
388
BR BL
389 1cb. Unidentified Steel

390
FE PU
391 Unidentified steel, free of injurious defects, is permitted to be used only for
392 members or details whose failure will not reduce the strength of the structure,
393 either locally or overall. Such use shall be subject to the approval of the engi-
ED FT
394 neer of record.

395
AT A
396 User Note: Unidentified steel may be used for details where the precise me-
397 chanical properties and weldability are not of concern. These are commonly
D DR
398 curb plates, shims and other similar pieces.

399
400 1dc. Rolled Heavy Shapes
401
402 ASTM A6/A6M hot-rolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding 2 in. (50
403 mm) are considered to be rolled heavy shapes. Rolled heavy shapes used as
404 members subject to primary (computed) tensile forces due to tension or flexure
405 and spliced or connected using complete-joint-penetration groove welds that
406 fuse through the thickness of the flange or the flange and the web, shall be
407 specified as follows. The structural design documents shall require that such
408 shapes be supplied with Charpy V-notch (CVN) impact test results in accord-
409 ance with ASTM A6/A6M, Supplementary Requirement S30, Charpy V-
410 Notch Impact Test for Structural Shapes—Alternate Core Location. The im-
411 pact test shall meet a minimum average value of 20 ft-lb (27 J) absorbed energy
412 at a maximum temperature of +70 °F (+21 °C).
413
414 The requirements in this section do not apply if the splices and connections are
415 made by bolting. Where a rolled heavy shape is welded to the surface of an-
416 other shape using groove welds, the requirements apply only to the shape that
417 has weld metal fused through the cross section.

A-10
418
419 User Note: Additional requirements for rolled heavy-shape welded joints are
420 given in Sections J1.5, J1.6, J2.6 and M2.2.
421
422 1ed. Built-Up Heavy Shapes
423
424 Built-up cross sections consisting of plates with a thickness exceeding 2 in. (50
425 mm) are considered built-up heavy shapes. Built-up heavy shapes used as
426 members subject to primary (computed) tensile forces due to tension or flexure
427 and spliced or connected to other members using complete-joint-penetration
428 groove welds that fuse through the thickness of the plates, shall be specified as
429 follows. The structural design documents shall require that the steel be sup-
430 plied with Charpy V-notch impact test results in accordance with ASTM
431 A6/A6M, Supplementary Requirement S5, Charpy V-Notch Impact Test. The
432 impact test shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM A673/A673M, Fre-
433 quency P, and shall meet a minimum average value of 20 ft-lb (27 J) absorbed
434 energy at a maximum temperature of +70°F (+21°C).
435
436 5, EW
When a built-up heavy shape is welded to the face of another member using
21
437 groove welds, these requirements apply only to the shape that has weld metal
438 fused through the cross section.
Y VI
439
20
440 User Note: Additional requirements for built-up heavy-shape welded joints
AR E
441 are given in Sections J1.5, J1.6, J2.6 and M2.2.

U IC R
442
443 2. Steel Castings and Forgings
444
BR BL
445 Steel castings and forgings shall conform to an ASTM standard intended for
446 structural applications and shall provide strength, ductility, weldability and
FE PU
447 toughness adequate for the purpose. Test reports produced in accordance with
448 the ASTM reference standards shall constitute sufficient evidence of conform-
449 ity with such standards.
ED FT
450
451 3. Bolts, Washers and Nuts
452
AT A
453 Bolt, washer and nut material conforming to one of the following ASTM spec-
D DR
454 ifications standards is approved for use under this Specification:

455
456 User Note: ASTM F3125 is an umbrella standard that incorporates Grades
457 A325, A325M, A490, A490M, F1852 and F2280, which were previously sep-
458 arate standards.
459
460 (a) Bolts
461 ASTM A307
462 ASTM A354
463 ASTM A449
464 ASTM F3043
465 ASTM F3111
466 ASTM F3125/F3125M
467 ASTM F3148
468
469 (b) Nuts
470 ASTM A194/A194M
471 ASTM A563
472 ASTM A563M
473

A-11
474 (c) Washers

475 ASTM F436
476 ASTM F436M
477 ASTM F844
478
479 (d) Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators
480 ASTM F959
481 ASTM F959M
482
483 Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity
484 with the standards.
485
486 4. Anchor Rods and Threaded Rods
487
488 Anchor rod and threaded rod material conforming to one of the following
489 ASTM specifications standards is approved for use under this Specification:
490
491 ASTM A36/A36M
492
5, EW
ASTM A193/A193M
21
493 ASTM A354
494 ASTM A449
Y VI
495
20
ASTM A572/A572M
496 ASTM A588/A588M
AR E
497 ASTM F1554

U IC R
498
499 User Note: ASTM F1554 is the preferred material specification for anchor
500 rods.
BR BL
501
502 ASTM A449 material is permitted for high-strength anchor rods and threaded
503 rods of any diameter.
FE PU
504
505 Threads on anchor rods and threaded rods shall conform to Class 2A, Unified
ED FT
506 Coarse Thread Series of ASME B1.1, except for anchor rods over 1 in. diameter
507 which are permitted to conform to Class 2A, 8UN Thread Series.
508
AT A

D DR

511
512 5. Consumables for Welding
513
514 Filler metals and fluxes shall conform to one of the following specifications of
515 the American Welding Society:
516 AWS A5.1/A5.1M
517 AWS A5.5/A5.5M
518 AWS A5.17/A5.17M
519 AWS A5.18/A5.18M
520 AWS A5.20/A5.20M
521 AWS A5.23/A5.23M
522 AWS A5.25/A5.25M
523 AWS A5.26/A5.26M
524 AWS A5.28/A5.28M
525 AWS A5.29/A5.29M
526 AWS A5.32/A5.32M
527 AWS A5.36/A5.36M
528

A-12

531
532 6. Headed Stud Anchors
533
534 Steel headed stud anchors shall conform to the requirements of the Structural
535 Welding Code—Steel (AWS D1.1/D1.1M).
536
538 with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
539
540 A4. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
541 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
542
543 The issuing entity shall obtain authorization from the engineer of record prior
544 to each issuance of the structural design documents and specifications. When
545 authorized, the documents that are released shall be clearly identified with the
546 authorized purpose and shall include the date of release.
547 5, EW
21
548 Structural design documents and specifications issued for construction of all
549 or a portion of the work shall be clearly legible and drawn to an identified scale
Y VI
550
20
that is appropriate to clearly convey the information.
551
AR E
552 1. Design Documents and Specifications

U IC R
553
554 Structural design documents and specifications They shall be based on
555 the consideration of the design loads, forces, and deformations to be re-
BR BL
556 sisted by the structural frame in the completed project and give the fol-
557 lowing information, as applicable, to define the scope of the work to be
FE PU
558 fabricated and erected:

559
560 (a) Information as required by the applicable building code
ED FT
561 (b) Statement of the method of design used: LRFD or ASD

562 (c) The section, size, material grade, and location of all members
AT A
563 (d) All geometry and work points necessary for layout
564 (e) Column base, floor, and roof elevation
D DR
565 (f) Column centers and offsets

566 (g) Identification of the lateral force-resisting system and connecting di-
567 aphragm elements that provide for lateral strength and stability in the
568 completed structure
569 (h) Design provisions for initial imperfections, if different than specified
570 in Chapter C for stability design
571 (i) Fabrication and erection tolerances not included in or different from
572 the Code of Standard Practice
573 (j) Any special erection conditions or other considerations that are re-
574 quired by the design concept, such as identification of a condition
575 when the structural steel frame in the fully erected and fully con-
576 nected state requires interaction with nonstructural steel elements for
577 strength or stability, the use of shores, jacks, or loads that must be
578 adjusted as erection progresses to set or maintain camber, position
579 within specified tolerances, or prestress
580 (k) Preset elevation requirements, if any, at free ends of cantilevered
581 members relative to their fixed-end elevations
582 (l) Column differential shortening information, including performance
583 requirements for monitoring and adjusting for column differential
584 shortening

A-13
585 (m) Requirements for all connections and member reinforcement

586 (n) Joining requirements between elements of built-up members
587 (o) Camber requirements for members, including magnitude, direction,
588 and location
589 (p) Requirements for material grade, size, capacity, and detailing of steel
590 headed stud anchors as specified in Chapter I
591 (q) Anticipated deflections and the associated loading conditions for ma-
592 jor structural elements (such as transfer girders and trusses) that sup-
593 port columns and hangers
594 (r) Requirements for openings in structural steel members for other
595 trades
596 (s) Shop painting and surface preparation requirements as required for
597 the design of bolted connections
598 (t) Requirements for approval documents in addition to what is specified
599 in the Code of Standard Practice Section 4.
600 (u) Charpy V-Notch toughness (CVN) requirements for rolled heavy
601 shapes or built-up heavy shapes, if different than what is required in
602 Section A3
603
5, EW
(v) Identification of members and joints subjected to fatigue
21
604 (w) Identification of members and joints requiring nondestructive testing
605 in addition to what is required in Chapter N
Y VI
606
20
(x) Additional project requirements, as deemed appropriate by the engi-
607 neer of record, that impact the life safety of the structure
AR E
608
U IC R
609 User Note: According to the Code of Standard Practice Section 3, it is

610 permitted in the structural design documents and specifications to refer to
611 architectural and mechanical/electrical/plumbing design documents for
BR BL
612 some information as required in this section.

613
FE PU
614 When structural steel connection design is delegated, the design docu-
615 ments and specifications shall include:
616
ED FT
617 (a) Design requirements for the delegated design

618 (b) Requirements for substantiating connection information
AT A
619
D DR
620 User Note: For projects that require consideration of seismic provisions,
621 additional requirements for information to be shown on the structural de-
622 sign documents and specifications are contained in Section A4 of the
623 AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. For safety-related
624 steel structures for nuclear facilities, additional requirements for infor-
625 mation to be shown are contained in ANSI/AISC N690 Section NA4.
626
627 User Note: The intent of the information required to be shown on design
628 documents issued for construction as identified in Section A4 is to ensure
629 that these items are documented and addressed by the Engineer of Record
630 prior to construction. Some information may be contained in deferred sub-
631 mittals prepared by a Specialty Structural Engineer and approved by the
632 Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge. Additional infor-
633 mation regarding design documents and submittals pertaining to metal
634 buildings and steel joists can be found in the Common Industry Practices
635 published by the Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA) and
636 the Code of Standard Practice published by the Steel Joist Institute (SJI),
637 respectively. Steel (open-web) joists and steel joist girders are not struc-
638 tural steel per the AISC Code of Standard Practice Section 2.2 and there-
639 fore fall outside the scope of this Specification.
640

A-14
641 2. Issuing Design Documents and Specifications

642
643 When design documents and specifications are issued for any purpose on
644 a project, Tthe issuing entity shall obtain authorization from the engineer
645 of record prior to each issuance of the structural design documents and
646 specifications. When authorized, the documents that are released shall be
647 clearly identified with the authorized purpose and shall include the date of
648 release.
649
650 A5. APPROVALS
651
652 The engineer of record or registered design professional in responsible charge,
653 as applicable, shall require submission of approval documents and shall review
654 and approve, reject, or provide review comments on the approval documents.
655
656 User Note: Submittal documents prepared by a specialty structural engineer
657 for metal buildings and for steel joists and joist girders is commonly accepted
658 practice, provided it is approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
659
5, EW
21
660 When structural steel connection design is delegated to a licensed engineer
661 working with the fabricator, the engineer of record shall require submission of
Y VI
662
20
the substantiating connection information and shall review the information
663 submitted for compliance with the information requested. The review shall
AR E
664 confirm the following:

U IC R
665
666 (a) The substantiating connection information has been prepared by a li-
667 censed engineer
BR BL
668 (b) The substantiating connection information conforms to the design docu-
669 ments and specifications
670 (c) The connection design work conforms to the design intent of the engineer
FE PU
671 of record on the overall project

672
ED FT
673 User Note: Communication requirements among the parties involved in the
674 approval process are discussed in the AISC Code of Standard Practice Section
675 4. The Commentary to Section 4.1 recommends that a pre-detailing conference
AT A
676 be held to facilitate good communication among the parties regarding the en-
D DR
677 gineer’s design intent, requests for information (RFI), and the approval docu-
678 ments required for a project.

B-1
1 CHAPTER B
2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
3
4 This chapter addresses general requirements for the design of steel structures appli-
5 cable to all chapters and appendices of this Specification.
6
8
9 B1. General Provisions
10 B2. Loads and Load Combinations
11 B3. Design Basis
12 B4. Member Properties
13 B5. Fabrication and Erection
14 B6. Quality Control and Quality Assurance
15 B7. 5, EW
Evaluation of Existing Structures
21
16 B8. Dimensional Tolerances
17
Y VI
18 B1.
20
GENERAL PROVISIONS
AR E
19 The design of members and connections shall be consistent with the intended
U IC R
20 behavior of the structural system and the assumptions made in the structural
21 analysis.
22 B2. LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS
BR BL
23 The loads, nominal loads, and load combinations shall be those stipulated by
24 the applicable building code. In the absence of a building code, the loads, nom-
FE PU
25 inal loads, and load combinations shall be those stipulated in Minimum Design
26 Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE/SEI
27 7).
ED FT
28 User Note: When using ASCE/SEI 7 for design according to Section B3.1
29 (LRFD), the load combinations in ASCE/SEI 7 Section 2.3 apply. For design,
30 according to Section B3.2 (ASD), the load combinations in ASCE/SEI 7 Sec-
AT A
31 tion 2.4 apply.

D DR
32
33 B3. DESIGN BASIS
34 Design shall be such that no applicable strength or serviceability limit state
35 shall be exceeded when the structure is subjected to all applicable load combi-
36 nations.
37
38 Design for strength shall be performed according to the provisions for load and
39 resistance factor design (LRFD) or to the provisions for allowable strength de-
40 sign (ASD).
41
42 User Note: The term “design,” as used in this Specification, is defined in the
43 Glossary.
44 1. Design for Strength Using Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)
45
46 Design according to the provisions for load and resistance factor design
47 (LRFD) satisfies the requirements of this Specification when the design
48 strength of each structural component equals or exceeds the required strength

B-2
49 determined on the basis of the LRFD load combinations. All provisions of this
50 Specification, except for those in Section B3.2, shall apply.
51 Design shall be performed in accordance with Equation B3-1:
52 Ru ≤ φRn (B3-1)
53 where
54 Ru = required strength using LRFD load combinations
55 Rn = nominal strength
56 φ = resistance factor
57 φRn = design strength
58
59 The nominal strength, Rn, and the resistance factor, φ, for the applicable limit
60 states are specified in Chapters D through K.
61
62 2. Design for Strength Using Allowable Strength Design (ASD)
63
5, EW
21
64 Design according to the provisions for allowable strength design (ASD) satis-
65 fies the requirements of this Specification when the allowable strength of each
Y VI
66
67
20
structural component equals or exceeds the required strength determined on
the basis of the ASD load combinations. All provisions of this Specification,
AR E
68 except those of Section B3.1, shall apply.

U IC R
69 Design shall be performed in accordance with Equation B3-2:

Rn
70 Ra ≤ (B3-2)
Ω
BR BL
71 where
FE PU
72 Ra = required strength using ASD load combinations

73 Rn = nominal strength
74 Ω = safety factor
75 Rn Ω = allowable strength
ED FT
76
77 The nominal strength, Rn, and the safety factor, Ω, for the applicable limit
AT A

D DR
79
80 3. Required Strength
81
82 The required strength of structural members and connections shall be deter-
83 mined by structural analysis for the applicable load combinations, as stipulated
84 in Section B2.
85 Design by elastic or inelastic analysis is permitted. Requirements for analysis
86 are stipulated in Chapter C and Appendix 1.
87
88 4. Design of Connections and Supports
89
90 Connection elements shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of
91 Chapters J and K. The forces and deformations used in design of the connec-
92 tions shall be consistent with the intended performance of the connection and
93 the assumptions used in the design of the structure. Self-limiting inelastic de-
94 formations of the connections are permitted.

B-3
95 At points of support, beams, girders, and trusses shall be restrained against

96 rotation about their longitudinal axis unless it can be shown by analysis that
97 the restraint is not required.
98 User Note: Code of Standard Practice Section 3.1.2 addresses communication
99 of necessary information for the design of connections.
100 4a. Simple Connections
101 A simple connection transmits a negligible moment. In the analysis of the
102 structure, simple connections may be assumed to allow unrestrained relative
103 rotation between the framing elements being connected. A simple connection
104 shall have sufficient rotation capacity to accommodate the required rotation
105 determined by the analysis of the structure.
106 4b. Moment Connections
107 Two types of moment connections, fully restrained and partially restrained, are
108 permitted, as specified below.
109 5, EW
(a) Fully Restrained (FR) Moment Connections
21
110 A fully restrained (FR) moment connection transfers moment with a neg-
Y VI
111 ligible rotation between the connected members. In the analysis of the
20
112 structure, the connection may be assumed to allow no relative rotation.
AR E
113 An FR connection shall have sufficient strength and stiffness to maintain

114 the initial angle between the connected members at the strength limit
U IC R
115 states.
116 (b) Partially Restrained (PR) Moment Connections
117 Partially restrained (PR) moment connections transfer moments, but the
BR BL
118 relative rotation between connected members is not negligible. In the

119 analysis of the structure, the moment-rotation response characteristics of
FE PU
120 any PR connection shall be included. The response characteristics of the

121 PR connection shall be based on the technical literature or established by
122 analytical or experimental means. The component elements of a PR con-
ED FT
123 nection shall have sufficient strength, stiffness, and deformation capacity
124 such that the moment-rotation response can be realized up to and includ-
125 ing the required strength of the connection.
AT A
D DR
126
127 5. Design of Diaphragms and Collectors
128
129 Diaphragms and collectors shall be designed for forces that result from loads,
130 as stipulated in Section B2. They shall be designed in conformance with the
131 provisions of Chapters C through K, as applicable.
132
133 6. Design of Anchorages to Concrete
134
135 Anchorage between steel and concrete acting compositely shall be designed in
136 accordance with Chapter I. The design of column bases, and anchor rods shall
137 be in accordance with Chapter J.
138
139 7. Design for Stability
140
141 The structure and its elements shall be designed for stability in accordance with
142 Chapter C.
143

B-4
144 8. Design for Serviceability

145
146 The overall structure and the individual members and connections shall be
147 evaluated for serviceability limit states in accordance with Chapter L.
148
149 9. Design for Structural Integrity
150
151 When design for structural integrity is required by the applicable building
152 code, the requirements in this section shall be met.
153
154 (a) Column splices shall have a nominal tensile strength equal to or greater
155 than D + L for the area tributary to the column between the splice and the
156 splice or base immediately below,
157 where
158 D = nominal dead load, kips (N)
159 L = nominal live load, kips (N)
160 5, EW
21
161 (b) Beam and girder end connections shall have a minimum nominal axial
162 tensile strength equal to (i) two-thirds of the required vertical shear
Y VI
163
20
strength for design according to Section B3.1 (LRFD) or (ii) the required
AR E
164 vertical shear strength for design according to Section B3.2 (ASD), but
U IC R
165 not less than 10 kips in either case.

166
167 (c) End connections of members bracing columns shall have a nominal tensile
168 strength equal to or greater than (i) 1% of two-thirds of the required col-
BR BL
169 umn axial strength at that level for design according to Section B3.1
170 (LRFD) or (ii) 1% of the required column axial strength at that level for
FE PU
171 design according to Section B3.2 (ASD).

172
173 The strength requirements for structural integrity in this section shall be eval-
ED FT
174 uated independently of other strength requirements. For the purpose of satis-
175 fying these requirements, bearing bolts in connections with short-slotted holes
AT A
176 parallel to the direction of the tension force and inelastic deformation of the
D DR
177 connection are permitted.
178 10. Design for Ponding

179
180 The roof system shall be investigated through structural analysis to ensure sta-
181 bility and strength under ponding conditions unless the roof surface is config-
182 ured to prevent the accumulation of water.
183 Ponding stability and strength analysis shall consider the effect of the deflec-
184 tions of the roof’s structural framing under all applicable loads (including dead
185 loads) present at the onset of ponding and the subsequent accumulation of
186 rainwater and snowmelt.
187 The nominal strength and resistance or safety factors for the applicable limit
189 11. Design for Fatigue
190
191 For mMembers and their connections, subjected to fatigue,repeated loading,
192 fatigue shall be considered in accordance with Appendix 3. Fatigue, as defined

B-5
193 in Appendix 3, need not be considered for seismic effects or for the effects of
194 wind loading on typical building lateral force-resisting systems and building
195 enclosure components.
196
197 12. Design for Fire Conditions
198
199 Design for fire conditions shall satisfy the requirements stipulated in Appendix
200 4.
201
202 Two methods of design for fire conditions are provided in Appendix 4: (a) by
203 analysis and (b) by qualification testing. Compliance with the fire-protection
204 requirements in the applicable building code shall be deemed to satisfy the
205 requirements of Appendix 4.
206
207 This section is not intended to create or imply a contractual requirement for
208 the engineer of record responsible for the structural design or any other mem-
209 ber of the design team.
210 5, EW
User Note: Design by qualification testing is the prescriptive method specified
21
211 in most building codes. Traditionally, on most projects where the architect is
212 the prime professional, the architect has been the responsible party to specify
Y VI
213
20
and coordinate fire protection requirements. Design by analysis is a newer
AR E
214 engineering approach to fire-protection. Designation of the person(s) respon-

215 sible for designing for fire conditions is a contractual matter to be addressed
U IC R
216 on each project. This section is not intended to create or imply a contractual
217 requirement for the engineer of record responsible for the structural design or
218 any other member of the design team.
BR BL
219
220 13. Design for Corrosion Effects
FE PU
221 Where corrosion could impair the strength or serviceability of a structure,

222 structural components shall be designed to tolerate corrosion or shall be pro-
223 tected against corrosion.
ED FT
224 B4. MEMBER PROPERTIES

AT A
225
D DR
226 1. Classification of Sections for Local Buckling

227
228 For members subject to axial compression, sections are classified as nonslen-
229 der-element or slender-element sections. For a nonslender-element section, the
230 width-to-thickness ratios of its compression elements shall not exceed λr from
231 Table B4.1a. If the width-to-thickness ratio of any compression element ex-
232 ceeds λr, the section is a slender-element section.
233
234 For members subject to flexure, sections are classified as compact, noncompact
235 or slender-element sections. For all sections addressed in Table B4.1b, flanges
236 must be continuously connected to the web or webs. For a section to qualify
237 as compact, the width-to-thickness ratios of its compression elements shall not
238 exceed the limiting width-to-thickness ratios, λp, from Table B4.1b. If the
239 width-to-thickness ratio of one or more compression elements exceeds λp, but
240 does not exceed λr from Table B4.1b, the section is noncompact. If the width-
241 to-thickness ratio of any compression element exceeds λr, the section is a slen-
242 der-element section.
243

B-6
244 For cases where the web and flange are not continuously attached, considera-
245 tion of element slenderness must account for the unattached length of the ele-
246 ments and the appropriate plate buckling boundary conditions.
247
248 User Note: The Commentary discusses element slenderness when web and
249 flange are not continuously attached.
250
251 1a. Unstiffened Elements
252
253 For unstiffened elements supported along only one edge parallel to the direc-
254 tion of the compression force, the width shall be taken as follows:
255
256 (a) For flanges of I-shaped members and tees, the width, b, is one-half the
257 full-flange width, bf.
258
259 (b) For legs of angles and flanges of channels and zees, the width, b, is the
260 full leg or flange width.
261 5, EW
21
262 (c) For plates, the width, b, is the distance from the free edge to the first row
263 of fasteners or line of welds.
Y VI
264 20
265 (d) For stems of tees, d is the full depth of the section.
AR E
266
U IC R
267 User Note: Refer to Table B4.1 for the graphic representation of unstiffened
268 element dimensions.
269
270 1b. Stiffened Elements
BR BL
271
272 For stiffened elements supported along two edges parallel to the direction of
273 the compression force, the width shall be taken as follows:
FE PU
274
275 (a) For webs of rolled sections, h is the clear distance between flanges less
276 the fillet at each flange; hc is twice the distance from the centroid to the
ED FT
277 inside face of the compression flange less the fillet or corner radius.
278
AT A
279 (b) For webs of built-up sections, h is the distance between adjacent lines of
280 fasteners or the clear distance between flanges when welds are used, and
D DR
281 hc is twice the distance from the centroid to the nearest line of fasteners at
282 the compression flange or the inside face of the compression flange when
283 welds are used; hp is twice the distance from the plastic neutral axis to the
284 nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the inside face of the
285 compression flange when welds are used.
286
287 (c) For flange plates in built-up sections, the width, b, is the distance between
288 adjacent lines of fasteners or lines of welds.
289
290 (d) For flanges of rectangular hollow structural sections (HSS), the width, b,
291 is the clear distance between webs less the inside corner radius on each
292 side. For webs of rectangular HSS, h is the clear distance between the
293 flanges less the inside corner radius on each side. If the corner radius is
294 not known, b and h shall be taken as the corresponding outside dimension
295 minus three times the thickness. The thickness, t, shall be taken as the
296 design wall thickness, per Section B4.2.
297
298 (e) For flanges or webs of box sections and other stiffened elements, the
299 width, b, is the clear distance between the elements providing stiffening.

B-7
300
301 (f) For perforated cover plates, b is the transverse distance between the near-
302 est line of fasteners, and the net area of the plate is taken at the widest
303 hole.
304
305 (g) For round hollow structural sections (HSS), the width shall be taken as the
306 outside diameter, D, and the thickness, t, shall be taken as the design wall
307 thickness, as defined in Section B4.2.
308
309 User Note: Refer to Table B4.1 for the graphic representation of stiffened ele-
310 ment dimensions.
311
312 For tapered flanges of rolled sections, the thickness is the nominal value half-
313 way between the free edge and the corresponding face of the web.
314
315 2. Design Wall Thickness for HSS
316
317 5, EW
The design wall thickness, t, shall be used in calculations involving the wall
21
318 thickness of hollow structural sections (HSS). The design wall thickness, t,
319 shall be taken equal to the nominal thickness for box sections and HSS pro-
Y VI
320
20
duced according to ASTM A1065/A1065M or ASTM A1085/A1085M. For
AR E
321 HSS produced according to other standards approved for use under this Spec-
322 ification, the design wall thickness, t, shall be taken equal to 0.93 times the
U IC R
323 nominal wall thickness.

324 User Note: A pipe can be designed using the provisions of this Specification
325 for round HSS sections as long as the pipe conforms to ASTM A53/A53M
BR BL
326 Grade B and the appropriate limitations of this Specification are used.
327
FE PU
328
ED FT
AT A
D DR

B-8
329
TABLE B4.1a
Width-to-Thickness Ratios: Compression Elements
Members Subject to Axial Compression
Limiting
Case
Width-to- Width-to-Thickness
Description of Thickness Ratio λr (nonslender/
Element Ratio slender) Examples
1 Flanges of rolled
I-shaped sec-
tions, plates pro-
jecting from
rolled I-shaped
sections, out- E
0.56
standing legs of b/t Fy
pairs of angles
connected with
5, EW continuous con-
tact, flanges of
21
channels, and
Unstiffened Elements
flanges of tees
Y VI
20 2 Flanges of built-
up I-shaped sec-
[a]
AR E
tions and plates

or angle legs b/t kc E
U IC R
projecting from 0.64

Fy
built-up I-shaped
sections
3 Legs of single
BR BL
angles, legs of
double angles E
with separators, b/t 0.45
Fy
FE PU
and all other un-

stiffened ele-
ments
4 Stems of tees E
ED FT
d/t 0.75
Fy
AT A
5 Webs of doubly
symmetric rolled E
D DR
and built-up I- h/tw 1.49

shaped sections Fy
and channels
6 Walls of rectan- E
gular HSS b/t 1.40
Fy
Stiffened Elements
7 Flange cover
plates plates be-
tween lines of E
b/t 1.40
fasteners or Fy
welds
8 All other stiffened E

elements b/t 1.49
Fy
9 Round HSS
E
D/t 0.11
Fy
[a]
kc = 4 h tw , but shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation purposes.
330

B-9
TABLE B4.1b
Members Subject to Flexure
Limiting
Width- Width-to-Thickness Ratio
to-Thick- λp λr
Case
Description of ness Ra- (compact/ (noncompact/

Element tio noncompact) slender) Examples
10 Flanges of rolled
I-shaped sec-
E E
tions, channels, b/t 0.38 1.0
and tees Fy Fy
11 Flanges of dou-
bly and singly [a] [b]
symmetric I- kc E
shaped built-up b/t 0.95
sections E FL
0.38
5, EW Fy
21
12 Legs of single
angles E E
Y VI
20 b/t 0.54
Fy
0.91
Fy
AR E
13 Flanges of all I-
U IC R
shaped sections
and channels in E E
flexure about the b/t 0.38 1.0
Fy Fy
minor axis
BR BL
14 Stems of tees
E E
d/t 0.84 1.52
Fy Fy
FE PU
331
332
ED FT
AT A
D DR

B-10
TABLE B4.1b
Members Subject to Flexure
Limiting
Width-to-Thickness Ratio
Width-
to-Thick- λp λr
Case
Description ness Ra- (compact/ (noncompact/

of Element tio noncompact) slender) Examples
15 Webs of dou-
bly symmetric E E
I-shaped sec- h/tw 3.76 5.70
tions and Fy Fy
channels
16 Webs of sin- [c]
gly symmetric
I-shaped sec- hc E
5, EW tions
hc/tw
hp Fy
5.70
E
21
2
 Mp  Fy
 0.54 − 0.09 
 M y 
Y VI
20 ≤ λr
AR E
17 Flanges of
rectangular E E
U IC R
HSS b/t 1.12 1.40

Fy Fy
18 Flange cover
plates be-
BR BL
tween lines of E E
fasteners or b/t 1.12 1.40
Fy Fy
welds
FE PU
19 Webs of rec-
tangular HSS E E
and box sec- h/t 2.42 5.70
Fy Fy
ED FT
tions
20 Round HSS
E E
AT A
D/t 0.07 0.31

Fy Fy
D DR
21 Flanges of
box sections E E
b/t 1.12 1.49
Fy Fy
4
[a] kc = but shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation purposes.
h tw
[b] FL = 0.7Fy for slender web I-shaped members and major-axis bending of compact and noncompact web built-up I-shaped
members with Sxt Sxc ≥ 0.7 ; and FL = Fy Sx t Sxc ≥ 0.5Fy for major-axis bending of compact and noncompact web built-
up I-shaped members with Sxc Sxt < 0.7 Sxt Sxc < 0.7 , where Sxc ,Sxt = elastic section modulusField Code
referred Changed
to compres-
sion and tension flanges, respectively, in.3 (mm3).
[c]
M y is the moment at yielding of the extreme fiber. Mp = FyZx, plastic moment, kip-in. (N-mm), where Zx = plastic section
modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3)
E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa) ENA = elastic neutral axis
Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi (MPa) PNA = plastic neutral axis
333
334

B-11
335 3. Gross and Net Area Determination

336
337 3a. Gross Area
338
339 The gross area, Ag, of a member is the total cross-sectional area.
340
341 3b. Net Area
342
343 The net area, An, of a member is the sum of the products of the thickness and
344 the net width of each element computed as follows:
345
346 In computing net area for tension and shear, the width of a bolt hole shall be
347 taken as 1/16 in. (2 mm) greater than the nominal dimension of the hole.
348
349 For a chain of bolt holes extending across a part in any diagonal or zigzag line,
350 the net width of the part shall be obtained by deducting from the gross width
351 the sum of the diameters or slot dimensions as provided in this section, of all
352 5, EW
holes in the chain, and adding, for each gage space in the chain, the quantity
21
353 s 2 4g ,
354
Y VI
355 where
20
356 g = transverse center-to-center spacing (gage) between fastener gage
AR E
357 lines, in. (mm)

U IC R
358 s = longitudinal center-to-center spacing (pitch) of any two consecutive

359 bolt holes, in. (mm)
360
361 For angles, the gage for bolt holes in opposite adjacent legs shall be the sum
BR BL
362 of the gages from the back of the angles less the thickness.
363
FE PU
364 For slotted HSS welded to a gusset plate, the net area, An, is the gross area
365 minus the product of the thickness and the total width of material that is re-
366 moved to form the slot.
367
ED FT
368 In determining the net area across plug or slot welds, the weld metal shall not
369 be considered as adding to the net area.
AT A
370
D DR
371 For members without holes, the net area, An, is equal to the gross area, Ag.
372
373 B5. FABRICATION AND ERECTION
374
375 Fabrication documents, Ffabrication, shop painting, and erection shall satisfy
376 the requirements stipulated in Chapter M.
377
378 User Note: Refer to Code of Standard Practice, Section 4 addresses require-
379 ments for fabrication and erection documents and. Code of Standard Practice
380 Section Section 4.4 addresses the approval process for fabrication approval
381 documents.
382
383 B6. QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
384
385 Quality control and quality assurance activities shall satisfy the requirements
386 stipulated in Chapter N.
387
388

B-12
389 B7. EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

390
391 The evaluation of existing structures shall satisfy the requirements stipulated
392 in Appendix 5.
393
394 B8. DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES
395
396 The provisions in this Specification are based on the assumption that dimen-
397 sional tolerances provided in the Code of Standard Practice, and in the ASTM
398 specifications standards approved for use under provided in Section A3.1a, are
399 satisfied. Where larger tolerances are permitted, the effects of such tolerances
400 these tolerances are not satisfied, the effect of the out-of-tolerance shall be
401 considered.
402
403
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

C-1
1 CHAPTER C
2 DESIGN FOR STABILITY

3
4 This chapter addresses requirements for the design of structures for stability. The
5 direct analysis method is presented herein.
6
8
9 C1. General Stability Requirements
10 C2. Calculation of Required Strengths
11 C3. Calculation of Available Strengths
12
13 User Note: Alternative methods for the design of structures for stability are provided
14 in Appendices 1 and 7. Appendix 1 provides alternatives that allow consideration of
15 5, EW
member imperfections and/or inelasticity directly within the analysis and provides for
21
16 a more detailed evaluation of the limit states. Appendix 7 provides the effective length
17 method and a first-order elastic method.
Y VI
18
20
19 C1. GENERAL STABILITY REQUIREMENTS
AR E
20
U IC R
21 Stability shall be provided for the structure as a whole and for each of its ele-
22 ments. The effects of all of the following on the stability of the structure and
23 its elements shall be considered: (a) flexural, shear and axial member defor-
BR BL
24 mations, and all other component and connection deformations that contribute
25 to the displacements of the structure; (b) second-order effects (including P-∆
FE PU
26 and P-δ effects); (c) geometric imperfections; (d) stiffness reductions due to
27 inelasticity, including the effect of partial yielding of the cross section which
28 may be accentuated by the presence of residual stresses; and (e) uncertainty in
ED FT
29 system, member, and connection strength and stiffness. All load-dependent

30 effects shall be calculated at a level of loading corresponding to LRFD load
AT A
31 combinations or 1.6 times ASD load combinations.

32
D DR
33 Any rational method of design for stability that considers all of the listed ef-
34 fects is permitted; this includes the methods identified in Sections C1.1 and
35 C1.2.
36
37 User Note: See Commentary Section C1 and Table C-C1.1 for an explanation
38 of how requirements (a) through (e) of Section C1 are satisfied in the methods
39 of design listed in Sections C1.1 and C1.2.
40
41 1. Direct Analysis Method of Design
42
43 The direct analysis method of design is permitted for all structures, and can be
44 based on either elastic or inelastic analysis. For design by elastic analysis,
45 required strengths shall be calculated in accordance with Section C2 and the
46 calculation of available strengths in accordance with Section C3. For design
47 by advanced analysis, the provisions of Section 1.1 and Sections 1.2 or 1.3 of
48 Appendix 1 shall be satisfied.
49

C-2
50 2. Alternative Methods of Design

51
52 The effective length method and the first-order analysis method, both defined
53 in Appendix 7, are based on elastic analysis and are permitted as alternatives
54 to the direct analysis method for structures that satisfy the limitations specified
55 in that appendix.
56
57 C2. CALCULATION OF REQUIRED STRENGTHS
58
59 For the direct analysis method of design, the required strengths of components
60 of the structure shall be determined from an elastic analysis conforming to
61 Section C2.1. The analysis shall include consideration of initial imperfections
62 in accordance with Section C2.2 and adjustments to stiffness in accordance
63 with Section C2.3.
64
65 1. General Analysis Requirements
66
67 The analysis of the structure shall conform to the following requirements:
68
5, EW
21
69 (a) The analysis shall consider flexural, shear, and axial member defor-
70 mations, and all other component and connection deformations that
Y VI
71
20
contribute to displacements of the structure. The analysis shall incor-
72 porate reductions in all stiffnesses that are considered to contribute to
AR E
73 the stability of the structure, as specified in Section C2.3.

U IC R
74
75 (b) The analysis shall be a second-order analysis that considers both P-Δ
76 and P-δ effects, except that it is permissible to neglect the effect of P-δ
77 on the response of the structure when the following conditions are sat-
BR BL
78 isfied: (1) the structure supports gravity loads primarily through nomi-
79 nally vertical columns, walls or frames; (2) the ratio of maximum sec-
FE PU
80 ond-order drift to maximum first-order drift (both determined for LRFD

81 load combinations or 1.6 times ASD load combinations, with stiffnesses
82 adjusted as specified in Section C2.3) in all stories is equal to or less
ED FT
83 than 1.7; and (3) no more than one-third of the total gravity load on the
84 structure is supported by columns that are part of moment-resisting
AT A
85 frames in the direction of translation being considered. It is necessary

D DR
86 in all cases to consider P-δ effects in the evaluation of individual mem-

87 bers subject to compression and flexure.
88
89 User Note: A P-Δ-only second-order analysis (one that neglects the
90 effects of P-δ on the response of the structure) is permitted under the
91 conditions listed. In this case, the requirement for considering P-δ ef-
92 fects in the evaluation of individual members can be satisfied by apply-
93 ing the B1 multiplier defined in Appendix 8, Section 8.1.2, to the re-
94 quired flexural strength of the member.
95
96 Use of the approximate method of second-order analysis provided in
97 Appendix 8, Section 8.1, is permitted.
98
99 (c) The analysis shall consider all gravity and other applied loads that may
100 influence the stability of the structure.
101
102 User Note: It is important to include in the analysis all gravity loads,
103 including loads on leaning columns and other elements that are not part
104 of the lateral force-resisting system.
105

C-3
106 (d) For design by LRFD, the second-order analysis shall be carried out un-
107 der LRFD load combinations. For design by ASD, the second-order
108 analysis shall be carried out under 1.6 times the ASD load combina-
109 tions, and the results shall be divided by 1.6 to obtain the required
110 strengths of components.
111
112 2. Consideration of Initial System Imperfections
113
114 The effect of initial imperfections in the position of points of intersection of
115 members on the stability of the structure shall be taken into account either by
116 direct modeling of these imperfections in the analysis as specified in Section
117 C2.2a or by the application of notional loads as specified in Section C2.2b.
118
119 User Note: The imperfections required to be considered in this section are
120 imperfections in the locations of points of intersection of members (system
121 imperfections). In typical building structures, the important imperfection of
122 this type is the out-of-plumbness of columns. Consideration of initial out-of-
123 straightness of individual members (member imperfections) is not required in
124
5, EW
the structural analysis when using the provisions of this section; it is accounted
21
125 for in the compression member design provisions of Chapter E and need not
126 be considered explicitly in the analysis as long as it is within the limits speci-
Y VI
127
20
fied in the Code of Standard Practice. Appendix 1, Section 1.2, provides an
128 extension to the direct analysis method that includes modeling of member im-
AR E
129 perfections (initial out-of-straightness) within the structural analysis.

U IC R
130
131 2a. Direct Modeling of Imperfections
132
BR BL
133 In all cases, it is permissible to account for the effect of initial system imper-
134 fections by including the imperfections directly in the analysis. The structure
135 shall be analyzed with points of intersection of members displaced from their
FE PU
136 nominal locations. The magnitude of the initial displacements shall be the
137 maximum amount considered in the design; the pattern of initial displacements
ED FT
138 shall be such that it provides the greatest destabilizing effect.

139
140 User Note: Initial displacements similar in configuration to both displace-
AT A
141 ments due to loading and anticipated buckling modes should be considered in
D DR
142 the modeling of imperfections. The magnitude of the initial displacements

143 should be based on permissible construction tolerances, as specified in the
144 Code of Standard Practice or other governing requirements, or on actual im-
145 perfections if known.
146
147 In the analysis of structures that support gravity loads primarily through nom-
148 inally vertical columns, walls or frames, where the ratio of maximum second-
149 order story drift to maximum first-order story drift (both determined for LRFD
150 load combinations or 1.6 times ASD load combinations, with stiffnesses ad-
151 justed as specified in Section C2.3) in all stories is equal to or less than 1.7, it
152 is permissible to include initial system imperfections in the analysis for grav-
153 ity-only load combinations and not in the analysis for load combinations that
154 include applied lateral loads.
155
156 2b. Use of Notional Loads to Represent Imperfections
157
158 For structures that support gravity loads primarily through nominally vertical
159 columns, walls, or frames, it is permissible to use notional loads to represent
160 the effects of initial system imperfections in the position of points of intersec-
161 tion of members in accordance with the requirements of this section. The

C-4
162 notional load shall be applied to a model of the structure based on its nominal
163 geometry.
164
165 User Note: In general, the notional load concept is applicable to all types of
166 structures and to imperfections in the positions of both points of intersection
167 of members and points along members, but the specific requirements in Sec-
168 tions C2.2b(a) through C2.2b(d) are applicable only for the particular class of
169 structure and type of system imperfection identified here.
170
171 (a) Notional loads shall be applied as lateral loads at all levels. The no-
172 tional loads shall be additive to other lateral loads and shall be applied
173 in all load combinations, except as indicated in Section C2.2b(d). The
174 magnitude of the notional loads shall be:
175
176 Ni = 0.002αYi (C2-1)
177
178 where
179 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
180 5, EW
Ni = notional load applied at level i, kips (N)
21
181 Yi = gravity load applied at level i from the LRFD load combination
182 or ASD load combination, as applicable, kips (N)
Y VI
183
20
184 User Note: The use of notional loads can lead to additional (generally
AR E
185 small) fictitious base shears in the structure. The correct horizontal re-
U IC R
186 actions at the foundation may be obtained by applying an additional

187 horizontal force at the base of the structure, equal and opposite in direc-
188 tion to the sum of all notional loads, distributed among vertical load-
BR BL
189 carrying elements in the same proportion as the gravity load supported
190 by those elements. The notional loads can also lead to additional over-
FE PU
191 turning effects, which are not fictitious.

192
193 (b) The notional load at any level, Ni, shall be distributed over that level in
ED FT
194 the same manner as the gravity load at the level. The notional loads
195 shall be applied in the direction that provides the greatest destabilizing
196
AT A
effect.
197
D DR
198 User Note: For most building structures, the requirement regarding no-
199 tional load direction may be satisfied as follows: for load combinations
200 that do not include lateral loading, consider two alternative orthogonal
201 directions of notional load application, in a positive and a negative sense
202 in each of the two directions, in the same direction at all levels; for load
203 combinations that include lateral loading, apply all notional loads in the
204 direction of the resultant of all lateral loads in the combination.
205
206 (c) The notional load coefficient of 0.002 in Equation C2-1 is based on a
207 nominal initial story out-of-plumbness ratio of 1/500; where the use of
208 a different maximum out-of-plumbness is justified, it is permissible to
209 adjust the notional load coefficient proportionally.
210
211 User Note: An out-of-plumbness of 1/500 represents the maximum
212 tolerance on column plumbness specified in the Code of Standard Prac-
213 tice. In some cases, other specified tolerances, such as those on plan
214 location of columns, will govern and will require a tighter plumbness
215 tolerance.
216

C-5
217 (d) For structures in which the ratio of maximum second-order drift to max-
218 imum first-order drift (both determined for LRFD load combinations or
219 1.6 times ASD load combinations, with stiffnesses adjusted as specified
220 in Section C2.3) in all stories is equal to or less than 1.7, it is permissible
221 to apply the notional load, Ni, only in gravity-only load combinations
222 and not in combinations that include other lateral loads.
223
224 3. Adjustments to Stiffness
225
226 The analysis of the structure to determine the required strengths of components
227 shall use reduced stiffnesses, as follows:
228
229 (a) A factor of 0.80 shall be applied to all stiffnesses that are considered to
230 contribute to the stability of the structure. It is permissible to apply this
231 reduction factor to all stiffnesses in the structure.
232
233 User Note: Applying the stiffness reduction to some members and not
234 others can, in some cases, result in artificial distortion of the structure
235
5, EW
under load and possible unintended redistribution of forces. This can
21
236 be avoided by applying the reduction to all members, including those
237 that do not contribute to the stability of the structure.
Y VI
238
20
239 (b) An additional factor, the stiffness reduction parameter, τb, shall be ap-
AR E
240 plied to the flexural stiffnesses of all members whose flexural stiff-
U IC R
241 nesses are considered to contribute to the stability of the structure. For
242 noncomposite members, τb shall be defined as follows (see Section I1.5
243 for the definition of τb for composite members):
BR BL
244
245 (1) When αPr/Pns ≤ 0.5
FE PU
246
247 τ b = 1.0 (C2-2a)
248
ED FT
249 (2) When αPr/Pns > 0.5

250
AT A
251 τb = 4 ( αPr Pns ) 1 − ( αPr Pns )  (C2-2b)

D DR
252 where
253 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
254 Pr = required axial compressive strength using LRFD or ASD load
255 combinations, kips (N)
256 Pns = cross-section compressive strength; for nonslender-element
257 sections, Pns = FyAg, and for slender-element sections, Pns =
258 FyAe, where Ae is as defined in Section E7 with Fncr = Fy, kips
259 (N)
260
261 User Note: Taken together, Sections (a) and (b) require the use of 0.8
262 τ b times the nominal elastic flexural stiffness and 0.8 times other nom-
263 inal elastic stiffnesses for structural steel members in the analysis.
264
265 (c) In structures to which Section C2.2b is applicable, in lieu of using τb <
266 1.0, where αPr Pns > 0.5 , it is permissible to use τb = 1.0 for all
267 noncomposite members if a notional load of 0.001 α Yi [where Yi is as
268 defined in Section C2.2b(a)] is applied at all levels, in the direction
269 specified in Section C2.2b(b), in all load combinations. These notional
270 loads shall be added to those, if any, used to account for the effects of

C-6
271 initial imperfections in the position of points of intersection of members

272 and shall not be subject to the provisions of Section C2.2b(d).
273
274 (d) Where components comprised of materials other than structural steel
275 are considered to contribute to the stability of the structure, and the gov-
276 erning codes and specifications for the other materials require greater
277 reductions in stiffness, such greater stiffness reductions shall be applied
278 to those components.
279
280 C3. CALCULATION OF AVAILABLE STRENGTHS
281
282 For the direct analysis method of design, the available strengths of members
283 and connections shall be calculated in accordance with the provisions of Chap-
284 ters D through K, as applicable, with no further consideration of overall struc-
285 ture stability. The effective length for flexural buckling of all members shall
286 be taken as the unbraced length unless a smaller value is justified by rational
287 analysis.
288
289
5, EW
Bracing intended to define the unbraced lengths of members shall have suffi-
21
290 cient stiffness and strength to control member movement at the braced points.
291
Y VI
292
20
User Note: Methods of satisfying this bracing requirement are provided in
293 Appendix 6. The requirements of Appendix 6 are not applicable to bracing
AR E
294 that is included in the design of the lateral force-resisting system of the over-
U IC R
295 all structure.

BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

D-1
1 CHAPTER D
2 DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION

3
4 This chapter applies to members subject to axial tension.
6 D1. Slenderness Limitations
7 D2. Tensile Strength
8 D3. Effective Net Area
9 D4. Built-Up Members
10 D5. Pin-Connected Members
11 D6. Eyebars
12
13 User Note: For cases not included in this chapter, the following sections apply:
14 • B3.11 5, EW
Members subject to fatigue
21
15 • Chapter H Members subject to combined axial tension and flexure
16 • J3 Threaded rods
Y VI
17 • J4.1
20
Connecting elements in tension
18 • J4.3 Block shear rupture strength at end connections of tension members
AR E
19
U IC R
20 D1. SLENDERNESS LIMITATIONS

21
22 There is no maximum slenderness limit for members in tension.
23
BR BL
24 User Note: For members designed on the basis of tension, the slenderness ra-
25 tio, L/r, preferably should not exceed 300, where L is the member length. This
FE PU
26 suggestion does not apply to rods or hangers in tension.

27
28 D2. TENSILE STRENGTH
ED FT
29
30 The design tensile strength, φtPn, and the allowable tensile strength, Pn/Ωt, of
31 tension members shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit states
AT A
32 of tensile yielding in the gross section and tensile rupture in the net section.
D DR
33
34 (a) For tensile yielding in the gross section
35
36 Pn = Fy Ag (D2-1)
37 φt = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)

38
39 (b) For tensile rupture in the net section
40
41
42 Pn = Fu Ae (D2-2)
43
44 φt = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωt = 2.00 (ASD)
45
46 where
47 Ae = effective net area, in.2 (mm2)
48 Ag = gross area of member, in.2 (mm2)
49 Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi (MPa)
50 Fu = specified minimum tensile strength, ksi (MPa)

D-2
51
52 Where connections use plug, slot or fillet welds in holes or slots, the effective
53 net area through the holes shall be used in Equation D2-2.
54
55 D3. EFFECTIVE NET AREA
56
57 The gross area, Ag, and net area, An, of tension members shall be determined in
58 accordance with the provisions of Section B4.3.
59
60 The effective net area of tension members shall be determined as
61
62 Ae = AnU (D3-1)
63
64 where U, the shear lag factor, is determined as shown in Table D3.1.
65
66 For open cross sections such as W, M, S, C, or HP shapes, WTs, STs, and
67 single and double angles, the shear lag factor, U, need not be less than the ratio
68 5, EW
of the gross area of the connected element(s) to the member gross area. This
21
69 provision does not apply to closed sections, such as HSS sections, nor to plates.
70
Y VI
71
20
D4. BUILT-UP MEMBERS
72
AR E
73 For limitations on the longitudinal spacing of connectors between elements in

U IC R
74 continuous contact consisting of a plate and a shape, or two plates, see Section
75 J3.5.
76
77 Lacing, perforated cover plates, or tie plates without lacing are permitted to be
BR BL
78 used on the open sides of built-up tension members. Tie plates shall have a
79 length not less than two-thirds the distance between the lines of welds or fas-
80 teners connecting them to the components of the member. The thickness of
FE PU
81 such tie plates shall not be less than one-fiftieth of the distance between these
82 lines. The longitudinal spacing of intermittent welds or fasteners at tie plates
83 shall not exceed 6 in. (150 mm).
ED FT
84
85 User Note: The longitudinal spacing of connectors between components
AT A
86 should preferably limit the slenderness ratio in any component between the
87 connectors to 300.
D DR
88

D-3
89
TABLE D3.1
Shear Lag Factors for Connections
to Tension Members
Case Description of Element Shear Lag Factor, U Examples
1 All tension members where the tension load
is transmitted directly to each of the cross-
sectional elements by fasteners or welds (ex- U = 1.0 –
cept as in Cases 4, 5 and 6).
2 All tension members, except HSS, where the
tension load is transmitted to some but not all
of the cross-sectional elements by fasteners
or by longitudinal welds in combination with x
transverse welds. Alternatively, Case 7 is per- U = 1−
l
mitted for W, M, S and HP shapes and Case
8 is permitted for angles.
3
5, EW
All tension members where the tension load U = 1.0 and
21
is transmitted only by transverse welds to
some but not all of the cross-sectional ele-
An = area of the directly –
ments. connected elements
Y VI
4[a]
20
Plates, angles, channels with welds at heels,
tees, and W-shapes with connected ele-
AR E
ments, where the tension load is transmitted 3l 2  x

by longitudinal welds only. See Case 2 for U= 1− l 
3l + w 2 
2
U IC R

definition of x .
5 Round and rectangular HSS with single con-

centric gusset through slots in the HSS.
BR BL
R sin θ 1
x= − tp
θ 2
FE PU
θ in rad
−10
  x 3.2 
U = 1 +   
  l  
ED FT
AT A
D DR
2b2 + tH − 2t 2
x =b−
2 H + 4b − 4t
x
U =1−
l

D-4
6 Rectangular HSS with two side gusset plates.
BU B + HU H
U=
H +B
3l 2
UB = 2
3l + B 2
3l 2
UH = 2
3l + H 2
7 W-, M-, S- or HP- with flange con- 2

shapes, or tees cut nected with three or bf ≥ d, U = 0.90
from these shapes. (If more fasteners per
3 –
5, EW
U is calculated per line in the direction 2
bf < d, U = 0.85
21
Case 2, the larger of loading 3
value is permitted to with web connected –
be used.) with four or more
Y VI
20 fasteners per line in
the direction of load-
U = 0.70
AR E
ing
8 Single and double an- with four or more –
U IC R
gles (If U is calculated fasteners per line in U = 0.80

per Case 2, the larger the direction of load-
value is permitted to ing
be used.) with three fasteners U = 0.60 –
per line in the direc-
BR BL
tion of loading (with

fewer than three fas-
teners per line in the
FE PU
direction of loading,
use Case 2)
B = overall width of rectangular HSS member, measured 90° to the plane of the connection, in. (mm); D = outside
diameter of round HSS, in. (mm); H = overall height of rectangular HSS member, measured in the plane of the
ED FT
connection, in. (mm); d = depth of section, in. (mm); for tees, d = depth of the section from which the tee was
cut, in. (mm); l = length of connection, in. (mm); w = width of plate, in. (mm); x = eccentricity of connection, in.
(mm).
AT A
l +l
D DR
[a]
l = 1 2 , where l1 and l2 shall not be less than 4 times the weld size.
2
90
91 D5. PIN-CONNECTED MEMBERS
92
93 1. Tensile Strength
94
95 The design tensile strength, φtPn, and the allowable tensile strength, Pn/Ωt, of
96 pin-connected members, shall be the lower value determined according to the
97 limit states of tensile rupture, shear rupture, bearing and yielding.
98
99 (a) For tensile rupture on the net effective area
100
101 Pn = Fu (2tbe ) (D5-1)
102
103 φt = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωt = 2.00 (ASD)
104
105 (b) For shear rupture on the effective area
106

D-5
107 Pn = 0.6Fu Asf Pn = 0.6Cr Fu Asf (D5-2) Field Code Changed
108
109 φsf = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωsf = 2.00 (ASD)
110
111 where
112 Asf = 2t ( a + d 2 )
113 = area on the shear failure path, in.2 (mm2)
114 Cr = reduction factor for shear rupture on pin-connected members
115 = 1.0 when dh – d ≤ 1/32 in. (1 mm)
116 = 0.95 when 1/32 in. < dh – d ≤ 1/16 in. (1 mm < dh – d ≤ 2 mm)
117 a = shortest distance from edge of the pin hole to the edge of the member
118 measured parallel to the direction of the force, in. (mm)
119 be = 2t + 0.63, in. (= 2t + 16, mm), but not more than the actual distancefrom
120 the edge of the hole to the edge of the part measured in the direction
121 normal to the applied force, in. (mm)
122 d = diameter of pin, in. (mm)
123 5, EW
dh = diameter of hole, in. (mm)
21
124 t = thickness of plate, in. (mm)
125
Y VI
126
20
(c) For bearing on the projected area of the pin, use Section J7.
127 (d) For yielding on the gross section, use Section D2(a).
AR E
128
U IC R
129 2. Dimensional Requirements

130
131 Pin-connected members shall meet the following requirements:
132
BR BL
133 (a) The pin hole shall be located midway between the edges of the member in
134 the direction normal to the applied force.
135 (b)When the pin is expected to provide for relative movement between con-
FE PU
136 nected parts while under full load, the diameter of the pin hole shall not be
137 more than 1/32 in. (1 mm) greater than the diameter of the pin for pins less
138 than 3 in. in diameter and not more than 1/16 in. (2 mm) greater than the
ED FT
139 diameter of the pin for pins of 3 in. (75 mm) in diameter or greater.
140 (c)The width of the plate at the pin hole shall not be less than 2be + d and the
AT A
141 minimum extension, a, beyond the bearing end of the pin hole, parallel to
142 the axis of the member, shall not be less than 1.33be.
D DR
143 (d)The corners beyond the pin hole are permitted to be cut at 45° to the axis of
144 the member, provided the net area beyond the pin hole, on a plane perpen-
145 dicular to the cut, is not less than that required beyond the pin hole parallel
146 to the axis of the member.
147
148 D6. EYEBARS
149
150 1. Tensile Strength
151
152 The available tensile strength of eyebars shall be determined in accordance with
153 Section D2, with Ag taken as the gross area of the eyebar body.
154
155 For calculation purposes, the width of the body of the eyebars shall not exceed
156 eight times its thickness.
157
158 2. Dimensional Requirements
159
160 Eyebars shall meet the following requirements:
161

D-6
162 (a) Eyebars shall be of uniform thickness, without reinforcement at the pin
163 holes, and have circular heads with the periphery concentric with the pin
164 hole.
165
166 (b) The radius of transition between the circular head and the eyebar body shall
167 not be less than the head diameter.
168
169 (c) The pin diameter shall not be less than seven-eighths times the eyebar body
170 width, and the pin-hole diameter shall not be more than 1/32 in. (1 mm)
171 greater than the pin diameter.
172
173 (d) For steels having Fy greater than 70 ksi (485 MPa), the hole diameter shall
174 not exceed five times the plate thickness, and the width of the eyebar body
175 shall be reduced accordingly.
176
177 (e) A thickness of less than 1/2 in. (13 mm) is permissible only if external nuts
178 are provided to tighten pin plates and filler plates into snug contact.
179 5, EW
21
180 (f) The width from the hole edge to the plate edge perpendicular to the direction
181 of applied load shall be greater than two-thirds and, for the purpose of cal-
Y VI
182 20
culation, not more than three-fourths times the eyebar body width.
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

E-1
1 CHAPTER E
2 DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMPRESSION

3
4 This chapter addresses members subject to axial compression.
6
7 E1. General Provisions
8 E2. Effective Length
9 E3. Flexural Buckling of Members without Slender Elements
10 E4. Torsional and Flexural-Torsional Buckling of Single Angles and Members
11 without Slender Elements
12 E5. Single-Angle Compression Members
13 E6. Built-Up Members
14 E7. Members with Slender Elements
15 5, EW
21
17 • H1 – H2 Members subject to combined axial compression and flexure
Y VI
18 • H3
20
Members subject to axial compression and torsion
19 • I2 Composite axially loaded members
AR E
20 • J4.4 Compressive strength of connecting elements

U IC R
21
22 E1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
23
BR BL
24 The design compressive strength, φc Pn , and the allowable compressive strength,

FE PU
25 Pn Ω c , are determined as follows.

26 The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be the lowest value obtained based on
27 the applicable limit states of flexural buckling, torsional buckling, and flexural-
ED FT
28 torsional buckling.
29
AT A
30 φc = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωc = 1.67 (ASD)

D DR
31
32

Public Review Draft February 5, 2021
E-2
33
TABLE USER NOTE E1.1

Selection Table for the Application of
Chapter E Sections
Without Slender With Slender
Elements Elements
Cross Section
Sections in Limit Sections in Limit
Chapter E States Chapter E States
LB
E3 FB
E7 FB
E4 TB
TB
LB
E3 FB
E7 FB
E4 FTB
FTB
5, EW
21
LB
E3 FB E7
FB
Y VI
20
LB
AR E
E3 FB E7
FB
U IC R
LB
E3 FB
E7 FB
E4 FTB
FTB
BR BL
E6 LB
FB E6
E3 FB
FTB E7
FE PU
E4 FTB
ED FT
E5 E5
AT A
D DR
E3 FB N/A N/A
Unsymmetrical shapes other LB

E4 FTB E7
than single angles FTB
FB = flexural buckling, TB = torsional buckling, FTB = flexural-torsional buckling, LB = local
buckling, N/A = not applicable
34

E-3
35 E2. EFFECTIVE LENGTH

36
37 The effective length, Lc, for calculation of member slenderness, Lc r , shall be
38 determined in accordance with Chapter C or Appendix 7,
39
40 where
41 Lc = KL = effective length of member, in. (mm)
42 K = effective length factor
43 L = laterally unbraced length of the member, in. (mm)
44 r = radius of gyration, in. (mm)
45
46 User Note: For members designed on the basis of compression, the effective
47 slenderness ratio, Lc r , preferably should not exceed 200. Furthermore, the
48 slenderness ratio of the member as fabricated—taken as the fabricated length of the
49 member divided by the least radius of gyration of the section—preferably should
50 not exceed 300.
51
52 User Note: The effective length, Lc, may be determined using an effective length
53 5, EW
factor, K, or a buckling analysis.
21
54
Y VI
55 E3. FLEXURAL BUCKLING OF MEMBERS WITHOUT SLENDER
20
56 ELEMENTS
AR E
57
U IC R
58 This section applies to nonslender-element compression members, as defined in

59 Section B4.1, for elements in axial compression.
60
61 User Note: When the torsional effective length is larger than the lateral effective
BR BL
62 length, Section E4 may control.

63
FE PU
64 The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be determined based on the limit state
65 of flexural buckling:
66
ED FT
67 Pn = Fn Ag (E3-1)
68
AT A
69 The nominal stress, Fn, is determined as follows:

D DR
70
Lc E Fy
71 (a) When ≤ 4.71 (or ≤ 2.25)
r Fy Fe
 Fy 
72 
Fn = 0.658 Fe  Fy (E3-2)
 
 
73
Lc E Fy
74 (b) When > 4.71 (or > 2.25)
r Fy Fe
75
76 Fn = 0.877 Fe (E3-3)
77
78 where
80 E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa)
81 Fe = elastic buckling stress determined according to Equation E3-4; or as
82 specified in Appendix 7, Section 7.2.3(b); or through an elastic buckling
83 analysis, as applicable, ksi (MPa)
E-4
π2 E
84 = 2
(E3-4)
 Lc 
 
 r 
85
86 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used, ksi (MPa)
88
89 User Note: The two inequalities for calculating the limits of applicability of
90 Sections E3(a) and E3(b), one based on Lc r and one based on Fy Fe , provide the
91 same result for flexural buckling.
92
93 E4. TORSIONAL AND FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING OF SINGLE
94 ANGLES AND MEMBERS WITHOUT SLENDER ELEMENTS
95
96 This section applies to singly symmetric and unsymmetric members, certain doubly
97 symmetric members, such as cruciform or built-up members, and doubly symmetric
98 members when the torsional unbraced length exceeds the lateral unbraced length,
99 5, EW
all without slender elements. These provisions also apply to single angles with
21
100 b t > 0.71 E Fy , where b is the width of the longest leg and t is the thickness.
Y VI
101
20
The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be determined based on the limit states
AR E
102 of torsional and flexural-torsional buckling:

U IC R
103
104 Pn = Fn Ag (E4-1)
105
BR BL
106 The nominal stress, Fn, shall be determined according to Equation E3-2 or E3-3,
107 using the torsional or flexural-torsional elastic buckling stress, Fe, determined as
FE PU
108 follows:
109
110 (a) For doubly symmetric members twisting about the shear center
ED FT
111
 π 2 ECw  1
AT A
112 Fe =  2
+ GJ  (E4-2)
 Lcz  Ix + Iy
D DR
113
114 (b) For singly symmetric members twisting about the shear center where y is the
115 axis of symmetry
116
 Fey + Fez  4 Fey Fez H 
117 Fe =   1 − 1 −  (E4-3)
 2H   ( Fey + Fez )2 
118
119 User Note: For singly symmetric members with the x-axis as the axis of
120 symmetry, such as channels, Equation E4-3 is applicable with Fey replaced by
121 Fex.
122
123 (c) For unsymmetric members twisting about the shear center, Fe is the lowest root
124 of the cubic equation
2 2
 xo  y 
125 ( Fe − Fex ) ( Fe − Fey ) ( Fe − Fez ) − Fe2 ( Fe − Fey )   − Fe2 ( Fe − Fex )  o  = 0
 ro   ro 
126 (E4-4)
127 where
128 Cw = warping constant, in.6 (mm6)
E-5
π2 E
129 Fex = 2
(E4-5)
 Lcx 
 r 
 x 
π2 E
130 Fey = 2
(E4-6)
 Lcy 
 
 ry 
 π 2 EC w  1
131 Fez =  (E4-7)
 L 2 + GJ  A r 2
 cz  g o
132 G = shear modulus of elasticity of steel = 11,200 ksi (77 200 MPa)
133 H = flexural constant
x2 + y2
134 = 1− o 2 o (E4-8)
ro
135 Ix, Iy = moment of inertia about the principal axes, in.4 (mm4)
136 J = torsional constant, in.4 (mm4)
137 Kx 5, EW = effective length factor for flexural buckling about x-axis
21
138 Ky = effective length factor for flexural buckling about y-axis
139 Kz = effective length factor for torsional buckling about the
Y VI
140
20 longitudinal axis
AR E
141 Lcx = KxLx = effective length of member for buckling about x-axis, in.
142 (mm)
U IC R
143 Lcy = KyLy = effective length of member for buckling about y-axis, in.
144 (mm)
145 Lcz = KzLz = effective length of member for buckling about
BR BL
146 longitudinal axis, in. (mm)

147 Lx, Ly, Lz= laterally unbraced length of the member for each axis, in. (mm)
FE PU
148 ro = polar radius of gyration about the shear center, in. (mm)
2 2 Ix + I y
149 ro2 = xo + yo + (E4-9)
Ag
ED FT
150 rx = radius of gyration about x-axis, in. (mm)

AT A
151 ry = radius of gyration about y-axis, in. (mm)

152 xo, yo = coordinates of the shear center with respect to the centroid, in.
D DR
153 (mm)
154
2
155 User Note: For doubly symmetric I-shaped sections, Cw may be taken as I y ho 4,
156 where ho is the distance between flange centroids, in lieu of a more precise analysis.
157 For tees and double angles, the term with Cw may be omitted when computing Fez.
158
159 (d) For doubly symmetric I-shaped members with minor axis lateral bracing offset
160 from the shear center
161
 π2 EI y  ho2 2
 1
162 Fe =  2  + ya  + GJ  2
(E4-10)
 Lcz  4   Ag ro
163
164 where
165 (
ro2 = rx2 + ry2 + y a2 + xa2 ) (E4-11)
166 ho = distance between flange centroids, in. (mm)
167 ya = bracing offset distance along y-axis, in. (mm)
168 xa = bracing offset distance along x-axis = 0

E-6
169
170 (e) For doubly symmetric I-shaped members with major axis lateral bracing offset
171 from the shear center
172
 π2 EI y  h2 I   1
173 Fe =  2  o + x xa2  + GJ  2
(E4-12)
 Lcz  4 I y   Ag ro
174
175 where
176 ya = bracing offset distance along y-axis = 0
177 xa = bracing offset distance along x-axis, in. (mm)
178
179 (f) For all other members with lateral bracing offset from the shear center, the elastic
180 buckling stress, Fe, shall be determined by analysis.
181
182 User Note: Bracing offset from the shear center is often referred to as constrained-
183 axis torsional buckling and is discussed further in the Commentary. Members that
184 buckle in this mode will exhibit twisting because the braces restrain only lateral
185 5, EW
movement.
21
186
187 E5. SINGLE-ANGLE COMPRESSION MEMBERS
Y VI
188
20
189 The nominal compressive strength, Pn, of single-angle members shall be the lowest
AR E
190 value based on the limit states of flexural buckling in accordance with Section E3
U IC R
191 or Section E7, as applicable, or flexural-torsional buckling in accordance with

192 Section E4. Flexural-torsional buckling need not be considered when b t ≤ 0.71 E Fy
193 .
BR BL
194 The effects of eccentricity on single-angle members are permitted to be neglected

FE PU
195 and the member evaluated as axially loaded using one of the effective slenderness
196 ratios specified in Section E5(a) or E5(b), provided that the following requirements
197 are met:
ED FT
198
199 (1) Members are loaded at the ends in compression through the same one leg.
AT A
200 (2) Members are attached by welding or by connections with a minimum of two
201 bolts.
D DR
202 (3) There are no intermediate transverse loads.

203 (4) Lc r as determined in this section does not exceed 200.
204 (5) For unequal leg angles, the ratio of long leg width to short leg width is less than
205 1.7.
206
207 Single-angle members that do not meet these requirements or the requirements
208 described in Section E5(a) or (b) shall be evaluated for combined axial load and
209 flexure using the provisions of Chapter H.
210 (a) For angles that are individual members or are web members of planar trusses
211 with adjacent web members attached to the same side of the gusset plate or
212 chord
213 (1) For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles connected through the longer
214 leg
L
215 (i) When ≤ 80
ra
Lc L
216 = 72 + 0.75 (E5-1)
r ra
E-7
L
217 (ii) When > 80
ra
218
Lc L
219 = 32 + 1.25 (E5-2)
r ra
220 (2) For unequal-leg angles connected through the shorter leg, Lc r from
Equations E5-1 and E5-2 shall be increased by adding 4 ( bl bs ) – 1 , but
2
221
 
222 Lc r of the members shall not be taken as less than 0.95L rz .
223
224 (b) For angles that are web members of box or space trusses with adjacent web
225 members attached to the same side of the gusset plate or chord
226 (1) For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles connected through the longer leg
L
227 (i) When ≤ 75
ra
5, EW Lc L
21
228 = 60 + 0.8 (E5-3)
r ra
Y VI
229
20
(ii) When
L
> 75
AR E
ra
U IC R
Lc L
230 = 45 + (E5-4)
r ra
231
BR BL
232 (2) For unequal-leg angles with leg length ratios less than 1.7 and connected
233 through the shorter leg, Lc r from Equations E5-3 and E5-4 shall be
FE PU
increased by adding 6 ( bl bs ) – 1 , but Lc r of the member shall not be

2
234
 
235 taken as less than 0.82L/rz
ED FT
236
237 where
AT A
238 L = length of member between work points at truss chord centerlines, in. (mm)
239 Lc = effective length of the member for buckling about the minor axis, in. (mm)
D DR
240 bl = length of longer leg of angle, in. (mm)

241 bs = length of shorter leg of angle, in. (mm)
242 ra = radius of gyration about the geometric axis parallel to the connected leg, in.
243 (mm)
244 rz = radius of gyration about the minor principal axis, in. (mm)
245
246 E6. BUILT-UP MEMBERS
247
248 1. Compressive Strength
249
250 This section applies to built-up members composed of two shapes either (a)
251 interconnected by bolts or welds or (b) with at least one open side interconnected by
252 perforated cover plates or lacing with tie plates. The end connection shall be welded
253 or connected by means of pretensioned bolts with Class A or B faying surfaces.
254 User Note: It is acceptable to design a bolted end connection of a built-up
255 compression member for the full compressive load with bolts in bearing and bolt
256 design based on the shear strength; however, the bolts must be pretensioned. In built-
257 up compression members, such as double-angle struts in trusses, a small relative slip
258 between the elements can significantly reduce the compressive strength of the strut.
E-8
259 Therefore, the connection between the elements at the ends of built-up members
260 should be designed to resist slip.
261
262 The nominal compressive strength of built-up members composed of two shapes
263 that are interconnected by bolts or welds shall be determined in accordance with
264 Sections E3, E4, or E7, subject to the following modification. In lieu of more
265 accurate analysis, if the buckling mode involves relative deformations that produce
266 shear forces in the connectors between individual shapes, Lc r is replaced by
267 ( Lc r )m , determined as follows:
268 (a) For intermediate connectors that are bolted snug-tight
269
2 2
 Lc   Lc   a 
270   =   +  (E6-1)
 r m  r o  ri 
271
272
273 5, EW
(b) For intermediate connectors that are welded or are connected by means of
21
274 pretensioned bolts with Class A or B faying surfaces
Y VI
20 a
275 (1) When ≤ 40
AR E
ri
U IC R
 Lc   Lc 
276   =  (E6-2a)
 r  m  r o
BR BL
277
FE PU
a
278 (2) When > 40
ri
ED FT
2 2
 Lc   Lc   K i a 
279   =   +  (E6-2b)
r
 m  r o  ri 
AT A
280
D DR
281 where
 Lc 
282   = modified slenderness ratio of built-up member
 r m
 Lc 
283   = slenderness ratio of built-up member acting as a unit in the buckling
 r o
284 direction being addressed
285 Lc = effective length of built-up member, in. (mm)
286 Ki = 0.50 for angles back-to-back
287 = 0.75 for channels back-to-back
288 = 0.86 for all other cases
289 a = distance between connectors, in. (mm)
290 ri = minimum radius of gyration of individual component, in. (mm)
291
292 2. General Requirements
293
294 Built-up members shall meet the following requirements:

E-9
295 (a) Individual components of compression members composed of two or more

296 shapes shall be connected to one another at intervals, a, such that the
297 slenderness ratio, a ri , of each of the component shapes between the fasteners
298 does not exceed three-fourths times the governing slenderness ratio of the built-
299 up member. The minimum radius of gyration, ri, shall be used in computing the
300 slenderness ratio of each component part.
301 (b) At the ends of built-up compression members bearing on base plates or finished
302 surfaces, all components in contact with one another shall be connected by a
303 weld having a length not less than the maximum width of the member or by
304 bolts spaced longitudinally not more than four diameters apart for a distance
305 equal to 1-1/2 times the maximum width of the member.
306 Along the length of built-up compression members between the end
307 connections required in the foregoing, longitudinal spacing of intermittent
308 welds or bolts shall be adequate to provide the required strength. For limitations
309 on the longitudinal spacing of fasteners between elements in continuous contact
310 consisting of a plate and a shape, or two plates, see Section J3.5. Where a
311 component of a built-up compression member consists of an outside plate, the
312 5, EW
maximum spacing shall not exceed the thickness of the thinner outside plate
21
313 times 0.75 E / Fy , nor 12 in. (300 mm), when intermittent welds are provided
Y VI
314
20
along the edges of the components or when fasteners are provided on all gage
315 lines at each section. When fasteners are staggered, the maximum spacing of
AR E
316 fasteners on each gage line shall not exceed the thickness of the thinner outside
U IC R
317 plate times 1.12 E / Fy nor 18 in. (460 mm).
318 (c) Open sides of compression members built up from plates or shapes shall be
BR BL
319 provided with continuous cover plates perforated with a succession of access
320 openings. The unsupported width of such plates at access openings, as defined
FE PU
321 in Section B4.1, is assumed to contribute to the available strength provided the
322 following requirements are met:
323 (1) The width-to-thickness ratio shall conform to the limitations of Section
ED FT
324 B4.1.
AT A
325 User Note: It is conservative to use the limiting width-to-thickness ratio

326 for Case 7 in Table B4.1a with the width, b, taken as the transverse distance
D DR
327 between the nearest lines of fasteners. The net area of the plate is taken at
328 the widest hole. In lieu of this approach, the limiting width-to-thickness
329 ratio may be determined through analysis.
330 (2) The ratio of length (in direction of stress) to width of hole shall not exceed
331 2.
332 (3) The clear distance between holes in the direction of stress shall be not less
333 than the transverse distance between nearest lines of connecting fasteners
334 or welds.
335 (4) The periphery of the holes at all points shall have a minimum radius of 1-
336 1/2 in. (38 mm).
337 (d) As an alternative to perforated cover plates, lacing with tie plates is permitted
338 at each end and at intermediate points if the lacing is interrupted. Tie plates shall
339 be as near the ends as practicable. In members providing available strength, the
340 end tie plates shall have a length of not less than the distance between the lines
341 of fasteners or welds connecting them to the components of the member.
342 Intermediate tie plates shall have a length not less than one-half of this distance.
343 The thickness of tie plates shall be not less than one-fiftieth of the distance
344 between lines of welds or fasteners connecting them to the segments of the
E-10
345 members. In welded construction, the welding on each line connecting a tie
346 plate shall total not less than one-third the length of the plate. In bolted
347 construction, the spacing in the direction of stress in tie plates shall be not more
348 than six diameters and the tie plates shall be connected to each segment by at
349 least three fasteners.
350 (e) Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels or other shapes employed as lacing,
351 shall be so spaced that L r of the flange element included between their
352 connections shall not exceed three-fourths times the governing slenderness ratio
353 for the member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to provide a shearing
354 strength normal to the axis of the member equal to 2% of the available
355 compressive strength of the member. For lacing bars arranged in single systems,
356 L r shall not exceed 140. For double lacing, this ratio shall not exceed 200.
357 Double lacing bars shall be joined at the intersections. For lacing bars in
358 compression, L is permitted to be taken as the unsupported length of the lacing
359 bar between welds or fasteners connecting it to the components of the built-up
360 member for single lacing, and 70% of that distance for double lacing.
361 User Note: The inclination of lacing bars to the axis of the member shall
362 5, EW
preferably be not less than 60º for single lacing and 45º for double lacing. When
21
363 the distance between the lines of welds or fasteners in the flanges is more than
Y VI
364 15 in. (380 mm), the lacing should preferably be double or made of angles.
20
365 For additional spacing requirements, see Section J3.5.
AR E
U IC R
366
367 E7. MEMBERS WITH SLENDER ELEMENTS
368
369 This section applies to slender-element compression members, as defined in Section
BR BL
370 B4.1 for elements in axial compression.

371
FE PU
372 The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be the lowest value based on the
373 applicable limit states of flexural buckling, torsional buckling, and flexural-torsional
374 buckling in interaction with local buckling.
ED FT
375
376 Pn = Fn Ae (E7-1)
AT A
377 where
D DR
378 Ae = summation of the effective areas of the cross section based on reduced
379 effective widths, be, de or he, or the area as given by Equations E7-6 or E7-
380 7, in.2 (mm2)
381 Fn = nominal stress determined in accordance with Section E3 or E4, ksi (MPa).
382 For single angles, determine Fn in accordance with Section E3 only.
383
384 User Note: The effective area, Ae, may be determined by deducting from the gross
385 area, Ag, the reduction in area of each slender element determined as ( b – be ) t .
386
387 1. Slender Element Members Excluding Round HSS
388
389 The effective width, be, (for tees, this is de; for webs, this is he) for slender elements
390 is determined as follows:
391
Fy
392 (a) When λ ≤ λ r
Fn
393 be = b (E7-2)
394

E-11
Fy
395 (b) When λ > λ r
Fn
396
 F  Fel
397 be = b  1 − c1 el  (E7-3)
 Fn  Fn
398
399 where
400 b = width of the element (for tees this is d; for webs this is h), in. (mm)
401 c1 = effective width imperfection adjustment factor determined from Table E7.1
1 − 1 − 4c1
402 c2 = (E7-4)
2c1
403 λ = width-to-thickness ratio for the element as defined in Section B4.1
404 λr = limiting width-to-thickness ratio as defined in Table B4.1a
2
 λ 
405 Fel =  c2 r  Fy (E7-5)
 λ 
406 5, EW
= elastic local buckling stress determined according to Equation E7-5 or an
21
407 elastic local buckling analysis, ksi (MPa)
408
Y VI
20 Table E7.1
AR E
Effective Width Imperfection Adjustment Factors,

U IC R
c1 and c2
Case Slender Element c1 c2
(a) Stiffened elements except walls of square and rectangular HSS 0.18 1.31
BR BL
(b) Walls of square and rectangular HSS 0.20 1.38

(c) All other elements 0.22 1.49
FE PU
409
410 2. Round HSS
411
ED FT
412 The effective area, Ae, is determined as follows:

413
AT A
D E
≤ 0.11
D DR
414 (a) When

t Fy
415
416 Ae = Ag (E7-6)
417
E D E
418 (b) When 0.11 < < 0.45
Fy t Fy
419
 0.038 E 2
420 Ae =  +  Ag (E7-7)
F
 y ( D / t ) 3 
421
422 where
423 D = outside diameter of round HSS, in. (mm)
424 t = thickness of wall, in. (mm)

F-1
1
2 CHAPTER F
3 DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

4
5 This chapter applies to members subject to simple bending about one principal axis.
6 For simple bending, the member is loaded in a plane parallel to a principal axis that
7 passes through the shear center or is restrained against twisting at load points and
8 supports.
9
11
12 F1. General Provisions
13 F2. Doubly Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent about
14 Their Major Axis
15 F3. Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with Compact Webs and Noncom-
16 5, EW
pact or Slender Flanges Bent about Their Major Axis
21
17 F4. Other I-Shaped Members with Compact or Noncompact Webs Bent
18 about Their Major Axis
Y VI
19
20
F5. Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with Slen-
20 der Webs Bent about Their Major Axis
AR E
21 F6. I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent about Their Minor Axis
U IC R
22 F7. Square and Rectangular HSS and Box Sections

23 F8. Round HSS
24 F9. Tees and Double Angles Loaded in the Plane of Symmetry
25 F10. Single Angles
BR BL
26 F11. Rectangular Bars and Rounds

27 F12. Unsymmetrical Shapes
28 F13. Proportions of Beams and Girders
FE PU
29
31 • Chapter G Design provisions for shear
ED FT
32 • H1–H3 Members subject to biaxial flexure or to combined flexure and ax-

33 ial force
AT A
34 • H3 Members subject to flexure and torsion

D DR
35 • Appendix 3 Members subject to fatigue

36
37 For guidance in determining the appropriate sections of this chapter to apply, Table
38 User Note F1.1 may be used.
39

F-2
40
TABLE USER NOTE F1.1
Selection Table for the Application
of Chapter F Sections
Section in Cross Flange Slen- Web Slen- Limit
Chapter F Section derness derness States
F2 C C Y, LTB
F3 NC, S C LTB, FLB
CFY,LTB,
F4
5, EW C, NC, S C, NC
FLB, TFY
21
Y VI
F5
20 C, NC, S S
CFY,LTB,
FLB, TFY
AR E
U IC R
F6 C, NC, S N/A Y, FLB

BR BL
Y, FLB,
F7 C, NC, S C, NC, S
WLB, LTB
FE PU
F8 N/A N/A Y, LB
ED FT
Y, LTB,
AT A
F9 C, NC, S N/A
FLB, WLB
D DR
Y, LTB,
F10 N/A N/A
LLB
F11 N/A N/A Y, LTB
Unsymmetrical
shapes, All limit
F12 N/A N/A
other than single states
angles
Y = yielding, CFY = compression flange yielding, LTB = lateral-torsional buckling, FLB =
flange local buckling, WLB = web local buckling, TFY = tension flange yielding, LLB = leg
local buckling, LB = local buckling, C = compact, NC = noncompact, S = slender, N/A = not
applicable
41

F-3
42 F1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

43
44 The design flexural strength, φbMn, and the allowable flexural strength, Mn/Ωb,
45 shall be determined as follows:
46 (a) For all provisions in this chapter
47 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
48
49 and the nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be determined according to
50 Sections F2 through F13.
51
52 (b) The provisions in this chapter are based on the assumption that points of
53 support for beams and girders are restrained against rotation about their
54 longitudinal axis.
55
56 (c) For singly symmetric members in single curvature and all doubly sym-
57 metric members
58 5, EW
21
59 The lateral-torsional buckling modification factor, Cb, for nonuniform mo-
60 ment diagrams when both ends of the segment are braced is determined as
Y VI
61
20
follows:
62
AR E
12.5M max
63 Cb = (F1-1)
U IC R
2.5M max + 3M A + 4 M B + 3M C
64 where
65 Mmax = absolute value of maximum moment in the unbraced sement,
66 kip-in. (N-mm)
BR BL
67 MA = absolute value of moment at quarter point of the unbraced seg-

68 ment, kip-in. (N-mm)
FE PU
69 MB = absolute value of moment at centerline of the unbraced seg-

70 ment, kip-in. (N-mm)
71 MC = absolute value of moment at three-quarter point of the un-
ED FT
72 braced segment, kip-in. (N-mm)

73
74 User Note: For doubly symmetric members with no transverse loading be-
AT A
75 tween brace points, Equation F1-1 reduces to 1.0 for the case of equal end
D DR
76 moments of opposite sign (uniform moment), 2.27 for the case of equal end
77 moments of the same sign (reverse curvature bending), and to 1.67 when one
78 end moment equals zero. For singly symmetric members, a more detailed
79 analysis for Cb is presented in the Commentary. The Commentary provides
80 additional equations for Cb that provide improved characterization of the ef-
81 fects of a variety of member boundary conditions.
82
83 For cantilevers where warping is prevented at the support and where the
84 free end is unbraced, Cb = 1.0.
85
86 (d) In singly symmetric members subject to reverse curvature bending, the
87 lateral-torsional buckling strength shall be checked for both flanges. The
88 available flexural strength shall be greater than or equal to the maximum
89 required moment causing compression within the flange under considera-
90 tion.
91
92 F2. DOUBLY SYMMETRIC COMPACT I-SHAPED MEMBERS AND
93 CHANNELS BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS
94

F-4
95 This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped members and channels bent
96 about their major axis, having compact webs and compact flanges as defined
97 in Section B4.1 for flexure.
98
99 User Note: For Fy = 50 ksi (345 MPa), all current ASTM A6 W, S, M, C, and
100 MC shapes except W21×48, W14×99, W14×90, W12×65, W10×12, W8×31,
101 W8×10, W6×15, W6×9, W6×8.5, and M4×6 have compact flanges; For Fy <
102 70 ksi (485 MPa), all current ASTM A6 W, S, M, HP, C, and MC shapes have
103 compact webs.
104 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower value obtained according
105 to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment) and lateral-torsional buckling.
106 1. Yielding
107
108 M n = M p = Fy Z x (F2-1)
109
110 where
5, EW
21
111 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used, ksi
112 (MPa)
Y VI
113
114
20
Zx = plastic section modulus about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3)
AR E
115 2. Lateral-Torsional Buckling

U IC R
116 (a) When Lb ≤ L p , the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not apply.
117 (b) When L p < Lb ≤ Lr

BR BL
  Lb − L p 
118 M n = Cb  M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S x )   ≤ M p (F2-2)
  Lr − L p  
FE PU
119 (c) When Lb > Lr

120 M n = Fcr S x ≤ M p (F2-3)
121 where
ED FT
122 Lb = length between points that are either braced against lateral dis-
123 placement of the compression flange or braced against twist of the
AT A
124 cross section, in. (mm)

D DR
2
Cb π2 E Jc  Lb 
125 Fcr = 1 + 0.078 (F2-4)
2
 Lb  S x ho  rts 
r 
 ts 
126 = critical stress, ksi (MPa)
128 J = torsional constant, in.4 (mm4)
129 Sx = elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3)
130 ho = distance between the flange centroids, in. (mm)
131
132 User Note: The square root term in Equation F2-4 may be conservatively
133 taken equal to 1.0.
134
135 User Note: Equations F2-3 and F2-4 provide identical solutions to the fol-
136 lowing expression for lateral-torsional buckling of doubly symmetric sec-
137 tions that has been presented in past editions of this Specification:

F-5
2
π  πE 
138 M cr = Cb EI y GJ +   I y Cw
Lb  Lb 
139 The advantage of Equations F2-3 and F2-4 is that the form is very similar to
140 the expression for lateral-torsional buckling of singly symmetric sections
141 given in Equations F4-4 and F4-5.
142
143 Lp, the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of yielding,
144 in. (mm), is:
E
145 L p = 1.76 ry (F2-5)
Fy
146
147 Lr, the limiting unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic lateral-tor-
148 sional buckling, in. (mm), is:
149
5, EW 2 2
21
E Jc  Jc   0.7 Fy 
150 Lr = 1.95rts +   + 6.76  E  (F2-6)
0.7 Fy S x ho  S x ho   
Y VI
151 where
20
AR E

U IC R
I y Cw
153 rts2 = (F2-7)
Sx
BR BL
154 and the coefficient c is determined as follows:

155 (1) For doubly symmetric I-shapes
FE PU
156
157 c=1 (F2-8a)
158
ED FT
159 (2) For channels

AT A
ho Iy
160 c= (F2-8b)
D DR
2 Cw
161 where
162 Iy = moment of inertia about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4)
163
164 User Note:
I y ho2
165 For doubly symmetric I-shapes with rectangular flanges, Cw = , and, thus,
4
166 Equation F2-7 becomes
I y ho
167 rts2 =
2S x
168 rts may be approximated accurately to conservatively as the radius of gyration

169 of the compression flange plus one-sixth of the web:
bf
170 rts =
 1 htw 
12 1 + 
 6 bf t f 

F-6
171
172 F3. DOUBLY SYMMETRIC I-SHAPED MEMBERS WITH COMPACT
173 WEBS AND NONCOMPACT OR SLENDER FLANGES BENT ABOUT
174 THEIR MAJOR AXIS
175
176 This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped members bent about their
177 major axis having compact webs and noncompact or slender flanges as defined
178 in Section B4.1 for flexure.
179
180 User Note: The following shapes have noncompact flanges for Fy = 50 ksi
181 (345 MPa): W21×48, W14×99, W14×90, W12×65, W10×12, W8×31,
182 W8×10, W6×15, W6×9, W6×8.5, and M4×6. All other ASTM A6 W, S, and
183 M shapes have compact flanges for Fy ≤ 50 ksi (345 MPa).
184
186 to the limit states of lateral-torsional buckling and compression flange local
187 buckling.
5, EW
21
188
Y VI
20
190 For lateral-torsional buckling, the provisions of Section F2.2 shall apply.
AR E
U IC R
191 2. Compression Flange Local Buckling

192
193 (a) For sections with noncompact flanges
BR BL
 λ − λ pf 
194 M n = M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S x )   (F3-1)
 λ rf − λ pf 
FE PU
195
196 (b) For sections with slender flanges
197
ED FT
0.9 Ekc S x
198 Mn = (F3-2)
λ2
AT A
199 where
D DR
4
200 kc = and shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for
h tw
201 calculation purposes
202 h = distance as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm)
bf
2t
203 λ = f
204 bf = width of the flange, in. (mm)
205 tf = thickness of the flange, in. (mm)
206 λpf = λp is the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact flange as
207 defined in Table B4.1b
208 λrf = λr is the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact flange as
210
211 F4. OTHER I-SHAPED MEMBERS WITH COMPACT OR
212 NONCOMPACT WEBS BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS
213
214 This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped members bent about their
215 major axis with noncompact webs and singly symmetric I-shaped members

F-7
216 with webs attached to the mid-width of the flanges, bent about their major axis,
217 with compact or noncompact webs, as defined in Section B4.1 for flexure.
218
219 User Note: I-shaped members for which this section is applicable may be
220 designed conservatively using Section F5.
221
222 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lowest value obtained according
223 to the limit states of compression flange yielding, lateral-torsional buckling,
224 compression flange local buckling, and tension flange yielding.
225
226 1. Compression Flange Yielding
227
228 Mn = RpcMyc (F4-1)
229 where
230 Myc = FySxc = yield moment in the compression flange, kip-in. (N-mm)
231 Rpc = web plastification factor, determined in accordance with Section
232 5, EW
F4.2(c)(6)
21
233 Sxc = elastic section modulus referred to compression flange, in.3 (mm3)
234
Y VI
235 2.
20
Lateral-Torsional Buckling
AR E
236 (a) When Lb ≤ Lp, the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not apply.
U IC R
237 (b) When Lp < Lb ≤ Lr

  Lb − L p  
238 M n = Cb  R pc M yc − ( R pc M yc − FL S xc )    ≤ R pc M yc (F4-2)
  Lr − L p  
BR BL

240 M n = Fcr S xc ≤ R pc M yc (F4-3)
FE PU
241 where
ED FT
242 (1) Myc, the yield moment in the compression flange, kip-in. (N-mm), is:
243 Myc =FySxc (F4-4)
AT A
244
D DR
245 (2) Fcr, the critical stress, ksi (MPa), is:

246
2
Cb π 2 E J  Lb 
247 Fcr = 1 + 0.078   (F4-5)
2
 Lb  S xc ho  rt 
 r 
 t 
248
I yc
249 For ≤ 0.23 , J shall be taken as zero,
Iy
250
251 where
252 Iyc = moment of inertia of the compression flange about the y-
253 axis, in.4 (mm4)
254
255 (3) FL, nominal compression flange stress above which the inelastic buck-
256 ling limit states apply, ksi (MPa), is determined as follows:
257

F-8
S xt
258 (i) When ≥ 0.7
S xc
259 FL = 0.7 Fy (F4-6a)
260
S xt
261 (ii) When < 0.7
S xc
S xt
262 FL = Fy ≥ 0.5Fy (F4-6b)
S xc
263 where
264 Sxt = elastic section modulus referred to tension flange, in.3 (mm3)
265
266 (4) Lp, the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of
267 yielingyielding, in. (mm) is:
E
268 L p = 1.1rt (F4-7)
Fy
5, EW
21
269
270 (5) Lr, the limiting unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic lateral-
Y VI
271 torsional buckling, in. (mm), is:
20
272
AR E
273
U IC R
2 2
E J  J   FL 
274 Lr = 1.95rt +   + 6.76  E  (F4-8)
FL S xc ho  S xc ho   
275
BR BL
276 (6) Rpc, the web plastification factor, is determined as follows:

277 (i) When I yc I y > 0.23
FE PU
hc
278 (a) When ≤ λ pw
tw
ED FT
Mp
279 R pc = (F4-9a)
M yc
AT A
hc
280 (b) When > λ pw
D DR
tw
 Mp  Mp  λ − λ pw   M p
281 R pc =  − − 1  ≤ (F4-9b)
 M yc  M yc  λ rw − λ pw   M yc
282
283 (ii) When I yc I y ≤ 0.23
284 Rpc = 1.0 (F4-10)
285
286 where
287 Mp = FyZx ≤ 1.6FySx
288 hc = twice the distance from the centroid to the following: the in-
289 side face of the compression flange less the fillet or corner
290 radius, for rolled shapes; the nearest line of fasteners at the
291 compression flange or the inside face of the compression
292 flange when welds are used, for built-up sections, in. (mm)
h
293 = c
tw

F-9
294 λpw = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact web as
296 λrw = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact web
297 as defined in Table B4.1b
298
299 (7) rt, the effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional buckling, in.
300 (mm), is determined as follows:
301 (i) For I-shapes with a rectangular compression flange
302
b fc
303 rt = (F4-11)
 1 
12  1 + aw 
 6 
304
305 where
hc t w
306 aw = (F4-12)
5, EW
b fc t fc
21
307 bfc = width of compression flange, in. (mm)
308 tfc = thickness of compression flange, in. (mm)
Y VI
309
20
tw = thickness of web, in. (mm)
310
AR E
311 (ii) For I-shapes with a channel cap or a cover plate attached to the
U IC R
312 compression flange

313
314 rt = radius of gyration of the flange components in flexural
315 compression plus one-third of the web area in compression
BR BL
316 due to application of major axis bending moment alone, in.

317 (mm)
318
FE PU

320
321 (a) For sections with compact flanges, the limit state of local buckling does
ED FT
322 not apply.

323 (b) For sections with noncompact flanges
AT A
 λ− λ pf 
M n = R pc M yc − ( R pc M yc − FL S xc ) 
D DR
324 (F4-13)

325 (c) For sections with slender flanges
0.9 Ekc S xc
326 Mn = (F4-14)
λ2
327 where
328 FL is defined in Equations F4-6a and F4-6b
329 Rpc is the web plastification factor, determined by Equation F4-9a, F4-
330 9b, or F4-10
4
331 kc = and shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76
h tw
332 for calculation purposes
b fc
333 λ =
2t fc
334 λpf = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact flange as de-
335 fined in Table B4.1b

F-10
336 λrf = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact flange as
338
339 4. Tension Flange Yielding
340
341 (a) When Sxt ≥ Sxc, the limit state of tension flange yielding does not apply.
342
343 (b) When Sxt < Sxc
344 Mn = RptMyt (F4-15)
345 where
346 M yt = Fy Sxt = yield moment in the tension flange, kip-in. (N-mm)
347
348 Rpt, the web plastification factor corresponding to the tension flange yield-
349 ing limit state, is determined as follows:
350
351 (1) When Iyc/Iy > 0.23
5, EW hc
≤ λ pw
21
352 (i) When tw
Mp
Y VI
353
20 R pt =
M yt
(F4-16a)
AR E
hc
U IC R
354 (ii) When > λ pw

tw
Mp  Mp   λ − λ pw  M p
355 R pt =  −  − 1     ≤ M yt
(F4-16b)
BR BL
 M yt  M yt   λ rw − λ pw  
356
FE PU
357 (2) When Iyc/Iy ≤ 0.23

358 Rpt = 1.0 (F4-17)
ED FT
359 where
360 Mp = FyZx ≤ 1.6FySx
hc
AT A
t
D DR
361 λ = w
362 λpw = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact web as defined
363 in Table B4.1b
364 λrw = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact web as de-
366
367 F5. DOUBLY SYMMETRIC AND SINGLY SYMMETRIC I-SHAPED
368 MEMBERS WITH SLENDER WEBS BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR
369 AXIS
370
371 This section applies to doubly symmetric and singly symmetric I-shaped mem-
372 bers with slender webs attached to the mid-width of the flanges and bent about
373 their major axis as defined in Section B4.1 for flexure.
374
376 to the limit states of compression flange yielding, lateral-torsional buckling,
377 compression flange local buckling, and tension flange yielding.
378

F-11
379 1. Compression Flange Yielding

380
381 M n = R pg Fy S xc (F5-1)
382
384
385 M n = R pg Fcr S xc (F5-2)
386 (a) When Lb ≤ Lp, the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not apply.
387
388 (b) When Lp < Lb ≤ Lr
  Lb − L p  
389 Fcr = Cb  Fy − ( 0.3Fy )    ≤ Fy (F5-3)
  Lr − L p  
390
Cb π 2 E
392
5, EW Fcr =
 Lb 
2
≤ Fy (F5-4)
21
 r 
 t 
Y VI
393
394 where
20
AR E
395 Lp is defined by Equation F4-7

U IC R
E
πrt
0.7 Fy
396 Lr = (F5-5)
397 rt = effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional buckling as defined
BR BL
398 in Section F4, in. (mm)

399 Rpg, the bending strength reduction factor, is:
400
FE PU
aw  hc E 
401 R pg = 1 −  − 5.7  ≤ 1.0 (F5-6)
1, 200 + 300aw  tw Fy 
ED FT
402
403 and
AT A
404 aw is defined by Equation F4-12, but shall not exceed 10

405
D DR
407 M n = R pg Fcr S xc (F5-7)
408 (a) For sections with compact flanges, the limit state of compression flange lo-
409 cal buckling does not apply.
410
 λ− λ pf 
412 Fcr = Fy − ( 0.3Fy )   (F5-8)
414
0.9 Ekc
415 Fcr = 2 (F5-9)
 bf 
 
 2t f 
416 where

F-12
4
417 kc = and shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than
h tw
418 0.76 for calculation purposes
b fc
419 λ =
2t fc
420 λpf = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact flange as de-
422 λrf = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact flange as de-
424
425 4. Tension Flange Yielding
426
427 (a) When Sxt ≥ Sxc, the limit state of tension flange yielding does not apply.
428
429 (b) When Sxt < Sxc
430 5, EW Mn = FySxt
(F5-10)
21
431
432 F6. I-SHAPED MEMBERS AND CHANNELS BENT ABOUT THEIR
Y VI
433 MINOR AXIS
20
434
AR E
435 This section applies to I-shaped members and channels bent about their minor
U IC R
436 axis.
437
439 to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment) and flange local buckling.
BR BL
440
441 1. Yielding
FE PU
Mn = M p = Fy Zy ≤ 1.6Fy Sy
442 (F6-1)
443 where
ED FT
444 Sy = elastic section modulus taken about the y-axis, in.3 (mm3)
445 Zy = plastic section modulus taken about the y-axis, in.3 (mm3)
446
AT A
447 2. Flange Local Buckling

D DR
448 (a) For sections with compact flanges, the limit state of flange local buck-
449 ling does not apply.
450 User Note: For Fy = 50 ksi (345 MPa), all current ASTM A6 W, S, M,
451 C, and MC shapes except W21x48, W14x99, W14x90, W12x65,
452 W10x12, W8x31, W8x10, W6x15, W6x9, W6x8.5, and M4x6 have com-
453 pact flanges.
 λ − λ pf 
455 M n = M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S y )  
 λ rf − λ pf
 
 λ − λ pf  Field Code Changed
456 M n = M p − ( M p − 0.70 Fy S y )   (F6-2)
λ −λ
 rf pf 
457

F-13
459 M n = Fcr S y (F6-3)

460 where
0.70 E
461 Fcr = 2
(F6-4)
b
 
 tf 
462 b = for flanges of I-shaped members, half the full flange width, bf ;
463 for flanges of channels, the full nominal dimension of the
464 flange, in. (mm)
b
466 λ =
tf
467 λpf = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact flange as
469 λrf = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact flange
470
471 5, EWas defined in Table B4.1b
21
472 F7. SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR HSS AND BOX SECTIONS
473
Y VI
20
474 This section applies to square and rectangular HSS, and box sections bent
AR E
475 about either axis, having compact, noncompact, or slender webs or flanges, as
U IC R
476 defined in Section B4.1 for flexure.

478 to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment), flange local buckling, web local
479 buckling, and lateral-torsional buckling under pure flexure.
BR BL
480
481 1. Yielding
FE PU
482
483 M n = M p = Fy Z (F7-1)
ED FT
484
485 where
486 Z = plastic section modulus about the axis of bending, in.3 (mm3)
AT A
487
D DR
488 2. Flange Local Buckling

489
490 (a) For compact sections, the limit state of flange local buckling does not ap-
491 ply.
493
 λ − λ pf 
494 M n = M p − ( M p − Fy S )  ≤Mp (F7-2)
495 where
496 S = elastic section modulus about the axis of bending, in.3 (mm3)
497 b = width of compression flange as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm)
b
499 λ =
tf

F-14
504
506
507 M n = Fy Se (F7-3)
508
509 where
510 Se = effective section modulus determined with the effective width,
511 be, of the compression flange taken as:
512
513 (1) For HSS
514
515
E  0.38 E 
516 be = 1.92t f 1 −  ≤ b (F7-4)
Fy  b /tf Fy 
517
518 (2) For box sections
519 5, EW
21
520
Y VI
20 E  0.34 E 
521 be = 1.92t f  1 −  ≤ b (F7-5)
AR E
Fy  b /tf Fy 
U IC R
522 3. Web Local Buckling

523
524 (a) For compact sections, the limit state of web local buckling does not apply.
BR BL
525 (b) For sections with noncompact webs

526
527
FE PU
 λ − λ pw 
528 M n = M p − ( M p − Fy S )  ≤Mp (F7-6)
 λ rw − λ pw 
ED FT
529
530 where
531 h = depth of web, as defined in Section B4.1b, in. (mm)
AT A
532 tw = thickness of the web, in. (mm)

D DR
h
533 λ =
tw
534 λpw = λp, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a compact web as
536 λrw = λr, the limiting width-to-thickness ratio for a noncompact web
538
539 (c) For sections with slender webs and compact or noncompact flanges
540
541 M n = R pg Fy S (F7-7)
542 where
543 Rpg is defined by Equation F5-6 with aw = 2htw ( bt f )
544
545 User Note: Box sections with slender webs and slender flanges are not ad-
546 dressed in this Specification.
547
548 User Note: There are no HSS with slender webs.

F-15
549
551
552 (a) When Lb ≤ L p , the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not apply.
553
554 (b) When L p < Lb ≤ Lr
  Lb − L p 
555 M n = Cb  M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S x )   ≤ M p (F7-10)
  Lr − L p  
JAg
557 M n = 2 ECb ≤Mp (F7-11)
Lb ry
558 where
560 Lp , the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of yielding, in.
561
5, EW
(mm), is:
21
562
JAg
563 L p = 0.13 Ery (F7-12)
Y VI
20 Mp
AR E
564
565 Lr, the limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic lat-
U IC R
566 eral-torsional buckling, in. (mm), is:

567
JAg
568 Lr = 2 Ery (F7-13)
BR BL
0.7 Fy S x
569
FE PU
570 User Note: Lateral-torsional buckling will not occur in square sections or sec-
571 tions bending about their minor axis. In HSS sizes, deflection will usually con-
572 trol before there is a significant reduction in flexural strength due to lateral-
573 torsional buckling. The same is true for box sections, and lateral-torsional
ED FT
574 buckling will usually only be a consideration for sections with high depth-to-
575 width ratios.
AT A
576
D DR
577 F8. ROUND HSS

0.45E
578 This section applies to round HSS having D/t ratios of less than .
Fy
580 to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment) and local buckling.
581 1. Yielding
582 M n = M p = Fy Z (F8-1)
583
584 2. Local Buckling
585
586 (a) For compact sections, the limit state of flange local buckling does
587 not apply.
588
589 (b) For noncompact sections

F-16
 
 0.021E 
590 Mn =  + Fy  S (F8-2)
D
 
 t 
591 (c) For sections with slender walls
592
593 M n = Fcr S (F8-3)
594 where
0.33E
596 Fcr = (F8-4)
 D
 
t 
597 t = design wall thickness of HSS member, in. (mm)
598
599 F9. TEES AND DOUBLE ANGLES LOADED IN THE PLANE OF
600 SYMMETRY
601 5, EW
21
602 This section applies to tees and double angles loaded in the plane of symmetry.
Y VI
603 20
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lowest value obtained accord-
604 ing to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment), lateral-torsional buckling,
AR E
605 flange local buckling, and local buckling of tee stems and double angle web
U IC R
606 legs.
607
608 1. Yielding
609
BR BL
610 Mn = Mp (F9-1)
611 where
FE PU
612
613 (a) For tee stems and web legs in tension
614
ED FT
615 M p = Fy Z x ≤ 1.6 M y (F9-2)

616
AT A
617 where
618 My = yield moment about the axis of bending, kip-in. (N-mm)
D DR
619 = FySx (F9-3)

620
621 (b) For tee stems in compression
622
623 Mp = My (F9-4)
624
625 (c) For double angles with web legs in compression
626
627 M p = 1.5M y (F9-5)
628
630
631 (a) For stems and web legs in tension
632
633 (1) When Lb ≤ L p , the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling does not ap-
634 ply.
635

F-17
L p < Lb ≤ Lr
636 (2) When
 Lb − L p 
637 Mn = M p − (M p − M y )  (F9-6)
 Lr − L p 
638 (3) When Lb > Lr
639
640 M n = M cr (F9-7)
641 where
E
642 Lp = 1.76 ry (F9-8)
Fy
 E  IyJ  Fy  dS
643 Lr = 1.95   2.36   x + 1 (F9-9)
F
 y S x  E  J
644 Mcr =
1.95E
Lb (
I y J B + 1 + B2 ) (F9-10)
5, EW  d  I
= 2.3   y
21
645 B (F9-11)
 Lb  J
646 d = depth of tee or width of web leg in tension, in. (mm)
Y VI
647
20
AR E
648 (b) For stems and web legs in compression anywhere along the unbraced
649 length, Mcr is given by Equation F9-10 with
U IC R
650
 d  Iy
651 B = −2.3   (F9-12)
 Lb  J
BR BL
652 where
653 d = depth of tee or width of web leg in compression, in. (mm)
FE PU
654
655 (1) For tee stems
656
Mn = Mcr ≤ My
ED FT
657 (F9-13)
658
AT A
659 (2) For double-angle web legs, Mn shall be determined using Equations
660 F10-2 and F10-3 with Mcr determined using Equation F9-10 and My
D DR
661 determined using Equation F9-3.

662
663 3. Flange Local Buckling of Tees and Double-Angle Legs
664
665 (a) For tee flanges
666 (1) For sections with a compact flange in flexural compression, the limit
667 state of flange local buckling does not apply.
668
669 (2) For sections with a noncompact flange in flexural compression
670
  λ − λ pf 
671 M n =  M p − ( M p − 0.7 Fy S xc )    ≤ 1.6M y (F9-14)
  λ rf − λ pf  
672
673 (3) For sections with a slender flange in flexural compression
674

F-18
0.7 ES xc
675 Mn = 2
(F9-15)
 bf 
 
 2t f 
676
677 where
678 Sxc = elastic section modulus referred to the compression flange, in.3
679 (mm3)
bf
680 λ =
2t f
685
686 (b) For double-angle flange legs
687 5, EW
21
688 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, for double angles with the flange legs in
689 compression shall be determined in accordance with Section F10.3,
Y VI
690 20
with Sc referred to the compression flange.
691
AR E
692 4. Local Buckling of Tee Stems and Double-Angle Web Legs in Flexural
U IC R
693 Compression
694
695 (a) For tee stems
696 M n = Fcr S x (F9-16)
BR BL
697
698 where
FE PU
699 Sx = elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3)
700
701 Fcr, the critical stress, is determined as follows:
702
ED FT
d E
≤ 0.84
tw Fy
AT A
703 (1) When

D DR
704
705 Fcr = Fy (F9-17)
706
E d E
0.84 < ≤ 1.52
Fy tw Fy
707 (2) When
708
 d Fy 
709 Fcr = 1.43 − 0.515  Fy (F9-18)
 t E 
 w 
710
d E
> 1.52
tw Fy
711 (3) When
712
1.52 E
713 Fcr = 2
(F9-19)
d 
t 
 w

F-19
714
715 (b) For double-angle web legs
716
717 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, for double angles with the web legs in
718 compression shall be determined in accordance with Section F10.3,
719 with Sc taken as the elastic section modulus.
720
721 F10. SINGLE ANGLES
722
723 This section applies to single angles with and without continuous lateral re-
724 straint along their length.
725
726 Single angles with continuous lateral-torsional restraint along the length are
727 permitted to be designed on the basis of geometric axis (x, y) bending. Sin-
728 gle angles without continuous lateral-torsional restraint along the length
729 shall be designed using the provisions for principal axis bending except
730 where the provision for bending about a geometric axis is permitted.
731 5, EW
If the moment resultant has components about both principal axes, with or
21
732 without axial load, or the moment is about one principal axis and there is
733 axial load, the combined stress ratio shall be determined using the provisions
Y VI
734
20
of Section H2.
AR E
735 User Note: For geometric axis design, use section properties computed
U IC R
736 about the x- and y-axis of the angle, parallel and perpendicular to the legs.
737 For principal axis design, use section properties computed about the major
738 and minor principal axes of the angle.
739 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lowest value obtained ac-
BR BL
740 cording to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment), lateral-torsional

741 buckling, and leg local buckling.
FE PU
742 User Note: For bending about the minor principal axis, only the limit states
743 of yielding and leg local buckling apply.
ED FT
744 1. Yielding
745
746 Mn = 1.5My (F10-1)
AT A
747
D DR

749
750 For single angles without continuous lateral-torsional restraint along the
751 length
My
752 (a) When ≤ 1.0
M cr
 My 
753 M n = 1.92 − 1.17  M y ≤ 1.5M y (F10-2)
 M cr 
 
My
754 (b) When > 1.0
M cr
 0.17 M cr 
755 M n =  0.92 −  M cr (F10-3)
 My 
 
756
757 where

F-20
758 Mcr, the elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, is determined as fol-

759 lows:
760
761 (1) For bending about the major principal axis of single angles
762
9 EAg rz tCb  
2
 β r  β r
763 M cr = 1 +  4.4 w z  + 4.4 w z 
8Lb   Lb t  Lb t 
 
764 (F10-4)
765 where
766 Cb is computed using Equation F1-1 with a maximum value of 1.5
767 Ag = gross area of angle, in.2(mm2)
768
769 Lb = laterally unbraced length of member, in. (mm)
770 rz = radius of gyration about the minor principal axis, in. (mm)
771 t = thickness of angle leg, in. (mm)
772 βw =
5, EW
section property for single angles about major principal axis,
21
773 in. (mm). βw is positive with short legs in compression and
774 negative with long legs in compression for unequal-leg an-
Y VI
775 gles, and zero for equal-leg angles. If the long leg is in com-
20
776 pression anywhere along the unbraced length of the member,
AR E
777 the negative value of βw shall be used.

778
U IC R
779 User Note: The equation for βw and values for common angle
780 sizes are listed in the Commentary.
781
BR BL
782 (2) For bending about one of the geometric axes of an equal-leg angle
783 with no axial compression
784
FE PU
785 (i) With no lateral-torsional restraint:

786
787 (a) With maximum compression at the toe
ED FT
0.58 Eb 4 tCb  
2
Lt
788 M cr = 2
1 + 0.88  b2  − 1 (F10-5a)
Lb  b  
AT A
 
D DR
789 (b) With maximum tension at the toe

0.58Eb4tCb  
2
 1 + 0.88  b  + 1
Lt
790 M cr = 2 2
(F10-5b)
Lb  b  
 
791 where
792 My shall be taken as 0.80 times the yield moment calculated
793 using the geometric section modulus.
794 b = width of leg, in. (mm)
795
796 (ii) With lateral-torsional restraint at the point of maximum moment
797 only:
798
799 Mcr shall be taken as 1.25 times Mcr computed using Equation
800 F10-5a or F10-5b.
801
802 My shall be taken as the yield moment calculated using the geo-
803 metric section modulus.
804

F-21
805 User Note: Mn may be taken as My for single angles with their vertical leg toe
806 in compression, and having a span-to-depth ratio less than or equal to
2 Fy
1.64 E  t 
807   − 1.4
Fy b E
808
809 3. Leg Local Buckling
810
811 The limit state of leg local buckling applies when the toe of the leg is in com-
812 pression.
813
814 (a) For compact sections, the limit state of leg local buckling does not apply.
815 (b) For sections with noncompact legs
  b  Fy 
816 M n = Fy Sc  2.43 − 1.72    (F10-6)
  t  E 
817 5, EW
(c) For sections with slender legs
21
818
819 M n = Fcr Sc (F10-7)
Y VI
820 where
20
AR E
0.71E
821 Fcr = 2
(F10-8)
U IC R
b
t
 
822 Sc = elastic section modulus to the toe in compression relative to the axis of
823 bending, in.3 (mm3). For bending about one of the geometric axes of
BR BL
824 an equal-leg angle with no lateral-torsional restraint, Sc shall be 0.80

825 of the geometric axis section modulus.
FE PU
826 b = full width of leg in compression, in. (mm)

827
828 F11. RECTANGULAR BARS AND ROUNDS
829
ED FT
830 This section applies to rectangular bars bent about either geometric axis, and
831 rounds.
AT A
832
D DR
834 to the limit states of yielding (plastic moment) and lateral-torsional buckling.
835
836 1. Yielding
837
838 For rectangular bars
839 Mn = M p = Fy Z ≤ 1.5Fy Sx (F11-1)
840
841 For rounds
842 Mn = M p = Fy Z ≤ 1.6Fy Sx (F11-2)
843
845
Lb d 0.08 E
846 (a) For rectangular bars with ≤ bent about their major axis, rec-
t2 Fy
847 tangular bars bent about their minor axis, and rounds, the limit state of lat-
848 eral-torsional buckling does not apply.
849

F-22
0.08 E Lb d 1.9 E
850 (b) For rectangular bars with < 2 ≤ bent about their major axis
Fy t Fy
851
 L d  Fy 
852 M n = Cb 1.52 − 0.274  b2  E My ≤ Mp (F11-3)
  t  
853 where
854 Lb = length between points that are either braced against lateral dis-
855 placement of the compression region, or between points braced
856 to prevent twist of the cross section, in. (mm)
857
Lb d 1.9 E
858 (c) For rectangular bars with > bent about their major axis
t2 Fy
859 M n = Fcr S x ≤ M p (F11-4)
860 where
1.9 ECb
861
5, EW
Fcr =
Lb d
(F11-5)
21
t2
862
Y VI
863
20
F12. UNSYMMETRICAL SHAPES
AR E
864
865 This section applies to all unsymmetrical shapes except single angles.
U IC R
866
868 to the limit states of yielding (yield moment), lateral-torsional buckling, and
869 local buckling where
BR BL
870
871 M n = Fn Smin (F12-1)
FE PU
872 where
873 Smin = minimum elastic section modulus relative to the axis of bending,
874 in.3 (mm3)
ED FT
875
876 User Note: The design provisions within this section can be overly conserva-
877 tive for certain shapes, unbraced lengths, and moment diagrams. To improve
AT A
878 economy, the provisions of Appendix 1.3 are recommended as an alternative

D DR
879 for determining the nominal flexural strength of members of unsymmetrical

880 shape.
881
882 1. Yielding
883
884 Fn = Fy (F12-2)
885
887
888 Fn = Fcr ≤ Fy (F12-3)
889 where
890 Fcr = lateral-torsional buckling stress for the section as determined by
891 analysis, ksi (MPa)
892
893 User Note: In the case of Z-shaped members, it is recommended that Fcr be
894 taken as 0.5Fcr of a channel with the same flange and web properties.
895

F-23
896 3. Local Buckling

897
898 Fn = Fcr ≤ Fy (F12-4)
899 where
900 Fcr = local buckling stress for the section as determined by analysis, ksi
901 (MPa)
902
903 F13. PROPORTIONS OF BEAMS AND GIRDERS
904
905 1. Strength Reductions for Members with Bolt Holes in the Tension Flange
906
907 This section applies to rolled or built-up shapes and cover-plated beams with
908 standard and oversize bolt holes and short- and long-slotted bolt holes parallel
909 to the direction of load, proportioned on the basis of flexural strength of the
910 gross section.
911 In addition to the limit states specified in other sections of this Chapter, the
912 5, EW
nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be limited according to the limit state of
21
913 tensile rupture of the tension flange.
Y VI
914
20
(a) When Fu Afn ≥ Yt Fy Afg , the limit state of tensile rupture does not apply.
AR E
915
916 (b) When Fu Afn < Yt Fy Afg , the nominal flexural strength, M n , at the location
U IC R
917 of the holes in the tension flange shall not be taken greater than
918
Fu A fn
BR BL
919 Mn = Sx (F13-1)
A fg
920 where
FE PU
921 Afg = gross area of tension flange, calculated in accordance with Section
922 B4.3a, in.2 (mm2)
923 Afn = net area of tension flange, calculated in accordance with Section
ED FT
924 B4.3b, in.2 (mm2)

925 Fu = specified minimum tensile strength, ksi (MPa)
926 Sx = minimum elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, in.3 (mm3)
AT A
927 Yt = 1.0 for Fy/Fu ≤ 0.8

D DR
928 = 1.1 otherwise

929
930 2. Proportioning Limits for I-Shaped Members
931
932 Singly symmetric I-shaped members shall satisfy the following limit:
933
I yc
934 0.1 ≤ ≤ 0.9 (F13-2)
Iy
935
936 I-shaped members with slender webs shall also satisfy the following limits:
937
a
938 (a) When ≤ 1.5
h
939
h  E
940 t  = 12.0 (F13-3)
 w  max Fy
941

F-24
a
942 (b) When > 1.5
h
943
h  0.40 E
944 t  = (F13-4)
 w  max Fy
945
946 where
947 a = clear distance between transverse stiffeners, in. (mm)
948
949 In unstiffened girders, h/tw shall not exceed 260. The ratio of 2 times the web
950 area in compression to the compression flange area, aw, as defined by Equation
951 F4-12, shall not exceed 10.
952
953 3. Cover Plates
954
955 For members with cover plates, the following provisions apply:
956 5, EW
21
957 (a) Flanges of welded beams or girders are permitted to be varied in thickness
958 or width by splicing a series of plates or by the use of cover plates.
Y VI
959
20
960 (b) High-strength bolts or welds connecting flange to web, or cover plate to
AR E
961 flange, shall be proportioned to resist the total horizontal shear resulting
U IC R
962 from the bending forces on the girder. The longitudinal distribution of
963 these bolts or intermittent welds shall be in proportion to the intensity of
964 the shear.
965
BR BL
966 (c) However, the longitudinal spacing shall not exceed the maximum speci-
967 fied for compression or tension members in Sections E6 or D4, respec-
968 tively. Bolts or welds connecting flange to web shall also be proportioned
FE PU
969 to transmit to the web any loads applied directly to the flange, unless pro-
970 vision is made to transmit such loads by direct bearing.
971
ED FT
972 (d) Partial-length cover plates shall be extended beyond the theoretical cutoff
973 point and the extended portion shall be attached to the beam or girder by
AT A
974 high-strength bolts in a slip-critical connection or fillet welds. The attach-

975 ment shall, at the applicable strength given in Sections J2.2, J3.8 or B3.11,
D DR
976 develop the cover plate’s portion of the flexural strength in the beam or
977 girder at the theoretical cutoff point.
978
979 (e) For welded cover plates, the welds connecting the cover plate termination
980 to the beam or girder shall be continuous welds along both edges of the
981 cover plate in the length a′, defined in the following, and shall develop the
982 cover plate’s portion of the available strength of the beam or girder at the
983 distance a′ from the end of the cover plate.
984
985 (1) When there is a continuous weld equal to or larger than three-fourths
986 of the plate thickness across the end of the plate
987
988 a′ = w (F13-5)
989
990 where
991 w = width of cover plate, in. (mm)
992
993 (2) When there is a continuous weld smaller than three-fourths of the
994 plate thickness across the end of the plate

F-25
995
996 a′ = 1.5w (F13-6)
997
998 (3) When there is no weld across the end of the plate
999
1000 a′ = 2w (F13-7)
1001
1002 4. Built-Up Beams
1003
1004 Where two or more beams or channels are used side by side to form a flexural
1005 member, they shall be connected together in compliance with Section E6.2.
1006 When concentrated loads are carried from one beam to another or distributed
1007 between the beams, diaphragms having sufficient stiffness to distribute the load
1008 shall be welded or bolted between the beams.
1009
1010
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

G-1
1 CHAPTER G
2 DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR

3
4
5 This chapter addresses webs of singly or doubly symmetric members subject to shear
6 in the plane of the web, single angles and HSS subject to shear, and shear in the weak
7 direction of singly or doubly symmetric shapes.
9 G1. General Provisions
10 G2. I-Shaped Members and Channels
11 G3. Single Angles and Tees
12 G4. Rectangular HSS, Box Sections, and other Singly and Doubly Symmetric
13
5, EW
Members
21
14 G5. Round HSS
15 G6. Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Minor-
Y VI
16 Axis Shear
20
17 G7. Beams and Girders with Web Openings
AR E
18
U IC R
20 • H3.3 Unsymmetric sections

21 • J4.2 Shear strength of connecting elements
22 • J10.6 Web panel zone shear
BR BL
23
24 G1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
FE PU
25
26 The design shear strength, φvVn, and the allowable shear strength, Vn/Ωv, shall
27 be determined as follows:
28
ED FT
29 (a) For all provisions in this chapter except Section G2.1(a)

30
AT A
31 φv = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωv = 1.67 (ASD)

D DR
32
33 (b) The nominal shear strength, Vn, shall be determined according to Sections
34 G2 through G7.
35
36 G2. I-SHAPED MEMBERS AND CHANNELS
37
38 This section addresses the determination of shear strength for I-shaped mem-
39 bers and channels. Section G2.1 is applicable for webs with and without trans-
40 verse stiffeners. Alternatively, Sections G2.2 and G2.3 may are permitted to be
41 used for webs with transverse stiffeners. Transverse stiffeners, or components
42 providing equivalent restraint of out-of-plane deformation of the web, shall be
43 provided at the member ends and at supports.
44
45 1. Shear Strength of Webs without Tension Field Action
46
47 The nominal shear strength, Vn, is:
48
49 Vn = 0.6FyAwCv1 (G2-1)
50

G-2
51 where
52 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used, ksi
53 (MPa)
54 Aw = area of web, the overall depth times the web thickness, dtw, in.2 (mm2)
55
56 (a) For webs of rolled I-shaped members with h tw ≤ 2.24 E Fy
57 φv = 1.00 (LRFD) Ωv= 1.50 (ASD)
58
59 and
60
61 Cv1 = 1.0 (G2-2)
62
63 where
65 h = clear distance between flanges less the fillet at each flange, in.
66 (mm)
67
5, EW
tw = thickness of web, in. (mm)
21
68
69 User Note: All current ASTM A6 W, S, and HP shapes except W44x230,
Y VI
70 W40x149, W36x135, W33x118, W30x90, W24x55, W16x26, and
20
71 W12x14 meet the criteria stated in Section G2.1(a) for Fy = 50 ksi (345
AR E
72 MPa).
73
U IC R
74 (b) For all other I-shaped members and channels

75
76 (1) The web shear strength coefficient, Cv1, is determined as follows:
77
BR BL
78 (i) When h / tw ≤ 1.10 kv E / Fy

FE PU
79
80 Cv1 = 1.0 (G2-3)
81
82 where
ED FT
83 h = for built-up welded sections, the clear distance between

84 flanges, in. (mm)
AT A
85 = for built-up bolted sections, the distance between fas-

D DR
86 tener lines, in. (mm)

87
88 (ii) When h tw > 1.10 kv E / Fy
89
1.10 kv E / Fy
90 Cv1 = (G2-4)
h / tw
91
92 (2) The web plate shear buckling coefficient, kv, is determined as follows:
93 (i) For webs without transverse stiffeners
94
95 kv = 5.34
96
97 (ii) For webs with transverse stiffeners
5
98 kv = 5 + (G2-5)
( h )2
a /
99 = 5.34 when a / h > 3.0
100 where

G-3
101 a = clear distance between transverse stiffeners, in. (mm)

102
103 User Note: Cv1= 1.0 for all ASTM A6 W, S, M, and HP shapes except
104 M12.5x12.4, M12.5x11.6, M12x11.8, M12x10.8, M12x10, M10x8, and
105 M10x7.5, when Fy = 50 ksi (345 MPa).
106
107 2. Shear Strength of Interior Web Panels with a h ≤ 3 Considering Tension
108 Field Action
109
110 The nominal shear strength, Vn, is determined as follows:
111
112 (a) When h tw ≤ 1.10 kv E / Fy
113 Vn = 0.6 Fy Aw (G2-6)
114
115 (b) When h / tw > 1.10 kv E / Fy
5, EW ( Afc + Aft ) ≤ 2.5 , h b fc ≤ 6.0 and h b ft ≤ 6.0
21
116 (1) When 2 Aw
 
Y VI
117
20 Vn = 0.6 Fy Aw Cv 2 +
1 − Cv 2  (G2-7)
 2 
1.15 1 + ( a / h )
AR E
 
U IC R
118
119 (2) Otherwise
120
 
 
BR BL
1 − Cv 2
121 Vn = 0.6 Fy Aw Cv 2 +  (G2-8)
 1.15  a / h + 1 + ( a / h )  
2
  
FE PU

122
123 where
ED FT
124 The web shear buckling coefficient, Cv2, is determined as follows:

125
126 (i) When h / tw ≤ 1.10 kv E / Fy
AT A
127
D DR
128 Cv2 = 1.0 (G2-9)

129
130 (ii) When 1.10 k v E / Fy < h / t w ≤ 1.37 kv E / Fy
131
1.10 kv E / Fy
132 Cv2 = (G2-10)
h / tw
133
134 (iii) When h / tw > 1.37 kv E / Fy
135
1.51kv E
136 Cv2 = (G2-11)
( h / t w ) 2 Fy
137
138 Afc = area of compression flange, in.2 (mm2)
139 Aft = area of tension flange, in.2 (mm2)
140 bfc = width of compression flange, in. (mm)
141 bft = width of tension flange, in. (mm)

G-4
142 kv is as defined in Section G2.1(b)(2)

143
144 The nominal shear strength is permitted to be taken as the larger of the values
145 from Sections G2.1 and G2.2.
146
147 User Note: Section G2.1 may predict a higher strength for members that do not
148 meet the requirements of Section G2.2(b)(1).
149
150 3. Shear Strength of End Web Panels with a/h ≤ 3 Considering Tension
151 Field Action
152
153 (a) The nominal shear strength for I-shaped members with equal flange areas
154 in the end panel, Vn, is
155
  
1 − Cv 2
156 Vn = 0.6 Fyw Aw Cv 2 + βv   (G2-12)
  2  
 1.15 1 + ( a h )
5, EW   
21
157
158 where
Y VI
202.8 ( M pf + M pm + M pst + M pm ) ≤ 1.0
159 βv = (G2-13)
AR E
h Fyw tw (1 − Cv 2 )
U IC R
160
161 and
162 Fyw = specified minimum yield stress of the web material, ksi (MPa)
163 Mpf = plastic moment of a section composed of the flange and a seg-
BR BL
164 ment of the web with the depth, de, kip-in. (N-mm)
165 Mpm = smaller of Mpf and Mpst, kip-in. (N-mm)
FE PU
166 Mpst = plastic moment of a section composed of the end stiffener plus
167 a length of web equal to de plus the distance from the inside
168 face of the stiffener to the end of the beam, except that the dis-
169 tance from the inside face of the stiffener to the end of the beam
ED FT
170 shall not exceed 0.84tw E Fy for calculation purposes, kip-

AT A
171 in. (N-mm)

172
D DR
173 (i) when Cv2 ≤ 0.8

2
174 d e = 35t w ( 0.8 − Cv 2 ) (G2-14)
175
176 (ii) when Cv2 > 0.8
177 de = 0 (G2-15)
178
179 (b) The flexural stress in the tension flange, αM r S xt , in the end panel shall not Formatted: No bullets or numbering
180 be larger than 0.35Fy.
181
182 where
183
184 α =1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
185
186 (b) The nominal shear strength for I-shaped
187 members with unequal flange areas shall be determined by analysis.
188
189 User Note: An approach for I-shaped members with unequal flange areas is
190 discussed in the commentary.

G-5
191
192 4. Transverse Stiffeners
193
194 For transverse stiffeners, the following shall apply.
195
196 (a) Transverse stiffeners are not required where h tw ≤ 2.54 E Fy , or where
197 the available shear strength provided in accordance with Section G2.1 for
198 kv = 5.34 is greater than the required shear strength.
199 (b) Transverse stiffeners are permitted to be stopped short of the tension
200 flange, provided bearing is not needed to transmit a concentrated load or
201 reaction. The weld by which transverse stiffeners are attached to the web
202 shall be terminated not less than four times nor more than six times the
203 web thickness from the near toe of the web-to-flange weld or web-to-
204 flange fillet. When single stiffeners are used, they shall be detailed at-
205 tached to the compression flange to resist any twist of the compression
206 flange.
207 5, EW
(c) Bolts connecting stiffeners to the girder web shall be spaced not more than
21
208 12 in. (300 mm) on center. If intermittent fillet welds are used, the clear
209 distance between welds shall not be more than 16 times the web thickness
Y VI
210
20
nor more than 10 in. (250 mm).
211
AR E
E
( b t )st ≤ 0.56
U IC R
212 (d) (G2-16)

Fyst
213 (e) I st ≥ I st 2 + ( I st1 − I st 2 ) ρw (G2-17)
214
BR BL
215 where
216
FE PU
217 Fyst = specified minimum yield stress of the stiffener material, ksi
218 (MPa)
219 Ist = moment of inertia of the transverse stiffeners about an axis in
ED FT
220 the web center for stiffener pairs, or about the face in contact
221 with the web plate for single stiffeners, in.4 (mm4)
222 Ist1 = minimum moment of inertia of the transverse stiffeners re-
AT A
223 quired for development of the full shear post-buckling re-

D DR
224 sistance of the stiffened web panels, Vr = Vc1, in.4 (mm4)

1.5
h 4 ρ1.3
st  Fyw 
225 =   (G2-18)
40  E 
226 = minimum moment of inertia of the transverse stiffeners re-
227 quired for development of the full shear post buckling re-
228 sistance of the stiffened web panels, Vr = Vc1, in.4 (mm4)
229 Ist2 = minimum moment of inertia of the transverse stiffeners required
230 for development of the web shear buckling resistance, Vr = Vc2,
231 in.4 (mm4)
 2.5 
232 =  2
− 2  b p tw3 ≥ 0.5b p tw3 (G2-19)
 ( a h ) 
233 = minimum moment of inertia of the transverse stiffeners re-
234 quired for development of the web shear buckling resistance,
235 Vr = Vc2, in.4 (mm4)
236 V c1 = available shear strength calculated with Vn as defined in Sec-
237 tion G2.1 or G2.2, as applicable, kips (N)
238 Vc 2 = available shear strength, kips (N), calculated with

G-6
239 Vn = 0.6Fy AwCv2

240 Vr = required shear strength in the panel being considered, kips (N)
241 bp = smaller of the dimension a and h, in. (mm)
242 ( b t )st = width-to-thickness ratio of the stiffener
243 ρst = larger of Fyw Fyst and 1.0
 V − Vc 2 
244 ρw = maximum shear ratio,  r  ≥ 0, within the web panels
 Vc1 − Vc 2 
245 on each side of the transverse stiffener
246
247 User Note: Ist may conservatively be taken as Ist1. Equation G2-19 provides
248 the minimum stiffener moment of inertia required to attain the web shear
249 post post-buckling resistance according to Sections G2.1 and G2.2, as appli-
250 cable. If less post post-buckling shear strength is required, Equation G2-17
251 provides a linear interpolation between the minimum moment of inertia re-
252 quired to develop web shear buckling and that required to develop the web
253 5, EW
shear post post-buckling strength.
21
254
255 G3. SINGLE ANGLES AND TEES
Y VI
256
20
257 The nominal shear strength, Vn , of a single-angle leg or a tee stem is:
AR E
258
U IC R
259 Vn = 0.6 Fy btCv 2 (G3-1)

260 where
261 Cv2 = web shear buckling strength coefficient, as defined in Section G2.2
BR BL
262 with h/tw =b/t and kv =1.2

263 b = width of the leg resisting the shear force or depth of the tee stem, in.
264 (mm)
FE PU
265 t = thickness of angle leg or tee stem, in. (mm)

266
267 G4. RECTANGULAR HSS, BOX SECTIONS, AND OTHER SINGLY
ED FT
268 AND DOUBLY SYMMETRIC MEMBERS

269
AT A
270 The nominal shear strength, Vn, is:

271
D DR
272 Vn = 0.6 Fy AwCv 2 (G4-1)

273
274 For rectangular HSS and box sections
275 Aw = 2ht, in.2 (mm2)
276 Cv2 = web shear buckling strength coefficient, as defined in Section G2.2,
277 with h/tw =h/t and kv =5
278 h = width resisting the shear force, taken as the clear distance between
279 the flanges less the inside corner radius on each side for HSS or the
280 clear distance between flanges for box sections, in. (mm). If the
281 corner radius is not known, h shall be taken as the corresponding
282 outside dimension minus 3 times the thickness.
283 t = design wall thickness, as defined in Section B4.2, in. (mm)
284
285 For other singly or doubly symmetric shapes
286 Aw = area of web or webs, taken as the sum of the overall depth times the
287 web thickness, dtw, in.2 (mm2)
288 Cv2 = web shear buckling strength coefficient, as defined in Section G2.2,
289 with h/tw =h/t and kv =5

G-7
290 h = width resisting the shear force, in. (mm)

291 = for built-up welded sections, the clear distance between flanges, in.
292 (mm)
293 = for built-up bolted sections, the distance between fastener lines, in.
294 (mm)
295 t = web thickness, as defined in Section B4.2, in. (mm)
296
297 G5. ROUND HSS
298
299 The nominal shear strength, Vn, of round HSS, according to the limit states of
300 shear yielding and shear buckling, shall be determined as:
301
302 Vn = Fcr Ag 2 (G5-1)
303 where
304 Fcr shall be the larger of
1.60E
305 Fcr = (G5-2a)
5, EW Lv 
5
D 4
21
 
D t 
306
Y VI
307 and
20
AR E
0.78 E
308 Fcr = 3
(G5-2b)
U IC R
 D 2
 
 t 
309
BR BL
310 but shall not exceed 0.6Fy

312 D = outside diameter, in. (mm)
FE PU
313 Lv = distance from maximum to zero shear force, in. (mm)

314 t = design wall thickness, in. (mm)
315
ED FT
316 User Note: The shear buckling equations, Equations G5-2a and G5-2b, will
317 control for D/t over 100, high-strength steels, and long lengths. For standard
318 sections, shear yielding will usually control and Fcr = 0.6Fy.
AT A
319
D DR
320 G6. DOUBLY SYMMETRIC AND SINGLY SYMMETRIC MEMBERS

321 SUBJECT TO MINOR-AXIS SHEAR
322
323 For doubly and singly symmetric members loaded in the minor axis without
324 torsion, the nominal shear strength, Vn, for each shear resisting element is:
325
326 Vn = 0.6 Fy b f t f Cv 2 (G6-1)
327
328 where
329 Cv2 = web shear buckling strength coefficient, as defined in Section G2.2
330 with h/tw =bf/2tf for I-shaped members and tees, or h/tw =bf/tf for chan-
331 nels, and kv = 1.2
332 bf = width of flange, in. (mm)
333 tf = thickness of flange, in. (mm)
334
335 User Note: Cv2 = 1.0 for all ASTM A6 W, S, M, and HP shapes, when
336 Fy ≤ 70 ksi (485 MPa).
337

G-8
338 G7. BEAMS AND GIRDERS WITH WEB OPENINGS

339
340 The effect of all web openings on the shear strength of steel and composite
341 beams shall be determined. Reinforcement shall be provided when the required
342 strength exceeds the available strength of the member at the opening.
343
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

H-1
1 CHAPTER H
2 DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION

3
4
5 This chapter addresses members subject to axial force and flexure about one or both axes, with or without torsion, and
6 members subject to torsion only.
8 H1. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Force
9 H2. Unsymmetric and Other Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Force
10 H3. Members Subject to Torsion and Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear, and/or Axial Force
11 H4. Rupture of Flanges with Bolt Holes Subjected to Tension
12
13 User Note: For composite members, see Chapter I.
14
15 H1. 5, EW
DOUBLY AND SINGLY SYMMETRIC MEMBERS SUBJECT TO FLEXURE AND AXIAL FORCE
21
16
17 1. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Compression
Y VI
18
20
19 The interaction of flexure and compression in doubly symmetric members and singly symmetric members
AR E
20 constrained to bend about a geometric axis (x and/or y) shall be limited by Equations H1-1a and H1-1b.
U IC R
21 User Note: Section H2 is permitted to be used in lieu of the provisions of this section.
Pr
22 ≥ 0.2
BR BL
(a) When
Pc
Pr 8  M rx M ry 
FE PU
23 +  +  ≤ 1.0 (H1-1a)
Pc 9  M cx M cy 
24
ED FT
Pr
25 (b) When < 0.2
Pc
AT A
Pr  M rx M ry 
D DR
26 + +  ≤ 1.0 (H1-1b)
2 Pc  M cx M cy 
27 where
28 Pr = required compressive strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
30 Pc = available compressive strength, φPn or Pn Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter E, kips (N)
31 Mr = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
32 combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
33 Mc = available flexural strength, φM n or M n Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter F, kip-in. (N-
34 mm)
35 x = subscript relating symbol to major axis bending
36 y = subscript relating symbol to minor axis bending
37
38 User Note: All terms in Equations H1-1a and H1-1b are to be taken as positive
39
40
H-2
41 2. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Tension

42
43 The interaction of flexure and tension in doubly symmetric members and singly symmetric members
44 constrained to bend about a geometric axis (x and/or y) shall be limited by Equations H1-1a and H1-1b,
45 where
46 Pr = required tensile strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
48 Pc = available tensile strength, φPn or Pn Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter D, kips (N)
49
α Pr
50 For doubly symmetric members, Cb in Chapter F is permitted to be multiplied by 1+ when axial
Pey
51 tension acts concurrently with flexure,
52
53 where
π2 EI y
54 Pey = (H1-2)
L2b
55 5, EW
21
α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
56
Y VI
57 and
20
AR E
59 Iy = moment of inertia about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4)

U IC R
60 Lb = length between points that are either braced against lateral displacement of the compression flange
61 or braced against twist of the cross section, in.4 (mm4)
62
63 3. Doubly Symmetric Rolled Compact Members Subject to Single-Axis Flexure and Compression
BR BL
64
65 For doubly symmetric rolled compact members, with the effective length for torsional buckling less than or
FE PU
66 equal to the effective length for y-axis flexural buckling, Lcz ≤ Lc y , subjected to flexure and compression with
67 moments primarily about their major axis, it is permissible to address the two independent limit states, in-plane
ED FT
68 instability and out-of-plane buckling or lateral-torsional buckling, separately in lieu of the combined approach
69 provided in Section H1.1,
70
AT A
71 where
D DR
72 Lcy = effective length for buckling about the y-axis, in. (mm)
73 Lcz = effective length for buckling about the longitudinal axis, in. (mm)
74
75 For members with M ry M cy ≥ 0.05 , the provisions of Section H1.1 shall be followed.
76 (a) For the limit state of in-plane instability, Equations H1-1a and H1-1b shall be used with Pc taken as the
77 available compressive strength in the plane of bending and Mcx taken as the available flexural strength
78 based on the limit state of yielding.
79
80 (b) For the limit state of out-of-plane buckling and lateral-torsional buckling
2
Pr  Pr   M rx 
81  1.5 − 0.5  + ≤ 1.0 (H1-3)
Pcy  Pcy   Cb M cx 
82 where
83 Pcy = available compressive strength out of the plane of bending, kips (N)
84 Cb = lateral-torsional buckling modification factor determined from Section F1
H-3
85 Mcx = available lateral-torsional strength for major axis flexure determined in accordance with
86 Chapter F using C b = 1.0 , kip-in. (N-mm)
87
88 User Note: In Equation H1-3, C b M cx may be larger than φb M px in LRFD or M px Ωb in ASD. All variables
89 in Equation H1-3 are to be taken as positive. The yielding resistance of the beam-column is captured by
90 Equations H1-1a and H1-1b.
91
92 H2. UNSYMMETRIC AND OTHER MEMBERS SUBJECT TO FLEXURE AND AXIAL FORCE
93
94 This section addresses the interaction of flexure and axial stress for shapes not covered in Section H1. It is
95 permitted to use the provisions of this Section for any shape in lieu of the provisions of Section H1.
f ra f rbw f rbz
96 + + ≤ 1.0 (H2-1)
Fca Fcbw Fcbz
97
98 where
99
100
fra
5, EW = required axial stress at the point of consideration, determined in accordance with Chapter C,
21
using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi (MPa)
101 Fca = available axial stress at the point of consideration, determined in accordance with Chapter E
Y VI
102 20 for compression or Section D2 for tension, ksi (MPa)
103 frbw, frbz = required flexural stress at the point of consideration, determined in accordance with Chapter
AR E
104 C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi (MPa).

U IC R
105 Fcbw, Fcbz = available flexural stress at the point of consideration, determined in accordance with Chapter
106 F, ksi (MPa)
107 Use the section modulus, S, for the specific location in the cross section and consider the sign
108 of the stress.
BR BL
109 w = subscript relating symbol to major principal axis bending

110 z = subscript relating symbol to minor principal axis bending
FE PU
111
112 User Note: The subscripts w and z refer to the principal axes of the unsymmetric cross section. For doubly
113 symmetric cross sections, these can be replaced by the x and y subscripts.
ED FT
114 Equation H2-1 shall be evaluated using the principal bending axes by considering the sense of the flexural
AT A
115 stresses at the critical points of the cross section. The flexural terms are either added to or subtracted from the
116 axial term as applicable. When the axial force is compression, second-order effects shall be included according
D DR
117 to the provisions of Chapter C.

118
119 A more detailed analysis of the interaction of flexure and tension is permitted in lieu of Equation H2-1.
120
121 H3. MEMBERS SUBJECT TO TORSION AND COMBINED TORSION, FLEXURE, SHEAR, AND/OR
122 AXIAL FORCE
123
124 1. Round and Rectangular HSS Subject to Torsion
125
126 The design torsional strength, φT Tn , and the allowable torsional strength, Tn ΩT , for round and rectangular
127 HSS according to the limit states of torsional yielding and torsional buckling shall be determined as follows:
128
129 T n = Fcr C (H3-1)
130
131 φT = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω T = 1.67 (ASD)

H-4
132
133 where
134 C = HSS torsional constant, in.3 (mm3)
135
136 The critical stress, Fcr, shall be determined as follows:
137
138 (a) For round HSS, Fcr shall be the larger of
139
1.23E
140 (1) 5
(H3-2a)
L  D 4
 
D  t 
141
142 and
0.60 E
143 (2) Fcr = 3
(H3-2b)
D 2
 
 t 
144 5, EW
21
145 but shall not exceed 0.6Fy ,
Y VI
146
20
147 where
AR E
148 D = outside diameter, in. (mm)

U IC R
149 L = length of member, in. (mm)

150 t = design wall thickness defined in Section B4.2, in. (mm)
151
BR BL
152 (b) For rectangular HSS

153
FE PU
154 (1) When h t ≤ 2.45 E / Fy

155 Fcr = 0.6Fy (H3-3)
156
ED FT
157 (2) When 2.45 E / Fy < h / t ≤ 3.07 E / Fy

AT A
(
0.6 Fy 2.45 E / Fy )
D DR
158 Fcr = (H3-4)

h
 
t
159
160 (3) When 3.07 E / Fy < h / t ≤ 260
0.458π2 E
161 Fcr = 2
(H3-5)
h
 
t
162
163 where
164 h = flat width of longer side, as defined in Section B4.1b(d), in. (mm)
165
166 User Note: The torsional constant, C, may be conservatively taken as:
2
π(D − t) t
167 For round HSS: C =
2

H-5
168 For rectangular HSS: C = 2( B − t )( H − t )t − 4.5(4 − π)t 3

169
170 2. HSS Subject to Combined Torsion, Shear, Flexure and Axial Force
171
172 When the required torsional strength, Tr, is less than or equal to 20% of the available torsional strength, Tc, the
173 interaction of torsion, shear, flexure and/or axial force for HSS may be determined by Section H1 and the
174 torsional effects may be neglected. When Tr exceeds 20% of Tc, the interaction of torsion, shear, flexure and/or
175 axial force shall be limited, at the point of consideration, by
2
 Pr M rx M ry   Vr Tr 
176  + +  +  +  ≤ 1.0 (H3-6)
 Pc M cx M cy   Vc Tc 
177
178 where
179 Vr/Vc shall be taken as the larger value for the x- or y-axis.
180
181 and
182
183
184 5, EW
Pr = required axial strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
21
combinations, kips (N)
185 Pc = available tensile or compressive strength, φPn or Pn Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter
Y VI
186
20 D or E, kips (N)
187 Mrx, Mry = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD
AR E
188 load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)

U IC R
189 Mcx, Mcy = available flexural strength, φM n or M n Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter F, kip-
190 in. (N-mm)
191 Vr = required shear strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
BR BL

193 Vc = available shear strength, φVn or Vn Ω , determined in accordance with Chapter G, kips (N)
FE PU
194 Tr = required torsional strength, determined in accordance with Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load
196 Tc = available torsional strength, φTn or Tn Ω , determined in accordance with Section H3.1, kip-in.
ED FT
197 (N-mm)
198 x = subscript relating symbol to major axis bending
AT A
199 y = subscript relating symbol to minor axis bending

D DR
200
201 User Note: All terms in Equations H3-6 are to be taken as positive.
202
203 3. Non-HSS Members Subject to Torsion and Combined Stress
204
205 The available torsional strength for non-HSS members shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit
206 states of yielding under normal stress, shear yielding under shear stress, or buckling, determined as follows:
207 φT = 0.90 (LRFD) ; Ω T = 1.67 (ASD)
208
209 (a) For the limit state of yielding under normal stress
210
211 Fn = Fy (H3-7)
212
213 (b) For the limit state of shear yielding under shear stress
214

H-6
215 Fn = 0.6Fy (H3-8)

216
217 (c) For the limit state of buckling
218
219 Fn = Fcr (H3-9)
220
221 where
222 Fcr = buckling stress for the section as determined by analysis, ksi (MPa)
223
224
225 H4. RUPTURE OF FLANGES WITH BOLT HOLES AND SUBJECTED TO TENSION
226
227 At locations of bolt holes in flanges subjected to tension under combined axial force and major axis flexure,
228 flange tensile rupture strength shall be limited by Equation H4-1. Each flange subjected to tension due to axial
229 force and flexure shall be checked separately.
230
Pr M rx
231 + ≤ 1.0 (H4-1)
5, EW Pc M cx
21
232
233 where
Y VI
234 20
Pr = required axial strength of the member at the location of the bolt holes, determined in accordance with
235 Chapter C, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, positive in tension and negative in compression,
AR E
236 kips (N)

U IC R
237 Pc = available axial strength for the limit state of tensile rupture of the net section at the location of bolt
238 holes, φPn or Pn Ω , determined in accordance with Section D2(b), kips (N)
239 Mrx = required flexural strength at the location of the bolt holes, determined in accordance with Chapter C,
BR BL
240 using LRFD or ASD load combinations, positive for tension and negative for compression in the flange
241 under consideration and negative for compression, kip-in. (N-mm)
FE PU
242 Mcx = available flexural strength about x-axis for the limit state of tensile rupture of the flange, φM n or M n Ω
243 , determined according to Section F13.1. When the limit state of tensile rupture in flexure does not
244 apply, use the plastic moment, Mp, determined with bolt holes not taken into consideration, kip-in. (N-
ED FT
245 mm)
246
AT A
247
D DR

I-1
1 CHAPTER I
2 DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

3
4
5 This chapter addresses composite members composed of rolled or built-up structural
6 steel shapes or HSS and structural concrete acting together, and steel beams support-
7 ing a reinforced concrete slab so interconnected that the beams and the slab act to-
8 gether to resist bending. Simple and continuous composite beams with steel headed
9 stud anchors, as well asand encased and filled beams, constructed with or without
10 temporary shores, are included. This chapter also addresses concrete filled composite
11 plate shear walls composed of structural steel plates, ties, steel anchors, and structural
12 concrete acting together.
13
15 5, EW
21
16 I1. General Provisions
17 I2. Axial Force
Y VI
18 I3.
20
Flexure
19 I4. Shear
AR E
20 I5. Combined Flexure and Axial Force

U IC R
21 I6. Load Transfer

22 I7. Composite Diaphragms and Collector Beams
23 I8. Steel Anchors
24
BR BL
25 I1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

26
27 In determining load effects in members and connections of a structure that in-
FE PU
28 cludes composite members, consideration shall be given to the effective cross

29 sections at the time each increment of load is applied.
30
ED FT
31 1. Concrete and Steel Reinforcement

32
AT A
33 The design, detailing and material properties related to the concrete and rein-
34 forcing steel portions of composite construction shall comply with the rein-
D DR
35 forced concrete and reinforcing bar design specifications stipulated by the ap-
36 plicable building code. Additionally, the provisions in the Building Code Re-
37 quirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318) and the Metric Building Code
38 Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318M), subsequently referred to in
39 Chapter I collectively as ACI 318, shall apply with the following exceptions
40 and limitations:
41
42 (a) Concrete and steel reinforcement material limitations shall be as specified
43 in Section I1.3.
44 (b) Longitudinal and transverse reinforcement requirements shall be as speci-
45 fied in Sections I2 and I3 in addition to those specified in ACI 318.
46 Concrete and steel reinforcement components designed in accordance with ACI
47 318 shall be based on a level of loading corresponding to LRFD load combina-
48 tions.
49 User Note: It is the intent of this Specification that the concrete and reinforcing
50 steel portions of composite concrete members are detailed utilizing the

I-2
51 provisions of ACI 318 as modified by this Specification. All requirements spe-

52 cific to composite members are covered in this Specification.
53 Note that the design basis for ACI 318 is strength design. Designers using ASD
54 for steel must be conscious of the different load factors.
55
56 2. Nominal Strength of Composite Sections
57
58 The nominal strength of composite sections shall be determined in accordance
59 with either the plastic stress distribution method, the strain compatibility
60 method, the elastic stress distribution method, or the effective stress-strain
61 method, as defined in this section.
62
63 The tensile strength of the concrete shall be neglected in the determination of
64 the nominal strength of composite members.
65
66 Local buckling effects shall be evaluated for filled composite members, as de-
67 5, EW
fined in Section I1.4. Local buckling effects need not be evaluated for encased
21
68 composite columnsmembers or composite plate shear walls meeting the re-
69 quirements of this chapter.
Y VI
70
20
71 2a. Plastic Stress Distribution Method
AR E
72
U IC R
73 For the plastic stress distribution method, the nominal strength shall be com-
74 puted assuming that steel components have reached a stress of Fy in either ten-
75 sion or compression, and concrete components in compression due to axial
76 force and/or flexure have reached a stress of 0 .8 5 f c′ , where f c′ is the speci-
BR BL
77 fied compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa). For round HSS filled with
78 concrete, a stress of 0.95f c′ is permitted to be used for concrete components in
FE PU
79 compression due to axial force and/or flexure to account for the effects of con-
80 crete confinement.
81
ED FT
82 2b. Strain Compatibility Method

83
84 For the strain compatibility method, a linear distribution of strains across the
AT A
85 section shall be assumed, with the maximum concrete compressive strain equal
D DR
86 to 0.003 in./in. (mm/mm). The stress-strain relationships for steel and concrete
87 shall be obtained from tests or from published results.
88
89 User Note: The strain compatibility method can be used to determine nominal
90 strength for irregular sections and for cases where the steel does not exhibit
91 elasto-plastic behavior. General guidelines for the strain compatibility method
92 for encased members subjected to axial load, flexure or both are given in AISC
93 Design Guide 6, Load and Resistance Factor Design of W-Shapes Encased in
94 Concrete, and ACI 318.
95
96 2c. Elastic Stress Distribution Method
97
98 For the elastic stress distribution method, the nominal strength shall be deter-
99 mined from the superposition of elastic stresses for the limit state of yielding
100 or concrete crushing.
101
102 2d. Effective Stress-Strain Method
103
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, xxxx, 2022

I-3
104 For the effective stress-strain method, the nominal strength shall be computed
105 assuming strain compatibility, and effective stress-strain relationships for steel
106 and concrete components accounting for the effects of local buckling, yielding,
107 interaction and concrete confinement.
108
109 3. Material Limitations
110
111 For concrete, structural steel, and steel reinforcing bars in composite systems,
112 the following limitations shall be met unless the design is based on the require-
113 ments of Appendix X is used:
114 (a) For the determination of the available strength, concrete shall have a spec-
115 ified compressive strength, f′c, of not less than 3 ksi (21 MPa) nor more
116 than 10 ksi (69 MPa) for normal weight concrete and not less than 3 ksi
117 (21 MPa) nor more than 6 ksi (41 MPa) for lightweight concrete.
118 (b) The specified minimum yield stress of structural steel used in calculating
119 the strength of composite members shall not exceed 75 ksi (525 MPa).
5, EW
21
120 (c) The specified minimum yield stress of reinforcing bars used in calculating
121 the strength of composite members shall not exceed 80 ksi (550 MPa).
Y VI
122
20
The design of filled composite members constructed from high-strength mate-
123 rials with strengths above the limits noted in this section shall be in accordance
AR E
124 with Appendix X.

U IC R
125 User Note: Appendix X includes equations for determining the available
126 strength of rectangular filled composite members with either the specified min-
127 imum yield stress of structural steel exceeding 75 ksi (525 MPa) but less than
128 100 ksi (690 MPa) or specified compressive strength, f′c, exceeding 10 ksi (69
BR BL
129 MPa) but less than 15 ksi (100 MPa).

FE PU
130 4. Classification of Filled Composite Sections for Local Buckling

131
132 For compression, filled composite sections are classified as compact composite,
133 noncompact composite, or slender composite sections. For a section to qualify
ED FT
134 as compact composite, the maximum width-to-thickness ratio, λ, of its com-

135 pression steel elements shall not exceed the limiting width-to-thickness ratio,
AT A
136 λp, from Table I1.1a. If the maximum width-to-thickness ratio of one or more
D DR
137 steel compression elements exceeds λp, but does not exceed λr from Table
138 I1.1a, the filled composite section is noncompact composite. If the maximum
139 width-to-thickness ratio of any compression steel element exceeds λr, the sec-
140 tion is slender composite. The maximum permitted width-to-thickness ratio
141 shall be as specified in the tableTable I1.1a.
142
143 For flexure, filled composite sections are classified as compact composite,
144 noncompact composite, or slender composite sections. For a section to qualify
145 as compact composite, the maximum width-to-thickness ratio of its compres-
146 sion steel elements shall not exceed the limiting width-to-thickness ratio, λp,
147 from Table I1.1b. If the maximum width-to-thickness ratio of one or more steel
148 compression elements exceeds λp, but does not exceed λr from Table I1.1b, the
149 section is noncompact composite. If the width-to-thickness ratio of any steel
150 element exceeds λr, the section is slender composite. The maximum permitted
151 width-to-thickness ratio shall be as specified in the tableTable I1.1b.
152
153 Refer to Section B4.1b for definitions of width, b and D, and thickness, t, for
154 rectangular and round HSS sections and box sections of uniform thickness.
155

I-4
156 User Note: All current ASTM A1085/A1085M and ASTM A500/A500M
157 Grade C square HSS sections are compact composite according to the limits of
158 Table I1.1a and Table I1.1b, except HSS7×7×1/8, HSS8×8×1/8,
159 HSS10x10x3/16 and HSS12×12×3/16, which are noncompact composite for
160 both axial compression and flexure, and HSS9x9x1/8, which is slender
161 compsite for both axial compression and flexure.
162
163 All current ASTM A500/A500M Grade C round HSS sections are compact
164 composite according to the limits of Table I1.1a and Table I1.1b for both axial
165 compression and flexure, with the exception of HSS6.625x0.125,
166 HSS7.000x0.125, HSS10.000x0.188, HSS14.000x0.250,
167 HSS16.000×0.250, and HSS20.000x0.375, which are noncompact composite
168 for flexure.
169
170
TABLE I1.1a
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Compression Steel Elements in
5, EW
Composite Members Subject to Axial Compression
21
for Use with Section I2.2
Y VI
20 λp λr
Compact Noncompact
AR E
Width-to- Composite/ Composite/

U IC R
Description of Thickness Noncompact Slender Com- Maximum

Element Ratio Composite posite Permitted
Walls of Rectan-
gular
E E E
BR BL
HSS and Box Sec- 2.26 3.00 5.00

b/t
tions Fy Fy Fy
of Uniform Thick-
FE PU
ness
0.15E 0.19E 0.31E
Round HSS D/t
Fy Fy Fy
ED FT
171
TABLE I1.1b
AT A
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Compression Steel Elements in

D DR
Composite Members Subject to Flexure

for Use with Section I3.4
λp λr
Compact Noncompact
Width-to- Composite/ Composite/
Description of Thickness Noncompact Slender Maximum
Element Ratio Composite Composite Permitted
Flanges of Rectan-
gular E E E
HSS and Box Sec- b/t 2.26 3.00 5.00
Fy Fy Fy
tions of
Uniform Thickness
Webs of Rectangu-
lar
HSS and Box Sec- E E E
h/t 3.00 5.70 5.70
tions Fy Fy Fy
of Uniform Thick-
ness
0.09E 0.31E 0.31E
Round HSS D/t
Fy Fy Fy

I-5
172
173 5. Stiffness for Calculation of Required Strengths
174
175 For the direct analysis method of design, the required strengths of encased com-
176 posite members, filled composite members, and composite plate shear walls shall
177 be determined using the provisions of Section C2 and the following require-
178 ments:
179
180 (1) The nominal flexural stiffness of encased and filled composite members
181 subject to net compression shall be taken as the effective stiffness of the
182 composite section, EIeff, as defined in Section I2.
183
184 (2) The nominal axial stiffness of encased and filled composite members sub-
185 ject to net compression shall be taken as the summation of the elastic axial
186 stiffnesses of each component.
187
188 (3) The Sstiffness of encased and filled composite members subject to net ten-
189 5, EW
sion shall be taken as the stiffness of the bare steel members in accordance
21
190 with Chapter C.
191
Y VI
192
20
(4) The stiffness reduction parameter, τb, shall be taken as 0.8 for encased and
193 filled composite members.
AR E
194
U IC R
195 User Note: Taken together, the stiffness reduction factors require the use
196 of 0.64EIeff for the flexural stiffness and 0.8 times the nominal axial stiff-
197 ness of encased composite members and filled composite members subject
198 to net compression in the analysis.
BR BL
199
200 Stiffness values appropriate for the calculation of deflections and for use
FE PU
201 with the effective length method are discussed in the Commentary.
202
203 (5) The flexural stiffness, (EI)eff, axial stiffness, (EA)eff, and shear stiffnesses,
204 (GA)eff, of composite plate shear walls shall account for the extent of con-
ED FT
205 crete cracking under LRFD load combinations or 1.6 times the ASD load
206 combinations. It is permitted to use the following to estimate stiffness be
AT A
207 calculated as follows:

D DR
208
209 ( EI ) eff = E s I s + 0.35 Ec I c (I1-1)
210 ( EA ) eff = E s As + 0.45 E c Ac (I1-2)
211 (GA) eff = G s Asw + Gc Ac (I1-3)
212 where
213 Ac = area of concrete, in.2 (mm2)
214 As = area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)
215 Asw = area of steel plates in the direction of in-plane shear, in.2 (mm2)
216 Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete
217 = w1.5
c f c′ , ksi ( 0.043 w1.5
c f c′ , MPa)
218 Es = modulus of elasticity of steel
219 = 29,000 ksi (200,000 MPa)
220 Gs = shear modulus of steel
221 = 11,150 ksi (76,880 MPa)
222 Gc = shear modulus of concrete
223 = 0.4 Ec
224 Ic = moment of inertia of the concrete section about the elastic neu-
225 tral axis of the composite section, in.4 (mm4)

I-6
226 Is = moment of inertia of steel shape about the elastic neutral axis of
227 the composite section, in.4 (mm4)
228 wc = weight of concrete per unit volume (90 ≤ wc ≤ 155 lb/ft3 or 1500
229 ≤ wc ≤ 2500 kg/m3)
230
231 (6) The stiffness reduction parameter, τb, shall be taken as 1.0 for composite
232 plate shear walls.
233
234 6. Requirements for Composite Plate Shear Walls
235 The steel plates shall comprise at least 1% but no more than 10% of the total
236 composite cross-sectional area. The opposing steel plates shall be connected to
237 each other using ties consisting of bars, structural shapes, or built-up members.
238 For filled composite plate shear walls, the steel plates shall be anchored to the
239 concrete using ties or a combination of ties and steel anchors. Walls without
240 flange (closure) plates or boundary elements are not permitted.
241
242 6a.
5, EW
Slenderness Requirement
21
243 The slenderness ratio of the plates, b/t, shall be limited as follows:
Y VI
244
20 b
≤ 1.2
E
(I1-4)
t Fy
AR E
U IC R
245 where
246 b = largest clear distance between rows of steel anchors or ties, in. (mm)
247 t = plate thickness, in. (mm)
248
BR BL
249 6b. Tie Bar Requirement

250
FE PU
251 Tie bars shall have spacing no greater than 1.0 times the wall thickness, tsc. The
252 tie bar spacing to plate thickness ratio, st S/t, shall be limited as follows:
ED FT
st Es
253 ≤ 1.0 (I1-5)
t 2α + 1
AT A
4
t  t 
D DR
254 α = 1.7  sc − 2   (I1-6)

t   dtie 
255 where
256 S st = largest clear spacing of the ties, in. (mm)
257 t = plate thickness, in. (mm)
258 tsc = thickness of composite plate shear wall, in. (mm)
259 dtie = effective diameter of the tie bar, in. (mm)
260
261 I2. AXIAL FORCE
262
263 This section applies to encased composite members, filled composite members,
264 and composite plate shear walls subject to axial force.
265
266 1. Encased Composite Members
267
268 1a. Limitations
269
270 For encased composite members, the following limitations shall be met:

I-7
271
272 (a) The cross-sectional area of the steel core shall comprise at least 1% of
273 the total composite cross section.
274 (b) Concrete encasement of the steel core shall be reinforced with continu-
275 ous longitudinal bars and transverse reinforcement consisting of stir-
276 rups,lateral ties, hoops, or spirals.
277 Detailing of longitudinal reinforcing, including bar spacing and con-
278 crete cover requirements, shall conform to ACI 318.
279 Transverse reinforcement where specified as stirrups, ties, or hoops
280 shall consist of a minimum of either a No. 3 (10 mm) bar spaced at a
281 maximum of 12 in. (300 mm) on center, or a No. 4 (13 mm) bar or larger
282 spaced at a maximum of 16 in. (400 mm) on center shall be used. De-
283 formed wire or welded wire reinforcement of equivalent area are is per-
284 mitted.
285 Maximum spacing of lateral stirrups, ties, or hoops shall not exceed 0.5
286 5, EW
times the least column dimension. Refer to ACI 318 for concrete cover
21
287 requirements.
288 (c) The minimum reinforcement ratio for continuous longitudinal reinforc-
Y VI
289
20
ing, ρsr, shall be 0.004, where ρsr is given by:
AR E
Asr
290 ρ sr = (I2-1)
U IC R
Ag
291 where
292 Ag = gross area of composite member, in.2 (mm2)
293 Asr = area of continuous reinforcing bars, in.2 (mm2)
BR BL
294
295 (d) The maximum reinforcement ratio for continuous longitudinal reinforcing,
FE PU
296 ρsr, shall be based on ACI 318 with the gross area of concrete, Ag, as-
297 sumed in the calculations.
298
ED FT
299 User Note: Refer to ACI 318 for additional longitudinal and transverse steel,
300 lateral tie, and spiral reinforcing provisions. Refer to Section I4 for shear re-
301 quirements.
AT A
302
D DR
303 1b. Compressive Strength

304
305 The design compressive strength, φcPn, and allowable compressive strength,
306 Pn/Ωc, of doubly symmetric axially loaded encased composite members shall
307 be determined for the limit state of flexural buckling based on member slender-
308 ness as follows:
309
310 φc = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωc = 2.00 (ASD)
311
Pno
312 (a) When ≤ 2.25
Pe
313
 Pno 
314 Pn = Pno  0.658 Pe  (I2-2)
 
 
315
316

I-8
Pno
317 (b) When > 2.25
Pe
318
319 Pn = 0.877Pe (I2-3)
320
321
322 where
323 Pno = nominal axial compressive strength without consideration of length
324 effects, kips (N)
325 = F y As + F ysr Asr + 0.85 f c′ Ac Pno = F y As + F ysr Asr + 0.85 f c′ Ac (I2-
326 4)
327 Pe = elastic critical buckling load determined in accordance with Chap-
328 ter C or Appendix 7, kips (N)
2 2
329 = π (EIeff ) Lc (I2-5)
331 As 5, EW
= cross-sectional area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)
21
333 = w1.5 f c′ , ksi ( 0.043 w1.5 f c′ , MPa)
Y VI
334 EIeff
20 c c
= effective stiffness of composite section, kip-in.2 (N-mm2)

AR E
335 = EsIs +EsIsr +C1EcIc (I2-6)

336 C1 = coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of an encased com-
U IC R
337 posite compression member

 As + Asr 
338 = 0.25 + 3  ≤ 0.7 (I2-7)
 Ag 
BR BL
339 Es = modulus of elasticity of steel

340 = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa)
FE PU
341 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of steel section, ksi (MPa)

342 Fysr = specified minimum yield stress of reinforcing steel, ksi (MPa)
343 Ic = moment of inertia of the concrete section about the elastic neutral
ED FT
344 axis of the composite section, in.4 (mm4)

345 Is = moment of inertia of steel shape about the elastic neutral axis of
AT A
346 the composite section, in.4 (mm4)

347 Isr = moment of inertia of reinforcing bars about the elastic neutral axis
D DR
348 of the composite section, in.4 (mm4)

351 Lc = KL = effective length of the member, in. (mm)
352 fc′ = specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa)
353 wc = weight of concrete per unit volume (90 ≤ wc ≤ 155 lb/ft3 or 1500
354 ≤ wc ≤ 2500 kg/m3)
355
356 The available compressive strength need not be less than that specified deter-
357 mined for the bare steel member, as required by in accordance with Chapter
358 E.
359
360 1c. Tensile Strength
361
362 The available tensile strength of axially loaded encased composite members
363 shall be determined for the limit state of yielding as:
364
365 Pn = F y As + Fysr Asr (I2-8)

I-9
366
367 φt = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)
368
369 1d. Load Transfer
370
371 Load transfer requirements for encased composite members shall be deter-
372 mined in accordance with Section I6.
373
374 1e. Detailing Requirements
375
376 For encased composite members, the following detailing requirements shall be
377 met:
378
379 (a) Clear spacing between the steel core and longitudinal reinforcing shall be
380 a minimum of 1.5 reinforcing bar diameters, but not less than 1.5 in. (38
381 mm).
382
383 5, EW
(b) If the composite cross section is built up from two or more encased steel
21
384 shapes, the shapes shall be interconnected with lacing, tie plates or compa-
385 rable components to prevent buckling of individual shapes due to loads ap-
Y VI
386
20
plied prior to hardening of the concrete.
387
AR E
U IC R
389 lateral tie, and spiral reinforcing provisions. Refer to Section I4 for shear re-
390 quirements. These limitations and requirements are not applicable to composite
391 plate shear walls.
392
BR BL
393 2. Filled Composite Members

394
395 2a. Limitations
FE PU
396
397 For filled composite members, the following limitations shall be met:
398
ED FT
399 (a) The cross-sectional area of the steel section shall comprise at least 1%
400 of the total composite cross section.
AT A
401 (b) Filled composite members shall be classified for local buckling accord-
D DR
402 ing to Section I1.4.

403 (c) Minimum longitudinal reinforcement is not required. If longitudinal re-
404 inforcement is provided, internal transverse reinforcement is not re-
405 quired for strength; however, minimum internal transverse reinforce-
406 ment shall be provided for constructabilityas specified in the following:
407 stirrups, ties, or hoops consisting of a. A minimum of either a No. 3 (10
408 mm) bar spaced at a maximum of 12 in. (300 mm) on center, or a No. 4
409 (13 mm) bar or larger spaced at a maximum of 16 in. (400 mm) on cen-
410 ter shall be used. Deformed wire or welded wire reinforcement of
411 equivalent area isare permitted.
412 (d) If longitudinal reinforcing steel is provided for strength, the maximum
413 reinforcement ratio shall be based on ACI 318 requirements for the
414 gross area of concrete.
416 lateral tie, and spiral reinforcing provisions. Refer to Section I4 and Section I4
417 Commentary for shear in concrete filled members.
418

I-10
419 2b. Compressive Strength

420
421 The available compressive strength of axially loaded doubly symmetric filled
422 composite members shall be determined for the limit state of flexural buckling
423 in accordance with Section I2.1b with the following modifications:
424
425 (a) For compact composite sections
426
427 Pno = Pp (I2-9a)
428
429 where
430 Pp = plastic axial compressive strength, kips (N)
 E   E  Field Code Changed
431 = Fy As + C 2 f c′  Ac + Asr s  Pp = Fy As + C 2 f c′  Ac + Asr s 
 E c   Ec 
432 (I2-9b)
433 C2 = 0.85 for rectangular sections and 0.95 for round sections
434 5, EW
21
435 (b) For noncompact composite sections
436
Y VI
437
20 Pno = Pp −
Pp − Py
(λ − λ p )
2
(I2-9c)
( λr − λ p )
2
AR E
U IC R
438
439 where
440 λ, λp and λr are width-to-thickness ratios determined from Table I1.1a
441
BR BL
442 Pp is determined from Equation I2-9b

 E 
443 Py = Fy As + 0.7 f c′  Ac + Asr s  (I2-9d)
FE PU
 Ec 
444
445 (c) For slender composite sections
ED FT
 E 
446 Pno = Fcr As + 0.7 fc′  Ac + Asr s 
 Ec 
AT A
 E  Field Code Changed

D DR
447 Pno = Fn As + 0.7 f c′  Ac + Asr s  (I2-9e)

 Ec 
448
449 where
450 The critical buckling stress for the steel section of filled composite
451 members, Fn, is determined as follows:
452
453 (1) For rectangular filled sections
9 Es 9 Es Field Code Changed
454 Fcr = Fn = 2
(I2-10)
2
b b
   
t t
455
456 (2) For round filled sections
457
0.72Fy 0.72Fy Field Code Changed
458 Fcr = 0.2
Fn = 0.2 (I2-11)
 D  Fy   D  Fy 
 t  E   t  E 
  s    s 

I-11
459
460 The effective stiffness of the composite section, EIeff, for all sections shall be:
461
462 EIeff = EsIs + EsIsr +C3EcIc (I2-12)
463
464 where
465 C3 = coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of filled composite
466 compression member
 As + Asr 
467 = 0.45 + 3  ≤ 0.9 (I2-13)
 Ag 
468
469 The available compressive strength need not be less than specified that deter-
470 mined for the bare steel member, as required by in accordance with Chapter
471 E.
472
473 2c. Tensile Strength
474 5, EW
21
475 The available tensile strength of axially loaded filled composite members
Y VI
477
20
478 Pn = As Fy + Asr F ysr (I2-14)
AR E
479
U IC R
480 φt = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)

481
482 2d. Load Transfer
483
BR BL
484 Load transfer requirements for filled composite members shall be determined
485 in accordance with Section I6.
FE PU
486
487 2e. Detailing Requirements
488
ED FT
489 Clear spacing between the inside of the steel sectionperimeter and longitudi-
490 nal reinforcing, where provided, shall be a minimum of 1.5 reinforcing bar
491 diameters, but not less than 1.5 in. (38 mm).
AT A
492
D DR
493 3. Composite Plate Shear Walls

494
495 3a. Limitations
496
497 For composite plate shear walls, the following limitations shall be met:
498
499 (a) The steel plates shall comprise at least 1% but no more than 10% of the total
500 composite cross-section area.
501 (b) The steel plates shall satisfy the slenderness requirements of Section I1.6.
502 (c) Walls without flange (closure) plates or boundary elements are not permitted.
503 (d) The height-to-length ratio of the wall shall be greater than or equal to 3.
504
505 3b3a. Compressive Strength
506
507 The available compressive strength of axially loaded composite plate shear
508 walls shall be determined for the limit state of flexural buckling in accordance
509 with Section I2.1b. The value of flexural stiffness from Section I1.5 shall be
510 used along with the section axial load capacity, Pno, determined as follows:
511

I-12
512 Pno = F y As + 0.85 f c′ Ac (I2-15)

513
514 φc = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)
515
516 3c3b. Tensile Strength
517
518 The available tensile strength of axially loaded composite plate shear walls
520
521 Pn = As F y (I2-16)
522 φt = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωt = 1.67 (ASD)
523
524 I3. FLEXURE
525
526 This section applies to three types of composite members subject to flexure:
527 composite beams with steel anchors consisting of steel headed stud anchors
528
5, EW
or steel channel anchors, concrete encased members, and concrete filled
21
529 members.
530
Y VI
531
532
1. General 20
AR E
533 1a. Effective Width

534
U IC R
535 The effective width of the concrete slab shall be the sum of the effective
536 widths for each side of the beam centerline, each of which shall not exceed:
537
BR BL
538 (a) one-eighth of the beam span, center-to-center of supports;

539 (b) one-half the distance to the centerline of the adjacent beam; or
540 (c) the distance to the edge of the slab.
FE PU
541
542 1b. Strength During Construction
543
ED FT
544 When temporary shores are not used during construction, the steel section
545 alone shall have sufficient strength to support all loads applied prior to the
546 concrete attaining 75% of its specified strength, fc′. The available flexural
AT A
547 strength of the steel section shall be determined in accordance with Chapter
D DR
548 F.
549
550 2. Composite Beams with Steel Headed Stud or Steel Channel Anchors
551
552 2a. Positive Flexural Strength
553
554 The design positive flexural strength, φ b M n , and allowable positive flexural
555 strength, M n Ωb , shall be determined for the limit state of yielding as fol-
556 lows:
557
558 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
559
560 (a) When h tw ≤ 3.76 E Fy
561
562 Mn shall be determined from the plastic stress distribution on the com-
563 posite section for the limit state of yielding (plastic moment).
564

I-13
565 User Note: All current ASTM A6 W, S and HP shapes satisfy the limit
566 given in Section I3.2a(a) for Fy ≤ 70 ksi (485 MPa).
567
568 (b) When h tw > 3.76 E Fy
569
570 Mn shall be determined from the superposition of elastic stresses, con-
571 sidering the effects of shoring, for the limit state of yielding (yield mo-
572 ment).
573
574 2b. Negative Flexural Strength
575
576 The available negative flexural strength shall be determined for the steel sec-
577 tion alone, in accordance with the requirements of Chapter F.
578
579 Alternatively, the available negative flexural strength shall be determined
580 from the plastic stress distribution on the composite section, for the limit state
581 5, EW
of yielding (plastic moment), with
21
582
583 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
Y VI
584
20
585 provided that the following limitations are met:
AR E
586
U IC R
587 (a) The steel beam is compact and is adequately braced in accordance with
588 Chapter F.
589
590 (b) Steel headed stud or steel channel anchors connect the slab to the steel
BR BL
591 beam in the negative moment region.

592
FE PU
593 (c) The slab reinforcement parallel to the steel beam, within the effective
594 width of the slab, is developed.
595
596 User Note: To check compactness of a composite beam in negative flexure,
ED FT
597 Case 10 in Table B4.1 is appropriate to use for flanges, and Case 16 of Table
598 B4.1 is appropriate to use for webs.
AT A
599
D DR
600 2c. Composite Beams with Formed Steel Deck

601
602 1. General
603
604 The available flexural strength of composite construction consisting of
605 concrete slabs on formed steel deck connected to steel beams shall be
606 determined by the applicable portions of Sections I3.2a and I3.2b, with
607 the following requirements:
608
609 (a) The nominal rib height shall not be greater than 3 in. (75 mm). The
610 average width of concrete rib or haunch, wr, shall be not less than
611 2 in. (50 mm), but shall not be taken in calculations as more than
612 the minimum clear width near the top of the steel deck.
613
614 (b) The concrete slab shall be connected to the steel beam with steel
615 headed stud anchors welded either through the deck or directly to
616 the steel cross section. Steel headed stud anchors, after installation,
617 shall extend not less than 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) above the top of the
618 steel deck and there shall be at least 1/2 in. (13 mm) of specified
619 concrete cover above the top of the steel headed stud anchors.

I-14
620
621 (c) The slab thickness above the steel deck shall be not less than 2 in.
622 (50 mm).
623
624 (d) Steel deck shall be anchored to all supporting members at a spacing
625 not to exceed 18 in. (460 mm). Such anchorage shall be provided
626 by steel headed stud anchors, a combination of steel headed stud
627 anchors and arc spot (puddle) welds, or other devices specified by
628 the contract documentsdesign documents and specifications issued
629 for construction.
630
631 2. Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Steel Beam
632
633 Concrete below the top of the steel deck shall be neglected in determin-
634 ing composite section properties and in calculating Ac for deck ribs ori-
635 ented perpendicular to the steel beams.
636
637 3. 5, EW
Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to Steel Beam
21
638
639 Concrete below the top of the steel deck is permitted to be included in
Y VI
640 20
determining composite section properties and in calculating Ac.
641
AR E
642 Formed steel deck ribs over supporting beams are permitted to be split
U IC R
643 longitudinally and separated to form a concrete haunch.

644
645 When the nominal depth of steel deck is 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) or greater,
646 the average width, wr, of the supported haunch or rib shall be not less
BR BL
647 than 2 in. (50 mm) for the first steel headed stud anchor in the transverse
648 row plus four stud diameters for each additional steel headed stud an-
649 chor.
FE PU
650
651 2d. Load Transfer Between Steel Beam and Concrete Slab
652
ED FT
653 1. Load Transfer for Positive Flexural Strength

654
AT A
655 The entire horizontal shear at the interface between the steel beam and
656 the concrete slab shall be assumed to be transferred by steel headed stud
D DR
657 or steel channel anchors, except for concrete-encased beams as defined

658 in Section I3.3. For composite action with concrete subject to flexural
659 compression, the nominal shear force between the steel beam and the
660 concrete slab transferred by steel anchors, V′, between the point of max-
661 imum positive moment and the point of zero moment shall be deter-
662 mined as the lowest value in accordance with the limit states of concrete
663 crushing, tensile yielding of the steel section, or the shear strength of
664 the steel anchors:
665
666 (a) Concrete crushing
667
668 V ′ = 0.85fc′Ac (I3-1a)
669
670 (b) Tensile yielding of the steel section
671
672 V ′ = F y As (I3-1b)
673
674 (c) Shear strength of steel headed stud or steel channel anchors

I-15
675
676 V ′ = ΣQn (I3-1c)
677
678 where
679 Ac = area of concrete slab within effective width, in.2 (mm2)
680 As = cross-sectional area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)
681 ΣQn = sum of nominal shear strengths of steel headed stud or steel
682 channel anchors between the point of maximum positive
683 moment and the point of zero moment, kips (N)
684
685 The effect of ductility (slip capacity) of the shear connection at the in-
686 terface of the concrete slab and the steel beam shall be considered.
687
688 2. Load Transfer for Negative Flexural Strength
689
690 In continuous composite beams where longitudinal reinforcing steel in
691
5, EW
the negative moment regions is considered to act compositely with the
21
692 steel beam, the total horizontal shear between the point of maximum
693 negative moment and the point of zero moment shall be determined as
Y VI
694
695
20
the lower value in accordance with the following limit states:
AR E
696 (a) For the limit state of tensile yielding of the slab reinforcement
U IC R
697
698 V ′ = F ysr Asr (I3-2a)
699 where
700 Asr = area of developed longitudinal reinforcing steel within the
BR BL
701 effective width of the concrete slab, in.2 (mm2)

702 Fysr = specified minimum yield stress of the reinforcing steel, ksi
FE PU
703 (MPa)
704
705 (b) For the limit state of shear strength of steel headed stud or steel
706 channel anchors
ED FT
707
708 V ′ = ΣQn (I3-2b)
AT A
709
D DR

711
712 3a. Limitations
713
714 For encased composite members, the following limitations shall be met:
715
716 (a) The available flexural strength of concrete-encased members shall be
717 determined as follows:
718
719 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
720
721 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be determined using one of the
722 following methods:
723
724 (1) The superposition of elastic stresses on the composite section, consid-
725 ering the effects of shoring for the limit state of yielding (yield mo-
726 ment).
727

I-16
728 (2) The plastic stress distribution on the steel section alone, for the limit
729 state of yielding (plastic moment) on the steel section.
730
731 (3) The plastic stress distribution on the composite section or the strain-
732 compatibility method, for the limit state of yielding (plastic moment)
733 on the composite section. For concrete-encased members, steel an-
734 chors shall be provided.
735
736 (b) The total cross sectional area of the steel core shall comprise at least
737 1% of the total composite cross section.
738
739 (c) Concrete encasement of the steel core shall be reinforced with contin-
740 uous longitudinal bars and transverse reinforcement (stirrups, ties,
741 hoops, or spirals).
742
743 Detailing of longitudinal reinforcing, including bar spacing and con-
744 crete cover requirements, shall conform to ACI 318.
745 5, EW
Transverse reinforcement for constructabilitythat consists of stirrups,
21
746 ties, or hoops shall consist ofbe a minimum of either a No. 3 (10 mm)
747 bar spaced at a maximum of 12 in. (300 mm) on center, or a No. 4 (13
Y VI
748
20
mm) bar or larger spaced at a maximum of 16 in. (400 mm) on center
AR E
749 shall be used. Deformed wire or welded wire reinforcement of equiv-

750 alent area isare permitted.
U IC R
751 (d) The minimum reinforcement ratio for continuous longitudinal rein-
752 forcing, ρsr, shall be 0.004, where ρsr is given by:
A
753 ρ sr = sr (I3-3)
BR BL
Ag
754 where
FE PU
755 Ag = gross area of composite member, in.2 (mm2)

756 Asr = area of continuous reinforcing bars, in.2 (mm2)
757
ED FT
758 (e) The cComposite beam members with Pu < 0.10Pn, including the area of
759 the steel section and reinforcing steel, shall be tension controlled as
760 defined in ACI 318.
AT A
761
D DR
762 User Note: The effect of this limitation is to restrict the reinforcement ratio
763 to mitigate brittle fractureprovide ductile behavior in case of an overload.
764 Refer to ACI 318 for additional longitudinal and transverse steel, lateral tie
765 and spiral reinforcing provisions. Refer to Section I4 for shear requirements.
766
767 3b. Detailing Requirements
768
769 Clear spacing between the steel core and longitudinal reinforcing shall be a
770 minimum of 1.5 reinforcing bar diameters, but not less than 1.5 in. (38 mm).
771
773
774 4a. Limitations
775
776 For filled composite members, the following limitations shall be met:
777
778 (a) Filled composite sections shall be classified for local buckling accord-
779 ing to Section I1.4.
780

I-17
781 (b) The total cross sectional area of the steel core section shall comprise at
782 least 1% of the total composite cross section.
783
784 c) Minimum lLongitudinal reinforcement is not required.
785
786 Where longitudinal reinforcement is provided, the minimum reinforce-
787 ment ratio for continuous longitudinal reinforcing, ρsr, shall be 0.004,
788 where ρsr is given by:
A
789 ρ sr = sr (I3-4)
Ag
790 If longitudinal reinforcement is provided, internal transverse reinforce-
791 ment is not required for strength; however, minimum internal trans-
792 verse reinforcement shall be provided for constructability as specified
793 in the following: stirrups, ties, or hoops consisting of. Aa minimum of
794 either a No. 3 (10 mm) bar spaced at a maximum of 12 in. (300 mm)
795 on center, or a No. 4 (13 mm) bar or larger spaced at a maximum of 16
796
5, EW
in. (400 mm) on center shall be used. Deformed wire or welded wire
21
797 reinforcement of equivalent area isare permitted.
798
799 (d) The cComposite beam members with Pu < 0.10Pn, including the area of
Y VI
800
20
the steel section and reinforcing steel, shall be tension controlled as
AR E
801 defined in ACI 318.

802
U IC R
803 User Note: The effect of this limitation is to restrict the reinforcement ratio
804 to mitigate brittle fractureprovide ductile behavior in case of an overload.
805 Refer to ACI 318 for additional longitudinal and transverse steel, lateral tie,
806 and spiral reinforcing provisions. Refer to Section I4 for shear requirements.
BR BL
807 These limitations and requirements are not applicable to composite plate
808 shear walls.
FE PU
809
810 4b. Flexural Strength
811
ED FT
812 The available flexural strength of filled composite members shall be deter-
813 mined as follows:
814
AT A
815 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)

D DR
816
817 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be determined as follows:
818
819 (a) For compact composite sections
820
821 Mn = M p (I3-3a)
822
823 where
824 Mp = moment corresponding to plastic stress distribution over
825 the composite cross section, kip-in. (N-mm)
826
827 (b) For noncompact composite sections
 λ −λ p 
828 Mn = M p – ( M p – M y )   (I3-3b)
 λr −λ p 
829
830 where
831 λ, λp and λr are width-to-thickness ratios determined from Table
832 I1.1b.

I-18
833 My = yield moment corresponding to yielding of the tension

834 flange and first yield of the compression flange, kip-in.
835 (N-mm). The capacity at first yield shall be calculated as-
836 suming a linear elastic stress distribution with the maxi-
837 mum concrete compressive stress limited to 0.7f′c and the
838 maximum steel stress limited to Fy.
839
840 (c) For slender composite sections, Mn, shall be determined as the first
841 yield moment. The compression flange stress shall be limited to the
842 local buckling stress, FcrFn, determined using Equation I2-10 or I2-
843 11. The concrete stress distribution shall be linear elastic with the max-
844 imum compressive stress limited to 0.70f′c.
845
846 4c. Detailing Requirements
847
848 Clear spacing between the inside of the steel sectionperimeter and longitu-
849 dinal reinforcing where provided shall be a minimum of 1.5 reinforcing bar
850 5, EW
diameters, but not less than 1.5 in. (38 mm).
21
851
Y VI
853
20
854 The available flexural strength of filled composite plate shear walls shall be
AR E
855 determined in accordance with Section I1.2a as the moment, Mp, corresponding
U IC R
856 to plastic stress distribution over the composite cross section, where.
857
858 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
859
BR BL
860 I4. SHEAR

861
FE PU

863
864 The design shear strength, φvVn, and allowable shear strength, Vn/Ωv, of en-
865 cased composite members shall be determined based on one of the follow-
ED FT
866 ing:
867
AT A
868 (a) The available shear strength of the steel section alone as specified in
D DR
869 Chapter G
870
871 (b) The available shear strength of the reinforced concrete portion (concrete
872 plus steel reinforcement) alone as defined by ACI 318 with
873
874 φv = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωv = 2.00 (ASD)
875
876 (c) The nominal shear strength of the steel section, as defined in Chapter
877 G, plus the nominal strength of the reinforcing steel, as defined by ACI
878 318, with a combined resistance or safety factor of
879
880 φv = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωv = 2.00 (ASD)

882
883 The design shear strength, φvVn, and allowable shear strength, Vn/Ωv, of filled
884 composite members shall be determined as follows:
885
886 φv = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωv = 1.67 (ASD)

I-19
887
888
889 The nominal shear strength, Vn, shall account forinclude the contributions of
890 the steel section and concrete infill as follows:
891 Vn = 0.6Av Fy + 0.06Kc Ac fc′ (I4-1)
892 where
893 Av = Shear area of the steel portion of a composite member. The shear
894 area for a circular round section is equal to 2As/π, and for a rectan-
895 gular section is equal to the sum of the area of webs in the direction
896 of in-plane shear, in.2 (mm2)
897 Ac = Area of concrete in filled composite member, in.2 (mm2)
898 As = Area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)
899 5, EW
Kc = 1 for members with shear span-to-depth, (Mu/Vu)/d), greater than or
21
900 equal to 0.7, where Mu and Vu are equal to the maximum required
901 flexuralmoment and shear demandsstrengths, respectively, along the
Y VI
902
20
member length, and d is equal to the member depth in the direction
903 of bending
AR E
904 Kc = 10 for members with rectangular compact composite cross sections

U IC R
905 and (Mu/Vu)/d less than 0.5

906 Kc = 9 for members with circular round compact composite cross sections
907 and (Mu/Vu)/d less than 0.5
908 Kc = 1 for members having other than compact composite cross sections,
BR BL
909 irrespective of (Mu/Vu)/d

910 f’c = concrete strength in ksi
911
FE PU
912 Linear interpolation between the above Kc values shall be used for members
913 with compact composite cross sections and (Mu/Vu)/d between 0.5 and 0.7.
914
ED FT
915 User Note: For most members, Kc will be equal to 1.0. Low shear span-to-depth ratios
916 may occur in connection design (panel zones) or other special situations, for which
AT A
917 higher values of Kc (> 1.0) are more appropriate.

918
D DR
919 3. Composite Beams with Formed Steel Deck

920 The available shear strength of composite beams with steel headed stud or steel
921 channel anchors shall be determined based upon the properties of the steel sec-
922 tion alone in accordance with Chapter G.
923
925 The design in-plane shear strength, φvVn, and allowable shear strength, Vn/Ωv,
926 of composite plate shear walls shall be determined as follows:
927
928 φv = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωv = 1.67 (ASD)
929
930 The nominal shear strength, Vn, shall account for the contributions of the steel
931 section and concrete infill as follows:
932
K s + K sc
933 Vn = Asw F y (I4-2)
3 K s2 + K sc
2
934

I-20
935 where
936 Asw = area of steel plates in the direction of in-plane shear, in.2 (mm2)
937 G = shear modulus of steel, ksi (MPa)
938 K = G A K s = GAsw
s s sw (I4-3) Field Code Changed
0.7 ( Ec Ac )( E s Asw )
K sc =
939 4 E s Asw + Ec Ac (I4-4)
940
941 I5. COMBINED FLEXURE AND AXIAL FORCE
942
943 The interaction between flexure and axial forces in composite members shall
944 account for stability as required by Chapter C. The available compressive
945 strength and the available flexural strength shall be determined as defined in
946 Sections I2 and I3, respectively. To account for the influence of length effects
947 on the axial strength of the member, the nominal axial strength of the member
948 shall be determined in accordance with Section I2.
949
950 5, EW
(a) For encased composite members and for filled composite members with
21
951 compact composite sections, the interaction between axial force and flex-
952 ure shall be based on the interaction equations of Section H1.1 or one of
Y VI
953
20
the methods defined in Section I1.2.
954
AR E
955 (b) For filled composite members with noncompact composite or slender com-
U IC R
956 posite sections, the interaction between axial force and flexure shall be
957 based either on the interaction equations of Section H1.1, the method de-
958 fined in Section I1.2d, or Equations I5-1a and b.
959
BR BL
960 (1) When Pr ≥ c p

Pc
FE PU
961
Pr 1 − c p  M r 
962 +  ≤ 1.0 (I5-1a)
Pc cm  M c 
ED FT
963 (2) When Pr < c p

Pc
AT A
 1 − cm   Pr  M r
D DR
964    + ≤ 1.0 (I5-1b)

 c p   Pc  M c
965
966
Table I5.1
Coefficients cp and cm for Use with Equations I5-1a and I5-1b
Filled Compo- cm
site cp
Member Type when csr ≥ 0.5 when csr < 0.5
0.17 1.06 0.90

Rectangular cp = cm = ≥ 1.0 cm = ≤ 1.67
csr 0.4 csr 0.11 csr 0.36
0.27 1.10 0.95

Round HSS cp = cm = ≥ 1.0 cm = ≤ 1.67
csr 0.4 csr 0.08 csr 0.32
967
968 where

I-21
969 Mc = available flexural strength, determined in accordance with Section

970 I3, kip-in. (N-mm)
971 Mr = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Sec-
972 tion I1.5, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
973 Pc = available axial strength, determined in accordance with Section
974 I2, kips (N)
975 Pr = required axial strength, determined in accordance with Section
976 I1.5, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N)
977
978 For design according to Section B3.1 (LRFD):
979 Mc = φ b M n = design flexural strength determined in accordance
980 with Section I3, kip-in. (N-mm)
981 Mr = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with
982 Section I1.5, using LRFD load combinations, kip-in. (N-
983 mm)
984
5, EW
Mc = φ b M n = design flexural strength determined in accordance
21
985 with Section I3, kip-in. (N-mm)
986 Pc = φc Pn = design axial strength, determined in accordance
Y VI
987
20 with Section I2, kips (N)
AR E
988 Pr = required axial strength, determined in accordance with

U IC R
989 Section I1.5, using LRFD load combinations, kips (N)

990 Pc = φc Pn = design axial strength, determined in accordance
991 with Section I2, kips (N)
992 φc = resistance factor for compression = 0.75
BR BL
993 φb = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90

994
FE PU
995 For design according to Section B3.2 (ASD):

996 Mc = M n Ω b = allowable flexural strength, determined in ac-
997 cordance with Section I3, kip-in. (N-mm)
ED FT
998 Mr = required flexural strength, determined in accordance with

999 Section I1.5, using ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-
AT A
1000 mm)
D DR
1001 Mc = M n Ω b = allowable flexural strength, determined in ac-

1002 cordance with Section I3, kip-in. (N-mm)
1003 Pc = Pn Ωc = allowable axial strength, determined in
1004 accordance with Section I2, kips (N)
1005 Pr = required axial strength, determined in accordance with
1006 Section I1.5, using ASD load combinations, kips (N)
1007 Pc = Pn Ωc = allowable axial strength, determined in accord-
1008 ance with Section I2, kips (N)
1009 Ωc = safety factor for compression = 2.00
1010 Ωb = safety factor for flexure = 1.67
1011
1012 cm and cp are determined from Table I5.1
As Fy + Asr Fyr
1013 csr = (I5-2)
Ac fc′
1014 (c) For filled composite plate shear walls sections, the interaction between ax-
1015 ial force and flexure shall be based on the methods defined in Section I1.2a
1016 or I1.2d.

I-22
1017
1018 I6. LOAD TRANSFER
1019
1021
1022 When external forces are applied to an axially loaded encased or filled compo-
1023 site member, the introduction of force to the member and the transfer of longi-
1024 tudinal shear within the member shall be assessed in accordance with the re-
1025 quirements for force allocation presented in this section.
1026
1027 The available strength of the applicable force transfer mechanisms as deter-
1028 mined in accordance with Section I6.3 shall equal or exceed the required lon-
1029 gitudinal shear force to be transferred, Vr′ , as determined in accordance with
1030 Section I6.2. Force transfer mechanisms shall be located within the load trans-
1031 fer region as determined in accordance with Section I6.4.
1032
1033 2. Force Allocation
1034 5, EW
21
1035 Force allocation shall be determined based upon the distribution of external
1036 force in accordance with the following requirements.
Y VI
1037
20
1038 User Note: Bearing strength provisions for externally applied forces are pro-
AR E
1039 vided in Section J8. For filled composite members, the term A2 A1 in Equa-
U IC R
1040 tion J8-2 may be taken equal to 2.0 due to confinement effects.
1041
1042 2a. External Force Applied to Steel Section
BR BL
1043
1044 When the entire external force is applied directly to the steel section, the force
required to be transferred to the concrete, V r′ , shall be determined as:
FE PU
1045
1046
1047 V r′ = Pr (1 – F y As Pno ) (I6-1)
ED FT
1048
1049 where
AT A

1051 effects, determined by Equation I2-4 for encased composite mem-
D DR
1052 bers, and Equation I2-9a or Equation I2-9c, as applicable, for com-
1053 pact composite or noncompact composite filled composite mem-
1054 bers, kips (N)
1055 Pr = required external force applied to the composite member, kips (N)
1056
1057 User Note: Equation I6-1 does not apply to slender filled composite members
1058 for which the external force is applied directly to the concrete fill in accordance
1059 with Section I6.2b, or concurrently to the steel and concrete, in accordance with
1060 Section I6.2c.
1061
1062 2b. External Force Applied to Concrete
1063
1064 When the entire external force is applied directly to the concrete encasement
1065 or concrete fill, the force required to be transferred to the steel, V′r, shall be
1067
1068 (a) For encased or filled composite members that are compact composite or
1069 noncompact composite
1070

I-23
1071 V r′ = Pr ( F y As Pno ) (I6-2a)

1072
1073 (b) For slender filled composite members
1074
1075 V r′ = Pr ( Fn As Pno ) Vr′ = Pr ( Fcr As / Pno ) (I6-2b)
1076
1077 where
1078 FcrFn = critical buckling stress for steel elements of filled composite mem-
1079 bers determined using Equation I2-10 or Equation I2-11, as ap-
1080 plicable, ksi (MPa)
1081 Pno = nominal axial compressive strength without consideration of
1082 length effects, determined by Equation I2-4 for encased compo-
1083 site members, and Equation I2-9a, Equation I2-9c, or Equation
1084 I2-9e for filled composite members, kips (N)
1085
1086 2c. External Force Applied Concurrently to Steel and Concrete
1087 5, EW
21
1088 When the external force is applied concurrently to the steel section and concrete
1089 encasement or concrete fill, V′r shall be determined as the force required to es-
Y VI
1090
20
tablish equilibrium of the cross section.
1091
AR E
1092 User Note: The Commentary provides an acceptable method of determining

U IC R
1093 the longitudinal shear force required for equilibrium of the cross section.
1094
1095 3. Force Transfer Mechanisms
1096
BR BL
1097 The available strength of the force transfer mechanisms of direct bond interac-
1098 tion, shear connection, and direct bearing shall be determined in accordance
FE PU
1099 with this section. Use of the force transfer mechanism providing the largest
1100 nominal strength is permitted. Force transfer mechanisms shall not be super-
1101 imposed.
1102
ED FT
1103 The force transfer mechanism of direct bond interaction shall not be used for
1104 encased composite members or for filled composite members where bond fail-
AT A
1105 ure would result in uncontrolled slip.

D DR
1106
1107 3a. Direct Bearing
1108
1109 Where force is transferred in an encased or filled composite member by direct
1110 bearing from internal bearing mechanisms, the available bearing strength of the
1111 concrete for the limit state of concrete crushing shall be determined as:
1112
1113 Rn = 1.7 fc′A1 (I6-3)
1114
1115 φB = 0.65 (LRFD) ΩB = 2.31 (ASD)
1116
1117 where
1118 A1 = loaded area of concrete, in.2 (mm2)
1119
1120 User Note: An example of force transfer via an internal bearing mechanism is
1121 the use of internal steel plates within a filled composite member.
1122
1123 3b. Shear Connection
1124

I-24
1125 Where force is transferred in an encased or filled composite member by shear

1126 connection, the available shear strength of steel headed stud or steel channel
1127 anchors shall be determined as:
1128
1129 Rc = ΣQcv (I6-4)
1130
1131 where
1132 ΣQcv = sum of available shear strengths, φvQnv (LRFD) or Qnv/Ωv (ASD),
1133 as applicable, of steel headed stud or steel channel anchors, deter-
1134 mined in accordance with Section I8.3a or Section I8.3d, respec-
1135 tively, placed within the load introduction length as defined in
1136 Section I6.4, kips (N)
1137
1138 3c. Direct Bond Interaction
1139
1140 Where force is transferred in a filled composite member by direct bond inter-
1141 action, the available bond strength between the steel and concrete shall be de-
1142 5, EW
termined as follows:
21
1143
1144 Rn = pb Lin Fin (I6-5)
Y VI
1145
20
AR E
1146 φd = 0.50 (LRFD) Ω d = 3.00 (ASD)

1147
U IC R
1148 where
1150 Fin = nominal bond stress, ksi (MPa)
1151 = 12 t H 2 ≤ 0.1, ksi ( 2 100 t H 2 ≤ 0.7, M P a) for rectangular cross sec-
BR BL
1152 tions
1153 = 30 t D 2 ≤ 0.2, ksi ( 5 300 t D 2 ≤ 1.4, M Pa) for circular round cross sec-
FE PU
1154 tions
1155 H = maximum transverse dimension of rectangular steel member, in.
1156 (mm)
ED FT
1157 Lin = load introduction length, determined in accordance with Section I6.4,
1158 in. (mm)
AT A
1159 Rn = nominal bond strength, kips (N)

D DR
1160 pb = perimeter of the steel-concrete bond interface within the composite

1161 cross section, in. (mm)
1162 t = design wall thickness of HSS member as defined in Section B4.2, in.
1163 (mm)
1164
1165 4. Detailing Requirements
1166
1167 4a. Encased Composite Members
1168
1169 Force transfer mechanisms shall be distributed within the load introduction
1170 length, which shall not exceed a distance of two times the minimum transverse
1171 dimension of the encased composite member above and below the load transfer
1172 region. Anchors utilized to transfer longitudinal shear shall be placed on at
1173 least two faces of the steel shape in a generally symmetric configuration about
1174 the steel shape axes.
1175
1176 Steel anchor spacing, both within and outside of the load introduction length,
1177 shall conform to Section I8.3e.
1178
1179 4b. Filled Composite Members

I-25
1180
1181 Force transfer mechanisms shall be distributed within the load introduction
1182 length, which shall not exceed a distance of two times the minimum transverse
1183 dimension of a rectangular steel member or two times the diameter of a round
1184 steel member both above and below the load transfer region. For the specific
1185 case of load applied to the concrete of a filled composite member containing
1186 no internal reinforcement, the load introduction length shall extend beyond the
1187 load transfer region in only the direction of the applied force. Steel anchor
1188 spacing within the load introduction length shall conform to Section I8.3e.
1189
1190 I7. COMPOSITE DIAPHRAGMS AND COLLECTOR BEAMS
1191
1192 Composite slab diaphragms and collector beams shall be designed and detailed
1193 to transfer loads between the diaphragm, the diaphragm’s boundary members
1194 and collector elements, and elements of the lateral force-resisting system.
1195
1196 User Note: Design guidelines for composite diaphragms and collector beams
1197 5, EW
can be found in the Commentary.
21
1198
1199 I8. STEEL ANCHORS
Y VI
1200 20
1201 1. General
AR E
1202
U IC R
1203 The diameter of a steel headed stud anchor, dsa, shall be 3/4 in. (19 mm) or less,
1204 except where anchors are utilized solely for shear transfer in solid slabs in
1205 which case 7/8-in.- (2 mm) and 1-in.- (25 mm) diameter anchors are permitted.
1206 Additionally, dsa shall not be greater than 2.5 times the thickness of the base
BR BL
1207 metal to which it is welded, unless it is welded to a flange directly over a web.
1208
1209 Section I8.2 applies to a composite flexural member where steel anchors are
FE PU
1210 embedded in a solid concrete slab or in a slab cast on formed steel deck. Section
1211 I8.3 applies to all other cases.
1212
ED FT
1213 2. Steel Anchors in Composite Beams

1214
AT A
1215 The length of steel headed stud anchors shall not be less than four stud diame-
1216 ters from the base of the steel headed stud anchor to the top of the stud head
D DR
1217 after installation.

1218
1219 2a. Strength of Steel Headed Stud Anchors
1220
1221 The nominal shear strength of one steel headed stud anchor embedded in a solid
1222 concrete slab or in a composite slab with decking shall be determined as fol-
1223 lows:
1224 Qn = 0.5 Asa fc′ Ec ≤ Rg R p Asa Fu (I8-1)
1225
1226 where
1227 Asa = cross-sectional area of steel headed stud anchor, in.2 (mm2)
1229 = w1.5
c f c′ , ksi ( 0.043 w1.5
c f c′ , MPa)
1230 Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of a steel headed stud an-
1231 chor, ksi (MPa)
1232 Rg = 1.0 for:
1233 (a) One steel headed stud anchor welded in a steel deck rib with
1234 the deck oriented perpendicular to the steel shape

I-26
1235 (b) Any number of steel headed stud anchors welded in a row
1236 directly to the steel shape
1237 (c) Any number of steel headed stud anchors welded in a row
1238 through steel deck with the deck oriented parallel to the steel
1239 shape and the ratio of the average rib width to rib depth ≥ 1.5
1240 = 0.85 for:
1241 (a) Two steel headed stud anchors welded in a steel deck rib
1242 with the deck oriented perpendicular to the steel shape
1243 (b) One steel headed stud anchor welded through steel deck with
1244 the deck oriented parallel to the steel shape and the ratio of the
1245 average rib width to rib depth < 1.5
1246 = 0.7 for three or more steel headed stud anchors welded in a
1247 steel deck rib with the deck oriented perpendicular to the steel
1248 shape
1249 Rp = 0.75 for:
1250 (a) Steel headed stud anchors welded directly to the steel shape
1251 (b) Steel headed stud anchors welded in a composite slab with
1252 5, EW
the deck oriented perpendicular to the beam and emid-ht ≥ 2 in.
21
1253 (50 mm)
1254 (c) Steel headed stud anchors welded through steel deck, or
Y VI
1255
20
steel sheet used as girder filler material, and embedded in a
1256 composite slab with the deck oriented parallel to the beam
AR E
1257 = 0.6 for steel headed stud anchors welded in a composite slab
U IC R
1258 with deck oriented perpendicular to the beam and emid-ht < 2 in.
1259 (50 mm)
1260 emid-ht = distance from the edge of steel headed stud anchor shank to the
1261 steel deck web, measured at mid-height of the deck rib, and in the
BR BL
1262 load bearing direction of the steel headed stud anchor (in other
1263 words, in the direction of maximum moment for a simply sup-
1264 ported beam), in. (mm)
FE PU
1265
1266 User Note: The table below presents values for Rg and Rp for several
1267 cases. Available strengths for steel headed stud anchors can be
ED FT
1268 found in the AISC Steel Construction Manual.

1269
AT A
Condition Rg Rp
D DR
No decking 1.0 0.75

Decking oriented parallel
to the steel shape
wr
≥ 1.5 1.0 0.75
hr
wr 0.85[a] 0.75
< 1.5
hr
Decking oriented perpendicular
to the steel shape
Number of steel headed stud an-
chors occupying the same
decking rib:
1 1.0 0.6[b]
2 0.85 0.6[b]
3 or more 0.7 0.6[b]
hr = nominal rib height, in. (mm)
wr = average width of concrete rib or haunch (as defined in Section I3.2c),
in. (mm)
[a]
For a single steel headed stud anchor

I-27
[b]
This value may be increased to 0.75 when emid-ht ≥ 2 in. (50 mm).
1270
1271 2b. Strength of Steel Channel Anchors
1272
1273 The nominal shear strength of one hot-rolled channel anchor embedded in a
1274 solid concrete slab shall be determined as:
1275 Qn = 0.3(t f + 0.5tw)la fc′Ec (I8-2)
1276 where
1277 la = length of channel anchor, in. (mm)
1278 tf = thickness of flange of channel anchor, in. (mm)
1279 tw = thickness of channel anchor web, in. (mm)
1280
1281 The strength of the channel anchor shall be developed by welding the channel
1282 to the beam flange for a force equal to Qn, considering eccentricity on the an-
1283 chor.
1284
5, EW
21
1285 2c. Required Number of Steel Anchors
1286
Y VI
1287
1288
20
The number of anchors required between the section of maximum bending mo-
ment, positive or negative, and the adjacent section of zero moment shall be
AR E
1289 equal to the horizontal shear as determined in Sections I3.2d.1 and I3.2d.2 di-
U IC R
1290 vided by the nominal shear strength of one steel anchor as determined from
1291 Section I8.2a or Section I8.2b. The number of steel anchors required between
1292 any concentrated load and the nearest point of zero moment shall be sufficient
1293 to develop the maximum moment required at the concentrated load point.
BR BL
1294
1295 2d. Detailing Requirements
1296
FE PU
1297 Steel anchors in composite beams shall meet the following requirements:
1298
1299 (a) Steel anchors required on each side of the point of maximum bending mo-
ED FT
1300 ment, positive or negative, shall be distributed uniformly between that point
1301 and the adjacent points of zero moment, unless specified otherwise on the
1302 contract documentsdesign documents and specifications issued for con-
AT A
1303 struction.
D DR
1304
1305 (b) Steel anchors shall have at least 1 in. (25 mm) of lateral concrete cover in
1306 the direction perpendicular to the shear force, except for anchors installed in
1307 the ribs of formed steel decks.
1308
1309 (c) The minimum distance from the center of a steel anchor to a free edge in the direction
1310 of the shear force shall be 8 in. (200 mm) if normal weight concrete is used and 10 in.
1311 (250 mm) if lightweight concrete is used. The provisions of ACI 318 Chapter 17 are
1312 permitted to be used in lieu of these values.
1313
1314 (d) Minimum center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud anchors shall be
1315 four diameters in any direction. For composite beams that do not contain
1316 anchors located within formed steel deck oriented perpendicular to the
1317 beam span, an additional minimum spacing limit of six diameters along the
1318 longitudinal axis of the beam shall apply.
1319
1320 (e) The maximum center-to-center spacing of steel anchors shall not exceed
1321 eight times the total slab thickness or 36 in. (900 mm).
1322

I-28
1323 3. Steel Anchors in Composite Components

1324
1325 This section shall apply to the design of cast-in-place steel headed stud anchors
1326 and steel channel anchors in composite components.
1327
1328 The provisions of the applicable building code or ACI 318 Chapter 17 are per-
1329 mitted to be used in lieu of the provisions in this section.
1330
1331 User Note: The steel headed stud anchor strength provisions in this section are
1332 applicable to anchors located primarily in the load transfer (connection) region
1333 of composite columns and beam-columns, concrete-encased and filled compo-
1334 site beams, composite coupling beams, and composite walls, where the steel
1335 and concrete are working compositely within a member. They are not intended
1336 for hybrid construction where the steel and concrete are not working compos-
1337 itely, such as with embed plates.
1338
1339 Section I8.2 specifies the strength of steel anchors embedded in a solid concrete
1340 5, EW
slab or in a concrete slab with formed steel deck in a composite beam.
21
1341
1342 Limit states for the steel shank of the anchor and for concrete breakout in shear
Y VI
1343 20
are covered directly in this Section. Additionally, the spacing and dimensional
1344 limitations provided in these provisions preclude the limit states of concrete
AR E
1345 pryout for anchors loaded in shear and concrete breakout for anchors loaded in
U IC R
1346 tension as defined by ACI 318 Chapter 17.

1347
1348 For normal weight concrete: Steel headed stud anchors subjected to shear only
1349 shall not be less than five stud diameters in length from the base of the steel
BR BL
1350 headed stud to the top of the stud head after installation. Steel headed stud
1351 anchors subjected to tension or interaction of shear and tension shall not be less
1352 than eight stud diameters in length from the base of the stud to the top of the
FE PU
1353 stud head after installation.

1354
1355 For lightweight concrete: Steel headed stud anchors subjected to shear only
ED FT
1356 shall not be less than seven stud diameters in length from the base of the steel
1357 headed stud to the top of the stud head after installation. Steel headed stud
AT A
1358 anchors subjected to tension shall not be less than ten stud diameters in length
1359 from the base of the stud to the top of the stud head after installation. The nom-
D DR
1360 inal strength of steel headed stud anchors subjected to interaction of shear and
1361 tension for lightweight concrete shall be determined as stipulated by the appli-
1362 cable building code or ACI 318 Chapter 17.
1363
1364 Steel headed stud anchors subjected to tension or interaction of shear and ten-
1365 sion shall have a diameter of the head greater than or equal to 1.6 times the
1366 diameter of the shank.
1367
1368 User Note: The following table presents values of minimum steel headed stud
1369 anchor h/d ratios for each condition covered in this Specification.
1370
Loading Con- Normal Weight Lightweight
dition Concrete Concrete
Shear h dsa ≥ 5 h dsa ≥ 7
Tension h dsa ≥ 8 h dsa ≥ 10
Shear and
h dsa ≥ 8 N/A[a]
Tension

I-29
h d sa = ratio of steel headed stud anchor shank length to the top

of the stud head, to shank diameter.
[a]Refer to ACI 318 Chapter 17 for the calculation of interaction

effects of anchors embedded in lightweight concrete.
1371
1372
1373 3a. Shear Strength of Steel Headed Stud Anchors in Composite Components
1374
1375 Where concrete breakout strength in shear is not an applicable limit state, the
1376 design shear strength, φvQnv, and allowable shear strength, Qnv/Ωv, of one steel
1377 headed stud anchor shall be determined as:
1378
1379 Qnv = Fu Asa (I8-3)
1380
1381 φv = 0.65 (LRFD) Ωv = 2.31 (ASD)
1382
5, EW
21
1383 where
1384 Asa = cross-sectional area of a steel headed stud anchor, in.2 (mm2)
Y VI
1385
1386
Fu 20 = specified minimum tensile strength of a steel headed stud an-
chor, ksi (MPa)
AR E
1387 Qnv = nominal shear strength of a steel headed stud anchor, kips (N)
U IC R
1388
1389 Where concrete breakout strength in shear is an applicable limit state, the avail-
1390 able shear strength of one steel headed stud anchor shall be determined by one
1391 of the following:
BR BL
1392
1393 (a) Where anchor reinforcement is developed in accordance with ACI 318
1394 on both sides of the concrete breakout surface for the steel headed stud
FE PU
1395 anchor, the minimum of the steel nominal shear strength from Equation
1396 I8-3 and the nominal strength of the anchor reinforcement shall be used
1397 for the nominal shear strength, Qnv, of the steel headed stud anchor.
ED FT
1398 (b) As stipulated by the applicable building code or ACI 318 Chapter 17.
1399
1400 User Note: If concrete breakout strength in shear is an applicable limit state (for
AT A
1401 example, where the breakout prism is not restrained by an adjacent steel plate,
D DR
1402 flange or web), appropriate anchor reinforcement is required for the provisions
1403 of this Section to be used. Alternatively, the provisions of the applicable build-
1404 ing code or ACI 318 Chapter 17 may be used.
1405
1406 3b. Tensile Strength of Steel Headed Stud Anchors in Composite Components
1407
1408 Where the distance from the center of an anchor to a free edge of concrete in
1409 the direction perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud anchor is
1410 greater than or equal to 1.5 times the height of the steel headed stud anchor
1411 measured to the top of the stud head, and where the center-to-center spacing of
1412 steel headed stud anchors is greater than or equal to three times the height of
1413 the steel headed stud anchor measured to the top of the stud head, the available
1414 tensile strength of one steel headed stud anchor shall be determined as:
1415
1416 Qnt = Fu Asa (I8-4)
1417
1418 φt = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωt = 2.00 (ASD)
1419
1420 where

I-30
1421 Qnt = nominal tensile strength of steel headed stud anchor, kips (N)
1422
1423 Where the distance from the center of an anchor to a free edge of concrete in
1424 the direction perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud anchor is less
1425 than 1.5 times the height of the steel headed stud anchor measured to the top of
1426 the stud head, or where the center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud anchors
1427 is less than three times the height of the steel headed stud anchor measured to
1428 the top of the stud head, the nominal tensile strength of one steel headed stud
1429 anchor shall be determined by one of the following:
1430
1431 (a) Where anchor reinforcement is developed in accordance with ACI 318 on
1432 both sides of the concrete breakout surface for the steel headed stud anchor,
1433 the minimum of the steel nominal tensile strength from Equation I8-4 and
1434 the nominal strength of the anchor reinforcement shall be used for the nom-
1435 inal tensile strength, Qnt, of the steel headed stud anchor.
1437
1438 5, EW
User Note: Supplemental confining reinforcement is recommended around the
21
1439 anchors for steel headed stud anchors subjected to tension or interaction of
1440 shear and tension to avoid edge effects or effects from closely spaced anchors.
Y VI
1441 20
See the Commentary and ACI 318 for guidelines.
1442
AR E
1443 3c. Strength of Steel Headed Stud Anchors for Interaction of Shear and Ten-
U IC R
1444 sion in Composite Components

1445
1446 Where concrete breakout strength in shear is not a governing limit state, and
1447 where the distance from the center of an anchor to a free edge of concrete in the
BR BL
1448 direction perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud anchor is greater
1449 than or equal to 1.5 times the height of the steel headed stud anchor measured
1450 to the top of the stud head, and where the center-to-center spacing of steel
FE PU
1451 headed stud anchors is greater than or equal to three times the height of the steel
1452 headed stud anchor measured to the top of the stud head, the nominal strength
1453 for interaction of shear and tension of one steel headed stud anchor shall be
ED FT
1454 determined as:

1455
AT A
5/3 5/3
 Qrt  Q 
+  rv  ≤ 1.0
D DR
1456   (I8-5)
 Qct   Qcv 
1457
1458 where
1459 Qct = available tensile strength, determined in accordance with Section
1460 I8.3b, kips (N)
1461 Qrt = required tensile strength, kips (N)
1462 Qcv = available shear strength, determined in accordance with Section
1463 I8.3a, kips (N)
1464 Qrv = required shear strength, kips (N)
1465
1466 Where concrete breakout strength in shear is a governing limit state, or where
1467 the distance from the center of an anchor to a free edge of concrete in the direc-
1468 tion perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud anchor is less than 1.5
1469 times the height of the steel headed stud anchor measured to the top of the stud
1470 head, or where the center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud anchors is less
1471 than three times the height of the steel headed stud anchor measured to the top
1472 of the stud head, the nominal strength for interaction of shear and tension of
1473 one steel headed stud anchor shall be determined by one of the following:
1474

I-31
1475 (a) Where anchor reinforcement is developed in accordance with ACI 318 on
1476 both sides of the concrete breakout surface for the steel headed stud anchor,
1477 the minimum of the steel nominal shear strength from Equation I8-3 and
1478 the nominal strength of the anchor reinforcement shall be used for the nom-
1479 inal shear strength, Qnv, of the steel headed stud anchor, and the minimum
1480 of the steel nominal tensile strength from Equation I8-4 and the nominal
1481 strength of the anchor reinforcement shall be used for the nominal tensile
1482 strength, Qnt, of the steel headed stud anchor for use in Equation I8-5.
1484
1485 3d. Shear Strength of Steel Channel Anchors in Composite Components
1486
1487 The available shear strength of steel channel anchors shall be based on the
1488 provisions of Section I8.2b with the following resistance factor and safety fac-
1489 tor:
1490
1491 φv = 0.75 (LRFD) Ωv = 2.00 (ASD)
1492 5, EW
21
1493 3e. Detailing Requirements in Composite Components
1494
Y VI
1495
20
Steel anchors in composite components shall meet the following requirements:
1496
AR E
1497 (a) Minimum concrete cover to steel anchors shall be in accordance with ACI
U IC R
1498 318 provisions for concrete protection of headed shear stud reinforcement.
1499
1500 (b) Minimum center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud anchors shall be four
1501 diameters in any direction.
BR BL
1502
1503 (c) The maximum center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud anchors shall
1504 not exceed 32 times the shank diameter.
FE PU
1505
1506 (d) The maximum center-to-center spacing of steel channel anchors shall be 24
1507 in. (600 mm).
ED FT
1508
1509 User Note: Detailing requirements provided in this section are absolute limits.
AT A
1510 See Sections I8.3a, I8.3b, and I8.3c for additional limitations required to pre-
1511 clude edge and group effect considerations.
D DR
1512
1513 4. Performance Based Alternative for the Design of Shear Connection
1514
1515 In lieu of shear connection prescribed by, and the corresponding strength deter-
1516 mined perin accordance with, Sections I8.1 through and I8.23, it shall beis per-
1517 mitted to use an alternate form of shear connection and determine its strength
1518 through testing, provided its performance requirements are established in ac-
1519 cordance with Sections I8.4a through I8.4d and satisfy the approval require-
1520 ments of the authority having jurisdiction. The geometric limitations of Sec-
1521 tions I8.1 through and I8.32 do not apply to the performance evaluated by Sec-
1522 tion I8.4.
1523
1524 4a. Test Standard
1525
1526 Shear connection strength, slip capacity, and stiffness shall be established using
1527 in accordance with AISI S923. An alternative test protocol may be used in the
1528 evaluation when approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
1529
1530 4b. Nominal and Available Strength

I-32
1531
1532 When determining available strength of a flexural member, the nominal tested
1533 strength of shear connection, Qne, shall be taken as 0.85 times the mean tested
1534 strength determined per in accordance with Section I8.4a. When required, the
1535 design shear strength, φvQne, and the available allowable shear strength, Qne/Ωv,
1536 shall be determined per in accordance with Section I8.3a. Alternatively, it shall
1537 be permitted to take Qne as the mean tested strength provided φvQne or Qne/Ωv ,
1538 as applicable, is determined on the basis of a reliability analysis.
1539
1540 User Note: An approach for establishing available strength using test data is
1541 provided in Chapter K of ANSI/AISI S100.
1542
1543 4c. Shear Connection Slip Capacity
1544
1545 The nominal shear connection slip capacity shall be taken as the average shear
1546 connection slip corresponding to each specific tested shear connection config-
1547 uration. Shear connection slip capacity shall be measured at no less than 95%
1548 5, EW
of the post-peak strength.
21
1549
1550 4d. Acceptance Criteria
Y VI
1551
20
1552 The design using tested properties of the shear connection per Section I8.4a
AR E
1553 through I8.4c shall be limited to the geometric and material properties tested.
U IC R
1554 The nominal performance characteristics are permitted to be used in design pro-
1555 vided either the conditions (1), (2), and (3) are satisfied, or the condition (4) is,
1556 met.
1557
BR BL
1558 (1) The maximum permitted coefficient of variation corresponding to each

1559 tested configuration of shear connection does not exceed 0.09 established
1560 over four replicate tests, or 0.15 established over nine replicate tests. It is
FE PU
1561 permitted, for this purpose, to establish the number of tests using all tests
1562 of the same type of shear connection that exhibit the same failure mode.
1563
ED FT
1564 (2) The nominal shear connection slip capacity is at least 0.25 in. (6 mm).
1565
AT A
1566 (3) The minimum shear elastic stiffness of the shear connection shall not be
1567 less than 2,000 kip/in. (180 N/mm).
D DR
1568
1569 (4) Shear connections corresponding to the values of shear connection coeffi-
1570 cient of variation, shear connection slip capacity, and elastic stiffness, co-
1571 efficient of variation, and slip capacity other than those stipulated in con-
1572 ditions (1), (2), and (3), shall be deemed acceptable, provided their effect
1573 is captured in the design. In lieu of using in an analysis the shear connection
1574 elastic stiffness determined per this Section, it shall be permitted to estab-
1575 lish the stiffness of a composite section, incorporating shear connection
1576 evaluated by this Section, directly through testing using in accordance with
1577 AISI S924. When stiffness of a composite section is established usingin
1578 accordance with AISI S924, it shall be a mean tested value established us-
1579 ingbased on at least three tests.
1580

J-1
1 CHAPTER J
2 DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS
3
4 This chapter addresses connecting elements, connectors,. and the affected elements
5 of connected members not subject to fatigue loads.
6
8
9 J1. General Provisions
10 J2. Welds
11 J3. Bolts and Threaded Parts
12 J4. Affected Elements of Members and Connecting Elements
13 J5. Fillers
14 J6. Splices
15 J7. Bearing Strength
16 5, EW
J8. Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete
21
17 J9. Anchor Rods and Embedments
18 J10. Flanges and Webs with Concentrated Forces
Y VI
19
20
AR E
21 • Chapter K Additional Requirements for HSS and Box-Section Connections

U IC R
22 • Appendix 3 Fatigue
23
24 J1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
BR BL
25
26 1. Design Basis
FE PU
27
28 The design strength, φRn, and the allowable strength, Rn/Ω, of connections shall
29 be determined in accordance with the provisions of this chapter and the provi-
ED FT
30 sions of Chapter B.
31
AT A
32 The required strength of the connections shall be determined by structural anal-

33 ysis for the specified design loads, consistent with the type of construction spec-
D DR
34 ified, or shall be a proportion of the required strength of the connected members

35 when so specified herein.
36
37 Where the gravity axes of intersecting axially loaded members do not intersect
38 at one point, the effects of eccentricity shall be considered.
39
40 2. Simple Connections
41
42 Simple connections of beams, girders and trusses shall be designed as flexible
43 and are permitted to be proportioned for the reaction shears only, except as
44 otherwise indicated in the design documents. Flexible beam connections shall
45 accommodate end rotations of simple beams. Some inelastic but self-limiting
46 deformation in the connection is permitted to accommodate the end rotation of
47 a simple beam.
48
49 3. Moment Connections
50
51 End connections of restrained beams, girders and trusses shall be designed for
52 the combined effect of forces resulting from moment and shear induced by the

J-2
53 rigidity of the connections. Response criteria for moment connections are pro-
54 vided in Section B3.4b.
55
56 User Note: See Chapter C and Appendix 7 for analysis requirements to estab-
57 lish the required strength for the design of connections.
58
59 4. Compression Members with Bearing Joints
60
61 Compression members relying on bearing for load transfer shall meet the fol-
62 lowing requirements:
63
64 (a) For columns bearing on bearing plates or finished to bear at splices, there
65 shall be sufficient connectors to hold all parts in place.
66
67 (b) For compression members other than columns finished to bear, the splice
68 material and its connectors shall be arranged to hold all parts in line and
69 their required strength shall be the lesser of:
70
71 (1)
5, EW
An axial tensile force equal to 50% of the required compressive
21
72 strength of the member; or
73 (2) The moment and shear resulting from a transverse load equal to 2%
Y VI
74
20
of the required compressive strength of the member. The transverse
75 load shall be applied at the location of the splice exclusive of other
AR E
76 loads that act on the member. The member shall be taken as pinned
U IC R
77 for the determination of the shears and moments at the splice.

78
79 User Note: All compression joints should also be proportioned to resist any
BR BL
80 tension developed by the load combinations stipulated in Section B2.

81
82 5. Splices in Heavy Sections
FE PU
83
84 When tensile forces due to applied tension or flexure are to be transmitted
ED FT
85 through splices in heavy sections, as defined in Sections A3.1c and A3.1d, by

86 complete-joint-penetration (CJP) groove welds, the following provisions apply:
87 (a) material notch-toughness requirements as given in Sections A3.1c and
AT A
88 A3.1d; (b) weld access hole details as given in Section J1.6; (c) filler metal
D DR
89 requirements as given in Section J2.6; and (d) thermal cut surface preparation
90 and inspection requirements as given in Section M2.2. The foregoing provision
91 is not applicable to splices of elements of built-up shapes that are welded prior
92 to assembling the shape.
93
94 User Note: CJP groove welded splices of heavy sections can exhibit detri-
95 mental effects of weld shrinkage. Members that are sized for compression that
96 are also subject to tensile forces may be less susceptible to damage from shrink-
97 age if they are spliced using partial-joint-penetration (PJP) groove welds on the
98 flanges and fillet-welded web plates, or using bolts for some or all of the splice.
99
100 6. Weld Access Holes
101
102 Weld access holes shall meet the following requirements:
103
104 (a) All weld access holes required to facilitate welding operations shall be de-
105 tailed to provide room for weld backing as needed.
106

J-3
107 (b) The access hole shall have a length from the toe of the weld preparation not
108 less than 1-1/2 times the thickness of the material in which the hole is made,
109 nor less than 1-1/2 in. (38 mm).
110
111 (c) The access hole shall have a height not less than the thickness of the material
112 with the access hole, nor less than 3/4 in. (19 mm), nor does it need to
113 exceed 2 in. (50 mm).
114
115 (d) For sections that are rolled or welded prior to cutting, the edge of the web
116 shall be sloped or curved from the surface of the flange to the reentrant
117 surface of the access hole.
118
119 (e) In hot-rolled shapes, and built-up shapes with CJP groove welds that join
120 the web-to-flange, weld access holes shall be free of notches and sharp
121 reentrant corners.
122
123 (f) No arc of the weld access hole shall have a radius less than 3/8 in. (10 mm).
124
125
5, EW
(g) In built-up shapes with fillet or partial-joint-penetration (PJP) groove welds
21
126 that join the web-to-flange, weld access holes shall be free of notches and
127 sharp reentrant corners.
Y VI
128
20
129 (h) The access hole is permitted to terminate perpendicular to the flange, provid-
AR E
130 ing the weld is terminated at least a distance equal to the weld size away
U IC R
131 from the access hole.

132
133 (i) For heavy shapes, as defined in Sections A3.1c and A3.1d, the thermally cut
BR BL
134 surfaces of weld access holes shall be ground to bright metal.

135
136 (j) If the curved transition portion of weld access holes is formed by predrilled
FE PU
137 or sawed holes, that portion of the access hole need not be ground.
138
ED FT
139 7. Placement of Welds and Bolts

140
141 Groups of welds or bolts at the ends of any member that transmit axial force
AT A
142 into that member shall be sized so that the center of gravity of the group coin-
D DR
143 cides with the center of gravity of the member, unless provision is made for the
144 eccentricity. The foregoing provision is not applicable to end connections of
145 single-angle, double-angle and similar members.
146
147 8. Bolts in Combination with Welds
148 Bolts shall not be considered as sharing the load in combination with welds,
149 except in the design of shear connections on a common faying surface where
150 strain compatibility between the bolts and welds is considered.
151 It is permitted to determine the available strength, φRn and Rn/Ω, as applicable,
152 of a joint combining the strengths of high-strength bolts and longitudinal fillet
153 welds as the sum of (1) the nominal slip resistance, Rn, for bolts as defined in
154 Equation J3-4 according to the requirements of a slip-critical connection and
155 (2) the nominal weld strength, Rn, as defined in Section J2.4, when the follow-
156 ing apply:
157 (a) φ = 0.75 (LRFD); Ω = 2.00 (ASD) for the combined joint.

J-4
158 (b) When the high-strength bolts are pretensioned according to the require-
159 ments of Table J3.1 or Table J3.1M, using the turn-of-nut or combined
160 method, the longitudinal fillet welds shall have an available strength of
161 not less than 50% of the required strength of the connection.
162 (c) When the high-strength bolts are pretensioned according to the require-
163 ments of Table J3.1 or Table J3.1M, using any method other than the turn-
164 of-nut method, the longitudinal fillet welds shall have an available
165 strength of not less than 70% of the required strength of the connection.
166 (d) The high-strength bolts shall have an available strength of not less than
167 33% of the required strength of the connection.
168
169 In joints with combined bolts and longitudinal welds, the strength of the con-
170 nection need not be taken as less than either the strength of the bolts alone or
171 the strength of the welds alone.
172
173 9. Welded Alterations to Structures with Existing Rivets or Bolts
174
175 In making welded alterations to structures, existing rivets and high-strength
176
5, EW
bolts in standard or short-slotted holes transverse to the direction of load, and
21
177 tightened to the requirements of slip-critical connections are permitted to be
178 utilized for resisting loads present at the time of alteration, and the welding
Y VI
179
20
need only provide the additional required strength. The weld available strength
180 shall provide the additional required strength, but not less than 25% of the re-
AR E
181 quired strength of the connection.

U IC R
182
183 User Note: The provisions of this section are generally recommended for al-
184 teration in building designs or for field corrections. Use of the combined
BR BL
185 strength of bolts and welds on a common faying surface is not recommended
186 for new design.
187
FE PU
188 10. High-Strength Bolts in Combination with Existing Rivets

189
ED FT
190 In connections designed as slip-critical connections in accordance with the pro-

191 visions of Section J3, high-strength bolts are permitted to be considered as shar-
192 ing the load with existing rivets.
AT A
193
D DR
194 J2. WELDS AND WELDED JOINTS

195
196 Welding shall conform to the provisions of the Structural Welding Code—Steel
197 (AWS D1.1/D1.1M), hereafter referred to as AWS D1.1/D1.1M, except where
198 those provisions conflict with this Specification. This Specification governs
199 where provisions conflict with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
200 All provisions of the Structural Welding Code—Steel (AWS D1.1/D1.1M),
201 hereafter referred to as AWS D1.1/D1.1M, apply under this Specification, with
202 the exception that the provisions of the listed Specification sections apply under
203 this Specification in lieu of the cited AWS provisions as follows:
204
205 (a) Section J1.6 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 5.16
206 (b) Section J2.2a in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clauses 2.4.2.10 and 2.4.4.4
207 (c) Table J2.2 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M Table 2.1
208 (d) Table J2.5 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M Table 2.3
209 (e) Appendix 3, Table A-3.1 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M Table 2.5
210 (f) Section B3.11 and Appendix 3 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 2, Part
211 C
212 (g) Section M2.2 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clauses 5.14 and 5.15
213

J-5
214 1. Groove Welds

215
216 1a. Effective Area
217
218 The effective area of groove welds shall be taken as the length of the weld times
219 the effective throat.
220
221 The effective throat of a CJP groove weld shall be the thickness of the thinner
222 part joined.
223
224 When filled flush to the surface, the effective weld throat for a PJP groove weld
225 shall be as given in Table J2.1 and the effective weld throat for a flare groove
226 weld shall be as given in Table J2.2. The effective throat of a PJP groove weld
227 or flare groove weld filled less than flush shall be as shown in Table J2.1 or
228 Table J2.2, less the greatest perpendicular dimension measured from a line
229 flush to the base metal surface to the weld surface.
230
231 User Note: The effective throat of a PJP groove weld is dependent on the pro-
232
5, EW
cess used and the weld position. The design documents should either indicate
21
233 the effective throat required or the weld strength required, and the fabricator
234 should detail the joint based on the weld process and position to be used to weld
Y VI
235 the joint.
20
236
AR E
237 For PJP groove welds, effective throats larger than those for prequalified PJP
U IC R
238 groove welds in AWS D1.1/D1.1M Figure 3.2 and flare groove welds in Table
239 J2.2 are permitted for a given welding procedure specification (WPS), provided
240 the fabricator establishes by testing the consistent production of such larger ef-
BR BL
241 fective throat. Testing shall consist of sectioning the weld normal to its axis, at
242 mid-length, and at terminal ends. Such sectioning shall be made on a number of
243 combinations of material sizes representative of the range to be used in the fab-
FE PU
244 rication. During production of welds with increased effective throats, single
245 pass welds and the root pass of multi-pass welds shall be made using a mecha-
ED FT
246 nized, automatic, or robotic process, with no decrease in current or increase in

247 travel speed from that used for testing.
248
AT A
249 1b. Limitations

D DR
250
251 The minimum effective throat of a partial-joint-penetration groove weld shall
252 not be less than the size required to transmit calculated forces nor the size
253 shown in Table J2.3. Minimum weld size is determined by the thinner of the
254 two parts joined.
255
TABLE J2.1
Effective Throat of
Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds
Welding Position
F (flat),
H (horizontal), Groove Type
V (vertical), (AWS D1.1, Effective
Welding Process OH (overhead) Figure 3.3) Throat
Shielded metal arc J or U groove
(SMAW) depth of
All
Gas metal arc (GMAW) 60° V groove
Flux cored arc (FCAW)

J-6
J or U groove
Submerged arc (SAW) F
60° bevel or V
Gas metal arc (GMAW) 45° bevel depth of
F, H
Flux cored arc (FCAW) groove
Shielded metal arc depth of
All
(SMAW) groove
45° bevel
Gas metal arc (GMAW) minus 1/8 in.
V, OH
Flux cored arc (FCAW) (3 mm)
256
257
TABLE J2.2
Effective Throat of
Flare Groove Welds
Welding Process Flare Bevel Groove[a] Flare V-Groove
GMAW and FCAW-G 5/8R 3/4R
SMAW and FCAW-S 5/16R 5/8R
SAW 5/16R 1/2R
[a] For flare bevel groove with R < 3/8 in. (10 mm), use only reinforcing fillet weld on
5, EW
filled flush joint.
21
General note: R = radius of joint surface (is permitted to be assumed equal to 2t for
HSS)
Y VI
258
20
AR E
259
TABLE J2.3
U IC R
Minimum Effective Throat of

Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds
BR BL
Material Thickness of Minimum Effective

Thinner Part Joined, in. (mm) Throat,[a] in. (mm)
FE PU
To 1/4 (6) inclusive 1/8 (3)

Over 1/4 (6) to 1/2 (13) 3/16 (5)
Over 1/2 (13) to 3/4 (19) 1/4 (6)
ED FT
Over 3/4 (19) to 1-1/2 (38) 5/16 (8)

Over 1-1/2 (38) to 2-1/4 (57) 3/8 (10)
Over 2-1/4 (57) to 6 (150) 1/2 (13)
AT A
Over 6 (150) 5/8 (16)

D DR
[a] See Table J2.1.
260
261
262 2. Fillet Welds
263
265 The effective area of a fillet weld shall be the effective length multiplied by the
266 effective throat. The effective throat of a fillet weld shall be the shortest dis-
267 tance from the root to the face of the diagrammatic weld. An increase in effec-
268 tive throat is permitted if consistent penetration beyond the root of the dia-
269 grammatic weld is demonstrated by tests using a given welding procedure
270 specification (WPS), provided the fabricator establishes by testing the con-
271 sistent production of such larger effective throat. Testing shall consist of sec-
272 tioning the weld normal to its axis, at mid-length, and terminal ends. During
273 production, single pass welds and the root pass of multi-pass welds shall be
274 made using a mechanized, automatic or robotic process, with no decrease in
275 current or increase in travel speed from that used for testing. .
276

J-7
277 For fillet welds in holes and slots, the effective length shall be the length of the
278 centerline of the weld along the center of the plane through the throat. In the
279 case of overlapping fillets, the effective area shall not exceed the nominal cross-
280 sectional area of the hole or slot, in the plane of the faying surface.
281
282 2b. Limitations
283
284 Fillet welds shall meet the following limitations:
285
286 (a) The minimum size of fillet welds shall be not less than the size required to
287 transmit calculated forces, nor the size as shown in Table J2.4. These limita-
288 tions do not apply to fillet weld reinforcements of groove welds.
289
TABLE J2.4
Minimum Size of Fillet Welds
Material Thickness of Minimum Size of
Thinner Part Joined, in. (mm) Fillet Weld,[a] in. (mm)
5, EW
To 1/4 (6) inclusive 1/8 (3)
21
Over 1/4 (6) to 1/2 (13) 3/16 (5)
Over 1/2 (13) to 3/4 (19) 1/4 (6)
Over 3/4 (19) 5/16 (8)
Y VI
20
[a] Leg dimension of fillet welds. When non-low hydrogen electrodes are used single
AR E
pass welds must be used.

Note: See Section J2.2b for maximum size of fillet welds.
U IC R
290
291 (b) The maximum size of fillet welds of connected parts shall be:
292
BR BL
293 (1) Along edges of material less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) thick; not greater
294 than the thickness of the material.
FE PU
295
296 (2) Along edges of material 1/4 in. (6 mm) or more in thickness; not
297 greater than the thickness of the material minus 1/16 in. (2 mm), unless
ED FT
298 the weld is especially designated on the design and fabrication documents
299 to be built out to obtain full-throat thickness. In the as-welded condition,
AT A
300 the distance between the edge of the base metal and the toe of the weld is
D DR
301 permitted to be less than 1/16 in. (2 mm), provided the weld size is clearly
302 verifiable.
303
304 (c) The minimum length of fillet welds designed on the basis of strength shall be not
305 less than four times the nominal weld size, or else the effective size of the
306 weld shall not be taken to exceed one-quarter of its length.
307
308 (d) The effective length of end loaded fillet welds shall be determined as fol-
309 lows:
310
311 (1) For end-loaded fillet welds with a length up to 100 times the weld size,
312 it is permitted to take the effective length equal to the actual length.
313
314 (2) When the length of the end-loaded fillet weld exceeds 100 times the
315 weld size, the effective length shall be determined by multiplying the
316 actual length by the reduction factor, β, determined as:
317
318 β = 1.2 – 0.002(l/w) ≤ 1.0 (J2-1)
319
320 where

J-8
321 l = actual length of end-loaded weld, in. (mm)

322 w = size of weld leg, in. (mm)
323
324 (3) When the length of the weld exceeds 300 times the leg size, w, the
325 effective length shall be taken as 180w.
326
327 User Note: For the effect of longitudinal fillet weld length in end connec-
328 tions upon the effective area of the connected member see Section D3.
329
330 (e) Intermittent fillet welds are permitted to be used to transfer calculated
331 stress across a joint or faying surfaces and to join components of built-up
332 members. The length of any segment of intermittent fillet welding shall
333 be not less than four times the weld size, with a minimum of 1-1/2 in. (38
334 mm).
335
336 (f) In lap joints, the minimum amount of lap shall be five times the thickness
337 of the thinner part joined, but not less than 1 in. (25 mm). Lap joints join-
338 ing plates or bars subjected to axial stress that utilize transverse fillet
339
5, EW
welds only shall be fillet welded along the end of both lapped parts, except
21
340 where the deflection of the lapped parts is sufficiently restrained to pre-
341 vent opening of the joint under maximum loading.
Y VI
342
20
343 (g) Fillet weld terminations shall be detailed in a manner that does not result
AR E
344 in a notch in the base metal subject to applied tension loads. Components
U IC R
345 shall not be connected by welds where the weld would prevent the defor-
346 mation required to provide assumed design conditions.
347
BR BL
348 User Note: Fillet weld terminations should be detailed in a manner that does
349 not result in a notch in the base metal transverse to applied tension loads that
350 can occur as a result of normal fabrication. An accepted practice to avoid
FE PU
351 notches in base metal is to stop fillet welds short of the edge of the base metal
352 by a length approximately equal to the size of the weld. In most welds, the
ED FT
353 effect of stopping short can be neglected in strength calculations.

354
355 There are two common details where welds are terminated short of the end of
AT A
356 the joint to permit relative deformation between the connected parts:
D DR
357
358 • Welds on the outstanding legs of beam clip-angle connections are returned
359 on the top of the outstanding leg and stopped no more than 4 times the weld
360 size and not greater than half the leg width from the outer toe of the angle.
361 • Fillet welds connecting transverse stiffeners to webs of girders that are ¾
362 in. thick or less are stopped 4 to 6 times the web thickness from the web toe
363 of the flange-to web fillet weld, except where the end of the stiffener is
364 welded to the flange.
365
366 Details of fillet weld terminations may be shown on shop standard details.
367
368 (h) Fillet welds in holes or slots are permitted to be used to transmit shear and
369 resist loads perpendicular to the faying surface in lap joints or to prevent
370 the buckling or separation of lapped parts and to join components of built-
371 up members. Such fillet welds are permitted to overlap, subject to the pro-
372 visions of Section J2. Fillet welds in holes or slots are not to be considered
373 plug or slot welds.
374

J-9
375 (i) For fillet welds in slots, the ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall
376 have the corners rounded to a radius of not less than the thickness of the
377 part containing it, except those ends which extend to the edge of the part.
378
379 3. Plug and Slot Welds
380
382
383 The effective shear area of plug and slot welds shall be taken as the nominal
384 area of the hole or slot in the plane of the faying surface.
385
386 3b. Limitations
387
388 Plug or slot welds are permitted to be used to transmit shear in lap joints, or to
389 prevent buckling or separation of lapped parts, and to join component parts of
390 built-up members, subject to the following limitations:
391
392 (a) The diameter of the holes for a plug weld shall not be less than the thickness
393 5, EW
of the part containing it plus 5/16 in. (8 mm), rounded to the next larger
21
394 odd 1/16 in. (even mm), nor greater than the minimum diameter plus 1/8
395 in. (3 mm) or 2-1/4 times the thickness of the weld.
Y VI
396
20
397 (b) The minimum center-to-center spacing of plug welds shall be four times
AR E
398 the diameter of the hole.

U IC R
399
400 (c) The length of slot for a slot weld shall not exceed 10 times the thickness of
401 the weld.
BR BL
402
403 (d) The width of the slot shall be not less than the thickness of the part contain-
404 ing it plus 5/16 in. (8 mm) rounded to the next larger odd 1/16 in. (even
FE PU
405 mm), nor shall it be larger than 2-1/4 times the thickness of the weld.
406
ED FT
407 (e) The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the corners rounded
408 to a radius of not less than the thickness of the part containing it.
409
AT A
410 (f) The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to their
D DR
411 length shall be four times the width of the slot.

412
413 (g) The minimum center-to-center spacing in a longitudinal direction on any
414 line shall be two times the length of the slot.
415
416 (h) The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 5/8 in. (16 mm) or less in
417 thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the material. In material over
418 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick, the thickness of the weld shall be at least one-half
419 the thickness of the material, but not less than 5/8 in. (16 mm).
420
421 4. Strength
422
423 (a) The design strength, φRn, and the allowable strength, Rn/Ω, of welded
424 joints shall be the lower value of the base material strength determined
425 according to the limit states of tensile rupture and shear rupture and the
426 weld metal strength determined according to the limit state of rupture as
427 follows.
428
429 For the base metal
430

J-10
431 Rn = FnBMABM (J2-2)

432
433 For complete and partial-joint-penetration groove welds, and plug and
434 slot welds
435
436 Rn = FnwAwe (J2-3)
437
438 For fillet welds
439
440 Rn = FnwAwekds (J2-4)
441
442 where
443 ABM = area of the base metal, in.2 (mm2)
444 Awe = effective area of the weld, in.2 (mm2)
445 FnBM = nominal stress of the base metal, ksi (MPa)
446 Fnw = nominal stress of the weld metal, ksi (MPa)
447 kds = directional strength increase factor
448 (1) For fillet welds where strain compatibility of the various
449 5, EW
weld elements is considered
21
450 kds = (1.0 + 0.50sin1.5θ) (J2-5)
451 (2) For fillet welds to the ends of rectangular HSS loaded in
Y VI
452
20
tension
AR E
453 kds = 1.0

U IC R
454 (3) For all other conditions

455 kds = 1.0
456 θ = angle between the line of action of the required force and the
457 weld longitudinal axis, degrees
BR BL
458
459 The values of φ, Ω, FnBM, and Fnw, and limitations thereon, are given in
FE PU
460 Table J2.5.

461
462 User Note: The base metal check need not be performed for fillet welds
ED FT
463 as illustrated in the Commentary.

464
AT A
465 User Note: The instantaneous center method is a valid way to calculate
D DR
466 the strength of weld groups consisting of weld elements in various direc-
467 tions that considers strain compatibility.
468
469 Strain compatibility is satisfied for a linear weld group with a uniform
470 leg size connecting elements with uniform stiffness that are loaded
471 through the center of gravity, and therefore the directional strength in-
472 crease is permitted. A linear weld group is one in which all elements are
473 in a line or are parallel.
474
475 (b) For fillet weld groups concentrically loaded and consisting of elements
476 with a uniform leg size that are oriented both longitudinally and trans-
477 versely to the direction of applied load, the nominal strength, Rn, of the
478 fillet weld group is permitted to be determined as:
479
480 Rn = 0.85 FnwAwel + 1.5FnwAwet (J2-6)
481
482 where
483 Awel = effective area of longitudinally loaded fillet welds, in.2 (mm2)
484 Awet = effective area of transversely loaded fillet welds, in.2 (mm2)

J-11
485
486 User Note: The nominal strength of fillet welds groups consisting of el-
487 ements that are oriented both longitudinally and transversely to the di-
488 rection of applied load can also be calculated in accordance with Section
489 J2.4(a) neglecting the directional strength increase.
490
491 4. Strength
492
493 (a) The design strength, φRn and the allowable strength, Rn/Ω, of welded
494 joints shall be the lower value of the base material strength determined
495 according to the limit states of tensile rupture and shear rupture and the
496 weld metal strength determined according to the limit state of rupture as
497 follows:
498
499 For the base metal
500 Rn = FnBM ABM (J2-2)
501
502 For the weld metal
503 5, EW Rn = FnwAwe (J2-3)
21
504
505
Y VI
506 where
20
507 ABM = area of the base metal, in.2 (mm2)
AR E
508 Awe = effective area of the weld, in.2 (mm2)

U IC R
509 FnBM = nominal stress of the base metal, ksi (MPa)

510 Fnw = nominal stress of the weld metal, ksi (MPa)
511
BR BL
512 The values of φ, Ω, FnBM and Fnw, and limitations thereon, are given in
513 Table J2.5.
FE PU
514
515 (b) The design strength, φRn and the allowable strength, Rn/Ω, of weld groups
ED FT
517
518 (1) For a linear weld group with a uniform leg size, loaded through the
AT A
519 center of gravity, the available strength is permitted to be determined

520 accounting for a directional strength increase if strain compatibility of
D DR
521 the various weld elements is considered, using

522 (
Fnw = 0.60 FEXX 1.0 + 0.50 sin1.5 θ ) (J2-4)
523
524 where
525 FEXX = filler metal classification strength, ksi (MPa)
526 φ = 0.75 (LRFD); Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
527 θ = angle between the line of action of the required force and the weld
528 longitudinal axis, degrees
529
530
531 User Note: A linear weld group is one in which all elements are
532 in a line or are parallel.
533
534
535 (2) For fillet welds to the ends of rectangular HSS where the weld ia
536 loaded in tension, the directional strength increase is not applicable.
537 Hence,
538

J-12
539 Fnw = 0.60FEXX (J2-5)

540
541 (3) For fillet weld groups concentrically loaded and consisting of elements
542 with a uniform leg size that are oriented both longitudinally and trans-
543 versely to the direction of applied load, the combined strength, Rn, of
544 the fillet weld group shall be determined as the greater of the follow-
545 ing:
546
547 (i) Rn = Rnwl + Rnwt (J2-6a)
548
549 or
550
551 (ii) Rn = 0.85 Rnwl + 1.5Rnwt (J2-6b)
552
553 where
554 Rnwl = total nominal strength of longitudinally loaded fillet welds,
555 as determined in accordance with Table J2.5, kips (N)
556 Rnwt = total nominal strength of transversely loaded fillet welds, as
557 5, EW
determined in accordance with Table J2.5 without the increase in
21
558 Section J2.4(b), kips (N)
559
Y VI
560
20
User Note: The instantaneous center method is a valid way to calculate the
561 strength of weld groups consisting of weld elements in various directions based
AR E
562 on strain compatibility.

U IC R
563
564
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

J-13
565
TABLE J2.5
Available Strength of Welded Joints, ksi (MPa)
Effective
Nominal Required
Area
Load Type and Direction Pertinent Stress Filler Metal
φ and Ω (ABM or
Relative to Weld Axis Metal (FnBM or Fnw), Awe), Strength
ksi (MPa) Level[a][b]
in.2 (mm2)
COMPLETE-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS
Matching
filler metal
shall be
used. For T-
and corner-
Strength of the joint is controlled
joints with
by the base metal.
Tension– backing left
Normal to weld axis in place,
5, EW notch tough
21
filler metal is
required.
See Section
Y VI
20 J2.6.
AR E
Filler metal
with a
U IC R
strength
level equal
Strength of the joint is controlled
to or one
by the base metal.
Compression– strength
BR BL
Normal to weld axis level less

than match-
FE PU
ing filler
metal
is permitted.
ED FT
Filler metal
with a
strength
AT A
Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to level equal

D DR
Tension or compression– a weld is permitted to be neglected in design of to or less

Parallel to weld axis welds joining the parts. than match-
ing filler
metal is per-
mitted.
Matching
Strength of the joint is controlled filler metal
Shear by the base metal. shall be
used. [c]
PARTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS INCLUDING FLARE V-GROOVE
AND FLARE BEVEL GROOVE WELDS
φ = 0.75
Base Fu See J4
Tension– Ω = 2.00
Normal to weld axis φ = 0.80 See
Weld 0.60 FEXX
Ω = 1.88 J2.1a

J-14
Compression–
Connections of Members Compressive stress is permitted to be neglected
designed to bear as de- in design of welds joining the parts.
scribed in Section J1.4(b)
φ = 0.90
Base Fy See
Ω = 1.67 J4
Compression–
Connections not designed
to bear φ = 0.80
0.90 FEXX See
Weld Ω = 1.88 J2.1a
Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to Filler metal

Tension or compression– a weld is permitted to be neglected in design of with a
welds joining the parts. strength
Parallel to weld axis
level equal
Base Governed by J4
to or less
than match-
Shear φ = 0.75 0.60 FEXX See ing filler
Weld
Ω = 2.00 J2.1a
5, EW metal is per-
21
mitted.
FILLET WELDS INCLUDING FILLETS IN HOLES AND SLOTS AND SKEWED T-JOINTS
Y VI
20 Base
φ = 0.75
Governed by J4
See
Filler metal
with a
[d]
Shear Weld 0.60 FEXX
AR E
Ω = 2.00 J2.2a strength

level equal
U IC R
to or less
Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to than match-
Tension or compression– a weld is permitted to be neglected in design of ing filler
Parallel to weld axis welds joining the parts.
BR BL
metal is per-
mitted.
PLUG AND SLOT WELDS
FE PU
Filler metal
Base Governed by J4
with a
strength
ED FT
level equal
Shear–
to or less
Parallel to faying surface φ = 0.75
AT A
Weld 0.60FEXX J2.3a than match-

on the effective area Ω = 2.00 ing filler
D DR
metal is per-
mitted
[a] For matching weld metal, see AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 3.3.
[b] Filler metal with a strength level one strength level greater than matching is permitted.
[c] Filler metals with a strength level less than matching are permitted to be used for CJP
groove welds between the webs and flanges of built-up sections transferring shear loads,
or in applications where high restraint is a concern. In these applications, the weld joint
shall be detailed and the weld shall be designed using the thickness of the material as the
effective throat, where φ = 0.80, Ω = 1.88 and 0.60 FEXX is the nominal strength.
[d] The provisions of Section J2.4(b) are also applicable.
566

J-15
567 5. Combination of Welds

568
569 If two or more of the general types of welds (groove, fillet, plug, slot) are com-
570 bined in a single joint, the strength of each shall be separately computed with
571 reference to the axis of the group in order to determine the strength of the com-
572 bination.
573
574 6. Filler Metal Requirements
575
576 The choice of filler metal for use with CJP groove welds subject to tension
577 normal to the effective area shall comply with the requirements for matching
578 filler metals given in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
579
580 User Note: The following User Note Table summarizes the AWS D1.1/D1.1M
581 provisions for matching filler metals. Other restrictions exist. For a complete
582 list of base metals and prequalified matching filler metals, see AWS
583 D1.1/D1.1M Table 3.15.3 and Table 3.25.4.
584
5, EW
Base Metal (ASTM) Matching Filler Metal
21
A36 ≤ 3/4 in. thick 60- and 70-ksi filler metal
SMAW: E7015, E7016, E7018,
A36 > 3/4 in. thick, A588[a], A1011,
Y VI
20
A572 Gr. 50 and 55, A913 Gr. 50,
E7028
Other processes: 70-ksi filler
AR E
A992, A1018
metal
U IC R
A913 Gr. 60 and 65 80-ksi filler metal

A913 Gr. 70 90-ksi filler metal
[a] For corrosion resistance and color similar to the base metal, see AWS D1.1/D1.1M
clause 3.7.35.6.2.
BR BL
Notes:
In joints with base metals of different strengths, either a filler metal that matches the
FE PU
higher strength base metal or a filler metal that matches the lower strength and pro-
duces a low hydrogen deposit may be used when matching strength is required.
585
ED FT
586
587
588 Filler metal with a specified minimum Charpy V-notch toughness of 20 ft-lb
AT A
589 (27 J) at 40°F (4°C) or lower shall be used in the following joints:
D DR
590
591 (a) CJP groove welded T- and corner joints with steel backing left in place,
592 subject to tension normal to the effective area, unless the joints are de-
593 signed using the nominal strength and resistance factor or safety factor,
594 as applicable, for a PJP groove weld
595 (b) CJP groove welded splices subject to tension normal to the effective area
596 in heavy sections, as defined in Sections A3.1c and A3.1d
597
598 The manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance shall be sufficient evidence of
599 compliance.
600
601 7. Mixed Weld Metal
602
603 When Charpy V-notch toughness is specified, the process consumables for all
604 weld metal, tack welds, root pass and subsequent passes deposited in a joint
605 shall be compatible to ensure notch-tough composite weld metal.

J-16
606
607 J3. BOLTS, THREADED PARTS AND BOLTED CONNECTIONS
608
609 1. Common Bolts
610
611 ASTM A307 bolts are permitted except where pretensioning is specified.
612
613 2. High-Strength Bolts
614
615 Use of high-strength bolts and bolting components shall conform to the provi-
616 sions of the Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts, here-
617 after referred to as the RCSC Specification, except where those provisions con-
618 flict with this Specification. This Specification governs where provisions con-
619 flict with the RCSC Specification.
620 Use of high-strength bolts and bolting components shall conform to the provi-
621 sions of the Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts, here-
622 after referred to as the RCSC Specification, except as modified by this Specifi-
623 cation. Major modifications include the following:
624
5, EW
21
625 (a) This Specification allows bolt grades of ASTM F3125/F3125M Grades
626 A325, A325M, A490, A490M, F1852, and F2280, and ASTM F3043,
Y VI
627
20
ASTM F3111, ASTM F3148, ASTM A354 Grade BC, ASTM A354
628 Grade BD, and ASTM A449 bolts.
AR E
629 (b) The RCSC Specification Section 5.2 is replaced with Section J3.7 of this
U IC R
630 Specification
631 (c) Exceptions to the RCSC Specification associated with cyclically loaded
632 connections are contained in Appendix 3 of this Specification.
BR BL
633 (d) Water-jet cutting of holes is permitted by Section M2.5 of this Specifica-
634 tion.
635
FE PU
636 High-strength bolts in this Specification are grouped according to material

637 strength as follows:
ED FT
638
639 Group 120 ASTM F3125/F3125M Grades A325, A325M, F1852, and
640 ASTM A354 Grade BC
AT A
641 Group 144 ASTM F3148 Grade 144

D DR
642 Group 150 ASTM F3125/F3125M Grades A490, A490M, F2280, and
643 ASTM A354 Grade BD
644 Group 200 ASTM F3043 and F3111
645
646 Use of Group 144 bolting assemblies shall conform to the provisions of ASTM
647 F3148. Assemblies may be used in snug-tight, pretensioned or slip-critical
648 connections, using the installation procedures provided in ASTM F3148 and
649 RCSC Specification Section 8.2.5.
650
651 Use of Group 200 high-strength bolting assemblies shall conform to the appli-
652 cable provisions of their ASTM standard. ASTM F3043 and F3111 Grade 1
653 assemblies may be installed only to the snug-tight condition. ASTM F3043
654 and F3111 Grade 2 assemblies may be used in snug-tight, pretensioned and
655 slip-critical connections, using procedures provided in the applicable ASTM
656 standard.
657
658 User Note: The use of Group 200 bolting assemblies is limited to specific
659 building locations and noncorrosive environmental conditions by the applica-
660 ble ASTM standard.
661

J-17
662 When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the washers,
663 shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale.
664
665 (a) Bolting assemblies are permitted to be installed to the snug-tight condi-
666 tion when used in:
667
668 (1) Bearing-type connections, except as stipulated in Section E6
669 (2) Tension or combined shear and tension applications, for Group 120
670 bolts only, where loosening or fatigue due to vibration or load fluc-
671 tuations are not design considerations
672
673 (b) Bolts in the following connections shall be pretensioned:
674
675 (1) As required by the RCSC Specification
676 (2) Connections subjected to vibratory loads where bolt loosening is a
677 consideration
678 (3) End connections of built-up members composed of two shapes either
679 interconnected by bolts, or with at least one open side interconnected
680
5, EW
by perforated cover plates or lacing with tie plates, as required in
21
681 Section E6.1
682
Y VI
683
20
(c) The following connections shall be designed as slip slip-critical:
684
AR E
685 (1) As required by the RCSC Specification

U IC R
686 (2) The extended portion of bolted, partial-length cover plates, as re-
687 quired in Section F13.3
688
BR BL
689 The snug-tight condition is defined in the RCSC Specification. Bolts to be

690 tightened to a condition other than snug tight shall be clearly identified on the
691 design documents. (See Table J3.1 or J3.1M for minimum bolt pretension for
FE PU
692 connections designated as pretensioned or slip critical.)

693
ED FT
694 User Note: There are no specific minimum or maximum tension requirements
695 for snug-tight bolts. Bolts that have been pretensioned are permitted in snug-
696 tight connections unless specifically prohibited on design documents.
AT A
697
D DR
698 When bolt requirements cannot be provided within the RCSC Specification
699 limitations because of requirements for lengths exceeding 12 diameters or di-
700 ameters exceeding 1-1/2 in. (38 mm), bolts or threaded rods conforming to
701 Group 120 or Group 150 materials are permitted to be used in accordance with
702 the provisions for threaded parts in Table J3.2.
703 When ASTM A354 Grade BC, A354 Grade BD, or A449 bolts and threaded
704 rods are used in pretensioned connections, the bolt geometry, including the
705 thread pitch, thread length, head and nut(s), shall be equal to or (if larger in
706 diameter) proportional to that required by the RCSC Specification. Installation
707 shall comply with all applicable requirements of the RCSC Specification with
708 modifications as required for the increased diameter and/or length to provide
709 the design pretension.
710 32. Size and Use of Holes
711
712 The following requirements apply for bolted connections:
713
714 (a) The nominal dimensions of standard, oversized, short-slotted and long-slot-
715 ted holes for bolts are given in Table J3.3 or Table J3.3M.
716

J-18
717 User Note: Bolt holes with a smaller nominal diameter are permitted. See
718 RCSC Table 3.1 for bolt hole fabrication tolerances. See Section J9 for diame-
719 ters of holes in base plates for anchor rods providing anchorage to concrete.
720
721 (b) Standard holes or short-slotted holes transverse to the direction of the load
722 shall be provided in accordance with the provisions of this Specification,
723 unless oversized holes, short-slotted holes parallel to the load, or long-slot-
724 ted holes are approved by the engineer of record.
725
726 (c) Finger shims up to 1/4 in. (6 mm) are permitted in slip-critical connections
727 designed on the basis of standard holes without reducing the nominal shear
728 strength of the fastener to that specified for slotted holes.
729
TABLE J3.1
Minimum Bolt Pretension, kips
Group 144[a] [b]
And
Bolt Size, Group 120[a] Group 150[b] Group 200, Grade 2[c]
in. 5, EW
21
1/2 12 15 −
5/8 19 24 −
Y VI
3/4
20 28 35 −
7/8 39 49 −
AR E
1 51 64 90
U IC R
1 1/8 64 80 113
1-1/4 81 102 143
1 3/8 97 121 −
1-1/2 118 148 −
BR BL
[a]
Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts as specified in ASTM
F3125/F3125M for Grade A325 rounded off to nearest kip.
FE PU
[b]
Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts as specified in ASTM
F3125/F3125M for Grade A490 rounded off to nearest kip. Group 144 (F3148) assemblies
have the same specified minimum pretension as Group 150.
[c]
Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts as specified in ASTM F3043
ED FT
and F3111 for Grade 2, rounded off to nearest kip,.

730
AT A
TABLE J3.1M
D DR
Minimum Bolt Pretension, (metric) kN

Bolt Size, Group 120 [a] Group 150[b]
mm
M16 91 114
M20 142 179
M22 176 221
M24 205 257
M27 267 334
M30 326 408
M36 475 595
[a]Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts as specified in ASTM
F3125/F3125M for Grade A325M bolts, rounded off to nearest kN.
[ab]Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts as specified in ASTM
F3125/F3125M for Grade A490M bolts, rounded off to nearest kN.

731
732
733
734

J-19
735 User Note: Metric grades manufactured to ASTM F3125 Grade A325M and
736 A490M are similar to Group 120 (830 MPa) and Group 150 (1030 MPa), re-
737 spectively.
738
739 (d) Oversized holes are permitted in any or all plies of slip-critical connections,
740 but they shall not be used in bearing-type connections.
741
742 (e) Short-slotted holes are permitted in any or all plies of slip-critical or bear-
743 ing-type connections. The slots are permitted without regard to direction of
744 loading in slip-critical connections, but the length shall be normal to the
745 direction of the loading in bearing-type connections.
746
747 (f) Long-slotted holes are permitted in only one of the connected parts of either
748 a slip-critical or bearing-type connection at an individual faying surface.
749 Long-slotted holes are permitted without regard to direction of loading in
750 slip-critical connections, but shall be normal to the direction of loading in
751 bearing-type connections.
752
753
5, EW
(g) Washers shall be provided in accordance with the RCSC Specification Sec-
21
754 tion 6, except for Group 200 bolting assemblies, washers shall be provided
755 in accordance with the applicable ASTM standard.
Y VI
756
20
757 User Note: When Group 200 heavy-hex bolting assemblies are used, a single
AR E
758 washer is used under the bolt head and a single washer is used under the nut.
U IC R
759 When Group 200 twist-off bolting assemblies are used, a single washer is used
760 under the nut. Washers are of the type specified in the ASTM standard for the
761 bolting assembly.
BR BL
762
763 43. Minimum Spacing
764
FE PU
765 The distance between centers of standard, oversized or slotted holes shall not
766 be less than 2-2/3 times the nominal diameter, d, of the fastener. However, the
ED FT
767 clear distance between bolt holes or slots shall not be less than d.
768
769 User Note: A distance between centers of standard, oversize or slotted holes
AT A
770 of 3d is preferred.
D DR

J-20
TABLE J3.2
Nominal Stress of Fasteners and Threaded Parts, ksi (MPa)
Nominal Shear Stress in Bearing-
Type Connections,
Nominal Ten- Fnv, ksi (MPa) [c]
sile Threads Not Ex- Threads Ex-
Stress, cluded from cluded from
Fnt, ksi Shear Planes – Shear Planes –
Description of Fasteners (MPa)[a][b] (N)[e] (X)
A307 bolts 45 (310)[c] 27 (186190)[c] [d] 27 (186190)[c][d]
Group 120 (e.g., A325) 90 (620) 54 (372370) 68 (469)470
Group 144 (e.g., F3148) 108 (745750) 65 (448450) 81 (565570)
Group 150 (e.g., A490) 113 (780) 68 (469470) 84 (579580)
5, EW
21
Group 200 (e.g., F3043)
150 (10401000) 90 (620)[ef] 113 (779780)[ef]
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
Threaded parts meeting 0.75 Fu 0.450 Fu 0.563 Fu

the requirements of Sec-
tion A3.4,
BR BL
[a]
For high-strength bolts subject to tensile fatigue loading, see Appendix 3.
FE PU
[b]
For nominal tensile strength it is permitted to use the tensile stress area of the threaded rod or
bolt multiplied by the specified minimum tensile stress of the rod or bolt material, in lieu of the
tabulated values based on a nominal tensile stress area of 0.75 times the gross area. The tensile
ED FT
stress area shall be calculated in accordance with the applicable ASTM standard.For nominal
tensile strength it is permitted to use the tensile stress areaof the threaded rod or bolt multiplied
by the minimum specified tensile stress of the rod or bolt material, in lieu of the tabulated values
AT A
based on a nomnal tensile stress ares of 0.75 times the gross area
D DR
[c]
For end loaded connections with a fastener pattern length greater than 38 in. (950 mm), Fnv
shall be reduced to 83.3% of the tabulated values. Fastener pattern length is the maximum dis-
tance parallel to the line of force between the centerline of the bolts connecting two parts with
one faying surface.
d]
For A307 bolts, the tabulated values shall be reduced by 1% for each 1/16 in. (2 mm) over five
diameters of length in the grip.
[e]
Threads assumed and permitted in shear planes in all cases.
[fe]
The transition area of Group 200 bolts is considered part of the threaded section.
771
772 54. Minimum Edge Distance
773
774 The distance from the center of a standard hole to an edge of a connected part
775 in any direction shall not be less than either the applicable value from Table J3.4
776 or Table J3.4M, or as required in Section J3.10. The distance from the center of
777 an oversized or slotted hole to an edge of a connected part shall be not less than
778 that required for a standard hole to an edge of a connected part plus the appli-
779 cable increment, C2, from Table J3.5 or Table J3.5M.
780
781 User Note: The edge distances in Tables J3.4 and J3.4M are minimum edge
782 distances based on standard fabrication practices and workmanship tolerances.
783 The appropriate provisions of Sections J3.10 and J4 must be satisfied.
784

J-21
785 65. Maximum Spacing and Edge Distance

786
787 The maximum distance from the center of any bolt hole to the nearest edge of
788 elements in contact shall be 12 times the thickness of the connected element
789 under consideration, but shall not exceed 6 in. (150 mm). The longitudinal spac-
790 ing of bolt holes between elements consisting of a plate and a shape, or two
791 plates, in continuous contact shall be as follows:
792
793 (a) For painted members or unpainted members not subject to corrosion, the
794 spacing shall not exceed 24 times the thickness of the thinner part or 12
795 in. (300 mm).
796
797 (b) For unpainted members of weathering steel subject to atmospheric corro-
798 sion, the spacing shall not exceed 14 times the thickness of the thinner part
799 or 7 in. (180 mm).
800
801 User Note: The dimensions in (a) and (b) do not apply to elements consisting
802 of two shapes in continuous contact.
803
5, EW
21
804
TABLE J3.3
Y VI
20
Nominal Hole Dimensions, in.
AR E
Hole Dimensions
U IC R
Bolt Standard Oversize Short-Slot Long-Slot

Diameter (Dia.) (Dia.) (Width x Length) (Width x Length)
1/2 9/16 5/8 9/16 x 11/16 9/16 x 1-1/4
5/8 11/16 13/16 11/16 x 7/8 11/16 x 1-9/16
BR BL
3/4 13/16 15/16 13/16 x 1 13/16 x 1-7/8

7/8 15/16 1-1/16 15/16 x 1-1/8 15/16 x 2-3/16
1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/8 x 1-5/16 1-1/8 x 2-1/2
FE PU
≥1-1/8 d + 1/8 d + 5/16 (d + 1/8) x (d + 3/8) (d + 1/8) x 2.5d

805
806
ED FT
TABLE J3.3M
Nominal Hole Dimensions, mm
AT A
Hole Dimensions
D DR
Bolt Standard Oversize Short-Slot Long-Slot

Diameter (Dia.) (Dia.) (Width x (Width x
Length) Length)
M16 18 20 18 x 22 18 x 40
M20 22 24 22 x 26 22 x 50
M22 24 28 24 x 30 24 x 55
M24 27[a] 30 27 x 32 27 x 60
M27 30 35 30 x 37 30 x 67
M30 33 38 33 x 40 33 x 75
≥M36 d+3 d+8 (d + 3) x (d + 10) (d + 3) x 2.5d
[a]
Clearance provided allows the use of a 1-in.-diameter bolt.
807
808

J-22
809
TABLE J3.4
Minimum Edge Distance [a] from
Center of Standard Hole[b] to Edge of
Connected Part, in.
Bolt Diameter Minimum Edge Distance
1/2 3/4
5/8 7/8
3/4 1
7/8 1-1/8
1 1-1/4
1-1/8 1-1/2
1-1/4 1-5/8
Over 1-1/4 1-1/4d
[a]
If necessary, lesser edge distances are permitted provided the applicable provisions from Sec-
5, EW
tions J3.10 and J4 are satisfied, but edge distances less than one bolt diameter are not permit-
ted without approval from the engineer of record.
21
[b]
For oversized or slotted holes, see Table J3.5.
810
Y VI
811
20
AR E
TABLE J3.4M
U IC R
Minimum Edge Distance[a] from

Center of Standard Hole[b] to Edge of
Connected Part, mm
BR BL
Bolt Diameter Minimum Edge Distance

FE PU
16 22
20 26
ED FT
22 28
24 30
AT A
27 34
30 38
D DR
36 46
Over 36 1.25d
[a]
If necessary, lesser edge distances are permitted provided the applicable provisions from Sec-
tions J3.10 and J4 are satisfied, but edge distances less than one bolt diameter are not permit-
ted without approval from the engineer of record.
[b]
For oversized or slotted holes, see Table J3.5M.
812
813 76. Tensile and Shear Strength of Bolts and Threaded Parts
814
815 The design tensile or shear strength, φRn, and the allowable tensile or shear
816 strength, Rn/Ω, of a snug-tightened or pretensioned high-strength bolt or
817 threaded part shall be determined according to the limit states of tension rup-
818 ture and shear rupture as:
819
820 Rn = Fn Ab (J3-1)
821
822 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
823
824 where
825 Ab = nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or threaded part, in.2 (mm2)

J-23
826 Fn = nominal tensile stress, Fnt, or shear stress, Fnv, from Table J3.2, ksi
827 (MPa)
828
829 The required tensile strength shall include any tension resulting from prying
830 action produced by deformation of the connected parts.
831
832 User Note: The available strength of a bolt in shear depends on whether the
833 bolt is sheared through its shank or through the threads / thread runout. Bolts
834 that are relatively short may be produced as fully threaded, without a shank, and
835 thus may not be able to be installed in the “threads excluded” condition.
836
837 User Note: The force that can be resisted by a snug-tightened or pretensioned
838 high-strength bolt or threaded part may be limited by the bearing or tearout
839 strength at the bolt hole per Section J3.10. The effective strength of an individ-
840 ual fastener may be taken as the lesser of the fastener shear strength per Section
841 J3.6 or the bearing or tearout strength at the bolt hole per Section J3.10. The
842 strength of the bolt group is taken as the sum of the effective strengths of the
843 individual fasteners.
844
5, EW
21
845 87. Combined Tension and Shear in Bearing-Type Connections
846
Y VI
847
20
The available tensile strength of a bolt subjected to combined tension and shear
848 shall be determined according to the limit states of tension and shear rupture
AR E
849 as:
U IC R
850 Rn = Fnt′ Ab (J3-2)

851
852 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
BR BL
853
854 where
FE PU
855 F nt′ = nominal tensile stress modified to include the effects of shear stress,
856 ksi (MPa)
Fnt
f rv ≤ Fnt (LRFD)
ED FT
1.3 Fnt − (J3-3a)

φFnv
Ω Fnt
AT A
1.3 Fnt − f rv ≤ Fnt (ASD) (J3-3b)

Fnv
D DR
857 F nt = nominal tensile stress from Table J3.2, ksi (MPa)

858 Fnv = nominal shear stress from Table J3.2, ksi (MPa)
859 frv = required shear stress using LRFD or ASD load combinations, ksi
860 (MPa)
861
862 The available shear stress of the fastener shall equal or exceed the required shear
863 stress, frv.
864
865 User Note: Note that when the required stress, f, in either shear or tension, is
866 less than or equal to 30% of the corresponding available stress, the effects of
867 combined stress need not be investigated. Also note that Equations J3-3a and
868 J3-3b can be rewritten so as to find a nominal shear stress, F′nv, as a function of
869 the required tensile stress, ft.
870
871
872

J-24
873
TABLE J3.5
Values of Edge Distance Increment C2, in.
Slotted Holes
Nominal Long Axis Perpendicular to Long Axis
Diameter of Oversized Edge Parallel to
Fastener Holes Short Slots Long Slots[a] Edge
≤ 7/8 1/16 1/8
1 1/8 1/8 3/4d 0
≥1 1/8 1/8 3/16
[a]
When the length of the slot is less than the maximum allowable (see Table J3.3), C2 is per-
mitted to be reduced by one-half the difference between the maximum and actual slot lengths.
874
875
TABLE J3.5M
Values of Edge Distance Increment C2, mm
Nominal 5, EW Slotted Holes
21
Diameter of Long Axis Perpendicular to Long Axis
Fastener Oversized Edge Parallel to
Y VI
20 Holes Short Slots Long Slots [a] Edge
≤ 22 2 3
AR E
24 3 3 0.75d 0
U IC R
≥ 27 3 5
[a]
When the length of the slot is less than the maximum allowable (see Table J3.3M), C2 is per-
mitted to be reduced by one-half the difference between the maximum and actual slot
lengths.
BR BL
876
877 98. High-Strength Bolts in Slip-Critical Connections
FE PU
878
879 Slip-critical connections shall be designed to prevent slip and for the limit
880 states of bearing-type connections. When slip-critical bolts pass through fillers,
ED FT
881 all surfaces subject to slip shall be prepared to achieve design slip resistance.
882
AT A
883 The single bolt available slip resistance for the limit state of slip shall be de-
D DR
884 termined as follows:

885
886 Rn = μDuh f Tbns (J3-4)
887
888 (a) For standard size and short-slotted holes perpendicular to the direction of
889 the load
890
891 φ = 1.00 (LRFD) Ω = 1.50 (ASD)
892
893 (b) For oversized and short-slotted holes parallel to the direction of the load
894
895 φ = 0.85 (LRFD) Ω = 1.76 (ASD)
896
897 (c) For long-slotted holes
898
899 φ = 0.70 (LRFD) Ω = 2.14 (ASD)
900
901 where

J-25
902 Du = 1.13, a multiplier that reflects the ratio of the mean installed bolt pre-
903 tension to the specified minimum bolt pretension. The use of other
904 values are permitted if approved by the engineer of record.
905 Tb = minimum fastener pretension given in Table J3.1, kips, or Table
906 J3.1M, kN
907 hf = factor for fillers, determined as follows:
908
909 (1) For one filler between connected parts
910
911 hf = 1.0
912
913 (2) For two or more fillers between connected parts
914
915 hf = 0.85
916
917 ns = number of slip planes required to permit the connection to slip
918 μ = mean slip coefficient for Class A or B surfaces, as applicable, and de-
919 termined as follows, or as established by tests:
920
5, EW
21
921 (1) For Class A surfaces (unpainted clean mill scale steel surfaces or
922 surfaces with Class A coatings on blast-cleaned steel or hot-
Y VI
923
20
dipped galvanized steel whether as-galvanized or handand rough-
924 ened. surfaces)
AR E
925
U IC R
926 μ = 0.30
927
928 (2) For Class B surfaces (unpainted blast-cleaned steel surfaces or
BR BL
929 surfaces with Class B coatings on blast-cleaned steel)

930
FE PU
931 μ = 0.50
932
933 109. Combined Tension and Shear in Slip-Critical Connections
ED FT
934
935 When a slip-critical connection is subjected to an applied tension that reduces
936
AT A
the net clamping force, the available slip resistance per bolt from Section J3.8
937 shall be multiplied by the factor, ksc, determined as follows:
D DR
938
Tu
939 k sc = 1 − ≥0 (LRFD) (J3-5a)
Du Tb nb
1.5Ta
940 k sc = 1 − ≥0 (ASD) (J3-5b)
Du Tb nb
941 where
942 T a = required tension force using ASD load combinations, kips (kN)
943 Tu = required tension force using LRFD load combinations, kips (kN)
944 n b = number of bolts carrying the applied tension
945
946 110. Bearing and Tearout Strength at Bolt Holes
947
948 The available strength, φRn and Rn Ω , at bolt holes shall be determined for
949 the limit states of bearing and tearout, as follows:
950
951 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
952
953 The nominal strength of the connected material, Rn , is determined as follows:

J-26
954 11a. Snug-Tightened or Pretensioned High-Strength Bolted Connections (with

955 plies in firm contact)
956 (a) .For connections with plies in contact:
957 1. The strength of a connected element at a bolt in a connection with
958 standard, oversized and short-slotted holes, independent of the direc-
959 tion of loading, or a long-slotted hole with the slot parallel to the di-
960 rection of the bearing force shall be the lesser of:
961
962 (a) Bearing
963
964 (i) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is a design
965 consideration
966
967 Rn = 2.4 dtFu (J3-6a)
968
969 (ii) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is not a de-
970 sign consideration
971
972 5, EW Rn = 3.0 dtFu (J3-6b)
21
973
974 (b) Tearout
Y VI
975
20
AR E
976 (i) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is a design
977 consideration
U IC R
978
979 Rn = 1.2 lc tFu (J3-6c)
980
BR BL
981 (ii) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is not a de-
982 sign consideration
FE PU
983
984 Rn = 1.5 lc tFu (J3-6d)
985
ED FT
986 2. The strength of a connected element at a bolt in a connection with long-

987 slotted holes with the slot perpendicular to the direction of force is the
AT A
988 lesser of:

D DR
989
990 (a) Bearing
991 (J3-6e)
992 R n = 2.0 dtFu
993
994 (b) Tearout
995
996 Rn = 1.0 lc tFu (J3-6f)
997
998 11b. Connections Made Using Bolts or Rods that Pass Completely Through
999 an Unstiffened Box Member or HSS (b)
1000 For connections made using bolts or rods that pass completely through an
1001 unstiffened box member or HSS
1002
1003 (1) Bearing shall satisfy Section J7 and Equation J7-1
1004
1005 (2) Tearout
1006
1007 (i) For a bolt in a connection with a standard hole or a short-slotted
1008 hole with the slot perpendicular to the direction of force:

J-27
1009
1010 (a) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is a design
1011 consideration
1012
1013 Rn = 1.2 lc tFu (J3-6g)
1014
1015 (b) When deformation at the bolt hole at service load is not a
1016 design consideration
1017
1018 Rn = 1.5 lc tFu (J3-6h)
1019
1020 (ii) For a bolt in a connection with long-slotted holes with the slot
1021 perpendicular to the direction of force:
1022
1023 Rn = 1.0 lc tFu (J3.6i)
1024
1025 where
1026 Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of the connected material, ksi
1027 5, EW
(MPa)
21
1028 d = nominal fastener diameter, in. (mm)
1029 lc = clear distance, in the direction of the force, between the edge of the
Y VI
1030
20
hole and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material, in.
AR E
1031 (mm)
U IC R
1032 t = thickness of connected material, in. (mm)

1033
1034 Bearing strength and tearout strength shall be checked for both bearing-type
1035 and slip-critical connections. The use of oversized holes and short- and long-
BR BL
1036 slotted holes parallel to the line of force is restricted to slip-critical connections
1037 per Section J3.2.
FE PU
1038
1039 121. Special Fasteners
1040
ED FT
1041 The nominal strength of special fasteners other than the bolts presented in Table
1042 J3.2 shall be verified by tests.
AT A
1043
D DR
1044 132. Wall Strength at Tension Fasteners

1045
1046 When bolts or other fasteners in tension are attached to an unstiffened box or
1047 HSS wall, the strength of the wall shall be determined by rational analysis.
1048
1049 J4. AFFECTED ELEMENTS OF MEMBERS AND CONNECTING
1050 ELEMENTS
1051
1052 This section applies to elements of members at connections and connecting
1053 elements, such as plates, gussets, angles, and brackets.
1054
1055 1. Strength of Elements in Tension
1056
1057 The design strength, φRn, and the allowable strength, Rn /Ω, of affected and
1058 connecting elements loaded in tension shall be the lower value obtained ac-
1059 cording to the limit states of tensile yielding and tensile rupture.
1060
1061 (a) For tensile yielding of connecting elements
1062
1063 Rn = Fy Ag (J4-1)

J-28
1064
1065 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
1066
1067 (b) For tensile rupture of connecting elements
1068
1069 Rn = Fu Ae (J4-2)
1070
1071 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
1072
1073 where
1074 Ae = effective net area as defined in Section D3, in.2 (mm2)
1075
1076 User Note: The effects of shear lag or concentrated loads dispersed within
1077 the element may cause only a portion of the area to be effective in resisting the
1078 load. For shear lag, see Chapter D.
1079
1080 2. Strength of Elements in Shear
1081
1082 5, EW
The available shear strength of affected and connecting elements in shear shall
21
1083 be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of shear yielding and
1084 shear rupture:
Y VI
1085
20
AR E
1086 (a) For shear yielding of the element

1087
U IC R
1088 Rn = 0.60Fy Agv (J4-3)

1089
1090 φ = 1.00 (LRFD) Ω = 1.50 (ASD)
BR BL
1091
1092 where
FE PU
1093
1094 Agv = gross area subject to shear, in.2 (mm2)
1095
ED FT
1096 (b) For shear rupture of the element

1097
AT A
1098 Rn = 0.60 Fu Anv (J4-4)

D DR
1099
1100 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
1101
1102 where
1103 Anv = net area subject to shear, in.2 (mm2)
1104
1105 3. Block Shear Strength
1106
1107 The available strength for the limit state of block shear rupture along a shear
1108 failure path or paths and a perpendicular tension failure path shall be deter-
1110
1111
1112 Rn = 0.60Fu Anv + Ubs Fu Ant ≤ 0.60Fy Agv + Ubs Fu Ant (J4-5)
1113
1114 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
1115
1116 where
1117 Ant = net area subject to tension, in.2 (mm2)

J-29
1118
1119 Where the tension stress is uniform, Ubs = 1; where the tension stress is nonu-
1120 niform, Ubs = 0.5.
1121
1122 User Note: Typical cases where Ubs should be taken equal to 0.5 are illustrated
1123 in the Commentary
1124 For connections with round holes, Aev is calculated with a shear length reduc-
1125 tion for each hole in the shear plane, lvh, according to Equation J4-6. For con-
1126 nections with slotted holes, lvh is the nominal slot dimension parallel to the
1127 shear plane plus 1/16 in.
1128
1129 lvh = d h2 − d 2 (J4-6)
1130
1131 where
1132 Aev = effective area subjected to shear, in.2 (mm2)
1133 Ant = net area subjected to tension, in.2 (mm2)
1134 d = bolt diameter, in.
1135
5, EW
dh = nominal hole diameter plus 1/16 in. (2 mm), in.
21
1136
1137 For concentrically loaded connections that are symmetrical about the loading
Y VI
1138 20
axis and beam webs at welded clip angle connections:
1139
AR E
1140 Ubs = 1.0

U IC R
1141
1142 For end connections at axially loaded angles and axially loaded tee-shape
1143 members bolted through the web, and for outstanding legs of clip angles in
1144 single-angle connections:
BR BL
1145
1146 Ubs = 0.70 for connections with one bolt row parallel to the load
FE PU
1147 Ubs = 0.50 for connections with two bolt rows parallel to the load
1148
1149 For beam webs at bolted end connections subjected to vertical shear and for
ED FT
1150 connecting elements at these interfaces:

1151
AT A
1152 Ubs = 0.85 for connections with one vertical bolt row
D DR
1153 Ubs = 0.40 for connections with two vertical bolt rows
1154 Ubs = 0.50 for connections with two bolt rows parallel to the load
1155
1156 For beam webs at bolted end connections subjected to vertical shear and for
1157 connecting elements at these interfaces:
1158
1159 Ubs = 0.85 for connections with one vertical bolt row
1160 Ubs = 0.40 for connections with two vertical bolt rows
1161
1162 4. Strength of Elements in Compression
1163
1164 The available strength of connecting elements in compression for the limit
1165 states of yielding and buckling shall be determined as follows:
1166
1167 (a) When Lc/r ≤ 25
1168
1169 Pn = FyAg (J4-6)
1170
1171 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
1172

J-30
1173 (b) When Lc/r >25, the provisions of Chapter E apply;

1174
1175 where
1176 Lc = KL = effective length, in. (mm)
1178 L = laterally unbraced length of the memberelement, in. (mm)
1179
1180 User Note: The effective length factors used in computing compressive
1181 strengths of connecting elements are specific to the end restraint provided and
1182 may not necessarily be taken as unity when the direct analysis method is em-
1183 ployed.
1184
1185 5. Strength of Elements in Flexure
1186
1187 The available flexural strength of affected elements shall be the lower value
1188 obtained according to the limit states of flexural yielding, local buckling, flex-
1189 ural lateral-torsional buckling, and flexural rupture.
1190
1191 J5. FILLERS 5, EW
21
1192
1193 1. Fillers in Welded Connections
Y VI
1194
20
1195 Whenever it is necessary to use fillers in joints required to transfer applied
AR E
1196 force, the fillers and the connecting welds shall conform to the requirements of
U IC R
1197 Section J5.1a or Section J5.1b, as applicable.

1198
1199 1a. Thin Fillers
BR BL
1200
1201 Fillers less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) thick shall not be used to transfer stress. When
FE PU
1202 the thickness of the fillers is less than 1/4 in. (6 mm), or when the thickness of
1203 the filler is 1/4 in. (6 mm) or greater but not sufficient to transfer the applied
1204 force between the connected parts, the filler shall be kept flush with the edge
ED FT
1205 of the outside connected part, and the size of the weld shall be increased over
1206 the required size by an amount equal to the thickness of the filler.
AT A
1207
1208 1b. Thick Fillers
D DR
1209
1210 When the thickness of the fillers is sufficient to transfer the applied force be-
1211 tween the connected parts, the filler shall extend beyond the edges of the out-
1212 side connected base metal. The welds joining the outside connected base metal
1213 to the filler shall be sufficient to transmit the force to the filler and the region
1214 subjected to the applied force in the filler shall be sufficient to prevent over-
1215 stressing the filler. The welds joining the filler to the inside connected base
1216 metal shall be sufficient to transmit the applied force.
1217
1218 2. Fillers in Bolted Bearing-Type Connections
1219
1220 When a bolt that carries load passes through fillers that are equal to or less than
1221 1/4 in. (6 mm) thick, the shear strength shall be used without reduction. When
1222 a bolt that carries load passes through fillers that are greater than 1/4 in. (6 mm)
1223 thick, one of the following requirements shall apply:
1224
1225 (a) The shear strength of the bolts shall be multiplied by the factor
1226
1227 1 − 0.4(t − 0.25)
1228

J-31
1229 1 − 0.0154(t − 6) (S.I.)

1230
1231 but not less than 0.85, where t is the total thickness of the fillers.
1232
1233 (b) The fillers shall be welded or extended beyond the joint and bolted to uni-
1234 formly distribute the total force in the connected element over the com-
1235 bined cross section of the connected element and the fillers.
1236
1237 (c) The size of the joint shall be increased to accommodate a number of bolts
1238 that is equivalent to the total number required in (b).
1239
1240 J6. SPLICES
1241
1242 Groove-welded splices in plate girders and beams shall develop the nominal
1243 strength of the smaller spliced section. Other types of splices in cross sections
1244 of plate girders and beams shall develop the strength required by the forces at
1245 the point of the splice.
1246
1247 J7. 5, EW
BEARING STRENGTH
21
1248
1249 The design bearing strength, φRn , and the allowable bearing strength, Rn Ω ,
Y VI
1250
20
of surfaces in contact shall be determined for the limit state of bearing (local
AR E
1251 compressive yielding) as follows:

1252
U IC R
1253 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)

1254
1255 The nominal bearing strength, Rn, shall be determined as follows:
BR BL
1256
1257 (a) For finished surfaces, pins in reamed, drilled, or bored holes, bolts or rods
FE PU
1258 that pass completely through an unstiffened box or HSS member, and ends
1259 of fitted bearing stiffeners
1260
ED FT
1261 Rn = 1.8Fy Apb (J7-1)

1262
AT A
1263 where
D DR
1264 Apb = projected area in bearing, in.2 (mm2)

1265 Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi (MPa)
1266
1267 (b) For expansion rollers and rockers
1268
1269 (1) When d ≤ 25 in. (630 mm)
1270
1.2 ( F y – 13 ) lb d
1271 Rn = (J7-2)
20
1272
1.2 ( F y – 90 ) lb d
1273 Rn = (J7-2M)
20
1274
1275 (2) When d >25 in. (630 mm)
1276
6.0 ( Fy – 13) lb d
1277 Rn = (J7-3)
20
1278

J-32
30.2 ( Fy – 90 ) lb d
1279 Rn = (J7-3M)
20
1280
1281 where
1282 d = diameter, in. (mm)
1283 lb = length of bearing, in. (mm)
1284
1285 J8. COLUMN BASES AND BEARING ON CONCRETE
1286
1287 Provisions shall be made to transfer the column loads and moments to the foot-
1288 ings and foundations.
1289
1290 In the absence of code regulations, the design bearing strength, φc Pp , and the
1291 allowable bearing strength, Pp Ωc , for the limit state of concrete crushing are
1292 permitted to be taken as follows:
1293
1294 φ c = 0.65 (LRFD) Ω c = 2.31 (ASD)
5, EW
21
1295
1296 The nominal bearing strength, Pp, is determined as follows:
Y VI
1297 20
1298 (a) On the full area of a concrete support
AR E
1299
U IC R
1300 Pp = 0.85f c′A1 (J8-1)

1301
1302 (b) On less than the full area of a concrete support
BR BL
1303
1304 Pp = 0.85 f c′A1 A2 / A1 ≤ 1.7f c′A1 (J8-2)
FE PU
1305
1306 where
1307 A1 = area of steel concentrically bearing on a concrete support, in.2 (mm2)
ED FT
1308 A2 = maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that is geo-
AT A
1309 metrically similar to and concentric with the loaded area, in.2 (mm2)
1310 f c′ = specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa)
D DR
1311
1312 J9. ANCHOR RODS AND EMBEDMENTS
1313
1314 Anchor rods shall be designed to provide the required resistance to loads on
1315 the completed structure at the base of columns including the net tensile com-
1316 ponents of any bending moment resulting from load combinations stipulated
1317 in Section B2. The anchor rods shall be designed in accordance with the re-
1318 quirements for threaded parts in Table J3.2.
1319
1320 Design of anchor rods for the transfer of forces to the concrete foundation shall
1321 satisfy the requirements of ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or ACI 349 (ACI 349M).
1322
1323 User Note: Column bases should be designed considering bearing against con-
1324 crete elements, including when columns are required to resist a horizontal
1325 force at the base plate. See AISC Design Guide 1, Base Plate and Anchor Rod
1326 Design, Second Edition, for column base design information.
1327

J-33
1328 When anchor rods are used to resist horizontal forces, hole size, anchor rod
1329 setting tolerance, and the horizontal movement of the column shall be consid-
1330 ered in the design.
1331
1332 Larger oversized holes and slotted holes are permitted in base plates when ad-
1333 equate bearing is provided for the nut by using ASTM F844 washers or plate
1334 washers to bridge the hole.
1335
1336 User Note: The recommended hole sizes, corresponding washer dimensions
1337 and nuts are given in the AISC Steel Construction Manual and ASTM F1554.
1338 ASTM F1554 anchor rods may be furnished in accordance with product spec-
1339 ifications with a body diameter less than the nominal diameter. Load effects
1340 such as bending and elongation should be calculated based on minimum di-
1341 ameters permitted by the product specification. See ASTM F1554 and the ta-
1342 ble, “Applicable ASTM Specifications for Various Types of Structural Fas-
1343 teners,” in Part 2 of the AISC Steel Construction Manual.
1344
1345 User Note: See ACI 318 (ACI 318M) for embedment design and for shear
1346 5, EW
friction design. See OSHA for special erection requirements for anchor rods.
21
1347
1348 J10. FLANGES AND WEBS WITH CONCENTRATED FORCES
Y VI
1349
20
AR E
1350 This section applies to single- and double-concentrated forces applied normal
U IC R
1351 to the flange(s) of wide-flange sections and similar built-up shapes. A single-
1352 concentrated force is either tensile or compressive. Double-concentrated forces
1353 are one tensile and one compressive and form a couple on the same side of the
1354 loaded member.
BR BL
1355
1356 When the required strength exceeds the available strength as determined for the
FE PU
1357 limit states listed in this section, stiffeners and/or doublers shall be provided
1358 and shall be sized for the difference between the required strength and the avail-
1359 able strength for the applicable limit state. Stiffeners shall also meet the design
ED FT
1360 requirements in Section J10.8. Doublers shall also meet the design requirement
1361 in Section J10.9.
AT A
1362
D DR
1363 User Note: See Appendix 6, Section 6.3 for requirements for the ends of can-
1364 tilever members.
1365
1366 Stiffeners are required at unframed ends of beams in accordance with the re-
1367 quirements of Section J10.7.
1368
1369 User Note: Design guidance for members other than wide-flange sections and
1370 similar built-up shapes, including HSS members can be found in the Commen-
1371 tary.
1372
1373 1. Flange Local Bending
1374
1375 This section applies to tensile single-concentrated forces and the tensile com-
1376 ponent of double-concentrated forces.
1377
1378 The design strength, φRn , and the allowable strength, Rn Ω , for the limit state
1379 of flange local bending shall be determined as:
1380
1381 Rn = 6.25Fyf t 2f (J10-1)

J-34
1382
1383 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
1384
1385 where
1386 Fyf = specified minimum yield stress of the flange, ksi (MPa)
1387 tf = thickness of the loaded flange, in. (mm)
1388
1389 If the length of loading across the member flange is less than 0.15bf, where bf
1390 is the member flange width, Equation J10-1 need not be checked.
1391
1392 When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the
1393 member end that is less than 10tf, Rn shall be reduced by 50%.
1394
1395 When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners shall be provided.
1396
1397 2. Web Local Yielding
1398
1399 This section applies to single-concentrated forces and both components of dou-
1400 5, EW
ble-concentrated forces.
21
1401
1402 The available strength for the limit state of web local yielding shall be deter-
Y VI
1403
20
mined as follows:
AR E
1404
1405 φ = 1.00 (LRFD) Ω = 1.50 (ASD)
U IC R
1406
1407 The nominal strength, Rn , shall be determined as follows:
1408
BR BL
1409 (a) When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the
1410 member end that is greater than the full nominal depth of the member, d,
FE PU
1411
1412 Rn = Fywtw ( 5k + lb ) (J10-2)
ED FT
1413
1414 (b) When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the
1415 member end that is less than or equal to the full nominal depth of the mem-
AT A
1416 ber, d,
D DR
1417
1418 Rn = Fywtw ( 2.5k + lb ) (J10-3)
1419
1420 where
1421 Fyw = specified minimum yield stress of the web material, ksi (MPa)
1422 k = distance from outer face of the flange to the web toe of the fillet, in.
1423 (mm)
1424 lb = length of bearing, in. (mm)
1425 tw = thickness of web, in. (mm)
1426
1427 When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners or a doubler plate shall be pro-
1428 vided.
1429
1430 3. Web Local Crippling
1431
1432 This section applies to compressive single-concentrated forces or the compres-
1433 sive component of double-concentrated forces.
1434

J-35
1435 The available strength for the limit state of web local crippling shall be deter-
1437
1438 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
1439
1440 The nominal strength, Rn , shall be determined as follows:
1441
1442 (a) When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted is applied at a dis-
1443 tance from the member end that is greater than or equal to d 2
 1.5 
 l  t  EFywt f
1444 Rn = 0.80tw2 1 + 3  b   w   Qf (J10-4)
   f  
d t tw
 
1445 (b) When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted is applied at a dis-
1446 tance from the member end that is less than d 2
1447
1448 (1) For lb d ≤ 0.2
 1.5 
1449 5, EW  l  t 
Rn = 0.40tw2 1 + 3  b   w  
EFywt f
Qf (J10-5a)
21
  d  tf   tw
 
Y VI
1450 20
1451 (2) For lb / d > 0.2
AR E
  t   EFywt f
1.5
1 +  b − 0.2   w  
4l
U IC R
2
1452 Rn = 0.40tw Qf (J10-5b)
  d  tf   tw
 
1453 where
BR BL
1454 d = full nominal depth of the member, in. (mm)

1455 Qf = chord-stress interaction parameter = 1.0 for wide-flange sections
FE PU
1456 and for HSS (connecting surface) in tension

1457 = as given in Table K3.2 for all other HSS conditions
1458
ED FT
1459 When required, a transverse stiffener, a pair of transverse stiffeners, or a dou-

1460 bler plate extending at least three quarters of the depth of the web shall be
AT A
1461 provided.
1462
D DR
1463 4. Web Sidesway Buckling

1464
1465 This section applies only to compressive single-concentrated forces applied to
1466 members where relative lateral movement between the loaded compression
1467 flange and the tension flange is not restrained at the point of application of the
1468 concentrated force.
1469
1470 The available strength of the web for the limit state of sidesway buckling shall
1471 be determined as follows:
1472
1473 φ = 0.85 (LRFD) Ω = 1.76 (ASD)
1474
1475 The nominal strength, Rn, shall be determined as follows:
1476
1477 (a) If the compression flange is restrained against rotation
1478
1479 (1) When ( h tw ) ( Lb b f ) ≤ 2.3
1480

J-36
Cr tw3 t f   h tw  
3
1481 Rn = 1 + 0.4    (J10-6)
h2   Lb b f  
 
1482
1483 (2) When ( h tw ) ( Lb b f ) > 2.3 , the limit state of web sidesway buckling
1484 does not apply.
1485
1486 When the required strength of the web exceeds the available strength, local lat-
1487 eral bracing shall be provided at the tension flange or either a pair of transverse
1488 stiffeners or a doubler plate shall be provided.
1489
1490 (b) If the compression flange is not restrained against rotation
1491
1492 (1) When ( h tw ) ( Lb b f ) ≤ 1.7
1493
Cr tw3 t f   h tw  
3
Rn = 0.4   
1494
5, EW h 2   Lb b f  
(J10-7)
21
 
1495 (2) When ( h tw ) ( Lb b f ) > 1.7 , the limit state of web sidesway buckling
Y VI
20
1496 does not apply.
AR E
1497
U IC R
1498 When the required strength of the web exceeds the available strength, local lat-
1499 eral bracing shall be provided at both flanges at the point of application of the
1500 concentrated forces.
1501
BR BL
1502 In Equations J10-6 and J10-7, the following definitions apply:

1503
FE PU
1504 Cr = 960,000 ksi (6.6×106 MPa), when αsMr < My at the location of the
1505 force
1506 = 480,000 ksi (3.3×106 MPa), when αsMr < My at the location of the
ED FT
1507 force
1508 Lb = largest laterally unbraced length along either flange at the point of
AT A
1509 load, in. (mm)

D DR
1510 Mr = required flexural strength using LRFD or ASD load combinations,

1511 kip-in. (N-mm)
1512 bf = width of flange, in. (mm)
1513 h = clear distance between flanges less the fillet or corner radius for rolled
1514 shapes; distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear dis-
1515 tance between flanges when welds are used for built-up shapes, in.
1516 (mm)
1517 αs = 1.0 (LRFD); 1.5 (ASD)
1518
1519 User Note: For determination of adequate restraint, refer to Appendix 6.
1520
1521 5. Web Compression Buckling
1522
1523 This section applies to a pair of compressive single-concentrated forces or the
1524 compressive components in a pair of double-concentrated forces, applied at
1525 both flanges of a member at the same location.
1526
1527 The available strength for the limit state of web compression buckling shall be

J-37
 24tw3 EFyw 
1529 Rn =  Qf (J10-8)
 h 
 
1530
1531 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
1532 where
1533 Qf = 1.0 for wide-flange sections and for HSS (connecting surface) in ten-
1534 sion.
1535 = as given in Table K3.2 for all other HSS conditions
1536
1537 When the pair of concentrated compressive forces to be resisted is applied at a
1538 distance from the member end that is less than d / 2, Rn shall be reduced by
1539 50%.
1540
1541 When required, a single transverse stiffener, a pair of transverse stiffeners, or a
1542 doubler plate extending the full depth of the web shall be provided.
1543
1544 6. Web Panel- Zone Shear
1545 5, EW
21
1546 This section applies to double-concentrated forces applied to one or both
1547 flanges of a member at the same location.
Y VI
1548
20
AR E
1549 The available strength of the web panel zone for the limit state of shear yielding
U IC R
1551
1552 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
1553
BR BL
1554 The nominal strength, Rn, shall be determined as follows:

1555
FE PU
1556 (a) When the effect of inelastic panel- zone deformation on frame stability is
1557 not accounted for in the analysis:
1558
ED FT
1559 (1) For α Pr ≤ 0.4 Py

1560
AT A
1561 R n = 0.60 F y d c t w (J10-9)

D DR
1562
1563 (2) For α Pr > 0.4 Py
1564
 αP 
1565 Rn = 0.60Fydctw 1.4 − r  (J10-10)
 Py 
1566
1567 (b) When the effect of inelastic panel zone deformation on frame stability is
1568 accounted for , including plastic panel zone deformation, is considered in
1569 the analysis:
1570
1571 (1) For α Pr ≤ 0.75 Py
 3bcf tcf2 
Rn = 0.60Fy d c tw 1 +
1572  db d c tw  (J10-11)
 
1573
1574 (2) For α Pr > 0.75 Py

J-38
 3bcf tcf2   1.2αPr 

Rn = 0.60Fy dctw 1 + 1.9 −
1575
 dbdctw   Py 
 (J10-12)
 
1576
1577 In Equations J10-9 through J10-12, the following definitions apply:
1578
1580 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the column web, ksi (MPa)
1581 Pr = required axial strength using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips
1582 (N)
1583 Py = F y A g , axial yield strength of the column, kips (N)
1584 bcf = width of column flange, in. (mm)
1585 db = depth of beam, in. (mm)
1586 dc = depth of column, in. (mm)
1587 tcf = thickness of column flange, in. (mm)
1588 tw = thickness of column web, in. (mm)
1589 α = 1.0 (LRFD); = 1.6 (ASD)
1590
1591 5, EW
When required, doubler plate(s) or a pair of diagonal stiffeners shall be provided
21
1592 within the boundaries of the rigid connection whose webs lie in a common
1593 plane.
Y VI
1594
20
AR E
1595 See Section J10.9 for doubler plate design requirements.

U IC R
1596
1597 7. Unframed Ends of Beams and Girders
1598
1599 At unframed ends of beams and girders not otherwise restrained against rota-
BR BL
1600 tion about their longitudinal axes, a pair of transverse stiffeners, extending the
1601 full depth of the web, shall be provided.
FE PU
1602
1603 8. Additional Stiffener Requirements for Concentrated Forces
1604
ED FT
1605 Stiffeners required to resist tensile concentrated forces shall be designed in ac-
1606 cordance with the requirements of Section J4.1 and welded to the loaded flange
AT A
1607 and the web. The welds to the flange shall be sized for the difference between
D DR
1608 the required strength and available strength. The stiffener to web welds shall
1609 be sized to transfer to the web the algebraic difference in tensile force at the
1610 ends of the stiffener.
1611
1612 Stiffeners required to resist compressive concentrated forces shall be designed
1613 in accordance with the requirements in Section J4.4 and shall either bear on or
1614 be welded to the loaded flange and welded to the web. The welds to the flange
1615 shall be sized for the difference between the required strength and the applica-
1616 ble limit state strength. The weld to the web shall be sized to transfer to the web
1617 the algebraic difference in compression force at the ends of the stiffener. For
1618 fitted bearing stiffeners, see Section J7.
1619
1620 Transverse full depth bearing stiffeners for compressive forces applied to a
1621 beam or plate girder flange(s) shall be designed as axially compressed members
1622 (columns) in accordance with the requirements of Section E6.2 and Section
1623 J4.4. The member properties shall be determined using an effective length of
1624 0.75h and a cross section composed of two stiffeners, and a strip of the web
1625 having a width of 25tw at interior stiffeners and 12tw at the ends of members.
1626 The weld connecting full depth bearing stiffeners to the web shall be sized to
1627 transmit the difference in compressive force at each of the stiffeners to the web.

J-39
1628
1629 Transverse and diagonal stiffeners shall comply with the following additional
1630 requirements:
1631
1632 (a) The width of each stiffener plus one-half the thickness of the column web
1633 shall not be less than one-third of the flange or moment connection plate
1634 width delivering the concentrated force.
1635 (b) The thickness of a stiffener shall not be less than one-half the thickness of
1636 the flange or moment connection plate delivering the concentrated load,
1637 nor less than the width divided by 16.
1638 (c) Transverse stiffeners shall extend a minimum of one-half the depth of the
1639 member except as required in Sections J10.3, J10.5 and J10.7.
1640
1641 9. Additional Doubler Plate Requirements for Concentrated Forces
1642
1643 Doubler plates required for compression strength shall be designed in accord-
1644 ance with the requirements of Chapter E.
1645
1646
5, EW
Doubler plates required for tensile strength shall be designed in accordance
21
1647 with the requirements of Chapter D.
1648
Y VI
1649
20
Doubler plates required for shear strength (see Section J10.6) shall be designed
1650 in accordance with the provisions of Chapter G.
AR E
1651
U IC R
1652 Doubler plates shall comply with the following additional requirements:
1653
1654 (a) The thickness and extent of the doubler plate shall provide the additional
BR BL
1655 material necessary to equal or exceed the strength requirements.
1656 (b) The doubler plate shall be welded to develop the proportion of the total
FE PU
1657 force transmitted to the doubler plate.

1658
ED FT
1659 10. Transverse Forces on Plate Elements

1660
AT A
1661 When a force is applied transverse to the plane of a plate element, the nominal
D DR
1662 strength shall consider the limit states of shear and flexure in accordance with
1663 Sections J4.2 and J4.5.
1664
1665 User Note: The flexural strength can be checked based on yield-line theory and
1666 the shear strength can be determined based on a punching shear model. See
1667 AISC Steel Construction Manual Part 9 for further discussion.
1668
1669

K-1
1 CHAPTER K
2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HSS AND BOX-

3 SECTION CONNECTIONS
4
5 This chapter addresses additional requirements for connections to HSS members and
6 box sections of uniform wall thickness, where seam welds between box-section ele-
7 ments are complete-joint-penetration (CJP) groove welds in the connection region.
8 The requirements of Chapter J also apply.
9
11
12 K1. General Provisions and Parameters for HSS Connections
13 K2. Concentrated Forces on HSS
14
15
K3.
K4. 5, EW
HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections
HSS-to-HSS Moment Connections
21
16 K5. Welds of Plates and Branches to HSS
17
Y VI
18
20
K1. GENERAL PROVISIONS AND PARAMETERS FOR HSS
AR E
19 CONNECTIONS
20
U IC R
21 For the purposes of this chapter, the centerlines of branch members and chord
22 members shall lie in a common plane. Rectangular HSS connections are fur-
23 ther limited to having all members oriented with walls parallel to the plane.
24
BR BL
25 The tables in this chapter are often accompanied by limits of applicability.

26 Connections complying with the limits of applicability listed can be designed
FE PU
27 considering the limit states provided for each joint configuration. Connections
28 not complying with the limits of applicability listed are not prohibited and must
29 be designed by rational analysis.
ED FT
30
31 User Note: The connection strengths calculated in Chapter K, including the
32 applicable sections of Chapter J, are based on strength limit states only. See
AT A
33 the Commentary if excessive connection deformations may cause serviceabil-

D DR
34 ity or stability concerns.

35
36 User Note: Connection strength is often governed by the size of HSS mem-
37 bers, especially the wall thickness of truss chords, and this must be considered
38 in the initial design. To ensure economical and dependable connections can
39 be designed, the connections should be considered in the design of the mem-
40 bers. Angles between the chord and the branch(es) of less than 30° can make
41 welding and inspection difficult and should be avoided. The limits of applica-
42 bility provided reflect limitations on tests conducted to date, measures to
43 eliminate undesirable limit states, and other considerations discussed in the
44 Commentary. See Section J3.10(c) for through-bolt provisions.
45
46 This section provides parameters to be used in the design of plate-to-HSS and
47 HSS-to-HSS connections.
48
49 The design strength, φRn, φMn, and φPn, and the allowable strength, Rn/Ω,
50 Mn/Ω, and Pn/Ω, of connections shall be determined in accordance with the
51 provisions of this chapter and the provisions of Chapter B.
52

K-2
53 1. Definitions of Parameters
54
55 Ag = gross cross-sectional area of member, in.2 (mm2)
56 B = overall width of rectangular HSS main chord member, measured 90° to
57 the plane of the connection, in. (mm)
58 Bb = overall width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate, measured 90°
59 to the plane of the connection, in. (mm)
60 Be = effective width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate for local
61 yielding of the transverse element, in. (mm)
62 Bep = effective width of rectangular HSS branch member or plate for punching
63 shear, in. (mm)
64 D = outside diameter of round HSS chord main member, in. (mm)
65 Db = outside diameter of round HSS branch member, in. (mm)
66 Fc = available stress in chord main member, ksi (MPa)
67 = Fy for LRFD; 0.60Fy for ASD
68 Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of HSS chord member material, ksi
69 (MPa)
70 5, EW
Fub = specified minimum tensile strength of HSS branch member material, ksi
21
71 (MPa)
72 Fy = specified minimum yield stress of HSS chord main member material, ksi
Y VI
73
20
(MPa)
74 Fyb = specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch member or plate material,
AR E
75 ksi (MPa)
U IC R
76 H = overall height of rectangular HSS chord main member, measured in the

77 plane of the connection, in. (mm)
78 Hb = overall height of rectangular HSS branch member, measured in the plane
79 of the connection, in. (mm)
BR BL
80 Qf = chord stress interaction parameter

81 lend = distance from the near side of the connecting branch or plate to end of
82 chord, in. (mm)
FE PU
83 t = design wall thickness of HSS chord main member, in. (mm)

84 tb = design wall thickness of HSS branch member or thickness of plate, in.
85 (mm)
ED FT
86 β = width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to chord diameter = Db/D for
87 round HSS; the ratio of overall branch width to chord width = Bb/B for
AT A
88 rectangular HSS
βeff = effective width ratio; the sum of the perimeters of the two branch mem-
D DR
89
90 bers in a K-connection divided by eight times the chord width
91 γ = chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half the diameter to the wall
92 thickness = D/2t for round HSS, or the ratio of one-half the width to wall
93 thickness = B/2t for rectangular HSS
94 η = load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular HSS; the ratio of
95 the length of contact of the branch with the chord in the plane of the
96 connection to the chord width = lb/B
97 θ = acute angle between the branch and chord, degrees
98
99 2. Rectangular HSS
100
101 2a. Effective Width for Connections to Rectangular HSS
102
103 For local yielding of transverse elements, the effective width of elements
104 (plates or rectangular HSS branches) perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of
105 a rectangular HSS member that deliver a force component transverse to the
106 face of the member shall be taken as:
107

K-3
108  10t   Fy t 
(K1-1)
Be =    Bb ≤ Bb
 B   Fyb tb 
109
110 For shear yielding (punching), the effective width of the face of a rectangular
111 HSS member, adjacent to transverse element (plates or rectangular HSS
112 branches) shall be taken as:
113
114  10t  (K1-2)
Bep =   Bb ≤ Bb
 B 
115
116 User Note: Section J4 addresses the strength of affected elements in tension,
117 compression, flexure and shear. The effective widths above are used to estab-
118 lish the effective areas to be used when checking these limit states. The com-
119 mentary provides further guidance
120
121 3. Main Member Stress FunctionChord-Stress Interaction Parameter
122 5, EW
21
123 Where required, the main chord member stress function, Qf, shall be taken as:
124
Y VI
125
20
(a) For HSS chord member connecting surface in tension, Qf = 1
126
AR E
127 (b) For round HSS chord member connecting surface in compression
U IC R
128
129 Q f = 1 − 0.3U (1 + U ) ≤ 1.0 (K1-3)
130
131 (c) For rectangular HSS chord member connecting surface in compression
BR BL
132
133 (1) For T-, Y-, cross, and transverse plate connections
FE PU
U  U  Field Code Changed

134 Q f = 1.3 − 0.4   ≤ 1.0 0.4 ≤ Q f = 1.3 − 0.4   ≤ 1.0 for T-,
β β
135 Y-, and cross connections
ED FT
136 (K1-4)
137 (2) For gapped K-connections
AT A
 U   U  Field Code Changed

138 Q f = 1.3 − 0.4   ≤ 1.0 0.4 ≤ Q f = 1.3 − 0.4   ≤ 1.0
D DR
 βeff   βeff 
139 for gapped K-connections
140 (K1-5)
141 (3) For longitudinal plate connections
142
143 Q f = 1 − U 2 Q f = 1 − 0.3U (1 + U ) ≤ 1.0 for longitudinal plate Field Code Changed
144 connections
145 (K1-63)
146
147 where
Pro M
148 U= + ro ≤ 1.0
Fc Ag Fc S
149
150 where Pro and Mro are determined in the HSS chord member on the side of
151 the joint that has lower compression stress for round HSS and higher com-
152 pression stress for rectangular HSS. Pro and Mro refer to required strengths

K-4
153 in the HSS: Pro = Pu for LRFD, and Pa for ASD; Mro = Mu for LRFD, and Ma
154 for ASD.
155
156 Limits of Applicability:
157 D/t ≤ 50 for round HSS T-, Y-, and K-connections
158 D/t ≤ 40 for round HSS cross-connections
159 B/t and H/t ≤ 35 for rectangular HSS overlapped gapped K-connections and
160 T-, Y-, and cross-connections
161 Fy ≤ 52 ksi (360 MPa)
162 Fy/Fu ≤ 0.8 (Note: ASTM A500 Grade C is acceptable)
163
164 4. End Distance
165
166 The connection available strengths of the connection in Chapters J and K
167 assume a chord main member with a minimum end distance, lend, on both
168 sides of a connection.
169
170 5, EW
(a) For rectangular sections
21
171
172 lend ≥ B 1 − β , for β ≤ 0.85 (K1-7)
Y VI
173
20
174 (b) For round sections
AR E
175
U IC R
 β
176 lend ≥ D 1.25 −  (K1-8)
 2
177
BR BL
178 When the connection occurs at a distance less than lend from an open unrein-
179 forced end of the chord end, the available strengthreduce of the connection
180 shall be reducedavailable strength by 50%.
FE PU
181
182 K2. CONCENTRATED FORCES ON HSS
183
ED FT

185
AT A
186 lb = bearing length of the load, measured parallel to the axis of the HSS
187 member (or measured across the width of the HSS in the case of loaded
D DR
188 cap plates), in. (mm)

189
190 2. Round HSS
191
192 The available strength of plate-to-round HSS connections, within the limits
193 in Table K2.1A, shall be taken determined as shown in Table K2.1.
194
195

K-5
196
TABLE K2.1
Available Strengths of Plate-to-Round HSS Connections
Connection Available
Connection Type Plate Bending
Strength
Transverse Plate T-, Y-,
Limit state: HSS local yielding
and Cross-Connections
Plate Axial Load In-Plane Out-of-Plane
 
 5.5 
Rn sinθ = Fy t 2  Qf Mn = 0.5Bb Rn
Bb  –
 1 − 0.81  (K2-1b)
 D 
(K2-1a)
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
Longitudinal Plate T-, Y- Limit state: HSS plastification
and Cross-Connections
5, EW Plate Axial Load In-Plane Out-of-Plane
21
 l 
Y VI
20 Rn sinθ = 5.5Fy t 2 1 + 0.25 b  Qf
 D
Mn = 0.8 lb Rn
(K2-2b)
–
AR E
(K2-2a)
U IC R
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)

197
198
BR BL
TABLE K2.1A
Limits of Applicability of Table K2.1
FE PU
HSS wall slenderness: D t ≤ 50 for T-connections under branch plate axial load
or bending
D t ≤ 40 for cross-connections under branch plate axial
ED FT
load or bending
AT A
Width ratio: 0.2 < B b D ≤ 1.0 for transverse branch plate connections
D DR
Material strength: Fy ≤ 52 ksi (360 MPa)

Ductility: Fy Fu ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Gr. C is acceptable
199
201
202 The available strength of connections to rectangular HSS with concentrated
203 loads shall be determined based on the applicable limit states from Chapter
204 J.
205
206 K3. HSS-TO-HSS TRUSS CONNECTIONS
207
208 HSS-to-HSS truss connections are defined as connections that consist of one
209 or more branch members that are directly welded to a continuous chord that
210 passes as a continuous element through the connection. and Such connec-
211 tions shall be classified as follows:
212
213 (a) When the punching load, Pr sinθ, in a branch member is equilibrated by
214 beam shear in the chord member, the connection shall be classified as

K-6
215 a T-connection when the branch is perpendicular to the chord, and clas-
216 sified as a Y-connection otherwise.
217 (b) When the punching load, Pr sinθ, in a branch member is essentially
218 equilibrated (within 20%) by loads in other branch member(s) on the
219 same side of the connection, the connection shall be classified as a K-
220 connection. The relevant gap is between the primary branch members
221 whose loads equilibrate. An N-connection can be considered as a type
222 of K-connection.
223
224 User Note: A K-connection with one branch perpendicular to the
225 chord is often called an N-connection.
226
227 (c) When the punching load, Prsinθ, is transmitted through the chord mem-
228 ber and is equilibrated by branch member(s) on the opposite side, the
229 connection shall be classified as a cross-connection.
230 (d) When a connection has more than two primary branch members, or
231 branch members in more than one plane, the connection shall be clas-
232 5, EW
sified as a general or multiplanar connection.
21
233
234 User Note: Limit states are not defined for general or multiplanar
Y VI
235 20
HSS-to-HSS truss connections.
236
AR E
237 When branch members transmit part of their load as K-connections and part
U IC R
238 of their load as T-, Y-, or cross-connections, the adequacy of the connections
239 shall be determined by interpolation on the proportion of the available
240 strength of each in total.
241
BR BL
242 For trusses that are made with HSS that are connected by welding branch
243 members to chord members, eccentricities within the limits of applicability
244 are permitted without consideration of the resulting moments for the design
FE PU
245 of the connection.

246
ED FT
248
249 Ov = lov/lp × 100, %
AT A
250 e = eccentricity in a truss connection, positive being away from the

251 branches, in. (mm)
D DR
252 g = gap between toes of branch members in a gapped K-connection, ne-

253 glecting the welds, in. (mm)
254 lb = Hb / sinθ, in. (mm)
255 lov = overlap length measured along the connecting face of the chord be-
256 neath the two branches, in. (mm)
257 lp = projected length of the overlapping branch on the chord, in. (mm)
258 γ = chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half the diameter to the wall
259 thickness = D/2t for round HSS; the ratio of one-half the width to wall
260 thickness = B/2t for rectangular HSS
261 η = load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular HSS; the ratio
262 of the length of contact of the branch with the chord in the plane of
263 the connection to the chord width = lb/B
264 θ = acute angle between the branch and chord (degrees)
265 ζ = gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the branches of a gapped K-
266 connection to the width of the chord = g/B for rectangular HSS
267
268 2. Round HSS
269

K-7
270 The available strength of round HSS-to-HSS truss connections, within the
271 limits in Table K3.1A, shall be taken as the lowest value obtained according
272 to the limit states shown in Table K3.1.
273
TABLE K3.1
Available Strengths of Round
Connection Type Connection Available Axial Strength
General Check for T-, Y-, Cross- and K- Limit State: Shear Yielding (punching)
Connections with gap, when  1 + sinθ 
Pn = 0.6Fy t πDb  2 
(K3-1)
 2sin θ 
Db (tens/comp) < ( D − 2t )
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)
T- and Y-Connections Limit State: Chord Plastification
5, EW Pnsinθ = Fyt 2 ( 3.1+ 15.6β2 ) γ0.2Qf (K3-2)
21
Y VI
20 φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
AR E
Cross-Connections Limit State: Chord Plastification

U IC R
 5.7 
Pn sinθ = Fy t 2   Qf (K3-3)
 1 − 0.81 β 
BR BL
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)

FE PU
K-Connections with Gap or Overlap Limit State: Chord Plastification

ED FT
( Pn sinθ )compression branch (K3-4)

 Db comp 
AT A
= Fy t 2  2.0 + 11.33  QgQf

 D 
D DR
( Pn sin θ)tension branch

(K3-5)
= ( Pn sin θ)compression branch
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)

Functions
 
 0.024 γ1.2 
0.2
Qg = γ 1 +  (K3-6)
 exp   0.5 g 
− 1.33  + 1
  t  
Note that exp(x) is equal to ex, where e=2.71828 is the base of the natural logarithm.
274
275

K-8
276
TABLE K3.1A
Joint eccentricity: –0.55 ≤ e/D ≤ 0.25 for K-connections
Chord wall slenderness: D/t ≤ 50 for T-, Y- and K-connections
D/t ≤ 40 for cross-connections
Branch wall slenderness: Db t b ≤ 50 for tension and compression branch
Db t b ≤ 0.05E Fyb for compression branch
Width ratio: 0.2 ≤ Db D ≤ 1.0 for T-, Y-, cross- and overlapped
K-connections
0.4 ≤ Db D ≤ 1.0 for gapped K-connections
Gap: g ≤ tb comp + tb tens for gapped K-connections
Overlap: 25% ≤ Ov ≤ 100% for overlapped K-connections
Branch thickness: tb overlapping ≤ tb overlapped for branches in overlapped
K-connections
5, EW
Material strength:
Ductility strength:
Fy and Fyb ≤ 52 ksi (360 MPa)
Fy/Fu and Fyb/Fub ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Grade C is
21
acceptable.
Y VI
277
20
AR E
279
U IC R
280 The available strength, φPn and Pn/Ω, of rectangular HSS-to-HSS truss con-
281 nections within the limits in Table K3.2A, shall be taken as the lowest value
282 obtained according to limit states shown in Table K3.2 and Chapter J.
283
BR BL
284 User Note: Outside the limits in Table K3.2A, the limit states of Chapter J
285 are still applicable and the applicable limit states of Chapter K are not de-
FE PU
286 fined.
287
288
ED FT
AT A
D DR

K-9
289
TABLE K3.2
Available Strengths of Rectangular
Connection Type Connection Available Axial Strength
Gapped K-Connections Limit State: Chord Wall Plastification, for all β
Pnsinθ = Fyt 2 ( 9.8βeff γ0.5 ) Qf (K3-7)
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
Limit State: Shear Yielding (punching), when Bb < B – 2t

This limit state need not be checked for square branches.
Pn sinθ = 0.6Fy tB ( 2η + β + βeop ) (K3-8)
5, EW φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)
21
Limit State: Shear of Chord Side Walls in the Gap Re-
gion
Y VI
20 Determine Pnsinθ in accordance with Section G4.
AR E
This limit state need not be checked for square chords.

U IC R
Limit State: Local Yielding of Branch/Branches due to

Uneven Load Distribution.
This limit state need not be checked for square
BR BL
branches or where B t ≥ 15.
Pn = Fybtb ( 2Hb + Bb + Be − 4tb ) (K3-9)

FE PU
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)
Overlapped K-Connections Limit state: Local Yielding of Branch/Branches due to

ED FT
Uneven Load Distribution

φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)
AT A
When 25% ≤ Ov < 50%

D DR
O
Pn,i = Fybi tbi  v ( 2Hbi − 4tbi ) + Bei + Bej  (K3-10)
 50 
When 50% ≤ Ov < 80%
(
Pn ,i = Fybi t bi 2 H bi − 4t bi + Bei + Bej ) (K3-11)
When 80% ≤ Ov ≤ 100%

Note that the force arrows shown for (
Pn,i = Fybi t bi 2H bi − 4t bi + Bbi + Bej ) (K3-12)
overlapped K-connections may be
reversed; i and j control member Subscript i refers to the overlapping branch
identification.
Subscript j refers to the overlapped branch
 Fybj Abj 
Pn, j = Pn,i   (K3-13)
 Fybi Abi 
 
Functions
βeff = ( Bb + Hb )compression branch + ( Bb + Hb )tension branch  4B (K3-16)

K-10
5β
βeop = ≤β (K3-17)
γ
290
TABLE K3.2A
Joint eccentricity: –0.55 ≤ e H ≤ 0.25 for K-connections
Chord wall slenderness: B t and H t ≤ 35 for gapped K-connections and T-, Y-, and
cross-connections
Branch wall slenderness: B t ≤ 30 for overlapped K-connections
H t ≤ 35 for overlapped K-connections
B b t b and H b t b ≤ 35 for tension branch
E
≤ 1.25 for compression branch of gapped K-,
Fyb
T-, Y- and cross-connections
5, EW ≤ 35 for compression branch of gapped K-, T-, Y-

and cross-connections
21
E
≤ 1.1 for compression branch of overlapped K-
Y VI
20 Fyb
connections
AR E
Width ratio: B b B and H b B ≥ 0.25 for T-, Y-, cross-, and overlapped K-connec-
U IC R
tions
Aspect ratio: 0.5 ≤ H b Bb ≤ 2.0 and 0.5 ≤ H B ≤ 2.0
Overlap: 25% ≤ Ov ≤ 100% for overlapped K-connections
Branch width ratio: Bbi Bbj ≥ 0.75 for overlapped K-connections, where sub-
BR BL
script i refers to the overlapping branch and

subscript j refers to the overlapped branch
FE PU
Branch thickness ratio: t bi t bj ≤ 1.0 for overlapped K-connections, where sub-

script i refers to the overlapping branch and
subscript j refers to the overlapped branch
Material strength: Fy and Fyb ≤ 52 ksi (360 MPa)
ED FT
Ductility: Fy Fu and Fyb Fub ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Gr. C is acceptable.
AT A
Additional Limits for Gapped K-Connections

D DR
γ
Width ratio: B b B and H b B ≥ 0.1 +
50
βeff ≥ 0.35
Gap ratio: ζ = g B ≥ 0.5(1−βeff )
Gap: g ≥ tb compression branch + tb tension branch
Branch size: smaller Bb ≥ 0.63 (larger Bb), if both branches are square
291
292 User Note: Maximum gap size in Table K3.2A will be controlled by the e/H limit. If
293 the gap is large, treat as two Y-connections.
294
295 K4. HSS-TO-HSS MOMENT CONNECTIONS
296
297 HSS-to-HSS moment connections are defined as connections that consist of
298 one or two branch members that are directly welded to a continuous chord
299 that passes through the connection, with the branch or branches loaded by
300 bending moments.
301
302 A connection shall be classified as:
303

K-11
304 (a) A T-connection when there is one branch and it is perpendicular to the
305 chord and as a Y-connection when there is one branch, but not perpen-
306 dicular to the chord
307 (b) A cross-connection when there is a branch on each (opposite) side of
308 the chord
309
311
312 Zb = Plastic section modulus of branch about the axis of bending, in.3
313 (mm3)
314 β = width ratio
315 = Db/D for round HSS; ratio of branch diameter to chord diameter
316 = Bb/B for rectangular HSS; ratio of overall branch width to chord width
317 γ = chord slenderness ratio
318 = D/2t for round HSS; ratio of one-half the diameter to the wall thick-
319 ness
320 = B/2t for rectangular HSS; ratio of one-half the width to the wall thick-
321 ness 5, EW
21
322 η = load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular HSS
323 = lb/B; the ratio of the length of contact of the branch with the chord in
Y VI
324
20
the plane of the connection to the chord width, where lb=Hb /sin θ
325 θ = acute angle between the branch and chord (degrees)
AR E
326
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

K-12
327 2. Round HSS

328
329 The available strength of round HSS-to-HSS moment connections within the
330 limits of Table K4.1A shall be taken as the lowest value of the applicable
331 limit states shown in Table K4.1.
332
TABLE K4.1
Available Strengths of Round HSS-to-HSS Moment Connections
Connection Available Flexural
Connection Type
Strength
Branch(es) under In-Plane Bending Limit State: Chord Plastification
T-, Y- and Cross-Connections
D
M n -ip = 5.39Fy t 2 γ 0.5β  b  Qf (K4-1)
 sinθ 
5, EW
21
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)
Limit State: Shear Yielding (punch-
Y VI
20 ing), when Db < ( D − 2t )
AR E
 1 + 3sinθ 
M n -ip = 0.6Fy tDb2   (K4-2)
U IC R
2
 4sin θ 
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)

Branch(es) under Out-of-Plane Bending Limit State: Chord Plastification
BR BL
T-, Y- and Cross-Connections

Fy t 2Db  3.0 
M n -op =   Qf (K4-3)
FE PU
sinθ  1 − 0.81 β 
φ = 0.90 (LRFD) Ω = 1.67 (ASD)

ED FT
Limit state: Shear Yielding (punch-

ing), when Db < ( D − 2t )
AT A
 3 + sinθ 
D DR
M n -op = 0.6Fy tDb2  2  (K4-4)

 4sin θ 
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)
For T-, Y- and cross-connections, with branch(es) under combined axial load, in-plane
bending, and out-of-plane bending, or any combination of these load effects:
2
Pr  Mr −ip  Mr −op
+  + ≤ 1.0 (K4-5)
Pc  Mc −ip  Mc −op
Pr = required axial strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
kips (N)
Mr-ip = required in-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD
load combinations, kip-in (N-mm)
Mr-op= required out-of-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load
combinations, kip-in (N-mm)
Pc = available axial strength obtained from Table K3.1, kips (N)
Mc-ip = available strength for in-plane bending, kip-in (N-mm)
Mc-op= available strength for out-of-plane bending, kip-in (N-mm)
333

K-13
334
TABLE K4.1A
Chord wall slenderness: D t ≤ 50 for T- and Y-connections
D t ≤ 40 for cross-connections
Branch wall slenderness: D b t b ≤ 50
Db tb ≤ 0.05 E Fyb
Width ratio: 0.2 < D b D ≤ 1.0
Ductility: Fy Fu and Fyb Fub ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Gr. C is
acceptable
335
337
The available strength, φPn and Pn/Ω, of rectangular HSS-to-HSS moment
338
339 5, EW
connections within the limits in Table K4.2A shall be taken as the lowest
21
340 value obtained according to limit states shown in Table K4.2 and Chapter J.
341
Y VI
342
20
User Note: Outside the limits in Table K4.2A, the limit states of Chapter J
343 are still applicable and the applicable limit states of Chapter K are not de-
AR E
344 fined.
U IC R
345
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

K-14
346
TABLE K4.2
Available Strengths of Rectangular HSS-to-HSS Moment
Connections
Connection Type Connection Available Flexural Strength
Branch(es) under Out-of-Plane Bending
T- and Cross-Connections Limit State: Chord Sidewall Local Yielding
Mn −op = Fy*t ( B − t ) ( Hb + 5t ) (K4-6)
φ = 1.00 (LRFD) Ω = 1.50 (ASD)
Limit State: Chord distortional failure, for T-con-

5, EW nections and unbalanced cross-connections
21
Mn −op = 2Fy t Hbt + BHt ( B + H ) 
Y VI
20 (K4-7)
AR E
U IC R
φ = 0.95 (LRFD) Ω = 1.58 (ASD)

Branch(es) under In-Plane Bending Limit State: Sidewall Local Yielding
T- and Cross-Connections When β ≥ 0.85
BR BL
2
Mn − ip = 0.5Fy*t ( Hb + 5t ) (K4-8)
FE PU
φ = 1.00 (LRFD) Ω = 1.50 (ASD)

ED FT
AT A
D DR
For T- and cross-connections, with branch(es) under combined axial load, in-plane bending, and
out-of-plane bending, or any combination of these load effects:
Pr M r − ip M r − op
+ + ≤ 1.0 (K4-9)
Pc M c − ip M c − op
Pr = required axial strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N)
Mr-ip = required in-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in
(N-mm)
Mr-op = required out-of-plane flexural strength in branch using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
kip-in (N-mm)
Pc = available axial strength obtained from Table K3.1, kips (N)
Mc-ip = available strength for in-plane bending, kip-in (N-mm)
Mc-op = available strength for out-of-plane bending, kip-in (N-mm)

= φMn–op (LRFD); = Mn–op /Ω (ASD)

K-15
Functions
Fy*= Fy for T- connections and 0.8Fy for cross connections
Pro = Pu for LRFD, and Pa for ASD; Mro = Mu for LRFD, and Ma for ASD.
347
348
TABLE K4.2A
Branch angle: θ ≅ 90°
Chord wall slenderness: B t and H t ≤ 35
Branch wall slenderness: Bb t b and H b t b ≤ 35
E
≤ 1.25
Fyb
Width ratio: B b B ≥ 0.25
5, EW
21
Aspect ratio: 0.5 ≤ Hb B b ≤ 2.0 and 0.5 ≤ H B ≤ 2.0
Y VI
Ductility:
20 Fy Fu and Fyb Fub ≤ 0.8 Note: ASTM A500 Gr. C is acceptable
AR E
349
350 K5. WELDS OF PLATES AND BRANCHES TO HSS
U IC R
351
352 The available strength of branch connections shall be determined consider-
353 ing the nonuniformity of load transfer along the line of weld, due to differ-
BR BL
354 ences in relative stiffness of HSS walls in HSS-to-HSS connections and be-
355 tween elements in transverse plate-to-HSS connections, as follows:
356
FE PU
357 Rn or Pn= Fnwtwle (K5-1)

358
359 Mn-ip = FnwSip (K5-2)
ED FT
360
361 Mn-op = FnwSop (K5-3)
AT A
362
363 Interaction shall be considered.
D DR
364
365 (a) For fillet welds
366
367 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
368
369 (b) For partial-joint-penetration groove welds
370
371 φ = 0.80 (LRFD) Ω = 1.88 (ASD)
372
373 where
374 Fnw = nominal stress of weld metal in accordance with Chapter Jwith no
375 increase in strength due to directionality of the load for fillet welds,
376 ksi (MPa)
377 Sip = effective elastic section modulus of welds for in-plane bending (Ta-
378 ble K5.1), in.3 (mm3)
379 Sop = effective elastic section modulus of welds for out-of-plane bending
380 (Table K5.1), in.3 (mm3)
381 le = total effective weld length of groove and fillet welds to HSS for
382 weld strength calculations, in. (mm)

K-16
383 tw = smallest effective weld throat around the perimeter of branch or

384 plate, in. (mm)
385
TABLE K5.1
Effective Weld Properties for Connections to Rectan-
gular HSS
Connection Type Weld Properties
Transverse Plate T- and Cross-Con- Effective Weld Properties
nections under Plate Axial Load
le = 2Be (K5-4)
where le = total effective weld length for welds on

both sides of the transverse plate
5, EW
T-, Y-, and Cross-Connections Effective Weld Properties
21
under Branch Axial Load or Bending
2Hb
le = + 2Be (K5-5)
Y VI
20 sinθ
AR E
2
tw  H b   Hb 
U IC R
Sip =   + tw Be   (K5-6)
3  sin θ   sin θ 
3
H t ( t 3)( Bb − Be )
Sop = tw  b  Bb + w ( Bb2 ) − w (K5-7)
BR BL
 sinθ  3 Bb
When β > 0.85 or θ > 50°, Be 2 shall not exceed

FE PU
Bb 4
ED FT
AT A
D DR
Gapped K-Connections under Branch Effective Weld Properties

Axial Load
When θ ≤ 50°:
2( Hb − 1.2tb )
le = + 2( Bb − 1.2tb ) (K5-8)
sinθ
When θ ≥ 60°:
2( Hb − 1.2tb )
le = + Bb − 1.2tb (K5-9)
sinθ
When 50° < θ < 60°, linear interpolation shall be

used to determine le.

K-17
Overlapped K-Connections Overlapping Member Effective Weld Properties

Under Branch Axial Load (all dimensions are for the overlapping branch, i )
When 25% ≤ Ov < 50%:

2Ov  Ov   Hbi  Ov  Hbi 
le,i = 1−  +  
50  100   sinθi  100  sin ( θi + θ j ) 
+Bei + Bej
(K5-10)
When 50% ≤ Ov < 80%:

 O  H  O  Hbi 
le,i = 2  1 − v   bi  + v  
Note that the force arrows shown for   100   sin θ i  100  sin ( θ i + θ )
j 
overlapped K-connections may be re- +Bei + Bej

versed; i and j control member identi- (K5-11)
fication.
When 80% ≤ Ov ≤ 100%:
5, EW  O  H
le,i = 2  1 − v   bi
 Ov  Hbi 
21
+  
 100   sinθi  100  sin ( θi + θ j ) 
+Bbi + Bej
Y VI
20 (K5-12)
AR E
When Bbi B > 0.85 or θ i > 50  , B ei 2 shall not ex-

U IC R
ceed Bbi 4 and when Bbi Bbj > 0.85 or

(180 − θ i − θ j ) > 50  , B e j 2 shall not exceed Bbi/4.
BR BL
Subscript i refers to the overlapping branch

Subscript j refers to the overlapped branch
Overlapped Member Effective Weld Properties
FE PU
(all dimensions are for the overlapped branch, j )
2H bj
le, j = + 2B ej (K5-13)
ED FT
sin θ j
AT A
When B b j B > 0.85 or θj > 50°,

le , j = 2 ( H bj − 1.2 t bj ) sin θ j
D DR
(K5-14)
386
387 When a rectangular overlapped K-connection has been designed in accordance with
388 Table K3.2, and the branch member component forces normal to the chord are 80%
389 balanced (i.ein other words., the branch member forces normal to the chord face differ
390 by no more than 20%), the hidden weld under an overlapping branch may be omitted
391 if the remaining welds to the overlapped branch everywhere develop the full capacity
392 of the overlapped branch member walls.
393
394 The weld checks in Tables K5.1 and K5.2 are not required if the welds are capable of
395 developing the full strength of the branch member wall along its entire perimeter (or
396 a plate along its entire length).
397
398 User Note: The approach used here to allow downsizing of welds assumes a constant
399 weld size around the full perimeter of the HSS branch. Special attention is required
400 for equal width (or near-equal width) connections to rectangular HSS, which combine
401 partial-joint-penetration groove welds along the matched edges of the connection,
402 with fillet welds generally across the chord main member face.
403

K-18
404
TABLE K5.2
Effective Weld Properties for Connections to
Round HSS
Connection Type Weld Properties
T-, Y-, and cross-connections under Effective Weld Properties
Branch Axial Load
When 0.1≤ β ≤ 0.5, 60⁰ ≤ θ ≤ 90⁰, and
10 ≤ D/t ≤ 50:
4
le = lw ≤ lw (K5-15)
2β ( D t )
Where lw is the total weld length

around the branch. This may be ob-
tained from 3D models of intersection
5, EW cylinders, or from:
21
1+ 1 sin θ
lw = πDb (K5-16)
Y VI
20 2
AR E
405
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

L-1
1
2 CHAPTER L
3
4 DESIGN FOR SERVICEABILITY
5
6
7 This chapter addresses the evaluation of the structure and its components for the ser-
8 viceability limit states of deflections, drift, vibration, wind-induced motion, thermal
9 distortion, and connection slip.
11 L1. General Provisions
12 L2. Deflections
13 L3. Drift
14 L4. Vibration
15 L5. Wind-Induced Motion
16 L6. Thermal Expansion and Contraction
17 L7. 5, EW
Connection Slip
21
18
19 L1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
Y VI
20
20
21 Serviceability is a state in which the function of a building, its appearance,
AR E
22 maintainability, durability, and the comfort of its occupants are preserved un-
U IC R
23 der typical usage. Limiting values of structural behavior for serviceability

24 (such as maximum deflections and accelerations) shall be chosen with due re-
25 gard to the intended function of the structure. Serviceability shall be evaluated
BR BL
26 using applicable load combinations.

27
28 User Note: Serviceability limit states, service loads, and appropriate load
FE PU
29 combinations for serviceability considerations can be found in Minimum De-

30 sign Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures
ED FT
31 (ASCE/SEI 7) Appendix C and its commentary. The performance require-

32 ments for serviceability in this chapter are consistent with ASCE/SEI 7 Ap-
33 pendix C. Service loads are those that act on the structure at an arbitrary point
AT A
34 in time and are not usually taken as the nominal loads.

D DR
35
36 Reduced stiffness values used in the direct analysis method, described in Chap-
37 ter C, are not intended for use with the provisions of this chapter.
38
39 L2. DEFLECTIONS
40
41 Deflections in structural members and structural systems shall be limited so as
42 not to impair the serviceability of the structure.
43
44 L3. DRIFT
45
46 Drift shall be limited so as not to impair the serviceability of the structure.
47
48 L4. VIBRATION
49
50 The effect of vibration on the comfort of the occupants and the function of the
51 structure shall be considered. The sources of vibration to be considered in-
52 clude occupant loading, vibrating machinery and others identified for the struc-
53 ture.
54

L-2
55 L5. WIND-INDUCED MOTION

56
57 The effect of wind-induced motion of buildings on the comfort of occupants
58 shall be considered.
59
60 L6. THERMAL EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION
61
62 The effects of thermal expansion and contraction of a building shall be consid-
63 ered.
64
65 L7. CONNECTION SLIP
66
67 The effects of connection slip shall be included in the design where slip at
68 bolted connections may cause deformations that impair the serviceability of the
69 structure. Where appropriate, the connection shall be designed to preclude slip.
70
71 User Note: For the design of slip-critical connections, see Sections J3.8 and
72 J3.9. For more information on connection slip, refer to the RCSC Specification
73
5, EW
for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts.
21
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

M-1
1 CHAPTER M
2 FABRICATION AND ERECTION

3
4
5 This chapter addresses requirements for fabrication and erection documents, fabrica-
6 tion, shop painting, and erection.
7
9
10 M1. Fabrication and Erection Documents
11 M2. Fabrication
12 M3. Shop Painting
13 M4. Erection
14
15 M1. FABRICATION AND ERECTION DOCUMENTS
16 5, EW
21
17 1. Fabrication Documents for Steel Construction
Y VI
20
18 Fabrication documents shall indicate the work to be performed, and shall
AR E
19 include items required by the applicable building code and the following as
U IC R
20 applicable:
21 (a) Locations of pretensioned bolts
22 (b) Locations of Class A, or higher, faying surfaces
BR BL
23 (c) Weld access hole dimensions, surface profile, and finish requirements
FE PU
24 (d) Nondestructive testing (NDT) where performed by the fabricator
25 2. Erection Documents for Steel Construction

ED FT
26 Erection documents shall indicate the work to be performed, and include

AT A
27 items required by the applicable building code and the following as applica-
D DR
28 ble:
29 (a) Locations of pretensioned bolts
30 (b) Those joints or groups of joints in which a specific assembly order,
31 welding sequence, welding technique or other special precautions are
32 required
33
34
35 User Note: Refer to Code of Standard Practice, Section 4, addresses require-
36 ments for fabrication and erection documents.
37
38 M2. FABRICATION
39
40 1. Cambering, Curving and Straightening
41
42 Local application of heat or mechanical means is permitted to be used to intro-
43 duce or correct camber, curvature and straightness. The temperature of heated
44 regions shall not exceed 1,100°F (590°C) for ASTM A514/A514M nor 1,200°F
45 (650°C) for other steels, unless limited by the specified ASTM material stand-
46 ard.For hot rolled structural shapes, hollow structural sections (HSS), plates,

M-2
47 and bars conforming to the standard designations listed in Section A3.1a, the
48 temperature of heated regions shall not exceed 1,200°F (650°C), except that the
49 temperature of heated regions shall not exceed 1,100°F (590°C) for ASTM
50 A514/A514M, nor the temperature specified in the ASTM material standard
51 for ASTM A709/A709M, ASTM A913/A913M, and ASTM A1066/A1066M.
52 Subject to the approval of the engineer of record, alternative temperature limi-
53 tations in accordance with recommendations by the producer of the material
54 should be used.
55
56 User Note: For unlisted materials, as identified in Section A3.1b, limitations
57 for the temperature of the heated regions should be consistent with the recom-
58 mendations of the producer of the material.
59
60
61 2. Thermal Cutting
62
63 Thermally cut edges shall meet the requirements of Structural Welding Code—
64 Steel (AWS D1.1/D1.1M) clauses 75.14.5.2, 75.14.8.3, and 75.14.8.4, hereaf-
65
5, EW
ter referred to as AWS D1.1M/D1.1M, with the exception that thermally cut
21
66 free edges that will not be subject to fatigue shall be free of round-bottom
67 gouges greater than 3/16 in. (5 mm) deep, and sharp V-shaped notches. Gouges
Y VI
68
20
deeper than 3/16 in. (5 mm) and notches shall be removed by grinding or re-
69 paired by welding.
AR E
70
U IC R
71 Reentrant corners shall be formed with a curved transition. The radius need not
72 exceed that required to fit the connection. Discontinuous corners are permitted
73 where the material on both sides of the discontinuous reentrant corner are con-
BR BL
74 nected to a mating piece to prevent deformation, and associated stress concen-

75 tration at the corner.
76
FE PU
77 User Note: Reentrant corners with a radius of 1/2 to 3/8 in. (13 to 10 mm) are
78 generally acceptable for statically loaded work. Where pieces need to fit tightly
ED FT
79 together, a discontinuous reentrant corner is acceptable if the pieces are con-

80 nected close to the corner on both sides of the discontinuous corner. Slots in
81 HSS for gussets may be made with semicircular ends or with curved corners.
AT A
82 Square ends are acceptable provided the edge of the gusset is welded to the HSS.
D DR
83
84 Weld access holes shall meet the geometrical requirements of Section J1.6.
85 Beam copes and welds access holes in shapes that are to be galvanized shall be
86 ground to bright metal. For shapes with a flange thickness not exceeding 2 in.
87 (50 mm), the roughness of thermally cut surfaces of copes shall be no greater
88 than a surface roughness value of 2,000 μin. (50 μm) as defined in Surface
89 Texture, Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay (ASME B46.1), hereafter re-
90 ferred to as ASTM B46.1. For beam copes and weld access holes in which the
91 curved part of the access hole is thermally cut in ASTM A6/A6M hot-rolled
92 shapes with a flange thickness exceeding 2 in. (50 mm) and welded built-up
93 shapes with material thickness greater than 2 in. (50 mm), a preheat temperature
94 of not less than 150°F (66°C) shall be applied prior to thermal cutting. The
95 thermally cut surface of access holes in ASTM A6/A6M hot-rolled shapes with
96 a flange thickness exceeding 2 in. (50 mm) and built-up shapes with a material
97 thickness greater than 2 in. (50 mm) shall be ground.
98
99 User Note: The AWS Surface Roughness Guide for Oxygen Cutting (AWS
100 C4.1-77) sample 2 may be used as a guide for evaluating the surface roughness
101 of copes in shapes with flanges not exceeding 2 in. (50 mm) thick.
102

M-3
103 3. Planing of Edges

104
105 Planing or finishing of sheared or thermally cut edges of plates or shapes is not
106 required unless specifically called for in the construction documents or in-
107 cluded in a stipulated edge preparation for welding.
108
109 4. Welded Construction
110
111 Welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, except as
112 modified in Section J2.
113
114 User Note: Welder qualification tests on plate defined in AWS D1.1/D1.1M
115 clause 64 are appropriate for welds connecting plates, shapes or HSS to other
116 plates, shapes or rectangular HSS. The 6GR tubular welder qualification is re-
117 quired for unbacked complete-joint-penetration groove welds of HSS T-, Y- and
118 K-connections.
119
120 5. Bolted Construction
121
5, EW
21
122 Parts of bolted members shall be pinned or bolted and rigidly held together
123 during assembly. Use of a drift pin in bolt holes during assembly shall not dis-
Y VI
124
20
tort the metal or enlarge the holes. Poor matching of holes shall be cause for
125 rejection.
AR E
126
U IC R
127 Bolt holes shall comply with the provisions of the RCSC Specification for
128 Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts Section 3.3, hereafter referred to
129 as the RCSC Specification. Water jet and thermally cut bolt holes are permitted
BR BL
130 and shall have a surface roughness profile not exceeding 1,000 μin. (25 μm),
131 as defined in ASME B46.1. Gouges shall not exceed a depth of 1/16 in. (2 mm).
FE PU
132
133 User Note: The AWS Surface Roughness Guide for Oxygen Cutting (AWS
134 C4.1-77) sample 3 may be used as a guide for evaluating the surface roughness
ED FT
135 of thermally cut holes.

136
137 Fully inserted finger shims, with a total thickness of not more than 1/4 in. (6
AT A
138 mm) within a joint, are permitted without changing the strength (based upon
D DR
139 bolt hole type) for the design of connections. The orientation of such shims is
140 independent of the direction of application of the load.
141
142 The use of high-strength bolts shall conform to the requirements of the RCSC
143 Specification, except as modified in Section J3.
144
145 6. Compression Joints
146
147 Compression joints that depend on contact bearing as part of the splice strength
148 shall have the bearing surfaces of individual fabricated pieces prepared by mill-
149 ing, sawing or other equivalent means.
150
151 7. Dimensional Tolerances
152
153 Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with Chapter 6 of the AISC
154 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, hereafter referred
155 to as the Code of Standard Practice.
156
157 8. Finish of Column Bases
158

M-4
159 Column bases and base plates shall be finished in accordance with the follow-
160 ing requirements:
161
162 (a) Steel bearing plates 2 in. (50 mm) or less in thickness are permitted with-
163 out milling provided a smooth and notch-free contact bearing surface is
164 obtained. Steel bearing plates over 2 in. (50 mm) but not over 4 in. (100
165 mm) in thickness are permitted to be straightened by pressing or, if presses
166 are not available, by milling for bearing surfaces, except as stipulated in
167 subparagraphs (b) and (c) of this section, to obtain a smooth and notch-free
168 contact bearing surface. Steel bearing plates over 4 in. (100 mm) in thick-
169 ness shall be milled for bearing surfaces, except as stipulated in subpara-
170 graphs (b) and (c) of this section.
171
172 (b) Bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column bases that are grouted to en-
173 sure full bearing contact on foundations need not be milled.
174
175 (c) Top surfaces of bearing plates need not be milled when complete-joint-
176 penetration groove welds are provided between the column and the bear-
177
5, EW
ing plate.
21
178
179 9. Holes for Anchor Rods
Y VI
180
20
181 Holes for anchor rods are permitted to be mechanically or manually thermally
AR E
182 cut, providing the quality requirements in accordance with the provisions of
U IC R
183 Section M2.2 are met.

184
185 10. Drain Holes
BR BL
186
187 When water can collect inside HSS or box members, either during construction
188 or during service, the member shall be sealed, provided with a drain hole at the
FE PU
189 base, or otherwise protected from water infiltration.

190
ED FT
191 11. Requirements for Galvanized Members

192
193 Members and parts to be galvanized shall be designed, detailed, and fabricated
AT A
194 to provide for flow and drainage of pickling fluids and zinc and to prevent
D DR
195 pressure buildup in enclosed parts.

196
197 User Note: Drainage and vent holes should be detailed on fabrication docu-
198 ments. See The Design of Products to be Hot-Dip Galvanized After Fabrica-
199 tion, American Galvanizer’s Association, and ASTM A123, A143, A385,
200 F2329, A385, and A780 for useful information on design and detailing of gal-
201 vanized members. See Section M2.2 for requirements for copes of members
202 that are to be galvanized.
203
204 M3. SHOP PAINTING
205
207
208 Shop painting and surface preparation shall be in accordance with the provi-
209 sions in Code of Standard Practice Chapter 6.
210
211 Shop paint is not required unless specified by the contract documents.
212

M-5
213 2. Inaccessible Surfaces

214
215 Except for contact surfaces, surfaces inaccessible after shop assembly shall be
216 cleaned and painted prior to assembly, if required by the construction docu-
217 ments.
218
219 3. Contact Surfaces
220
221 Paint is permitted in bearing-type connections. For slip-critical connections, the
222 faying surface requirements shall be in accordance with RCSC Specification
223 Section 3.2.2.
224
225 4. Finished Surfaces
226
227 Machine-finished surfaces shall be protected against corrosion by a rust inhib-
228 itive coating that can be removed prior to erection or has characteristics that
229 make removal prior to erection unnecessary.
230
231 5.
5, EW
Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds
21
232
233 Unless otherwise specified in the design documents, surfaces within 2 in. (50
Y VI
234
20
mm) of any field weld location shall be free of materials that would prevent
235 weld quality from meeting the quality requirements of this Specification, or
AR E
236 produce unsafe fumes during welding.

U IC R
237
238 M4. ERECTION
239
BR BL
240 1. Column Base Setting

241
242 Column bases shall be set level and to correct elevation with full bearing on
FE PU
243 concrete or masonry as defined in Code of Standard Practice Section 7.

244
ED FT
245 2. Stability and Connections

246
247 The frame of structural steel buildings shall be carried up true and plumb within
AT A
248 the limits defined in Code of Standard Practice Chapter 7. As erection pro-
D DR
249 gresses, the structure shall be secured to support dead, erection, and other loads
250 anticipated to occur during the period of erection. Temporary bracing shall be
251 provided, in accordance with the requirements of the Code of Standard Prac-
252 tice, wherever necessary to support the loads to which the structure may be
253 subjected, including equipment and the operation of same. Such bracing shall
254 be left in place as long as required for safety.
255
256 3. Alignment
257
258 No permanent bolting or welding shall be performed until the affected portions
259 of the structure have been aligned as required by the construction documents.
260
261 4. Fit of Column Compression Joints and Base Plates
262
263 Lack of contact bearing not exceeding a gap of 1/16 in. (2 mm), regardless of
264 the type of splice used (partial-joint-penetration groove welded or bolted), is
265 permitted. If the gap exceeds 1/16 in. (2 mm), but is equal to or less than 1/4
266 in. (6 mm), and if an engineering investigation shows that sufficient contact
267 area does not exist, the gap shall be packed out with nontapered steel shims.

M-6
268 Shims need not be other than mild steel, regardless of the grade of the main
269 material.
270
271 5. Field Welding
272
273 Surfaces in and adjacent to joints to be field welded shall be prepared as neces-
274 sary to assure weld quality. This preparation shall include surface preparation
275 necessary to correct for damage or contamination occurring subsequent to fab-
276 rication.
277
278 6. Field Painting
279
280 Responsibility for touch-up painting, cleaning, and field painting shall be allo-
281 cated in accordance with accepted local practices, and this allocation shall be
282 set forth explicitly in the contract documents.
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

N-1
1
2
3 CHAPTER N
4 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
5
6 This chapter addresses minimum requirements for quality control, quality assurance,
7 and nondestructive testing for structural steel systems and steel elements of composite
8 members for buildings and other structures.
9
10 User Note: This chapter does not address quality control or quality assurance for the
11 following items:
12 (a) Steel (open web) joists and girders
13 (b) Tanks or pressure vessels
14 (c) Cables, cold-formed steel products, or gage material
15 (d) Concrete reinforcing bars, concrete materials, or placement of concrete for
16 composite members
17 (e) Surface preparations or coatings
18
5, EW
21
19 The Chapter is organized as follows:
20
Y VI
21 N1. 20
General Provisions
22 N2. Fabricator and Erector Quality Control Program
AR E
23 N3. Fabricator and Erector Documents

U IC R
24 N4. Inspection and Nondestructive Testing Personnel

25 N5. Minimum Requirements for Inspection of Structural Steel Buildings
26 N6. Approved Fabricators and Erectors
27 N7. Nonconforming Material and Workmanship
BR BL
28 N8. Minimum Requirements for Shop or Field Applied Coatings

29
FE PU
30 N1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

31
32 Quality control (QC), and quality assurance (QA), as specified in this chap-
ED FT
33 ter, shall be provided by the fabricator and erector. QC shall be provided by

34 the fabricator and erector. Quality assurance (QA), as specified in this chap-
AT A
35 ter, shall be provided by others when required by the authority having juris-
D DR
36 diction (AHJ), applicable building code, purchaser, owner, or engineer of

37 record (EOR), and when required, responsibilities shall be specified in the
38 contract documents., or as modified by the provisions of N6. Nondestructive
39 testing (NDT) shall be performed by the agency or firm responsible for qual-
40 ity assurance, except as permitted in accordance with Section N6.
41
42 User Note: The QA/QC requirements in Chapter N are considered adequate
43 and effective for most steel structures and are strongly encouraged without
44 modification. When the applicable building code and AHJ requires the use
45 of a QA plan, this chapter outlines the minimum requirements deemed ef-
46 fective to provide satisfactory results in steel building construction. There
47 may be cases where supplemental inspections are advisable. Additionally,
48 where the contractor’s QC program has demonstrated the capability to per-
49 form some tasks this plan has assigned to QA, modification of the plan could
50 be considered.
51
52 User Note: The producers of materials manufactured in accordance with the
53 standard specifications referenced in Section A3 and steel deck manufactur-
54 ers are not considered to be fabricators or erectors.
55

N-2
56 N2. FABRICATOR AND ERECTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM

57
58 The fabricator and erector shall establish, maintain and implement QC pro-
59 cedures to ensure that their work is performed in accordance with this Spec-
60 ification and the construction documents.
61
62 1. Material Identification
63
64 Material identification procedures shall comply with the requirements of
65 Section 6.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
66 Bridges, hereafter referred to as the Code of Standard Practice, and shall be
67 monitored by the fabricator’s quality control inspector (QCI).
68
69 2. Fabricator Quality Control Procedures
70
71 The fabricator’s QC procedures shall address inspection of the following as
72 a minimum, as applicable:
73
74
5, EW
(a) Shop welding, high-strength bolting, and details in accordance with
21
75 Section N5
76 (b) Shop cut and finished surfaces in accordance with Section M2
Y VI
77
20
(c) Shop heating for cambering, curving and straightening in accordance
78 with Section M2.1
AR E
79 (d) Tolerances for shop fabrication in accordance with Code of Standard

U IC R
80 Practice Section 6.4

81
82 3. Erector Quality Control Procedures
BR BL
83
84 The erector’s quality control procedures shall address inspection of the fol-
85 lowing as a minimum, as applicable:
FE PU
86
87 (a) Field welding, high-strength bolting, and details in accordance with
ED FT
88 Section N5
89 (b) Steel deck in accordance with SDI Standard for Quality Control and
90 Quality Assurance for Installation of Steel Deck
AT A
91 (c) Headed steel stud anchor placement and attachment in accordance with
D DR
92 Section N5.4
93 (d) Field cut surfaces in accordance with Section M2.2
94 (e) Field heating for straightening in accordance with Section M2.1
95 (f) Tolerances for field erection in accordance with Code of Standard Prac-
96 tice Section 7.13
97
98 N3. FABRICATOR AND ERECTOR DOCUMENTS
99
100 1. Submittals for Steel Construction
101
102 The fabricator or erector shall submit the following documents for review
103 by the EOR or the EOR’s designee, in accordance with Code of Standard
104 Practice Section 4.4, prior to fabrication or erection, as applicable:
105
106 (a) Fabrication documents, unless fabrication documents have been fur-
107 nished by others
108 (b) Erection documents, unless erection documents have been furnished by
109 others
110
111 2. Available Documents for Steel Construction

N-3
112
113 The following documents shall be available in electronic or printed form for
114 review by the EOR or the EOR’s designee prior to fabrication or erection,
115 as applicable, unless otherwise required in the construction documents to be
116 submitted:
117
118 (a) For main structural steel elements, copies of material test reports in
119 accordance with Section A3.1.
120 (b) For steel castings and forgings, copies of material test reports in
122 (c) For fasteners, copies of manufacturer’s certifications in accordance
123 with Section A3.3.
124 (d) For anchor rods and threaded rods, copies of material test reports
125 in accordance with Section A3.4.
126 (e) For welding consumables, copies of manufacturer’s certifications
127 in accordance with Section A3.5.
128 (f) For headed stud anchors, copies of manufacturer’s certifications in
130 (g)
5, EW
Manufacturer’s product data sheets or catalog data for welding
21
131 filler metals and fluxes to be used. The data sheets shall describe
132 the product, limitations of use, recommended or typical welding
Y VI
133
20
parameters, and storage and exposure requirements, including bak-
134 ing, if applicable.
AR E
135 (h) Welding procedure specifications (WPS).

U IC R
136 (i) Procedure qualification records (PQR) for WPS that are not
137 prequalified in accordance with Structural Welding Code—Steel
138 (AWS D1.1/D1.1M), hereafter referred to as AWS D1.1/D1.1M, or
BR BL
139 Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel (AWS D1.3/D1.3M), as ap-

140 plicable.
141 (j) Welding personnel performance qualification records (WPQR) and
FE PU
142 continuity records.

143 (k) Fabricator’s or erector’s, as applicable, written QC manual that
ED FT
144 shall include, as a minimum:

145 (1) Material control procedures
146 (2) Inspection procedures
AT A
147 (3) Nonconformance procedures

D DR
148 (l) Fabricator’s or erector’s, as applicable, QCI qualifications.

149 (m) Fabricator NDT personnel qualifications, if NDT is performed by
150 the fabricator.
151
152 N4. INSPECTION AND NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING PERSONNEL
153
154 1. Quality Control Inspector Qualifications
155
156 QC welding inspection personnel shall be qualified to the satisfaction of the
157 fabricator’s or erector’s QC program, as applicable, and in accordance with
158 either of the following:
159
160 (a) Associate welding inspectors (AWI) or higher as defined in Stand-
161 ard for the Qualification of Welding Inspectors (AWS B5.1), or
162 (b) Qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 6.1.4.
163
164 QC bolting inspection personnel shall be qualified on the basis of docu-
165 mented training and experience in structural bolting inspection.
166

N-4
167 The fabricator’s or erector’s QCI performing coating inspection shall be

168 qualified by training and experience as required by the firm’s quality control
169 program. The QCI shall receive initial and periodic documented training.
170
171 2. Quality Assurance Inspector Qualifications
172
173 QA welding inspectors shall be qualified to the satisfaction of the QA
174 agency’s written practice, and in accordance with either of the following:
175
176 (a) Welding inspectors (WI) or senior welding inspectors (SWI), as de-
177 fined in Standard for the Qualification of Welding Inspectors
178 (AWS B5.1), except AWI are permitted to be used under the direct
179 supervision of WI, who are on the premises and available when
180 weld inspection is being conducted, or
181 (b) Qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 6.1.4.
182
183 QA bolting inspection personnel shall be qualified on the basis of docu-
184 mented training and experience in structural bolting inspection.
185
5, EW
21
186 QA coating inspection personnel shall be qualified to the satisfaction of the
187 QA agency’s written practice. The inspector shall have, received docu-
Y VI
188
20
mented training, have experience in coating inspection, and shall be quali-
189 fied in accordance with one of the following:
AR E
190
U IC R
191 (a) NACE, Coating Inspector Program (CIP) Level 1 Certification

192 (b) SSPC, Protective Coatings Inspector Program (PCI) Level 1 Certi-
193 fication
BR BL
194 (c) On the basis of documented training and experience in coating ap-
195 plication and inspection.
196
FE PU
197 3. NDT Personnel Qualifications

198
ED FT
199 NDT personnel, for NDT other than visual, shall be qualified in accordance
200 with their employer’s written practice, which shall meet or exceed the crite-
201 ria of AWS D1.1/D1.1M clause 6.14.6, and,
AT A
202
D DR
203 (a) Personnel Qualification and Certification Nondestructive Testing

204 (ASNT SNT-TC-1A), or
205 (b) Standard for the Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive
206 Testing Personnel (ANSI/ASNT CP-189).
207
208 N5. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR INSPECTION OF
209 STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
210
211 1. Quality Control
212
213 QC inspection tasks shall be performed by the fabricator’s or erector’s QCI,
214 as applicable, in accordance with Sections N5.4, N5.6 and N5.7.
215
216 Tasks in Tables N5.4-1 through N5.4-3 and Tables N5.6-1 through N5.6-3
217 listed for QC are those inspections performed by the QCI to ensure that the
218 work is performed in accordance with the construction documents.
219
220 For QC inspection, the applicable construction documents are the fabrication
221 documents and the erection documents, and the applicable referenced spec-
222 ifications, codes and standards.

N-5
223
224 User Note: The QCI need not refer to the design documents and project
225 specifications. The Code of Standard Practice Section 4.2.1(a) requires the
226 transfer of information from the contract documents (design documents and
227 project specification) into accurate and complete fabrication and erection
228 documents, allowing QC inspection to be based upon fabrication and erec-
229 tion documents alone.
230
231 2. Quality Assurance
232
233 The QAI shall review the material test reports and certifications as listed in
234 Section N3.2 for compliance with the construction documents.
235
236 QA inspection tasks shall be performed by the QAI, in accordance with Sec-
237 tions N5.4, N5.6 and N5.7.
238
239 Tasks in Tables N5.4-1 through N5.4-3 and N5.6-1 through N5.6-3 listed
240 for QA are those inspections performed by the QAI to ensure that the work
241
5, EW
is performed in accordance with the construction documents.
21
242
243 Concurrent with the submittal of such reports to the AHJ, EOR or owner,
Y VI
244
20
the QA agency shall submit to the fabricator and erector:
245
AR E
246 (a) Inspection reports

U IC R
247 (b) NDT reports

248
249 3. Coordinated Inspection
BR BL
250
251 When a task is noted to be performed by both QC and QA, it is permitted to
252 coordinate the inspection function between the QCI and QAI so that the in-
FE PU
253 spection functions are performed by only one party. When QA relies upon
254 inspection functions performed by QC, the approval of the EOR and the AHJ
ED FT
255 is required.
256
257 4. Inspection of Welding
AT A
258
D DR
259 Observation of welding operations and visual inspection of in-process and

260 completed welds shall be the primary method to confirm that the materials,
261 procedures and workmanship are in conformance with the construction doc-
262 uments.
263
264 User Note: The technique, workmanship, appearance and quality of welded
265 construction are addressed in Section M2.4.
266
267 As a minimum, welding inspection tasks shall be in accordance with Tables
268 N5.4-1, N5.4-2 and N5.4-3. In these tables, the inspection tasks are as fol-
269 lows:
270
271 (a) Observe (O): The inspector shall observe these items on a random ba-
272 sis. Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections.
273 (b) Perform (P): These tasks shall be performed for each welded joint or
274 member.
275

N-6
TABLE N5.4-1
Inspection Tasks Prior to Welding

Inspection Tasks Prior to Welding QC QA
Welder qualification records and continuity records P O
WPS available P P
Manufacturer certifications for welding consumables available P P
Material identification (type/grade) O O
Welder identification systema
• Fabricator or erector, as applicable, shall maintain a
system by which a welder who has welded a joint or
O O
member can be identified.
• Die stamping of cyclically loaded members without the
approval of the engineer of record shall be prohibited.
Fit-up of groove welds (including joint geometry)
• Joint preparations
5, EW
• Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, bevel)
21
• Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces) O O
• Tacking (tack weld quality and location)
Y VI
20
• Backing type and fit (if applicable)
AR E
Fit-up of CJP groove welds of HSS T-, Y- and K-connections

U IC R
without backing (including joint geometry)

• Joint preparations
• Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, bevel) P O
• Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces)
BR BL

FE PU
Configuration and finish of access holes O O

Fit-up of fillet welds
• Dimensions (alignment, gaps at root)
O O
ED FT
• Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces)

AT A
Check welding equipment O −

D DR
a The fabricator or erector, as applicable, shall maintain a system by which a welder

who has welded a joint or member can be identified. Stamps, if used on cyclically-
loaded members, require the approval of the engineer of record and shall be the low-
stress type.
276

N-7
TABLE N5.4-2
Inspection Tasks During Welding

Inspection Tasks During Welding QC QA
Control and handling of welding consumables
• Packaging O O
• Exposure control
O O
No welding over cracked tack welds
Environmental conditions
• Wind speed within limits O O
• Precipitation and temperature
WPS followed
• Settings on welding equipment
• Travel speed
•
5, EW
Selected welding materials
O O
21
• Shielding gas type/flow rate
• Preheat applied
Y VI
•
20
Interpass temperature maintained (min./max.)
• Proper position (F, V, H, OH)
AR E
Welding techniques
U IC R
• Interpass and final cleaning O O

• Each pass within profile limitations
• Each pass meets quality requirements
BR BL
FE PU
Placement and installation of steel headed stud anchors P P
277
ED FT
278
279
AT A
280
D DR
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293

N-8
TABLE N5.4-3
Inspection Tasks After Welding

Inspection Tasks After Welding QC QA
Welds cleaned O O
Size, length and location of welds P P
Welds meet visual acceptance criteria
• Crack prohibition
• Weld/base-metal fusion
• Crater cross section P P
• Weld profiles
• Weld size
• Undercut
• Porosity
Arc strikes P P
k-area[a]
5, EW P P
21
Weld access holes in rolled heavy shapes and built-up heavy
P P
shapes[b]
Y VI
20
Backing removed and weld tabs removed (if required) P P
Repair activities P P
AR E
Document acceptance or rejection of welded joint or member

U IC R
[c] P P
No prohibited welds have been added without the approval of
O O
the EORengineer of record
[a] When welding of doubler plates, continuity plates or stiffeners has been performed in the
BR BL
k-area, visually inspect the web k-area for cracks within 3 in. (75 mm) of the weld.
[b]
After rolled heavy shapes (see Section A3.1c) and built-up heavy shapes (see Section
FE PU
A3.1d) are welded, visually inspect the weld access hole for cracks.
[c]Die stamping of cyclically loaded members without the approval of the engineer
of record shall be prohibited.Stamps, if used on cyclically-loaded members, require the
approval of the engineer of record and shall be the low-stress type.
ED FT
294
295
AT A
296 5. Nondestructive Testing of Welded Joints

D DR
297
298 5a. Procedures
299
300 Ultrasonic testing (UT), magnetic particle testing (MT), penetrant testing
301 (PT), and radiographic testing (RT), where required, shall be performed by
302 QA in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
303
304 User Note: The technique, workmanship, appearance and quality of welded
305 construction is addressed in Section M2.4.
306
307 5b. CJP Groove Weld NDT
308
309 For structures in risk category III or IV, UT shall be performed by QA on all
310 complete-joint-penetration (CJP) groove welds subject to transversely ap-
311 plied tension loading in butt, T- and corner joints, in material 5/16 in. (8 mm)
312 thick or greater. For structures in risk category II, UT shall be performed by
313 QA on 10% of CJP groove welds in butt, T- and corner joints subject to
314 transversely applied tension loading, in materials 5/16 in. (8 mm) thick or
315 greater.
316

N-9
317 User Note: For structures in risk category I, NDT of CJP groove welds is
318 not required. For all structures in all risk categories, NDT of CJP groove
319 welds in materials less than 5/16 in. (8 mm) thick is not required.
320
321 5c. Welded Joints Subjected to Fatigue
322
323 When required by Appendix 3, Table A-3.1, welded joints requiring weld
324 soundness to be established by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection shall be
325 tested by QA as prescribed. Reduction in the rate of UT is prohibited.
326
327 5d. Ultrasonic Testing Rejection Rate
328
329 The ultrasonic testing rejection rate shall be determined as the number of
330 welds containing defects divided by the number of welds completed. Welds
331 that contain acceptable discontinuities shall not be considered as having de-
332 fects when the rejection rate is determined. For evaluating the rejection rate
333 of continuous welds over 3 ft (1 m) in length where the effective throat is 1
334 in. (25 mm) or less, each 12 in. (300 mm) increment or fraction thereof shall
335
5, EW
be considered as one weld. For evaluating the rejection rate on continuous
21
336 welds over 3 ft (1 m) in length where the effective throat is greater than 1 in.
337 (25 mm), each 6 in. (150 mm) of length, or fraction thereof, shall be consid-
Y VI
338
20
ered one weld.
339
AR E
340 5e. Reduction of Ultrasonic Testing Rate

U IC R
341
342 For projects that contain 40 or fewer welds, there shall be no reduction in
343 the ultrasonic testing rate. The rate of UT is permitted to be reduced if ap-
BR BL
344 proved by the EOR and the AHJ. Where the initial rate of UT is 100%, the
345 NDT rate for an individual welder or welding operator is permitted to be
346 reduced to 25%, provided the rejection rate, the number of welds containing
FE PU
347 unacceptable defects divided by the number of welds completed, is demon-

348 strated to be 5% or less of the welds tested for the welder or welding opera-
ED FT
349 tor. A sampling of at least 40 completed welds shall be made for such re-
350 duced evaluation on each project.
351
AT A
352 5f. Increase in Ultrasonic Testing Rate

D DR
353
354 For structures in risk category II and higher (where the initial rate for UT is
355 10%) the NDT rate for an individual welder or welding operator shall be
356 increased to 100% should the rejection rate (the number of welds containing
357 unacceptable defects divided by the number of welds completed) exceed 5%
358 of the welds tested for the welder or welding operator. A sampling of at least
359 20 completed welds on each project shall be made prior to implementing
360 such an increase. If the rejection rate for the welder or welding operator falls
361 to 5% or less on the basis of at least 40 completed welds, the rate of UT may
362 be decreased to 10%.
363
364 5g. Documentation
365
366 All NDT performed shall be documented. For shop fabrication, the NDT
367 report shall identify the tested weld by piece mark and location in the piece.
368 For field work, the NDT report shall identify the tested weld by location in
369 the structure, piece mark, and location in the piece.
370
371 When a weld is rejected on the basis of NDT, the NDT record shall indicate
372 the location of the defect and the basis of rejection.

N-10
373
374 6. Inspection of High-Strength Bolting
375
376 Observation of bolting operations shall be the primary method used to con-
377 firm that the materials, procedures and workmanship incorporated in con-
378 struction are in conformance with the construction documents and the pro-
379 visions of the RCSC Specification.
380
381 (a) For snug-tight joints, pre-installation verification testing as specified
382 in Table N5.6-1 and monitoring of the installation procedures as spec-
383 ified in Table N5.6-2 are not applicable. The QCI and QAI need not
384 be present during the installation of fasteners in snug-tight joints.
385
386 (b) For pretensioned joints and slip-critical joints, when the installer is
387 using the turn-of-nut or combined method with matchmarking tech-
388 niques, the direct-tension-indicator method, or the twist-off-type ten-
389 sion control bolt method, monitoring of bolt pretensioning procedures
390 shall be as specified in Table N5.6-2. The QCI and QAI need not be
391
5, EW
present during the installation of fasteners when these methods are
21
392 used by the installer.
393
Y VI
394 (c)
20
For pretensioned joints and slip-critical joints, when the installer is
395 using the turn-of-nut or combined method without matchmarking, or
AR E
396 the calibrated wrench method, monitoring of bolt pretensioning pro-

U IC R
397 cedures shall be as specified in Table N5.6-2. The QCI and QAI
398 shall be engaged in their assigned inspection duties during installation
399 of fasteners when these methods are used by the installer.
BR BL
400
401 As a minimum, bolting inspection tasks shall be in accordance with Tables
402 N5.6-1, N5.6-2 and N5.6-3. In these tables, the inspection tasks are as fol-
FE PU
403 lows:
404
ED FT
405 (a) Observe (O): The inspector shall observe these items on a random ba-
406 sis. Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections.
407 (b) Perform (P): These tasks shall be performed for each bolted connec-
AT A
408 tion.
D DR
409

N-11
TABLE N5.6-1
Inspection Tasks Prior to Bolting

Inspection Tasks Prior to Bolting QC QA
Manufacturer’s certifications available for fastener materials O P
Fasteners marked in accordance with ASTM requirements O O

Correct fasteners selected for the joint detail (grade, type, bolt length if threads are
O O
to be excluded from shear plane)
Correct bolting procedure selected for joint detail O O
Connecting elements, including the appropriate faying surface condition and hole
O O
preparation, if specified, meet applicable requirements
5, EW
Pre-installation verification testing by installation personnel observed and docu-
P O
21
mented for fastener assemblies and methods used
Y VI
20
Protected storage provided for bolts, nuts, washers and other fastener components O O
AR E
410
U IC R
TABLE N5.6-2
BR BL
Inspection Tasks During Bolting

FE PU
Inspection Tasks During Bolting QC QA

Fastener assemblies placed in all holes and washers and nuts are positioned as
O O
ED FT
required
Joint brought to the snug-tight condition prior to the pretensioning operation O O

AT A
D DR
Fastener component not turned by the wrench prevented from rotating O O
Fasteners are pretensioned in accordance with the RCSC Specification, progressing

O O
systematically from the most rigid point toward the free edges
411
412
TABLE N5.6-3
Inspection Tasks After Bolting

Inspection Tasks After Bolting QC QA
Document acceptance or rejection of bolted connections P P
413
414

N-12
415 7. Inspection of Galvanized Structural Steel Main Members

416
417 Exposed cut surfaces of galvanized structural steel main members and ex-
418 posed corners of rectangular HSS shall be visually inspected for cracks sub-
419 sequent to galvanizing. Cracks shall be repaired or the member shall be re-
420 jected.
421
422 User Note: It is normal practice for fabricated steel that requires hot dip
423 galvanizing to be delivered to the galvanizer and then shipped to the jobsite.
424 As a result, inspection on site is common.
425
426 8. Other Inspection Tasks
427
428 The fabricator’s QCI shall inspect the fabricated steel to verify compliance
429 with the details shown on the fabrication documents.
430
431 User Note: This includes such items as the correct application of shop joint
432 details at each connection.
433
5, EW
21
434 The erector’s QCI shall inspect the erected steel frame to verify compliance
435 with the field installed details shown on the erection documents.
Y VI
436
20
437 User Note: This includes such items as braces, stiffeners, member locations,
AR E
438 and correct application of field joint details at each connection.

U IC R
439
440 The QAI shall be on the premises for inspection during the placement of
441 anchor rods and other embedments supporting structural steel for compli-
BR BL
442 ance with the construction documents. As a minimum, the diameter, grade,
443 type and length of the anchor rod or embedded item, and the extent or depth
444 of embedment into the concrete, shall be verified and documented prior to
FE PU
445 placement of concrete.

446
ED FT
447 The QAI shall inspect the fabricated steel or erected steel frame, as applica-
448 ble, to verify compliance with the details shown on the construction docu-
449 ments.
AT A
450
D DR
451 User Note: This includes such items as braces, stiffeners, member locations
452 and the correct application of joint details at each connection.
453
454 The acceptance or rejection of joint details and the correct application of
455 joint details shall be documented.
456
457 N6. APPROVED FABRICATORS AND ERECTORS
458
459 When the fabricator or erector has been approved by the AHJ to perform all
460 inspections without the involvement of a third-party, independent, QAI,
461 the fabricator or erector shall perform and document all of the QA inspec-
462 tions required by this Chapter.
463 NDT of welds completed in an approved fabricator’s shop is permitted to be
464 performed by that fabricator when approved by the AHJ. When the fabrica-
465 tor performs the NDT, the NDT reports prepared by the fabricator’s NDT
466 personnel shall be available for review by the QA agency.
467
468 At completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit a certifi-
469 cate of compliance to the AHJ stating that the materials supplied and work
470 performed by the fabricator are in accordance with the construction

N-13
471 documents. At completion of erection, the approved erector shall submit a

472 certificate of compliance to the AHJ stating that the materials supplied and
473 work performed by the erector are in accordance with the construction doc-
474 uments.
475
476 N7. NONCONFORMING MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
477
478 Identification and rejection of material or workmanship that is not in con-
479 formance with the construction documents is permitted at any time during
480 the progress of the work. However, this provision shall not relieve the owner
481 or the inspector of the obligation for timely, in-sequence inspections. Non-
482 conforming material and workmanship shall be brought to the immediate
483 attention of the fabricator or erector, as applicable.
484
485 Nonconforming material or workmanship shall be brought into conformance
486 or made suitable for its intended purpose as determined by the EOR.
487
488 Concurrent with the submittal of such reports to the AHJ, EOR or owner,
489
5, EW
the QA agency shall submit to the fabricator and erector:
21
490
491 (a) Nonconformance reports
Y VI
492
20
(b) Reports of repair, replacement or acceptance of nonconforming items
493
AR E
494 N8. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOP OR FIELD APPLIED

U IC R
495 COATINGS
496
497 When coating or touch up is specified in the contract documents to be per-
BR BL
498 formed by the fabricator or erector, the fabricator and/or erector, as applica-
499 ble, shall establish, maintain, and implement QC procedures to ensure the
500 proper application of coatings on structural steel in accordance with the coat-
FE PU
501 ing manufacturer’s product data sheet, unless there is direction to the con-
502 trary in the contract documents.
ED FT
503
504 User Note: When there is a conflict between the coating manufacturer’s
505 product data sheet and the contract documents for the proper application of
AT A
506 a coating, it is recommended to clarify with the engineer of record which

D DR
507 will govern.

508
509 Unless there is direction to the contrary in the contract documents, Observa-
510 tion observation of the coating process prior to, during, and after the appli-
511 cation of the coating shall be the primary method to confirm that the coating
512 material, procedures, and workmanship are in conformance with the con-
513 struction documents.manufacturer’s product data sheet unless there is direc-
514 tion to the contrary in the contract documents.

APP1-1
1
2 APPENDIX 1
3
4 DESIGN BY ADVANCED ANALYSIS
5
6 This Appendix permits the use of advanced methods of structural analysis to directly
7 model system and member imperfections, and/or allow for the redistribution of mem-
8 ber and connection forces and moments as a result of localized yielding.
9
10 The appendix is organized as follows:
11
12 1.1 General Requirements
13 1.2 Design by Elastic Analysis
14 1.3 Design by Inelastic Analysis
15
16 1.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
17
18 5, EW
The analysis methods permitted in this Appendix shall ensure that equilibrium
21
19 and compatibility are satisfied for the structure in its deformed shape, includ-
Y VI
20 ing all flexural, shear, axial, and torsional deformations, and all other compo-
20
21 nent and connection deformations that contribute to the displacements of the
AR E
22 structure.
U IC R
23
24 Design by the methods of this Appendix shall be conducted in accordance with
25 Section B3.1, using load and resistance factor design (LRFD).
26
BR BL
27 1.2. DESIGN BY ELASTIC ANALYSIS

28
FE PU
29 1. General Stability Requirements

30
31 Design by a second-order elastic analysis that includes the direct modeling of
ED FT
32 system and member imperfections is permitted for all structures subject to the
33 limitations defined in this section. All requirements of Section C1 apply, with
AT A
34 additional requirements and exceptions as noted below. All load-dependent

D DR
35 effects shall be calculated at a level of loading corresponding to LRFD load

36 combinations.
37
38 The influence of torsion shall be considered, including its impact on member
39 deformations and second-order effects.
40
41 The provisions of this method apply only to doubly symmetric members, in-
42 cluding I-shapes, HSS and box sections, unless evidence is provided that the
43 method is applicable to other member types.
44
45 2. Calculation of Required Strengths
46
47 For design using a second-order elastic analysis that includes the direct mod-
48 eling of system and member imperfections, the required strengths of compo-
49 nents of the structure shall be determined from an analysis conforming to Sec-
50 tion C2, with additional requirements and exceptions as noted in the following.
51
52 2a. General Analysis Requirements
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

APP1-2
53
54 The analysis of the structure shall also conform to the following requirements:
55
56 (a) Torsional member deformations shall be considered in the analysis.
57
58 (b) The analysis shall consider geometric nonlinearities, including P-Δ, P-
59 δ, and twisting effects as applicable to the structure. The use of the
60 approximate procedures appearing in Appendix 8 is not permitted.
61
62 User Note: A rigorous second-order analysis of the structure is an im-
63 portant requirement for this method of design. Many analysis routines
64 common in design offices are based on a more traditional second-order
65 analysis approach that includes only P-Δ and P-δ effects without con-
66 sideration of additional second-order effects related to member twist,
67 which can be significant for some members with unbraced lengths near
68 or exceeding Lr . The type of second-order analysis defined herein also
69 includes the beneficial effects of additional member torsional strength
70 and stiffness due to warping restraint, which can be conservatively ne-
71 5, EW
glected. Refer to the Commentary for additional information and guid-
21
72 ance.
73
Y VI
74 (c)
20
In all cases, the analysis shall directly model the effects of initial imper-
AR E
75 fections due to both points of intersection of members displaced from

76 their nominal locations (system imperfections), and initial out-of-
U IC R
77 straightness or offsets of members along their length (member imper-

78 fections). The magnitude of the initial displacements shall be the max-
79 imum amount considered in the design; the pattern of initial displace-
BR BL
80 ments shall be such that it provides the greatest destabilizing effect for
81 the load combination being considered. The use of notional loads to
FE PU
82 represent either type of imperfection is not permitted.

83
84 User Note: Initial displacements similar in configuration to both dis-
ED FT
85 placements due to loading and anticipated buckling modes should be

86 considered in the modeling of imperfections. The magnitude of the in-
AT A
87 itial points of intersection of members displaced from their nominal lo-

88 cations (system imperfections) should be based on permissible con-
D DR
89 struction tolerances, as specified in the AISC Code of Standard Practice

90 for Steel Buildings and Bridges or other governing requirements, or on
91 actual imperfections, if known. When these displacements are due to
92 erection tolerances, 1/500 is often considered, based on the tolerance of
93 the out-of-plumbness ratio specified in the Code of Standard Practice.
94 For out-of-straightness of members (member imperfections), a 1/1000
95 out-of-straightness ratio is often considered. Refer to the Commentary
96 for additional guidance.
97
98 2b. Adjustments to Stiffness
99
100 The analysis of the structure to determine the required strengths of components
101 shall use reduced stiffnesses as defined in Section C2.3. Such stiffness reduc-
102 tion, including factors of 0.8 and τb, shall be applied to all stiffnesses that are
103 considered to contribute to the stability of the structure. The use of notional
104 loads to represent τb is not permitted.
105
106 User Note: Stiffness reduction should be applied to all member properties
107 including torsional properties (GJ and ECw) affecting twist of the member
108 cross section. One practical method of including stiffness reduction is to reduce

APP1-3
109 E and G by 0.8τb, thereby leaving all cross-section geometric properties at their
110 nominal value.
111
112 Applying this stiffness reduction to some members and not others can, in some
113 cases, result in artificial distortion of the structure under load and thereby lead
114 to an unintended redistribution of forces. This can be avoided by applying the
115 reduction to all members, including those that do not contribute to the stability
116 of the structure.
117
118 3. Calculation of Available Strengths
119
120 For design using a second-order elastic analysis that includes the direct mod-
121 eling of system and member imperfections, the available strengths of members
122 and connections shall be calculated in accordance with the provisions of Chap-
123 ters D through K, as applicable, except as defined below, with no further con-
124 sideration of overall structure stability.
125
126 The nominal compressive strength of members, Pn, may be taken as the cross-
127
5, EW
section compressive strength, FyAg, or as FyAe for members with slender ele-
21
128 ments, where Ae is defined in Section E7.
129
Y VI
130 1.3.
20
DESIGN BY INELASTIC ANALYSIS
131
AR E
132 User Note: Design by the provisions of this section is independent of the re-
U IC R
133 quirements of Section 1.2.

134
BR BL
136
137 The design strength of the structural system and its members and connections
FE PU
138 shall equal or exceed the required strength as determined by the inelastic anal-
139 ysis. The provisions of Section 1.3 do not apply to seismic design.
140
ED FT
141 The inelastic analysis shall take into account: (a) flexural, shear, axial, and
142 torsional member deformations, and all other component and connection de-
AT A
143 formations that contribute to the displacements of the structure; (b) second-
144 order effects (including P-Δ, P-δ, and twisting effects); (c) geometric imper-
D DR
145 fections; (d) stiffness reductions due to inelasticity, including partial yielding
146 of the cross section that may be accentuated by the presence of residual
147 stresses; and (e) uncertainty in system, member, and connection strength and
148 stiffness.
149
150 Strength limit states detected by an inelastic analysis that incorporates all of
151 the preceding requirements in this Section are not subject to the corresponding
152 provisions of this Specification when a comparable or higher level of reliability
153 is provided by the analysis. Strength limit states not detected by the inelastic
154 analysis shall be evaluated using the corresponding provisions of Chapters D
155 through K.
156
157 Connections shall meet the requirements of Section B3.4.
158
159 Members and connections subject to inelastic deformations shall be shown to
160 have ductility consistent with the intended behavior of the structural system.
161 Force redistribution due to rupture of a member or connection is not permitted.
162

APP1-4
163 Any method that uses inelastic analysis to proportion members and connec-
164 tions to satisfy these general requirements is permitted. A design method
165 based on inelastic analysis that meets the preceding strength requirements, the
166 ductility requirements of Section 1.3.2, and the analysis requirements of Sec-
167 tion 1.3.3 satisfies these general requirements.
168 2. Ductility Requirements

169 Members and connections with elements subject to yielding shall be propor-
170 tioned such that all inelastic deformation demands are less than or equal to
171 their inelastic deformation capacities. In lieu of explicitly ensuring that the
172 inelastic deformation demands are less than or equal to their inelastic defor-
173 mation capacities, the following requirements shall be satisfied for steel mem-
174 bers subject to plastic hinging.
175 2a. Material

176
177 The specified minimum yield stress, Fy, of members subject to plastic hinging
178 shall not exceed 65 ksi (450 MPa).
5, EW
21
179 2b. Cross Section
Y VI
180
20
181 The cross section of members at plastic hinge locations shall be doubly sym-
AR E
182 metric with width-to-thickness ratios of their compression elements not ex-
U IC R
183 ceeding λpd, where λpd is equal to λp from Table B4.1b, except as modified
184 below:
185
BR BL
186 (a) For the width-to-thickness ratio, h tw , of webs of I-shaped members,

187 rectangular HSS, and box sections subject to combined flexure and
FE PU
188 compression
189
190 (1) When Pu φc Py ≤ 0.125
ED FT
191
 2.75Pu 
AT A
E
192 λ pd = 3.76 1 −  (A-1-1)
D DR
Fy  φc Py 
193
194 (2) When Pu φc Py > 0.125
E  Pu  E
195 λ pd = 1.12  2.33 −  ≥ 1.49 (A-1-2)
Fy  φ P
c y  Fy
196 where
197 Pu = required axial strength in compression, using LRFD load
199 Py = Fy Ag = axial yield strength, kips (N)
200 h = as defined in Section B4.1, in. (mm)
201 tw = web thickness, in. (mm)
202 φc = resistance factor for compression = 0.90
203
204 (b) For the width-to-thickness ratio, b t , of flanges of rectangular HSS and
205 box sections, and for flange cover plates between lines of fasteners or
206 welds
207

APP1-5
208 λ pd = 0.94 E Fy (A-1-3)

209 where
210 b = as defined in Section B4.1, in. (mm)
211 t = as defined in Section B4.1, in. (mm)
212
213 (c) For the diameter-to-thickness ratio, D t , of round HSS in flexure
214
215 λ pd = 0.045 E Fy (A-1-4)
216
217 where
219 2c. Unbraced Length

220
221 In prismatic member segments that contain plastic hinges, the laterally un-
222 braced length, Lb, shall not exceed Lpd, determined as follows. For members
223 subject to flexure only, or to flexure and axial tension, Lb shall be taken as the
224 5, EW
length between points braced against lateral displacement of the compression
21
225 flange, or between points braced to prevent twist of the cross section. For
Y VI
226 members subject to flexure and axial compression, Lb shall be taken as the
20
227 length between points braced against both lateral displacement in the minor
AR E
228 axis direction and twist of the cross section.

U IC R
229
230 (a) For I-shaped members bent about their major axis:
 M′  E
231 L pd =  0.12 − 0.076 1  ry (A-1-5)
BR BL
 M 2  Fy
232
FE PU
233 where
234 ry = radius of gyration about minor axis, in. (mm)
235
ED FT
236 (1) When the magnitude of the bending moment at any location within
237 the unbraced length exceeds M 2
AT A
238
D DR
239 M 1′ M 2 = +1 (A-1-6a)
240
241 Otherwise:
242
243 (2) When M mid ≤ ( M 1 + M 2 ) 2
244
245 M 1′ = M 1 (A-1-6b)
246
247 (3) When M mid > ( M 1 + M 2 ) 2
248
249 M 1′ = ( 2M mid – M 2 )< M 2 (A-1-6c)
250
251 where
252 M1 = smaller moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm)
253 M2 = larger moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm)
254 (shall be taken as positive in all cases)

APP1-6
255 M mid = moment at middle of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm)

256 M 1′ = effective moment at end of unbraced length opposite from
257 M 2 , kip-in. (N-mm)
258
259 The moments M1 and M mid are individually taken as positive when
260 they cause compression in the same flange as the moment, M 2 , and
261 taken as negative otherwise.
262
263 (b) For solid rectangular bars and for rectangular HSS and box sections bent
264 about their major axis
265
 M′ E E
266 Lpd =  0.17 − 0.10 1  ry ≥ 0.10 ry (A-1-7)
 M  F F
 2  y y
267
268 For all types of members subject to axial compression and containing plastic
269
5, EW
hinges, the laterally unbraced lengths about the cross section major and minor
21
270 axes shall not exceed 4.71rx E Fy and 4.71ry E Fy , respectively.
271
Y VI
272
20
There is no Lpd limit for member segments containing plastic hinges in the
AR E
273 following cases:

U IC R
274
275 (a) Members with round or square cross sections subject only to flexure or to
276 combined flexure and tension
277 (b) Members subject only to flexure about their minor axis or combined ten-
BR BL
278 sion and flexure about their minor axis

279 (c) Members subject only to tension
FE PU
280 2d. Axial Force

281
ED FT
282 To ensure ductility in compression members with plastic hinges, the de-
283 sign strength in compression shall not exceed 0.75Fy Ag .
AT A
D DR
284 3. Analysis Requirements

285
286 The structural analysis shall satisfy the general requirements of Section 1.3.1.
287 These requirements are permitted to be satisfied by a second-order inelastic
288 analysis meeting the requirements of this Section.
289
290 Exception: For continuous beams not subject to axial compression, a first-or-
291 der inelastic or plastic analysis is permitted and the requirements of Sections
292 1.3.3b and 1.3.3c are waived.
293
294 User Note: Refer to the Commentary for guidance in conducting a traditional
295 plastic analysis and design in conformance with these provisions.
296 3a. Material Properties and Yield Criteria

297
298 The specified minimum yield stress, Fy, and the stiffness of all steel members
299 and connections shall be reduced by a factor of 0.9 for the analysis, except as
300 stipulated in Section 1.3.3c.
301

APP1-7
302 The influence of axial force, major axis bending moment, and minor axis bend-
303 ing moment shall be included in the calculation of the inelastic response.
304
305 The plastic strength of the member cross section shall be represented in the
306 analysis either by an elastic-perfectly-plastic yield criterion expressed in terms
307 of the axial force, major axis bending moment, and minor axis bending mo-
308 ment, or by explicit modeling of the material stress-strain response as elastic-
309 perfectly-plastic.
310 3b. Geometric Imperfections

311
312 In all cases, the analysis shall directly model the effects of initial imperfections
313 due to both points of intersection of members displaced from their nominal
314 locations (system imperfections), and initial out-of-straightness or offsets of
315 members along their length (member imperfections). The magnitude of the in-
316 itial displacements shall be the maximum amount considered in the design; the
317 pattern of initial displacements shall be such that it provides the greatest desta-
318 bilizing effect.
5, EW
21
319 3c. Residual Stress and Partial Yielding Effects
Y VI
320 20
321 The analysis shall include the influence of residual stresses and partial yield-
AR E
322 ing. This shall be done by explicitly modeling these effects in the analysis or
U IC R
323 by reducing the stiffness of all structural components as specified in Section

324 C2.3.
325
326 If the provisions of Section C2.3 are used, then:
BR BL
327
328 (a) The 0.9 stiffness reduction factor specified in Section 1.3.3a shall be re-
FE PU
329 placed by the reduction of the elastic modulus, E, by 0.8 as specified in

330 Section C2.3, and
331
ED FT
332 (b) the elastic-perfectly-plastic yield criterion, expressed in terms of the axial
333 force, major axis bending moment, and minor axis bending moment, shall
AT A
334 satisfy the cross-section strength limit defined by Equations H1-1a and
D DR
335 H1-1b using Pc = 0.9Py , M cx = 0.9M px , and M cy = 0.9M py .

336

APP 3-1
1 APPENDIX 3
2
3 FATIGUE
4
5
6 This appendix applies to members and connections subject to high-cycle loading
7 within the elastic range of stresses of frequency and magnitude sufficient to initiate
8 cracking and progressive failure.
9
10 User Note: See AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings for structures
11 subject to seismic loads.
12
14
15 3.1. General Provisions
16 3.2. Calculation of Maximum Stresses and Stress Ranges
17 3.3.
5, EW
Plain Material and Welded Joints
21
18 3.4. Bolts and Threaded Parts
19 3.5. Fabrication and Erection Requirements for Fatigue
Y VI
20 3.6. 20
Nondestructive Examination Requirements for Fatigue
21
AR E
22 3.1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

U IC R
23
24 The fatigue resistance of members consisting of shapes or plate shall be de-
25 termined when the number of cycles of application of live load exceeds
26 20,000. No evaluation of fatigue resistance of members consisting of HSS
BR BL
27 in building-type structures subject to code mandated wind loads is required.

28 When the applied cyclic stress range is less than the threshold allowable
FE PU
29 stress range, FTH, no further evaluation of fatigue resistance is required. See

30 Table A-3.1.
ED FT
31 The engineer of record shall provide either complete details including weld
32 sizes or shall specify the planned cycle life and the maximum range of mo-
AT A
33 ments, shears and reactions for the connections.

D DR
34 The provisions of this Appendix shall apply to stresses calculated on the

35 basis of the applied cyclic load spectrum. The maximum permitted stress
36 due to peak cyclic loads shall be 0.66Fy. In the case of a stress reversal, the
37 stress range shall be computed as the numerical sum of maximum repeated
38 tensile and compressive stresses or the numerical sum of maximum shearing
39 stresses of opposite direction at the point of probable crack initiation.
40 The cyclic load resistance determined by the provisions of this Appendix is
41 applicable to structures with suitable corrosion protection or subject only to
42 mildly corrosive atmospheres, such as normal atmospheric conditions.
43
44 The cyclic load resistance determined by the provisions of this Appendix is
45 applicable only to structures subject to temperatures not exceeding 300°F
46 (150°C).
47
48 3.2. CALCULATION OF MAXIMUM STRESSES AND STRESS
49 RANGES
50
51 Calculated stresses shall be based upon elastic analysis. Stresses shall not
52 be amplified by stress concentration factors for geometrical discontinuities.

APP 3-2
53
54 For bolts and threaded rods subject to axial tension, the calculated stresses
55 shall include the effects of prying action, if any. In the case of axial stress
56 combined with bending, the maximum stresses of each kind shall be those
57 determined for concurrent arrangements of the applied load.
58
59 For members having symmetric cross sections, the fasteners and welds shall
60 be arranged symmetrically about the axis of the member, or the total stresses
61 including those due to eccentricity shall be included in the calculation of the
62 stress range.
63
64 For axially loaded angle members where the center of gravity of the con-
65 necting welds lies between the line of the center of gravity of the angle cross
66 section and the center of the connected leg, the effects of eccentricity shall
67 be ignored. If the center of gravity of the connecting welds lies outside this
68 zone, the total stresses, including those due to joint eccentricity, shall be in-
69 cluded in the calculation of stress range.
70
71 3.3.
5, EW
PLAIN MATERIAL AND WELDED JOINTS
21
72
73 In plain material and welded joints, the range of stress due to the applied
Y VI
74
20
cyclic loads shall not exceed the allowable stress range computed as follows.
75
AR E
76 (a) For stress categories A, B, B′, C, D, E and E,′ the allowable stress
U IC R
77 range, FSR, shall be determined by Equation A-3-1 or A-3-1M, as fol-

78 lows:
79
BR BL
0.333
 Cf 
80 FSR = 1, 000   ≥ FTH (A-3-1)
 nSR 
FE PU
0.333
 Cf 
81 FSR = 6 900   ≥ FTH (A-3-1M)
 nSR 
ED FT
82 where
83 Cf = constant from Table A-3.1 for the fatigue category
AT A
84 FSR = allowable stress range, ksi (MPa)

D DR
85
86 FTH = threshold allowable stress range, maximum stress range
87 for indefinite design life from Table A-3.1, ksi (MPa)
88 nSR = number of stress range fluctuations in design life
89
90 (b) For stress category F, the allowable stress range, FSR, shall be deter-
91 mined by Equation A-3-2 or A-3-2M as follows:
92
93

APP 3-3
0.167
 1.5 
94 FSR = 100   ≥ 8 ksi (A-3-2)
 nSR 
95
0.167
 1.5 
96 FSR = 690   ≥ 55 MPa (A-3-2M)
 nSR 
97
98 (c) For tension-loaded plate elements connected at their end by cruciform,
99 T or corner details with partial-joint-penetration (PJP) groove welds
100 transverse to the direction of stress, with or without reinforcing or con-
101 touring fillet welds, or if joined with only fillet welds, the allowable
102 stress range on the cross section of the tension-loaded plate element
103 shall be determined as the lesser of the following:
104
105 (1) Based upon crack initiation from the toe of the weld on the tension-
106 loaded plate element (i.e., when RPJP = 1.0), the allowable stress
107 range, FSR, shall be determined by Equation A-3-1 or A-3-1M for
108 5, EW
stress category C.
21
109
110 (2) Based upon crack initiation from the root of the weld, the allowable
Y VI
111
20
stress range, FSR, on the tension loaded plate element using trans-
AR E
112 verse PJP groove welds, with or without reinforcing or contouring

U IC R
113 fillet welds, the allowable stress range on the cross section at the
114 root of the weld shall be determined by Equation A-3-3 or A-3-3M,
115 for stress category C′ as follows:
116
BR BL
0.333
 4.4 
117 FSR = 1, 000 RPJP   (A-3-3)
FE PU
 nSR 
0.333
 4.4 
118 FSR = 6900 RPJP   (A-3-3M)
ED FT
 nSR 
119
AT A
120 where
D DR
121 RPJP, the reduction factor for reinforced or nonreinforced trans-

122 verse PJP groove welds, is determined as follows:
123
 2a  w
0.65 − 0.59   + 0.72  
124 RPJP =  tp   t p  ≤ 1.0 (A-3-4)
0.167
tp
125
 2a  w
1.12 − 1.01  + 1.24  
126 RPJP =  tp   t p  ≤ 1.0 (A-3-4M)
0.167
tp
127
128 2a = length of the nonwelded root face in the direction of
129 the thickness of the tension-loaded plate, in. (mm)
130 tp = thickness of tension loaded plate, in. (mm)
131 w = leg size of the reinforcing or contouring fillet, if any,
132 in the direction of the thickness of the tension-loaded
133 plate, in. (mm)
134

APP 3-4
135 If RPJP = 1.0, the stress range will be limited by the weld toe and
136 category C will control.
137
138 (3) Based upon crack initiation from the roots of a pair of transverse
139 fillet welds on opposite sides of the tension loaded plate element,
140 the allowable stress range, FSR, on the cross section at the root of
141 the welds shall be determined by Equation A-3-5 or A-3-5M, for
142 stress category C′′ as follows:
143
0.333
 4.4 
144 FSR = 1, 000 RFIL   (A-3-5)
 nSR 
145
0.333
 4.4 
146 FSR = 6900 RFIL   (A-3-5M)
 nSR 
147 where
148 RFIL = reduction factor for joints using a pair of transverse fillet
149 5, EW welds only
21
150
0.06 + 0.72 ( w / t p )
Y VI
151
20 =
t 0.167
≤ 1.0 (A-3-6)
p
AR E
0.103 + 1.24 ( w / t p )
U IC R
152 = ≤ 1.0 (A-3-6M)

t 0.167
p
153
154 If RFIL = 1.0, the stress range will be limited by the weld toe and
BR BL
155 category C will control.

156
FE PU
157 User Note: Stress categories C′ and C′′ are cases where the fatigue crack ini-
158 tiates in the root of the weld. These cases do not have a fatigue threshold and
159 cannot be designed for an infinite life. Infinite life can be approximated by use
ED FT
160 of a very high cycle life such as 2 × 108. Alternatively, if the size of the weld
161 is increased such that RFIL or RPJP is equal to 1.0, then the base metal controls,
AT A
162 resulting in stress category C, where there is a fatigue threshold and the crack
D DR
163 initiates at the toe of the weld.

164
165 3.4. BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS
166
167 In bolts and threaded parts, the range of stress of the applied cyclic load shall
168 not exceed the allowable stress range computed as follows.
169
170 (a) For mechanically fastened connections loaded in shear, the maximum
171 range of stress in the connected material of the applied cyclic load shall
172 not exceed the allowable stress range computed using Equation A-3-1 or
173 A-3-1M, where Cf and FTH are taken from Section 2 of Table A-3.1.
174
175 (b) For high-strength bolts, common bolts, threaded anchor rods, and hanger
176 rods with cut, ground or rolled threads, the maximum range of tensile stress
177 on the net tensile area from applied axial load and moment plus load due
178 to prying action shall not exceed the allowable stress range computed using
179 Equation A-3-1 or A-3-1M, where Cf and FTH are taken from Case 8.5
180 (stress category G). The net area in tension, At, is given by Equation A-3-
181 7 or A-3-7M.
182

APP 3-5
2
π 0.9743 
183 At =  db −  (A-3-7)
4 n 
184
π
185 At = ( d b − 0.9382 p )2 (A-3-7M)
4
186
187 where
188 db = nominal diameter (body or shank diameter), in. (mm)
189 n = threads per in. (per mm)
190 p = pitch, in. per thread (mm per thread)
191
192 For joints in which the material within the grip is not limited to steel or joints
193 that are not tensioned to the requirements of Table J3.1 or J3.1M, all axial load
194 and moment applied to the joint plus effects of any prying action shall be as-
195 sumed to be carried exclusively by the bolts or rods.
196
197 For joints in which the material within the grip is limited to steel and which
198
5, EW
are pretensioned to the requirements of Table J3.1 or J3.1M, an analysis of the
21
199 relative stiffness of the connected parts and bolts is permitted to be used to
200 determine the tensile stress range in the pretensioned bolts due to the total ap-
Y VI
201 20
plied cyclic load and moment, plus effects of any prying action. Alternatively,
202 the stress range in the bolts shall be assumed to be equal to the stress on the
AR E
203 net tensile area due to 20% of the absolute value of the applied cyclic axial
U IC R
204 load and moment from dead, live and other loads.
205
206 The following exceptions to RCSC Specification shall apply to cyclically
207 loaded connections subject to the requirements of Appendix 3:
BR BL
208
209 (a) The Engineer’s approval for thermally cut holes is not required for cycli-
FE PU
210 cally loaded slip-critical joints.

211 (b) Both pretensioned and not pretensioned bolted connections are permitted.
212 (c) Bolt net tension area is used for tension.
ED FT
213 (d) The maximum allowable stress range and stress range threshold are inde-
214 pendent of the bolt material.
AT A
215
D DR
216 3.5. FABRICATION AND ERECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR FATIGUE

217
218 Longitudinal steel backing, if used, shall be continuous. If splicing of steel
219 backing is required for long joints, the splice shall be made with a complete-
220 joint-penetration (CJP) groove weld, ground flush to permit a tight fit. If fillet
221 welds are used to attach left-in-place longitudinal backing, they shall be con-
222 tinuous.
223
224 In transverse CJP groove welded T- and corner-joints, a reinforcing fillet weld,
225 not less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) in size, shall be added at reentrant corners.
226
227 The surface roughness of thermally cut edges subject to cyclic stress ranges,
228 that include tension, shall not exceed 1,000 μin. (25 μm), where Surface Tex-
229 ture, Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay (ASME B46.1) is the reference
230 standard.
231
232 User Note: AWS C4.1 Sample 3 may be used to evaluate compliance with this
233 requirement.
234

APP 3-6
235 Reentrant corners at cuts, copes and weld access holes shall form a radius not
236 less than the prescribed radius in Table A-3.1.
237
238 For transverse butt joints in regions of tensile stress, weld tabs shall be used to
239 provide for cascading the weld termination outside the finished joint. End dams
240 shall not be used. Weld tabs shall be removed and the end of the weld finished
241 flush with the edge of the member.
242
243 Fillet welds subject to cyclic loading normal to the outstanding legs of angles
244 or on the outer edges of end plates shall have end returns around the corner for
245 a distance not less than two times the weld size; the end return distance shall
246 not exceed four times the weld size.
247
248 3.6. NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS FOR
249 FATIGUE
250
251 In the case of CJP groove welds, the maximum allowable stress range calcu-
252 lated by Equation A-3-1 or A-3-1M applies only to welds that have been ultra-
253
5, EW
sonically or radiographically tested and meet the acceptance requirements of
21
254 Structural Welding Code—Steel (AWS D1.1/D1.1M) clause 6.12.2 or clause
255 6.13.2.
Y VI
256
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

APP 3-7
257 TABLE A-3.1

258 Fatigue Design Parameters
Description Stress Constant, Threshold, Potential
Category Cf FTH, Crack
ksi Initiation Point
(MPa)
SECTION 1–PLAIN MATERIAL AWAY FROM ANY WELDING
1.1 Base metal, except non-
coated weathering steel, Away from all
with as-rolled or cleaned A 25 24 welds or struc-
surfaces; flame-cut edges (165) tural connec-
with surface roughness tions
value of 1,000 μin. (25 μm)
or less, but without reentrant
corners
1.2 Noncoated weathering
Away from all
5, EW
steel base metal with as-
rolled or cleaned surfaces; B 12 16 welds or struc-
21
flame-cut edges with sur- (110) tural connec-
face roughness value of tions
Y VI
20
1,000 μin. (25 μm) or less,
AR E
but without reentrant cor-

ners
U IC R
1.3 Members with reentrant

corners at copes, cuts, At any exter-
block-outs or other geomet- nal edge or at
BR BL
rical discontinuities, except hole perimeter

weld access holes
FE PU
R ≥ 1 in. (25 mm), with the C 4.4 10

radius, R, formed by (69)
ED FT
predrilling, subpunching
and reaming water-jet cut-
ting or thermally cutting and
AT A
grinding to a bright metal

D DR
surface
E’ 0.39 2.6 (18)
R ≥ 3/8 in. (10 mm) and the
radius, R, formed by drilling
punching, water-jet cutting,
or thermal cutting; punched
holes need not be reamed,
and thermally cut surfaces
need not be ground .

APP 3-8
1.4 Rolled cross sections At reentrant

with weld access holes corner of weld
made to requirements of access hole
Section J1.6
Access hole R ≥ 1 in. (25 C 4.4 10

mm) with radius, R, formed (69)
by predrilling, subpunching
and reaming or thermally
cut and ground to a bright
metal surface
Access hole R ≥ 3/8 in. (10 E’ 0.39 2.6

mm) and the radius, R, (18)
need not be ground to a
bright metal surface
1.5 Members with drilled or In net section
reamed holes originating at
side of the
5, EW hole
21
Holes containing preten- C 4.4 10
sioned bolts (69)
Y VI
20
D 2.2 7
Open holes without bolts
AR E
(48)
U IC R
SECTION 2–CONNECTED MATERIAL IN MECHANICALLY FASTENED JOINTS

2.1 Gross area of base
metal in lap joints connected B 12 16 Through gross
BR BL
by high-strength bolts in (110) section near

joints satisfying all require- hole
ments for slip-critical con-
FE PU
nections[a]. Holes may be

prepared by any method
permitted by this specifica-
ED FT
tion
.
AT A
2.2 Net area of base metal

D DR
in lap joints connected by In net section

high-strength bolts in joints B 12 16 originating at
satisfying all requirements (110) side of hole
for pretensioned connec-
tions.[b]
2.2 Base metal at net sec-
tion of high-strength bolted
joints, Holes may be pre-
pared by any method per-
mitted by this specifica-
tionbut thermally cut holes
shall be subject to the ap-
proval of the Engineer.
2.3 Net section of base
metal in existing riveted CD 4.42.2 107 In net section
joints 2.3 Base metal at the (6948) originating at
net section of joints with riv- side of hole
ets, snug tightened bolts or
other mechanical fasteners.
2.4 Base metal at net sec- E 1.1 4.5 In net section
tionNet section in base (31) originating at
side of hole

APP 3-9
metal of eyebar head or pin

plate connections
[a] Slip-critical connections are required by the RCSC Specification for cyclically loaded
connections where there is a reversal of loading direction [see RCSC Specification
Section 4.3(1)], and permitted for other loading conditions (see RCSC Specification
Section 4.3 Commentary). Holes may be prepared by any method permitted by this
Specification.
[b] Pretensioned connections are restricted by the RCSC Specification to cyclically
loaded connections where there is no reversal of loading direction [see RCSC Spec-
ification Section 4.2(3)]. Holes may be prepared by any method permitted by this
Specification but RCSC requires thermally cut holes to be approved by the engineer
of record (see RCSC Specification Section 3.3).
259
260
261
262 TABLE A-3.1 (continued)
263 5, EW Fatigue Design Parameters
21
264
Y VI
1.1 and 1.2 20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
1.3
FE PU
ED FT
1.4
AT A
D DR
1.5
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273

APP 3-10
274
275
276
277
278
279
2.1
2.2
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
2.3
ED FT
AT A
D DR
2.4
280
281
282

APP 3-11

284
Description Stress Constant, Thresh- Potential
Cate- Cf old, Crack
gory FTH , Initiation Point
ksi
(MPa)
SECTION 3–WELDED JOINTS JOINING COMPONENTS OF BUILT-UP MEMBERS
3.1 Base metal and weld metal From surface

in members without attach- or internal dis-
ments built up of plates or B 12 16 continuities in
shapes connected by continu- (110) weld
ous longitudinal CJP groove
welds, back gouged and
5, EW
welded from second side, or by
21
continuous fillet welds
Y VI
20
3.2 Base metal and weld metal From surface
in members without attach- or internal dis-
AR E
ments built up of plates or B′ 6.1 12 continuities in

U IC R
shapes, connected by continu- (83) weld

ous longitudinal CJP groove
welds with left-in-place continu-
ous steel backing, or by contin-
BR BL
uous PJP groove welds

FE PU
3.3 Base metal at the ends of From the weld

longitudinal welds that termi- termination
nate at weld access holes in into the web or
connected built-up members, flange
ED FT
as well as weld toes of fillet

welds that wrap around ends of
AT A
weld access holes

D DR
Access hole R ≥ 1 in. (25 mm) D 2.2 7

with radius, R, formed by (48)
predrilling, subpunching and
reaming, or thermally cut and
ground to bright metal surface
Access hole R ≥ 3/8 in. (10 mm) E’ 0.39 2.6

and the radius, R, need not be (18)
ground to a bright metal surface
3.4 Base metal at ends of longi- E 1.1 4.5 In connected

tudinal intermittent fillet weld (31) material at
segments start and stop
locations of
any weld

APP 3-12
3.5 Base metal at ends of par- In flange at toe

tial length welded coverplates of end weld (if
narrower than the flange having present) or in
square or tapered ends, with or flange at termi-
without welds across the ends nation of longi-
tudinal weld
t f ≤ 0.8 in. (20 mm)

E 1.1 4.5
(31)
t f > 0.8 in. (20 mm)
where E′ 0.39 2.6
tf = thickness of member (18)
flange, in. (mm)
3.6 Base metal at ends of par- In flange at toe
tial length welded coverplates of end weld or
or other attachments wider than in flange at ter-
5, EW
the flange with welds across the mination of
21
ends longitudinal
weld or in edge
Y VI
20
t f ≤ 0.8 in. (20 mm)
E 1.1 4.5
of flange
AR E
(31)
U IC R
t f > 0.8 in. (20 mm)

E′ 0.39 2.6
(18)
BR BL
3.7 Base metal at ends of par- In edge of

tial length welded coverplates flange at end
FE PU
wider than the flange without of coverplate

welds across the ends weld
ED FT
t f ≤ 0.8 in. (20 mm)

E′ 0.39 2.6
AT A
(18)
t f >0.8 in. (20 mm) is not per-
D DR
mitted None − −
SECTION 4–LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELDED END CONNECTIONS
4.1 Base metal at junction of ax- Initiating from

ially loaded members with lon- end of any
gitudinally welded end connec- weld termina-
tions; welds are on each side of tion extending
the axis of the member to bal- into the base
ance weld stresses metal
t ≤ 0.5 in. (13 mm)

E 1.1 4.5
(31)
t > 0.5 in. (13 mm)
E′ 0.39 2.6
where (18)
t = connected member
thickness, as shown in Case
4.1 figure, in. (mm)

APP 3-13
286
287
3.1
3.2
3.3
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
3.4
BR BL
FE PU
288
ED FT
289
290
AT A
291
D DR
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309

APP 3-14
310
3.5
3.6
3.7
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
4.1
BR BL
FE PU
311
ED FT
AT A
D DR

APP 3-15

313
Description Stress Constant, Threshold, Potential
Category Cf FTH , Crack
ksi Initiation Point
(MPa)
SECTION 5–WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS
5.1 Weld metal and base
metal in or adjacent to CJP From internal
groove welded splices in discontinuities
plate, rolled shapes, or built- B 12 16 in weld metal
up cross sections with no (110) or along the
change in cross section with fusion bound-
welds ground essentially par- ary
allel to the direction of stress
and inspected in accordance
5, EW
with Section 3.6
21
Y VI
20
groove welded splices with discontinuities
welds ground essentially par- in metal or
AR E
allel to the direction of stress along the fu-

U IC R
at transitions in thickness or sion boundary

width made on a slope no or at start of
greater than 1:2-1/2 and in- transition
spected in accordance with when Fy ≥ 90
BR BL
Section 3.6 ksi (620 MPa)

FE PU
Fy < 90 ksi (620 MPa) B 12 16

(110)
ED FT
6.1 12
AT A
Fy ≥ 90 ksi (620 MPa) B′

(83)
D DR
5.3 Base metal and weld

groove welded splices with discontinuities
welds ground essentially par- in weld metal
allel to the direction of stress B 12 16 or along the
at transitions in width made (110) fusion bound-
on a radius, R, of not less ary
than 24 in. (600 mm) with the
point of tangency at the end
of the groove weld and in-
spected in accordance with
Section 3.6

APP 3-16

metal in or adjacent to CJP From weld ex-
groove welds in T- or corner- tending into
joints or splices, without tran- C 4.4 10 base metal or
sitions in thickness or with (69) into weld
transition in thickness having metal
slopes no greater than 1:2-
1/2, when weld reinforcement
is not removed, and is in-
Section 3.6
5.5 Base metal and weld From the toe
metal in or adjacent to trans- of the groove
verse CJP groove welded weld or the
butt splices with backing left toe of the
in place weld attaching
backing when
Tack welds inside groove applicable
D 2.2 7 (48)
5, EW
Tack welds outside the E 1.1 4.5 (31)
21
groove and not closer than
1/2 in. (13 mm) to the edge
of base metal
Y VI
20
AR E
metal at transverse end con-

nections of tension-loaded
U IC R
plate elements using PJP

groove welds in butt, T- or
corner-joints, with reinforcing
BR BL
or contouring fillets; FSR shall

be the smaller of the toe
crack or root crack allowable
FE PU
stress range
Crack initiating from weld toe

ED FT
C 4.4 10 Initiating from

(69) weld toe ex-
tending into
AT A
base metal
D DR
Crack initiating from weld

root
C′ See Eq. None Initiating at
A-3-3 or weld root ex-
A-3-3M tending into
and through
weld
315

APP 3-17

318
319
5.1
5.2
5, EW
21
5.3
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
5.4
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR
320
321
322
323

APP 3-18
324
325
5.5
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
5.6
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR
326
327

APP 3-19

Description Stress Constant Thresh- Potential
Category Cf old Crack
FTH , Initiation Point
ksi
(MPa)
SECTION 5–WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS
(cont’d)

metal at transverse end con-
nections of tension-loaded
plate elements using a pair of
fillet welds on opposite sides
of the plate; FSR shall be the
5, EW
smaller of the weld toe crack
or weld root crack allowable
21
stress range
Y VI
20
Crack initiating from weld toe C 4.4 10 Initiating from
(69) weld toe ex-
AR E
tending into
U IC R
base metal
Crack initiating from weld root Initiating at

C'' See Eq. None
BR BL
A-3-5 or weld root ex-

A-3-5M tending into
FE PU
and through
weld
ED FT
5.8 Base metal of tension- C 4.4 10 From geomet-

loaded plate elements, and on (69) rical disconti-
built-up shapes and rolled nuity at toe of
AT A
beam webs or flanges at toe of fillet extending

D DR
transverse fillet welds adja- into base

cent to welded transverse stiff- metal
eners
SECTION 6–BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER

CONNECTIONS

APP 3-20
6.1 Base metal of equal or un- Near point of

equal thickness at details at- tangency of ra-
tached by CJP groove welds dius at edge of
subject to longitudinal loading member
only when the detail embodies
a transition radius, R, with the
weld termination ground
smooth and inspected in ac-
cordance with Section 3.6
R ≥ 24 in. (600 mm) 12 16

B
(110)
6 in. ≤ R < 24 in.

(150 mm ≤ R < 600 mm) C 10
4.4
(69)
5, EW
2 in. ≤ R < 6 in.
21
(50 mm ≤ R < 150 mm) D 2.2 7
(48)
Y VI
20
R < 2 in. (50 mm)
AR E
E 1.1 4.5
(31)
U IC R
330
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

APP 3-21

333
5.7
5, EW
21
Y VI
5.8
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
6.1
ED FT
AT A
D DR
334

APP 3-22
335
336
TABLE A-3.1 (continued)

Fatigue Design Parameters
Cate- Cf old Crack
ksi
(MPa)

CONNECTIONS (continued)
6.2 Base metal at details of

equal thickness attached by
CJP groove welds, subject to
transverse loading, with or with-
5, EW
out longitudinal loading, when
21
the detail embodies a transition
radius, R, with the weld termi-
Y VI
20
nation ground smooth and in-
AR E
Section 3.6
U IC R
(a) When weld reinforcement is Near point of

BR BL
removed tangency of ra-

dius or in the
B
FE PU
12 16 weld or at fu-
R ≥ 24 in. (600 mm)
(110) sion boundary
or member or
attachment
ED FT
6 in. ≤ R < 24 in.

(150 mm ≤ R < 600 mm) C 4.4 10
AT A
(69)
D DR
2 in. ≤ R < 6 in. D 2.2 7

(50 mm ≤ R < 150 mm) (48)
R < 2 in. (50 mm)

E 1.1
4.5
(31)
At toe of the
(b) When weld reinforcement is weld either
not removed along edge of
R ≥ 6 in. (150 mm) 10 member or the
C
4.4 (69) attachment
D 7
2 in. ≤ R < 6 in. (48)
2.2
(50 mm ≤ R < 150 mm)
4.5
E 1.1 (31)
R < 2 in. (50 mm)

APP 3-23
6.3 Base metal at details of un-

equal thickness attached by
CJP groove welds, subject to
transverse loading, with or with-
out longitudinal loading, when
the detail embodies a transition
radius, R, with the weld termi-
nation ground smooth and in
accordance with Section 3.6:
(a) When weld reinforcement is

removed
R > 2 in. (50 mm)

D 2.2 7 At toe of weld
(48) along edge of
thinner mate-
rial
R ≤ 2 in. (50 mm)
5, EW 1.1 In weld termi-
21
E 4.5 nation in small
(31) radius
(b) When reinforcement is not
Y VI
removed
20
AR E
Any radius
U IC R
1.1
E 4.5 At toe of weld
(31) along edge of
thinner mate-
BR BL
rial
337
FE PU
338
339
ED FT
AT A
D DR

APP 3-24

342
6.2
6.3
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
343
344
345
FE PU
346
347
ED FT
348
349
350
AT A
351
D DR
352

APP 3-25

Cate- Cf old Crack
ksi
(MPa)
CONNECTIONS (continued)
6.4 Base metal of equal or une- Initiating in
qual thickness, subject to longi- base metal at
tudinal stress at transverse the weld termi-
members, with or without trans- nation or at the
verse stress, attached by fillet toe of the weld
or PJP groove welds parallel to extending into
direction of stress when the de- the base metal
tail embodies a transition ra-
5, EW
dius, R, with weld termination
21
ground smooth
Y VI
20
R > 2 in. (50 mm)
D 2.2 7
AR E
(48)
U IC R
R ≤ 2 in. (50 mm)

E
1.1 4.5
BR BL
(31)
FE PU
SECTION 7–BASE METAL AT SHORT ATTACHMENTSa

ED FT
AT A
D DR

APP 3-26
7.1 Base metal subject to longi- Initiating in

tudinal loading at details with base metal at
welds parallel or transverse to the weld termi-
the direction of stress, with or nation or at the
without transverse load on the toe of the weld
detail, where the detail embod- extending into
ies no transition radius, R, and the base metal
with detail length, a, in direction
of stress and thickness of the
attachment, b:
a < 2 in. (50 mm) for any thick-

ness, b C 4.4 10
(69)
Align the descriptions, Ctegories, Cfs

and Fths after the chnges are acceptd
2 in. (50 mm) ≤ a ≤ 4 in. (100 7
mm) and a≤ 12b D 2.2 (48)
5, EW
21
2 in. (50 mm) ≤ a ≤ 4 in. (100
mm) and a > 12b
Y VI
20
a> 4 in. (100 mm) and b≤ 0.8
E 1.1
4.5
(31)
in. (20 mm)
AR E
U IC R
a > 4 in. (100 mm) 2.6

BR BL
0.39 (18)
and b > 0.8 in. (20 mm) E′
FE PU
7.2 Base metal subject to lon- Initiating in

gitudinal stress at details at- base metal at
ED FT
tached by fillet or PJP groove the weld termi-

welds, with or without trans- nation, extend-
verse load on detail, when the ing into the
AT A
detail embodies a transition ra- base metal

D DR
dius, R, with weld termination

ground smooth:
7
R > 2 in. (50 mm) D 2.2 (48)
4.5
E 1.1 (31)
R ≤ 2 in. (50 mm)
[a] “Attachment,” as used herein, is defined as any steel detail welded to a member that causes a deviation in
the stress flow in the member and, thus, reduces the fatigue resistance. The reduction is due to the presence
of the attachment, not due to the loading on the attachment.
355
356
357
358

APP 3-27

361
6.4
7.1
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
7.2
ED FT
AT A
D DR
362
363
364
365

APP 3-28

368

Cate- Cf old Crack
ksi
(MPa)
SECTION 8–MISCELLANEOUS
8.1 Base metal at steel headed C 4.4 10 At toe of weld

stud anchors attached by fillet (69) in base metal
weld or automatic stud welding
8.2 Shear on throat of any fillet F See Eq. See Eq. Initiating at the
5, EW
weld, continuous or intermit- A-3-2 or A-3-2 or root of the fillet
21
tent, longitudinal or transverse A-3-2M A-3-2M weld, extend-
ing into the
Y VI
20 weld
AR E
8.3 Base metal at plug or slot E 1.1 4.5 Initiating in the

U IC R
welds (31) base metal at

the end of the
plug or slot
weld, extend-
BR BL
ing into the

base metal
FE PU
8.4 Shear on plug or slot welds F See Eq. See Eq. Initiating in the
A-3-2 or A-3-2 or weld at the
A-3-2M A-3-2M faying surface,
ED FT
extending into
the weld
AT A
D DR
8.5 High-strength bolts, com- G 0.39 7 Initiating at the

mon bolts, threaded anchor (48) root of the
rods, and hanger rods, whether threads, ex-
pretensioned in accordance tending into
with Table J3.1 or J3.1M, or the fastener
snug-tightened with cut, ground
or rolled threads; stress range
on tensile stress area due to ap-
plied cyclic load plus prying ac-
tion, when applicable
369
370

APP 3-29

373
374
8.1
8.2
8.3
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
AR E
8.4
U IC R
BR BL
8.5
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR
375

APP4-1
1
2 APPENDIX 4
3
4 STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS

5
6
7 This appendix provides criteria for the design and evaluation of structural steel com-
8 ponents, systems, and frames for fire conditions. These criteria provide for the deter-
9 mination of the heat input, thermal expansion, and degradation in mechanical prop-
10 erties of materials at elevated temperatures that cause progressive decrease in strength
11 and stiffness of structural components and systems at elevated temperatures.
12
13 User Note: Throughout this chapter, the term “elevated temperatures” refers to tem-
14 peratures due to unintended fire exposure only.
15
16 5, EW
The appendix is organized as follows:
21
17
Y VI
19
20
4.2. Structural Design for Fire Conditions by Analysis
20 4.3. Design by Qualification Testing
AR E
21
U IC R
22 User Note: Appendix 4 incorporates provisions reproduced with permission from the
23 2018 International Building Code, ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation
24 Methods for Structural Fire Protection, Eurocode 3 Design of Steel Structures: Part
25 1.2: General Rules, Structural Fire Design, and Eurocode 4 Design of Composite Steel
BR BL
26 and Concrete Structures: Part 1.2: General Rules, Structural Fire Design. See the
27 Commentary to Appendix 4 for a listing of the specific provisions reproduced with
28 permission from each of these sources.
FE PU
29

ED FT
31
32 The methods contained in this appendix provide regulatory evidence of com-
AT A
33 pliance in accordance with the design applications outlined in this section.

D DR
34
35 1. Performance Objective
36
37 Structural components, members, and building frame systems shall be de-
38 signed so as to maintain their load-bearing function during the design-basis
39 fire and to satisfy other performance requirements specified for the building
40 occupancy.
41
42 Deformation criteria shall be applied where the means of providing struc-
43 tural fire resistance, or the design criteria for fire barriers, requires evaluation
44 of the deformation of the load-carrying structure.
45
46 Within the compartment of fire origin, forces and deformations from the de-
47 sign-basis fire shall not cause a breach of horizontal or vertical compartmen-
48 tation.
49
50 2. Design by Engineering Analysis
51

APP4-2
52 The analysis methods in Section 4.2 are permitted to be used to document

53 the anticipated performance of steel framing when subjected to design-basis
54 fire scenarios. Methods in Section 4.2 provide evidence of compliance with
55 performance objectives established in Section 4.1.1.
56
57 The analysis methods in Section 4.2 are permitted to be used to demonstrate
58 an equivalency for an alternative material or method, as permitted by the
59 applicable building code (ABC).
60
61 Structural design for fire conditions using Appendix 4.2 shall be performed
62 using the load and resistance factor design (LRFD) method in accordance
63 with the provisions of Section B3.1, (LRFD) unless a design based on ad-
64 vanced analysis is performed in accordance with Section 4.2.4c.. Ambient
65 resistance factors shall be used with the LRFD method.
66
67 3. Design by Qualification Testing
68
69 5, EW
The qualification testing methods in Section 4.3 are permitted to be used to
21
70 document the fire resistance of steel framing subject to the standardized fire
71 testing protocols required by the ABC.
Y VI
72 4.
20
Load Combinations and Required Strength
AR E
73
74 In the absence of ABC provisions for design under fire exposures, the re-
U IC R
75 quired strength of the structure and its elements shall be determined from
76 the gravity load combination as follows:
77
78 (0.9 or 1.2) D + AT + 0.5L + 0.2S (A-4-1)
BR BL
79
80 where
FE PU
81 AT = nominal forces and deformations due to the design-basis fire de-

82 fined in Section 4.2.1
83 D = nominal dead load
ED FT
84 L = nominal occupancy live load

85 S = nominal snow load
86
AT A
87 User Note: ASCE/SEI 7, Section 2.5, contains Equation A-4-1 this load
D DR
88 combination for extraordinary events, which includes fire. Live load reduc-
89 tion is permitted.usually considered in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7.
90
91 4.2. STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS BY ANALYSIS

92
93 It is permitted to design structural members, components, and building
94 frames for elevated temperatures in accordance with the requirements of this
95 section.
96
97 1. Design-Basis Fire
98
99 A design-basis fire shall be identified to describe the heating and cooling
100 conditions for the structure. These heating and cooling conditions shall re-
101 late to the fuel commodities and compartment characteristics present in the
102 assumed fire area. The fuel load density based on the occupancy of the space
103 shall be considered when determining the total fuel load. Heating and cool-
104 ing conditions shall be specified either in terms of a heat flux or temperature

APP4-3
105 of the upper gas layer created by the fire. The variation of the heating and
106 cooling conditions with time shall be determined for the duration of the fire.
107
108 The analysis methods in Section 4.2 shall be used in accordance with the
109 provisions for alternative materials, designs, and methods as permitted by
110 the ABC. When the analysis methods in Section 4.2 are used to demonstrate
111 equivalency to hourly ratings based on qualification testing in Section 4.3,
112 the design-basis fire shall be permitted to be determined in accordance with
113 ASTM E119 or UL 263.
114
115 1a. Localized Fire
116
117 Where the heat release rate from the fire is insufficient to cause flashover, a
118 localized fire exposure shall be assumed. In such cases, the fuel composi-
119 tion, arrangement of the fuel array, and floor area occupied by the fuel shall
120 be used to determine the radiant heat flux from the flame and smoke plume
121 to the structure.
122 5, EW
21
123 1b. Post-Flashover Compartment Fires
124
Y VI
125 20
Where the heat release rate from the fire is sufficient to cause flashover, a
126 post-flashover compartment fire shall be assumed. The determination of the
AR E
127 temperature versus time profile resulting from the fire shall include fuel
U IC R
128 load, ventilation characteristics of the space (natural and mechanical), com-
129 partment dimensions, and thermal characteristics of the compartment
130 boundary.
131
BR BL
132 The fire duration in a particular area shall be determined from the total com-
133 bustible mass, or fuel load in the space. In the case of either a localized fire
134 or a post-flashover compartment fire, the fire duration shall be determined
FE PU
135 as the total combustible mass divided by the mass loss rate.
136
137 1c. Exterior Fires
ED FT
138
139 The exposure effects of the exterior structure to flames projecting from win-
AT A
140 dows or other wall openings as a result of a post-flashover compartment fire

141 shall be addressed along with the radiation from the interior fire through the
D DR
142 opening. The shape and length of the flame projection shall be used along
143 with the distance between the flame and the exterior steelwork to determine
144 the heat flux to the steel. The method identified in Section 4.2.1b shall be
145 used for describing the characteristics of the interior compartment fire.
146
147 1d. Active Fire-Protection Systems
148
149 The effects of active fire-protection systems shall be addressed when de-
150 scribing the design-basis fire.
151
152 Where automatic smoke and heat vents are installed in nonsprinklered
153 spaces, the resulting smoke temperature shall be determined from calcula-
154 tion.
155
156 2. Temperatures in Structural Systems under Fire Conditions
157

APP4-4
158 Temperatures within structural members, components, and frames due to the
159 heating conditions posed by the design-basis fire shall be determined by a
160 heat transfer analysis.
161
162 3. Material Properties at Elevated Temperatures
163
164 The effects of elevated temperatures on the physical and mechanical prop-
165 erties of materials shall be considered in the analysis and design of structural
166 members, components and systems. Any rational method that establishes
167 material properties at elevated temperatures that is based on test data is per-
168 mitted, including the methods defined in Sections 4.2.3a, and 4.2.3b.
169
170 3a. Thermal Elongation
171
172 The coefficients of thermal expansion shall be taken as follows:
173 (a) For structural and reinforcing steels: For calculations at temperatures
174 5, EW
above 150°F (66°C), the coefficient of thermal expansion is 7.8 × 10-
21
175 6
/°F (1.4 × 10-5/oC).
Y VI
176 20
177 (b) For normal weight concrete: For calculations at temperatures above
AR E
178 150°F (66°C), the coefficient of thermal expansion is 10 × 10−6/°F (1.8

179 × 10−5/oC).
U IC R
180
181 (c) For lightweight concrete: For calculations at temperatures above
182 150°F (66°C), the coefficient of thermal expansion is 4.4 × 10−6/°F (7.9
BR BL
183 × 10−6/oC).
184
185 3b. Mechanical Properties of Structural Steel, Hot-Rolled Reinforcing
FE PU
186 Steel, and Concrete at Elevated Temperatures

187
188 The uniaxial engineering stress-strain-temperature relationship for structural
ED FT
189 steel, hot rolled reinforcing steel, and concrete shall be determined using this
190 section. This applies only to structural and reinforcing steels with a specified
AT A
191 minimum yield strength, Fy, equal to 65 ksi (450 MPa) or less, and to con-
192 crete with a specified compressive strength, f′c, equal to 8 ksi (55 MPa) or
D DR
193 less.
194
195 (a) Structural and Hot Rolled Reinforcing Steel
196 Table A-4.2.1 provides retention factors (kE, ky, and kp) for steel which
197 are expressed as the ratio of the mechanical property at elevated tem-
198 perature with respect to the property at ambient, assumed to be 68°F
199 (20°C). It is permitted to interpolate between these values. The proper-
200 ties at elevated temperature, T, and are defined as follows:
201
202 E(T) is the modulus of elasticity of steel at elevated temperature,
203 ksi (MPa), which is calculated as a ratio toas the retention factor, kE,
204 times the ambient property as specified in Table A-4.2.1.
205
206 G(T) is the shear modulus of elasticity of steel at elevated
207 temperature, ksi (MPa) , which is calculated as a ratio to the retention
208 factor, kE, times the ambient property as specified in Table A-4.2.1.
209

APP4-5
210 Fy(T) is the specified minimum yield stress of steel at elevated

211 temperature, ksi (MPa) , which is calculated as a ratio to as the reten-
212 tion factor, ky, times the ambient property as specified in Table A-
213 4.2.1.
214
215 Fp(T) is the proportional limit at elevated temperature, which is cal-
216 culated as a ratio tothe retention factor, kp, times the yield strength as
217 specified in Table A-4.2.1.
218
219 Fu(T) is the specified minimum tensile strength at elevated tempera-
220 ture, which is equal to Fy(T) for temperatures greater than 750°oF
221 (400°oC). For temperatures less than or equal to 750°F (400°C), Fu
222 may be used in place of Fu(T).
223
224 The engineering stress at elevated temperature, F(T), at each strain
225 range shall be determined as follows:
226 5, EW
(a) When in the elastic range [ε(T) ≤< εp(T)]
21
227 F(T) = E(T) ε(T) (A-4-2)[a]
Y VI
20
228 (b) When in the nonlinear range [εp(T) < ≤ ε(T) ≤ < εy(T)]
AR E
U IC R
b 2 2
229 F (T ) = Fp (T ) − c + a − ε y (T ) − ε (T )  (A-4-3)[a]
a
230
231 (c) When in the plastic range [εy(T) ≤ ε(T) ≤ εu(T)]
BR BL
232
233 F (T ) = Fy (T ) (A-4-4)[a]
FE PU
234 where
235 ε(T) = the engineering strain at elevated temperature, in./in.
ED FT
236 (m/mmm/mm)
237 εp(T) = the engineering strain at the proportional limit at elevated
AT A
238 temperature, in./in. (m/mmm/mm) = Fp(T) / E(T)

D DR
239 εy(T) = the engineering yield strain at elevated temperature, in./in.

240 (m/m) = 0.02 in./in. (m/mmm/mm)
241 εu(T) = the ultimate strain at elevated temperature, in./in. (m/m) =
242 0.15 in./in. (mm/mm)
243
 c 
244 a2 = a 2 = ε y (T ) − ε p (T )  ε y (T ) − ε p (T ) +  (A-4-5)[a]
 E ( T )
245 b 2 = E ( T )  ε y ( T ) − ε p (T )  c + c 2 (A-4-6)[a]
2
 Fy (T ) − Fp (T ) 
246 c= (A-4-7)[a]
E (T ) ε y (T ) − ε p (T )  − 2  Fy (T ) − Fp (T ) 
247
248 User Note: The equation for the plastic range conservatively neglects the
249 strain-hardening portion, but strain-hardening is permitted to be included.
a
EC4, European Committee for Standardization (CEN), Eurocode 4 Design of Com-
posite Steel and Concrete Structures: Part 1.2: General Rules, Structural Fire Design,
EN 1994-1-2, CEN, Brussels, 2005.

APP4-6
250 The plateau of the plastic range does not exceed the ultimate strain, εu(T).,
251 where εu(T) = 15%.
252
253 User Note: This section applies to structural steel materials specified in Sec-
254 tion A3.1 and to hot-rolled reinforcing steel with a specified minimum yield
255 strength, Fy, equal to 65 ksi or less., which This includes ASTM
256 A615/A615M Gr. 60 (420) and ASTM A706/A706M Gr. 60 (420) steel re-
257 inforcement.
258
259 (b) Concrete
260
261 Table A-4.2.2 provides retention factors (kc and kEc) for concrete which
262 are expressed as the ratio of the mechanical property at elevated temper-
263 ature with respect to the property at ambient, assumed to be 68°F (20°C).
264 It is permitted to interpolate between these values. For lightweight con-
265 crete, values of εcu(T) shall be obtained from tests. The properties at ele-
266 vated temperature, T, are defined as follows:
267 5, EW
21
268 Ec(T) = modulus of elasticity of concrete at elevated
269 temperature, ksi (MPa), which is calculated as the retention fac-
Y VI
270
20 tor, kEc, times the ambient property as specified in Table A-4.2.2.
271 f c′(T ) = the specified compressive strength of concrete at elevated
AR E
272 temperature, ksi (MPa), which is calculated as a ratio to the re-

U IC R
273 tention factor, kc, times the ambient property as specified in Table
274 A-4.2.2.
275 Ec(T) = the modulus of elasticity of concrete at elevated
276 temperature, ksi (MPa)
BR BL
277 εcu(T) = the concrete strain corresponding to f c′(T ) at elevated

278 temperature, in./in. (m/m), which is specified in Table A-4.2.2.
FE PU
279
280 The uniaxial stress-strain-temperature relationship for concrete in com-
281 pression is permitted to be calculated as follows:
ED FT
282
  ε (T )  
 3 c  
AT A
  εcu (T )  
Fc (T ) = fc (T ) 
D DR
283 ′ 3
(A-4-8)[a]
  εc ( T )  
2 +   
  εcu (T )  
284
285 where Fc(T) and εc(T) are the concrete compressive stress and strain, re-
286 spectively, at elevated temperature.
287
288 User Note: The tensile strength of concrete at elevated temperature can
289 be taken as zero, or not more than 10% of the compressive strength at the
290 corresponding temperature.
291
292 (c) Strengths of Bolts at Elevated Temperatures
293
294 Table A-4.2.3 provides the retention factors (kb) for high-strength bolts
295 which are is expressed as the ratio of the mechanical property at elevated
a
EC4, European Committee for Standardization (CEN), Eurocode 4 Design of Com-
posite Steel and Concrete Structures: Part 1.2: General Rules, Structural Fire Design,
EN 1994-1-2, CEN, Brussels, 2005.

APP4-7
296 temperature with respect to the property at ambient, which is assumed to be

297 68°F (20°C). The properties at elevated temperature, T, are defined as fol-
298 lows:
299
300 Fnt(T) = nominal tensile strength of the bolt, ksi (MPa), which is calcu-
301 lated as the retention factor, kb, times the ambient property as spec-
302 ified in Table A-4.2.3.
303
304 Fnv(T) = nominal shear strength of the bolt, ksi (MPa), which is calcu-
305 lated as the retention factor, kb, times the ambient property as spec-
306 ified in Table A-4.2.3.
307
TABLE A-4.2.1
Properties of Steel at Elevated Temperatures
kE = E (T ) E
Steel Temperature, kp = Fp (T ) Fy ky = Fy (T ) Fy
5, EW
ºF (ºC) = G (T ) G
21
68 (20) 1.00 1.00 1.00
200 (93) 1.00 1.00 1.00
Y VI
400 (200)
20 0.90 0.80 1.00
600 (320) 0.78 0.58 1.00
750 (400) 0.70 0.42 1.00
AR E
800 (430) 0.67 0.40 0.94

U IC R
1000 (540) 0.49 0.29 0.66

1200 (650) 0.22 0.13 0.35
1400 (760) 0.11 0.06 0.16
1600 (870) 0.07 0.04 0.07
1800 (980) 0.05 0.03 0.04
BR BL
2000 (1100) 0.02 0.01 0.02

2200 (1200) 0.00 0.00 0.00
308
FE PU
TABLE A-4.2.2
Properties of Concrete at Elevated Temperatures
ED FT
Concrete kc = fc′ (T ) fc′ εcu(T),, in./in.

Temperature, (mm/mm)
ºF (ºC) %
AT A
Normal Weight Lightweight Normal Weight

Concrete Concrete kEc = Ec (T ) Ec Concrete
D DR
68 (20) 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0025

200 (93) 0.95 1.00 0.93 0.0034
400 (200) 0.90 1.00 0.75 0.0046
550 (290) 0.86 1.00 0.61 0.0058
600 (320) 0.83 0.98 0.57 0.0062
800 (430) 0.71 0.85 0.38 0.0080
1000 (540) 0.54 0.71 0.20 1.060.0106
1200 (650) 0.38 0.58 0.092 1.320.0132
1400 (760) 0.21 0.45 0.073 1.430.0143
1600 (870) 0.10 0.31 0.055 1.490.0149
1800 (980) 0.05 0.18 0.036 1.500.0150
2000 (1100) 0.01 0.05 0.018 1.500.0150
2200 (1200) 0.00 0.00 0.000 0.0000
309
310

APP4-8
311
TABLE A-4.2.3
Properties of Group 120 and Group 150 High-
Strength Bolts at Elevated Temperatures
Bolt Temperature, kb = Fnt(T) / Fnt
°F (°C) = Fnv(T) / Fnv
Fnt (T ) Fnt or Fnv (T ) Fnv
68 (20) 1.00
200 (93) 0.97
300 (150) 0.95
400 (200) 0.93
600 (320) 0.88
800 (430) 0.71
900 (480) 0.59
1000 (540) 0.42
1200 (650) 0.16
5, EW
1400 (760) 0.08
21
1600 (870) 0.04
1800 (980) 0.01
Y VI
20
2000 (1100) 0.00
312
AR E
313 4. Structural Design Requirements

U IC R
314
315 4a. General Requirements
316
317 The structural frame and foundation shall be capable of providing the
BR BL
318 strength and deformation capacity to withstand, as a system, the structural

319 actions developed during the fire within the prescribed limits of deformation.
320 The structural system shall be designed to sustain local damage with the
FE PU
321 structural system as a whole remaining stable. Frame stability and required
322 strength shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of Section
323 C1.
ED FT
324
325 Continuous load paths shall be provided to transfer all forces from the ex-
AT A
326 posed region to the final point of resistance.

327
D DR
328 The size and spacing of vent holes in concrete-filled composite members
329 shall be evaluated such that no applicable strength limit states in the steel
330 elements are exceeded due to the build-up of steam pressureThe requirement
331 for steam vent holes in concrete-filled composite members shall be evalu-
332 ated. Any rational method that considers heat transfer through the cross sec-
333 tion, water content in concrete, fire protection, and the allowable pressure
334 build up in the member is permitted for calculating the size and spacing of
335 vent holes.
336
337 User Note: Section 4.3.2.2.14.3.2b(a) provides a possible vent hole config-
338 uration for concrete-filled columns.
339
340 4b. Strength Requirements and Deformation Limits
341
342 Conformance of the structural system to these requirements shall be demon-
343 strated by constructing a mathematical model of the structure based on prin-
344 ciples of structural mechanics and evaluating this model for the internal
345 forces and deformations in the members of the structure developed by the
346 temperatures from the design-basis fire.

APP4-9
347
348 Individual members shall have the design strength necessary to resist the
349 shears, axial forces and moments determined in accordance with these pro-
350 visions.
351
352 Connections Structural components shall be designed and detailed to resist
353 the imposed loading and deformation demands during a design-basis fire as
354 required to meet the performance objectives stated in Section 4.1.1. Where
355 the means of providing fire resistance requires the evaluation of deformation
356 criteria, the deformation of the structural system, or members thereof, under
357 the design-basis fire shall not exceed the prescribed limits.
358
359 User Note: Typical simple shear connections may need additional design
360 enhancements for ductility and resistance to large compression and tensile
361 forces that may develop during the design-basis fire exposure. A fire expo-
362 sure will not only affect the magnitude of member end reactions, but may
363 also change the limit state to one nature of the reaction to a limit state dif-
364 5, EW
ferent from the controlling mode at ambient temperature.
21
365
366 It shall be permitted to include membrane action of composite floor slabs for
Y VI
367 20
fire resistance if the design provides for the effects of increased connection
368 tensile forces and redistributed gravity load demands on the adjacent fram-
AR E
369 ing supports.

U IC R
370
371 4c. Design by Advanced Methods of Analysis
372
373 Design by advanced methods of analysis is permitted for the design of all
BR BL
374 steel building structures for fire conditions. The design-basis fire exposure
375 shall be that determined in Section 4.2.1. The analysis shall include both a
376 thermal response and the mechanical response to the design-basis fire.
FE PU
377
378 The thermal response shall produce a temperature field in each structural
379 element as a result of the design-basis fire and shall incorporate temperature-
ED FT
380 dependent thermal properties of the structural elements and fire-resistive

381 materials, as per Section 4.2.2.
AT A
382
383 The mechanical response results inshall include the forces and deformations
D DR
384 in the structural system due to the thermal response calculated from the
385 design-basis fire. The mechanical response shall take into account explicitly
386 the deterioration in strength and stiffness with increasing temperature, the
387 effects of thermal expansions, inelastic behavior and load redistribution,
388 large deformations, time-dependent effects such as creep, and uncertainties
389 resulting from variability in material properties at elevated temperature.
390 Support and restraint conditions (forces, moments, and boundary conditions)
391 shall represent the behavior of the structure during a design-basis fire.
392 Material properties shall be defined as per Section 4.2.3.
393
394 The resulting analysis shall address all relevant limit states, such as
395 excessive deflections, connection ruptures, and global or and local buckling
396 and shall demonstrate an adequate level of safety as required by the authority
397 having jurisdiction.
398
399 4d. Design by Simple Methods of Analysis
400

APP4-10
401 The methods of analysis in this section are permitted to be used for the eval-
402 uation of the performance of individual members structural components and
403 frames at elevated temperatures during exposure to a design-basis fire.
404
405 When evaluating individual membersstructural components, the support
406 stiffnesses and restraintboundary conditions (forces, moments and boundary
407 conditions) applicable at normal ambient temperatures are permitted to be
408 assumed to remain unchanged throughout the fire exposure for the calcula-
409 tion of required strengths.
410
411 For evaluating the performance of structural frames during exposure to a
412 design-basis fire, member demands (forces and moments)the required
413 strengths are also permitted to be determined through consideration of re-
414 duced stiffness at elevated temperatures, appropriate boundary conditions,
415 and thermal deformations.
416
417 User Note: Determining the required strength assuming ambient tempera-
418 5, EW
tures throughout the fire exposure is generally applicable to members in reg-
21
419 ular gravity frames. Determining the required strength accounting for ele-
420 vated temperatures may be more appropriate for irregular structural frames.
Y VI
421 20
422
AR E
423 The design strength shall be determined as in Section B3.1. The nominal
U IC R
424 strength, Rn, shall be calculated using material properties, as provided in

425 Section 4.2.3b, at the temperature developed by the design-basis fire and as
426 stipulated in Sections 4.2.4d(a) through (fh).
427
BR BL
428
429 The simple method is only applicable to members not governed by local
430 buckling or sized such that local buckling is not a consideration.
FE PU
431
432 It is permitted to model the thermal response of steel and composite mem-
433 bers using a lumped heat capacity analysis with heat input as determined by
ED FT
434 the design-basis fire defined in Section 4.2.1, using the temperature equal to
435 the maximum steel temperature. For composite beams, the maximum steel
AT A
436 temperature shall be assigned to the bottom flange and a temperature gradi-
437 ent shall be applied to incorporate thermally induced moments, as stipulated
D DR
438 in Section 4.2.4d(f) .

439
440 For steel temperatures less than or equal to 400°F (200°C), the member and
441 connection design strengths areis permitted to be determined without con-
442 sideration of temperature effects on the nominal strengths.
443
444 The design strength shall be determined as in Section B3.1. The nominal
445 strength, Rn, shall be calculated using material properties, as provided in
446 Section 4.2.3b, at the temperature developed by the design-basis fire and as
447 stipulated in Sections 4.2.4d(a) through (f).
448
449 User Note: Lumped heat capacity analysis assumes uniform temperature
450 over the section and length of the member, which is generally a reasonable
451 assumption for many structural members exposed to post-flashover fires.
452 Consideration should be given to the use of the uniform temperature assump-
453 tion as it may not always be applicable or conservative.
454
455 The simple methods of analysis are not intended for temperatures below
456 400°F (200°C). The nominal strengths for temperatures below 400°F

APP4-11
457 (200°C) should be calculated without any consideration of temperature ef-

458 fects on material properties or member behavior.
459
460 At temperatures below 400°F (200°C), the reduction in steel properties need
461 not be considered in calculating member strengths despite small reductions
462 in material properties in Table A-4.2.1. This is a simplifying assumption
463 used only in the simple method of analysis.
464
465 (a) Design for Tension
466
467 The nominal strength for tension shall be determined using the provi-
468 sions of Chapter D, with steel properties as stipulated in Section
469 4.2.3b(a) and assuming a uniform temperature over the cross section
470 using the temperature equal to the maximum steel temperature.
471
472 (b) Design for Compression
473
474 5, EW
For nonslender-element columns, the nominal strength for flexural
21
475 buckling of compression members shall be determined using the provi-
476 sions of Chapter E with steel properties as stipulated in Section
Y VI
477 20
4.2.3b(a). Equation A-4-9 shall be used in lieu of Equations E3-2 and
478 E3-3 to calculate the nominal compressive strength for flexural buck-
AR E
479 ling:
U IC R
 Fy (T )   Fy (T )  Field Code Changed

 F (T ) 
480 Fcr (T ) = 0.42 e  Fy (T ) Fn (T ) = 0.42 Fe (T )  Fy (T ) (A-4-9)
 
   
BR BL
481
482 where Fy(T) is the yield stress at elevated temperature and Fe(T) is the
FE PU
483 critical elastic buckling stress calculated from Equation E3-4 with the
484 elastic modulus, E(T), at elevated temperature. Fy(T) and E(T) are ob-
485 tained using coefficients from Table A-4.2.1.
486
ED FT
487 The strength of leaning (gravity)gravity only columns that do not pro-
488 vide resistance to lateral loads may is permitted to be increased by the
AT A
489 rotational restraints from cooler columns in the stories above and below
D DR
490 the story exposed to the fire. This increased strength applies to fires on
491 only one floor and should not be used for multiple story fires. It is per-
492 mitted to account for the increase in design strength by reducing the
493 column slenderness, The increase in design strength can be accounted
494 for by reducing the column slenderness ( Lc r ), used to calculate
495 Fe (T ) in Equation A-4-9 to ( Lc r )T Lc(T)/r as follows:
496
 Lc   T − 32   Lc  35
497   = 1 −    − (T − 32) ≥ 0
 r T  n ( 3,600)   r  n ( 3,600)
Lc ( T )  T − 32  Lc 35 Field Code Changed
498 = 1 −  − (T − 32 ) ≥ 0 (oF) (A-4-10)
r  n ( 3, 600 )  r n ( 3, 600 )
499
 Lc   T   Lc  35T
500   = 1 −    − ≥0
 r T  n ( 2,000)   r  n ( 2,000)

APP4-12
Lc (T )  T  Lc 35T Field Code Changed

501 = 1 −  − ≥ 0 (oC) (A-4-10M)
r  n ( 2, 000 )  r n ( 000 )
2,
502
503 where
505 Lc = KL = effective length of member, in. (mm)
509 T = steel temperature, oF , (oC)
510 n = 1 for columns with cooler columns both above and below
511 n = 2 for columns with cooler columns either above or below
512 only
514
515 User Note: The design equations for compression predict flexural
516 5, EW
buckling capacities of wide flange rolled shapes, but do not consider
21
517 local buckling and torsional buckling. If applicable, these additional
518 limit states must be considered with an alternative method. For most fire
Y VI
519
20
conditions, uniform heating and temperatures govern the design for
520 compression. When uniform heating is not a reasonable assumption,
AR E
521 alternative methods must be used to account for the effects of nonuni-
U IC R
522 form heating and resulting thermal gradients on the design strength of
523 compression members, as the simple method assumes a uniform tem-
524 perature distribution..
525
BR BL
526 (c) Design for Compression in Concrete-Filled Composite Columns

527
FE PU
528 For concrete-filled composite columns, the nominal strength for com-
529 pression shall be determined using the provisions of Section I2.2 with
530 steel and concrete properties as stipulated in Section 4.2.3b. Equation
531 A-4-11 shall be used in lieu of Equations I2-2 and I2-3 to calculate the
ED FT
532 nominal compressive strength for flexural buckling:

533
AT A
( ) .
534 𝑃 (𝑇) = 0.45 ( ) 𝑃 (𝑇)

D DR
  Pno (T )  
0.3
Field Code Changed
 
 
535 Pn ( T ) = 0.54 Pe (T )   Pno ( T ) (A-4-11)
 
 
536
537 where Pno(T) is calculated at elevated temperature using Equations I2-
538 9, I2-10, and I2-11, and I2-12. Pe(T) is calculated at elevated tempera-
539 ture using Equations I2-5., I2-13, and I2-14. EIeff(T) is calculated at el-
540 evated temperature using Equations I2-12 and I2-13. Fy(T), f’c(T), Es(T),
541 and Ec(T) are obtained using coefficients from Tables A-4.2.1 and A-
542 4.2.2.
543
544 (d) Design for Compression in Concrete-Filled Composite Plate Shear
545 Walls
546
547 For concrete-filled composite plate shear walls, the nominal strength for
548 compression shall be determined using the provisions of Section I2.3
549 with steel and concrete properties as stipulated in Section A-4.2.3b and

APP4-13
550 Equation A-4-12 used in lieu of Equations I2-2 and I2-3 to calculate the
551 nominal compressive strength for flexural buckling:
552
  Pno (T )  
0.3
  
 Pe (T )  
553 Pn ( T ) = 0.32 
 Pno (T ) (A-4-12)
 
 
554
555 where Pno(T) is calculated at elevated temperature using Equation I2-
556 15616. Pe(T) is calculated at elevated temperature using Equations I2-
557 5. and I1-1. EIeff(T) is calculated at elevated temperatures using Equa-
558 tion I1-1. Fy(T), f′c(Tc), Es(T), and Ec(Tc) are obtained using coefficients
559 from Tables A-4.2.1 and A-4.2.2.
560
561 User Note: For composite members, the steel temperature is deter-
562 mined using heat transfer equations with heat input corresponding to the
563 design-basis fire. The temperature distribution in concrete infill can be
564 5, EW
calculated using one- or two-dimensional heat transfer equations. The
21
565 regions of concrete infill will have varying temperatures and mechani-
566 cal properties. Concrete contribution to axial strength and effective stiff-
Y VI
567
20
ness can therefore be calculated by discretizing the cross-section into
568 smaller elements (with each concrete element considered to have a uni-
AR E
569 form temperature) and summing up the contribution of individual ele-

U IC R
570 ments.
571
572 (e) Design for Flexure
573
BR BL
574 For steel beams, the temperature over the depth of the member shall be
575 taken as the temperature calculated for the bottom flange.calculated bot-
FE PU
576 tom flange temperature shall be constant over the depth of the member.
577
578 (1) The nominal strength for flexure shall be determined using the pro-
579 visions of Chapter F with steel properties as stipulated in Section
ED FT
580 4.2.3b(b). Equations A-4-13 through A-4-19 shall be used in lieu

581 of Equations F2-2 through F2-6 to calculate the nominal flexural
AT A
582 strength for lateral-torsional buckling of doubly symmetric com-

D DR
583 pact rolled wide-flange shapes bent about their major axis: When
584 Lb ≤ Lr ( T )
585
  Lb 
cx 
 
586 M n ( T ) = Cb  FL ( T ) S x +  M p (T ) − FL ( T ) S x  1 −   ≤ M p (T )
  Lr (T )  
587 (A-4-13)
588 (2) When Lb > Lr (T )
589 Mn (T ) = Fcr (T )Sx ≤ M p (T ) (A-4-14)
590 where

APP4-14
2
Cb π2 E (T ) Jc  Lb 
591 Fcr (T ) = 1 + 0.078 (A-4-15)
 Lb 
2
S x ho  rts 
r 
 ts 
2 2
E (T ) Jc  Jc   FL (T ) 
592 Lr (T ) = 1.95 rts +   + 6.76  E (T ) 
FL (T ) S x ho  S x ho   
593 (A-4-16)
594 FL (T ) = Fy ( kp − 0.3ky ) (A-4-17)
595 M p (T ) = Fy (T ) Z x (A-4-18)
T
596 c x = 0.53 + ≤ 3.0 where T is in °F (A-4-19)
450
T
597
5, EW
c x = 0.6 +
250
≤ 3.0 where T is in °C (A-4-19M)
21
598 and
Y VI
599 20
T = elevated temperature of steel due to unintended fire exposure, °F
600 (°C)
AR E
601
U IC R
602 The material properties at elevated temperatures, E(T) and Fy(T), and
603 the retention factors, kp and ky ,coefficients are calculated in accord-
604 ance with Table A-4.2.1, and other terms are as defined in Chapter F.
BR BL
605
606 User Note: FL(T) represents the initial yield stress, which assumes a
607 residual stress of 0.3Fy. Alternatively, 10 ksi (69 MPa) may be used in
FE PU
608 place of 0.3Fy for calculation of FL(T).

609
610 User Note: The equations for lateral-torsional buckling do not consider
ED FT
611 local buckling. If applicable, the effects of local buckling must be con-
612 sidered with an alternative method.
613
AT A
614 (f) Design for Flexure in Composite Beams

D DR
615
616 For composite beams, the calculated bottom flange temperature shall be
617 taken as constant between the bottom flange and mid-depth of the web
618 and shall decrease linearly by no more than 25% from the mid-depth of
619 the web to the top flange of the beam.
620
621 The nominal strength of a composite flexural member shall be deter-
622 mined using the provisions of Chapter I, with reduced yield stresses in
623 the steel as determined from Table A-4.2.1. Steel properties will vary as
624 the temperature along the depth of section changes.
625
626 Alternatively, the nominal flexural strength of a composite beam,
627 Mn (T ) , is permitted to be calculated using the bottom flange temper-
628 ature, T, as follows:
629 Mn (T ) = r (T ) Mn M n (T ) = kcb M n (A-4-20) Field Code Changed
630
631 where,

APP4-15
632 M n = nominal flexural strength at ambient temperature calculated

633 in accordance with provisions of Chapter I, kip-in. (N-mm)
634 r(T)kcb = retention factor depending on bottom flange temperature,
635 T, as given in Table A-4.2.4
636
TABLE A-4.2.4
Retention Factor for Composite
Flexural MembersFlexure in Composite Beams
Bottom Flange Temperature,
°F (°C) r(T)kcb = Mn(T) / Mn
68 (20) 1.00
300 (150) 0.98
600 (320) 0.95
800 (430) 0.89
1000 (540) 0.71
1200 (650) 0.49
5, EW
1400 (760) 0.26
21
1600 (870) 0.12
1800 (980) 0.05
2000 (1100) 0.00
Y VI
637
20
638 (g) Design for Shear
AR E
639
U IC R
640 The nominal strength for shear yielding shall be determined in accord-
641 ance with the provisions of Chapter G, with steel properties as stipulated
642 in Section 4.2.3b(a) and assuming a uniform temperature over the cross
643 section.
BR BL
644
645 User Note: Shear yielding equations do not consider shear buckling or
FE PU
646 tension field action. If applicable, these limit states must be considered
647 with an alternative method.
648
ED FT
649 (h) Design for Combined Forces and Torsion

650
651 The nominal strength for combinations of axial force and flexure about one
AT A
652 or both axes, with or without torsion, shall be in accordance with the provi-
D DR
653 sions of Chapter H with the design axial and flexural strengths as stipulated
654 in Sections 4.2.4d(a),(b), (e), and (g) to (d). Nominal strength for torsion
655 shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Chapter H, with the
656 steel properties as stipulated in Section 4.2.3b(a), assuming uniform temper-
657 ature over the cross section.
658
659 4e. Design by Critical Temperature Method
660
661 The critical temperature of a structural member is the temperature at which
662 the demand on the member exceeds its capacity under fire conditions. The
663 temperature of a loaded structural member exposed to fire shall not exceed
664 the critical temperature as calculated in this section. The evaluation methods
665 in this section are permitted to be used in lieu of Section 4.2.4d for tension
666 members, continuously braced beams not supporting concrete slabs, or com-
667 pression members that are assumed to be simply supported and develop a
668 uniform temperature over the cross section throughout the fire exposure.
669

APP4-16
670 The use of the critical temperature methods shall be limited to steel members
671 with wide-flange rolled shapes that have nonslender elements per Section
672 B4.
673
674 (a) Design for Tensile Yielding
675
676 The critical temperature of a tension member is permitted to be calcu-
677 lated as follows:
678
R 
679 Tcr = 816 − 306ln  u  in °F (A-4-21)
 Rn 
R 
680 Tcr = 435 − 170ln  u  in°C (A-4-21M)
 Rn 
681 where
682 Tcr = critical temperature in °F (°C)
683
5, EW
Rn = nominal yielding strength at ambient temperature determined in
21
684 accordance with the provisions in Section D2, kips (N)
685 Ru = required tensile strength at elevated temperature, determined us-
686 ing the load combination in Equation A-4-1 and greater than
Y VI
687
20
0.01Rn, kips (N)
AR E

689
U IC R
690 User Note: Tensile rupture in the net section is not considered in this
691 critical temperature calculation. and ought to It can be considered using
692 an alternative methods.
693
BR BL
694 (b) Design for Compression

695
FE PU
696 The critical temperature of a compression member for flexural buckling

697 is permitted to be calculated as follows:
698
ED FT
L  P 
699 Tcr = 1580 − 0.814  c  − 1300  u  in °F (A-4-22)
 r   Pn 
AT A
L  P 
Tcr = 858 − 0.455  c  − 722  u  in °C
D DR
700 (A-4-22M)
 r   Pn 
701
702 where
703 Lc = effective length of member, in. (mm)
705 Pn = nominal compressive strength at ambient temperature deter-
706 mined in accordance with the provisions in Section E3, kips (N)
707 Pu = required compressive strength at elevated temperature, deter-
708 mined using the load combination in Equation A-4-1, kips (N)
710
711 (c) Design for Flexural Yielding
712
713 The critical temperature of a continuously braced beam not supporting
714 a concrete slab is permitted to be calculated as follows:
715
M 
716 Tcr = 816 − 306ln  u  in °F (A-4-23)
 Mn 

APP4-17
717
M 
718 Tcr = 435 − 170ln  u  in °C (A-4-23M)
 Mn 
719
720 where
722 Mn = nominal flexural strength due to yielding at ambient temperature
723 determined in accordance with the provisions in Section F2.1,
724 kip-in. (N-mm)
725 Mu = required flexural strength at elevated temperature, determined
726 using the load combination in Equation A-4-1, kip-in. and
727 greater than 0.01Mn (N-mm)
729
730 User Note: Lateral-torsional buckling of beams is not considered in
731 this critical temperature calculation. It can and ought to be considered
732
5, EW
using an alternative methods.
21
733 4.3. DESIGN BY QUALIFICATION TESTING
Y VI
734
20
735 1. Qualification Standards
AR E
736
U IC R
737 Structural members and components in steel buildings shall be qualified for
738 the rating period in conformance with ASTM E119 or UL 263. Demonstra-
739 tion of compliance with these requirements using the procedures specified
740 for steel construction in Section 5 of Standard Calculation Methods for
BR BL
741 Structural Fire Protection (ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29) is permitted. It is also per-

742 mitted to demonstrate equivalency to such standard fire resistance ratings
743 using the advanced analysis methods in Section 4.2 in combination with the
FE PU
744 fire exposure specified in ASTM E119 or UL 263 as the design-basis fire.
745
746
ED FT
747 User Note: There are other standard fire exposures which are more severe
748 than that prescribed in ASTM E119, for example the hydrocarbon pool fire
AT A
749 scenario defined in ASTM E1529 (UL 1709). Fire resistance ratings devel-
750 oped on the basis of ASTM E119 are not directly substitutable for such more
D DR
751 demanding conditions.

752
753 The generic steel assemblies described in Table A-4.3.1 shall be deemed to
754 have the fire resistance ratings prescribed therein.
755
756
757

APP4-18
758
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Rat-
ings of Steel Assembliese
Minimum Thickness (in.) of In-
Item Fire Protection Material sulating Material for Fire-Re-
Assembly
Number Used sistance Times (hr)
4 hrs 3 hrs 2 hrs 1 hr
1. Steel col- Carbonate, lightweight and
umns and all sand-lightweight aggregate
of primary concrete, members 6 in. × 6
1-1.1 2-1/2 2 1-1/2 1
trusses in. or greater (not including
sandstone, granite and sili-
ceous gravel).a
Carbonate, lightweight and
sand-lightweight aggregate
concrete, members 8 in. × 8
1-1.2 2 1-1/2 1 1
in. or greater (not including
5, EW sandstone, granite and sili-

ceous gravel).a
21
Carbonate, lightweight and
sand-lightweight aggregate
Y VI
20 concrete, members 12 in. ×
1-1.3 1-1/2 1 1 1
12 in. or greater (not includ-
ing sandstone, granite and si-
AR E
liceous gravel).a
U IC R
Siliceous aggregate concrete

and concrete excluded in
1-1.4 3 2 1-1/2 1
Item 1-1.1, members 6 in. × 6
in. or greater.a
BR BL

1-1.5 2-1/2 2 1 1
Item 1-1.1, members 8 in.× 8
in.or greater.a
FE PU

1-1.6 2 1 1 1
Item 1-1.1, members 12 in.×
12 in or greater.a
ED FT
Clay or shale brick with brick

1-2.1 3-3/4 – – 2-1/4
and mortar fill.a
Cement plaster over metal
AT A
lath wire tied to 3/4 in. cold-

rolled vertical channels with
D DR
2-
1-4.1 0.049 in. (No. 18 B.W. gage) – – 7/8
1/2b
wire ties spaced 3 to 6 in. on
center. Plaster mixed 1:2.5
by volume, cement to sand.
759
a
ICC IBC-2018 International Building Code, International Code Council.

APP4-19
Table A-4.3.1[a]
ings of Steel Assembliese (continued)
Minimum Thickness (in.) of
Item Fire Protection Material Insulating Material for Fire-
Assembly
Number Used Resistance Times (hr.)
1. Steel col- Vermiculite concrete, 1:4 mix
umns and all by volume over paperbacked
of primary wire fabric lath wrapped di-
trusses rectly around column with ad-
ditional 2 × 2 in. 0.065 / 0.065
in. (No. 16/16 B.W. gage)
1-5.1 wire fabric placed 3/4 in. from 2 – – –
outer concrete surface. Wire
fabric tied with 0.049 in. (No.
18 B.W. gage) wire spaced 6
in. on center for inner layer
and 2 in. on center for outer
5, EW layer.
21
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum
plaster over metal lath
wrapped around column and
Y VI
20 1-6.1
furred 1-1/4 in. from column
flanges. Sheets lapped at 1-1/2 1 – –
AR E
ends and tied at 6 in. inter-

vals with 0.049 in. (No. 18
U IC R
B.W. gage) tie wire. Plaster

pushed through to flanges.
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum 1-3/4 1-3/8 1 –
plaster over self-furring metal
lath wrapped directly around
BR BL
1-6.2
column, lapped 1 in. and tied
at 6 in. intervals with 0.049 in.
(No. 18 B.W. gage) wire.
FE PU
Perlite or vermiculite gypsum 1-1/2 – – –

plaster on metal lath applied
to 3/4 in. cold-rolled channels
1-6.3
spaced 24 in. apart vertically
ED FT
and wrapped flatwise around

column.
AT A
760
D DR
761
a

APP4-20
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Assembly
1. Steel col- 1-6.4 Perlite or vermiculite gypsum 2-1/2 2 – –
umns and all plaster over two layers of 1/2
of primary in. plain full-length gypsum
trusses lath applied tight to column
flanges. Lath wrapped with 1
in. hexagonal mesh of No. 20
gage wire and tied with dou-
bled 0.035 in. diameter (No.
18 B.W. gage) wire ties
spaced 23 in. on center. For
three-coat work, the plaster
mix for the second coat shall
5, EW not exceed 100 pounds of
21
gypsum to 2.5 cubic feet of
aggregate for the 3-hour sys-
tem.
Y VI
20 1-6.5 Perlite or vermiculite gypsum
plaster over one layer of 1/2
– 2 – –
AR E
in. plain full-length gypsum

lath applied tight to column
U IC R
flanges. Lath tied with dou-

bled 0.049 in. (No. 18 B.W.
gage) wire ties spaced 23 in.
on center and scratch coat
wrapped with 1 in. hexagonal
BR BL
mesh 0.035 in. (No. 20 B.W.

gage) wire fabric. For three-
coat work, the plaster mix for
FE PU
the second coat shall not ex-

ceed 100 pounds of gypsum
to 2.5 cubic feet of aggre-
gate.
ED FT
762
763
AT A
D DR
a

APP4-21
764
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Assembly
1. Steel col- 1-7.1 Multiple layers of 1/2 in. gyp- – – 2 1
umns and all sum wallboardc adhesivelyd
of primary secured to column flanges
trusses and successive layers. Wall-
board applied without hori-
zontal joints. Corner edges of
each layer staggered. Wall-
board layer below outer layer
secured to column with dou-
bled 0.049 in. (No. 18 B.W.
gage) steel wire ties spaced
5, EW 15 in. on center. Exposed
21
corners taped and treated.
1-7.2 Three layers of 5/8 in. Type X – – 1-7/8 –
gypsum wallboard.c First and
Y VI
20 second layer held in place by
1/8 in. dia. by 1-3/8 in. long
AR E
ring shank nails with 5/16 in.

U IC R
dia. heads spaced 24 in. on

center at corners. Middle
layer also secured with metal
straps at mid-height and 18
in. from each end, and by
BR BL
metal corner bead at each

corner held by the metal
straps. Third layer attached
FE PU
to corner bead with 1 in. long

gypsum wallboard screws
spaced 12 in. on center.
765
ED FT
766
AT A
D DR
a

APP4-22
767
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Assembly
1. Steel col- 1-7.3 Three layers of 5/8 in. Type X – 1-7/8 – –
umns and all gypsum wallboard,c each
of primary layer screw attached to 1-5/8
trusses in. steel studs, 0.018 in. thick
(No. 25 carbon sheet steel
gage) at each corner of col-
umn. Middle layer also se-
cured with 0.049 in. (No. 18
B.W. gage) double-strand
steel wire ties, 24 in. on cen-
ter. Screws are No. 6 by 1 in.
5, EW spaced 24 in. on center for in-
21
ner layer, No. 6 by 1-5/8 in.
spaced 12 in. on center for
middle layer and No. 8 by 2-
Y VI
20 1/4 in. spaced 12 in. on cen-
ter for outer layer.
AR E
768
U IC R
769
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR
a

APP4-23
770
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Assembly
Number Used sistance Times (hr.)
1. Steel col- 1-9.1 Minimum W8×35 wide flange – – – See
umns and all steel column (w/d ≥ 0.75) Note f
of primary with each web cavity filled
trusses even with the flange tip with
normal weight carbonate or
siliceous aggregate concrete
(3,000 psi minimum com-
pressive strength with 145
pcf ± 3 pcf unit weight). Rein-
force the concrete in each
web cavity with minimum No.
5, EW 4 deformed reinforcing bar in-
21
stalled vertically and cen-
tered in the cavity, and se-
Y VI
20 cured to the column web with
minimum No. 2 horizontal de-
formed reinforcing bar
AR E
welded to the web every 18

U IC R
in. on center vertically. As an

alternative to the No. 4 rebar,
3/4 in. diameter by 3 in. long
headed studs, spaced at 12
in. on center vertically, shall
BR BL
be welded on each side of

the web midway between the
column flanges.
FE PU
2. Webs or 2.1-1 Carbonate, lightweight and 2 1-1/2 1 1

flanges of sand-lightweight aggregate
steel beams concrete (not including sand-
and girders stone, granite and siliceous
ED FT
gravel) with 3 in. or finer

metal mesh placed 1 in. from
the finished surface an-
AT A
chored to the top flange and

providing not less than 0.025
D DR
in.2 of steel area per foot in

each direction.
771
772
a

APP4-24
773
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Assembly
Number Used sistance Times (hr.)
2. Webs or 2-1.2 Siliceous aggregate concrete 2-1/2 2 1-1/2 1
flanges of and concrete excluded in
steel beams Item 2-1.1 with 3 in. or finer
and girders metal mesh placed 1 in. from
the finished surface an-
chored to the top flange and
providing not less than 0.025
in.2 of steel area per foot in
each direction.
2-2.1 Cement plaster on metal lath – – 2-1/2b 7/8
attached to 3/4 in. cold-rolled
5, EW channels with 0.04 in. (No. 18
21
B.W. gage) wire ties spaced
3 in. to 6 in. on center. Plaster
Y VI
20 mixed 1:2.5 by volume, ce-
ment to sand.
2-3.1 Vermiculite gypsum plaster – 7/8 – –
AR E
on a metal lath cage, wire

U IC R
tied to 0.165 in. diameter (No.

8 B.W. gage) steel wire hang-
ers wrapped around beam
and spaced 16 in. on center.
Metal lath ties spaced ap-
BR BL
proximately 5 in. on center at

cage sides and bottom.
774
FE PU
775
ED FT
AT A
D DR
a

APP4-25
776
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Ratings of Steel
Assembliese (continued)
Minimum Thickness (in.) of Insulat-
Item ing Material for Fire-Resistance
Assembly Fire Protection Material Used
Number Times (hr.)
2. Webs or 2-4.1 Two layers of 5/8 in. Type X gypsum wall- – – 1-1/4 –
flanges of boardc are attached to U-shaped brackets
steel beams spaced 24 in. on center. 0.018 in. thick
and girders (No. 25 carbon sheet steel gage) 1-5/8 in.
deep by 1 in. galvanized steel runner
channels are first installed parallel to and
on each side of the top beam flange to
provide a 1/2 in. clearance to the flange.
The channel runners are attached to steel
deck or concrete floor construction with
approved fasteners spaced 12 in. on cen-
5, EW ter. U-shaped brackets are formed from
21
members identical to the channel runners.
At the bent portion of the U-shaped
bracket, the flanges of the channel are cut
Y VI
20 out so that 1-5/8 in. deep corner channels
can be inserted without attachment paral-
AR E
lel to each side of the lower flange.

U IC R
As an alternative, 0.021 in. thick (No. 24

carbon sheet steel gage) 1 in. × 2 in. run-
ner and corner angles shall be used in lieu
of channels, and the web cutouts in the U-
BR BL
shaped brackets shall not be required.

Each angle is attached to the bracket with
1/2-in.-long No. 8 self-drilling screws. The
FE PU
vertical legs of the U-shaped bracket are

attached to the runners with one 1/2 in.
long No. 8 self-drilling screw. The com-
pleted steel framing provides a 2-1/8 in.
and 1-1/2 in. space between the inner
ED FT
layer of wallboard and the sides and bot-

tom of the steel beam, respectively. The
inner layer of wallboard is attached to the
AT A
top runners and bottom corner channels

D DR
or corner angles with 1-1/4 in.-long No. 6

self-drilling screws spaced 16 in. on cen-
ter. The outer layer of wallboard is applied
with 1-3/4 in.-long No. 6 self-drilling
screws spaced 8 in. on center. The bot-
tom corners are reinforced with metal cor-
ner beads.
777
778
a

APP4-26
779
Table A-4.3.1[a]
Minimum Fire Protection and Fire Resistance Ratings
of Steel Assembliese (continued)
Item sulating Material for Fire-Re-
Assembly Fire Protection Material Used
Number sistance Times (hr.)
2. Webs or 2-4.2 Three layers of 5/8 in. Type X gyp- – 1-7/8 – –
flanges of sum wallboardc attached to a steel
steel beams suspension system as described
and girders immediately above utilizing the
0.018 in. thick (No. 25 carbon
sheet steel gage) 1 in. × 2 in.
lower corner angles. The framing
is located so that a 2-1/8 in. and 2
in. space is provided between the
inner layer of wallboard and the
sides and bottom of the beam, re-
5, EW spectively. The first two layers of
21
wallboard are attached as de-
scribed immediately above. A
layer of 0.035 in. thick (No. 20
Y VI
20 B.W. gage) 1 in. hexagonal galva-
nized wire mesh is applied under
AR E
the soffit of the middle layer and

up the sides approximately 2 in.
U IC R
The mesh is held in position with

the No. 6 1-5/8-in.-long screws in-
stalled in the vertical leg of the
bottom corner angles. The outer
BR BL
layer of wallboard is attached with

No. 6 2-1/4 in.-long screws
spaced 8 in. on center. One screw
FE PU
is also installed at the mid-depth

of the bracket in each layer. Bot-
tom corners are finished as de-
scribed above.
a
Reentrant parts of protected members to be filled solidly.
ED FT
b
Two layers of equal thickness with a 3/4-in. airspace between.
c
For all of the construction with gypsum wallboard, gypsum base for veneer plaster of the same size,
thickness and core type is permitted to be substituted for gypsum wallboard, provided attachment is
AT A
identical to that specified for the wallboard, the joints on the face layer are reinforced, and the entire
D DR
surface is covered with not less than 1/16-inch gypsum veneer plaster.
d
An approved adhesive qualified under ASTM E119 or UL 263.
e
Generic fire-resistance ratings (those not designated as PROPRIETARY* in the listing) in GA 600
shall be accepted as if herein listed.
780
a

APP4-27
781 2. Structural Steel Assemblies

782
783 The provisions of this section contain procedures by which the standard fire-
784 resistance ratings of structural steel assemblies are established by calcula-
785 tions. Use of these provisions is permitted in place of and/or as a supplement
786 to published fire resistive assemblies based on ASTM E119 or UL 263. The
787 installation of the fire protection material shall comply with the applicable
788 requirements of the building code, the referenced approved assemblies, and
789 manufacturer instructions.
790
791 The weight-to-heated-perimeter ratios (W/D) and area-to-heated-perimeter
792 ratios (A/P) shall be determined in accordance with the definitions given in
793 this section. As used in these sections, W is the average weight of a shape
794 in pounds per linear foot and A is the area in square inches. The heated pe-
795 rimeter, D or P, is the inside perimeter of the fire-resistant material or exte-
796 rior contour of the steel shape in inches, as defined for each type of member.
797
798 5, EW
User Note: These procedures establish a basis for determining the fire re-
21
799 sistance rating of steel construction assemblies as a function of the thickness
800 of fire-resistant material, the weight, W, or area, A, and the applicable heated
Y VI
801 20
perimeter, D or P, of the fire protection material or structural steel member.
802 The W/D and A/P ratios are equivalent and mutually convertible section
AR E
803 properties that represent their thermal inertia. W/D has conventionally been
U IC R
804 used for open wide-flange shapes, while A/P has been used for closed hollow
805 structural sections.
806
807 The heated perimeter, D or P, is a function of the configuration of the steel
BR BL
808 fire protection material installation, which can be in either a contour or box
809 profile, together with the nature of the heat exposure on the steel member.
810 The latter is typically characterized as either an all-around exposure of the
FE PU
811 steel shape, as for an interior column, or as a 3-sided exposure of a floor

812 beam supporting a concrete floor. Tabulations of W/D and A/P values for
813 these cases and for the standard rolled steel shapes are available from mul-
ED FT
814 tiple sources, including AISC Design Guide 19 (a free download for mem-
815 bers from www.aisc/org/dg) and other publications.
AT A
816
817 2a.2.1 Steel Columns
D DR
818
819 The fire-resistance ratings of columns shall be based on the size of the mem-
820 ber and the type of protection provided in accordance with this section.
821
822 The application of these procedures for noncomposite steel column assem-
823 blies shall be limited to designs in which the fire-resistant material is not
824 designed to carry any of the load acting on the column.
825
826 Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing elements shall not be embedded in re-
827 quired fire-resistant materials, unless fire-endurance test results are available
828 to establish the adequacy of the resulting condition.
829
830 User Note: The International Building Code requires fire resistance rated
831 columns to be protected on all sides for the full column height, including
832 connections with other structural members and protection continuity through
833 any ceilings to the top of the column.
834
835 (a) 2.1.1 Gypsum Wallboard Protection
836

APP4-28
837 The fire resistance of columns with weight-to-heated perimeter ratios

838 (W/D) less than or equal to 3.65 lb/ft/in. and protected with Type X
839 gypsum wallboard is permitted to be determined from the following ex-
840 pression for a maximum column rating of 4-hours:
841
0.75
  W′  
h
842 R = 130   D   (A-4-24)[a],[b]
 
 2 
0.75
  W′  
h
843 R = 96   D   (A-4-24M)[a]
 
 2 
844
845 where
846 D = inside heated perimeter of the gypsum board, in. (mm)
847 R = fire resistance, minutes
848
5, EW
W = nominal weight of steel shape, lb/ft (kg/m)
21
849 W' = total weight of steel shape and gypsum wallboard protection,
850 lb/ft (kg/m)
851 h = total nominal thickness of Type X gypsum wallboard, in. (mm)
Y VI
852
20
AR E
853 and
W ′ W 50h
U IC R
854 = + (A-4-25)[a],[b]
D D 144
W′ W
855 = + 0.0008h (A-4-25M)[a]
D D
BR BL
856
857 For columns with weight-to-heated-perimeter ratios, (W/D,) greater
858 than 3.65 lb/ft/in. (0.22 kg/m/mm), the thickness of Type X gypsum
FE PU
859 wallboard required for specified fire-resistance ratings shall be the same
860 as the thickness determined for W/D = 3.65 lb/ft/in. (0.22 kg/m/mm).
861
ED FT
862 User Note: This equation has been developed and long used for steel
863 column fire protection with any Type X gypsum board. Since Type C
AT A
864 gypsum board has demonstrated improved fire performance relative to

865 Type X board, these provisions may also be conservatively applied to
D DR
866 column protection with any Type C gypsum board. The supporting test
867 data and accompanying gypsum board installation methods limit the
868 computed fire resistance rating of the steel column to a maximum of 3-
869 hours or 4-hours, as specified in the next section.
870
871 The gypsum board or gypsum panel products shall be installed and sup-
872 ported as required either in UL X526 for fire-resistance ratings of four
873 hours or less, or in UL X528 for fire-resistance ratings of three hours or
874 less.
875
876 User Note: The attachment of the Type X gypsum board protection for
877 the steel columns must be done in accordance with the referenced UL
878 assemblies. UL X526 is applicable only when exterior steel covers are
879 installed over the gypsum board. Otherwise, UL X528 describes the
880 more general gypsum board installation.
a
ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire Pro tec-
tion
b

APP4-29
881
882 (b) 2.1.2 Sprayed and Intumescent/Mastic Fire-Resistant Materials
883
884 The fire resistance of columns protected with sprayed or intumes-
885 cent/mastic fire-resistant coatings shall be determined on the basis of
886 standard fire-resistance rated assemblies, any associated computations
887 and limits as provided in the applicable rated assemblies.
888
889 The fire resistance of wide-flange columns protected with sprayed fire-
890 resistant materials is permitted to be determined as:
891
 W  
892 R =  C1   + C2  h (A-4-26)[a],[b]
 D  
 W  
893 R = C3   + C4  h (A-4-26M)[a]
 D  
894
895
5, EW
where
21
897 h = thickness of sprayed fire-resistant material, in.
Y VI
898
899
20
D = heated perimeter of the column, in.
C1,C2 , C3, and C4= material-dependent constants prescribed in spec-
AR E
900 ified rated assembly.

U IC R
901 D = heated perimeter of the column, in. (mm)

903 W = weight of columns, pounds per linear foot (kg/m)
904 h = thickness of sprayed fire-resistant material, in. (mm)
BR BL
905
906 The material dependent constants, C1, C2, C3, and C4 shall be deter-
907 mined for specific fire-resistant materials on the basis of standard fire
FE PU
908 endurance tests. The computational usage for each correlation, protec-
909 tion product and its material-dependent constants shall be limited to the
910 range of their underlying fire test basis reflected in the selected rated
ED FT
911 assembly.
912
AT A
913 User Note: The fire resistance rated steel column assemblies, published
914 by UL and by other test laboratories, will often include such interpola-
D DR
915 tion equations and specific constants that depend on the particular fire
916 protection product. The applicability limits of each given design cor-
917 relation relative to the column assembly, sprayed fire-resistant protec-
918 tion product, W/D, rating duration, minimum required thickness, and the
919 like must be followed to remain within the range of the existing fire test
920 data range.
921
922 The fire resistance of HSS columns protected with sprayed fire-resistant
923 materials is permitted to be determined from empirical correlations sim-
924 ilar to Equation A-4-25 expressed in terms of A/P values, wherein A is
925 the area in in.2 (mm2) and P is the heated perimeter. The applicability
926 limits specified in the rated column assembly for each correlation and
927 its material-dependent constants shall be followed.
928
a
tion
b

APP4-30
929 User Note: A/P is a directly convertible and equivalent steel section
930 property to W/D which has traditionally been used in fire resistive com-
931 putations for HSS sections. Similar to W/D for open wide flange shapes,
932 tabulation of A/P values for standard closed shapes with contour and
933 box protection applications are available from multiple sources, includ-
934 ing AISC and the published literature. The applicability limits of each
935 given design correlation relative to the column assembly, sprayed fire-
936 resistant protection product, A/P, rating duration, minimum required
937 thickness, and the like must be followed to remain within the range of
938 the existing fire test result range .
939
940 (c) 2.1.3 Noncomposite Columns Encased in Concrete
941
942 The fire resistance of noncomposite columns fully encased within con-
943 crete protection is permitted to be determined from the following ex-
944 pression:
945
946 5, EW R = Ro (1 + 0.03m ) (A-4-27)[a],[b]
21
947
948
Y VI
949 where
20
AR E
 h1.6    
0.7 0.8
W   H
Ro = 10   + 17  0.2  × 1 + 26 
U IC R
950  
 D  kc    pccc h ( L + h)  
0.7
h1.6    
0.8 Field Code Changed
W   H
951 Ro = 10   + 17  1 + 26    (A-4-28)[a],[b]
BR BL
D K c 0.2
  pc cc h ( L + h )  
952
FE PU
. . .
953 𝑅 = 73 + 0.162 . 1 + 31,000
( )
0.7 1.6    
0.8

ED FT
954 W  h H [a]
Ro = 73   + 0.162 1 + 31, 000    (A-4-28M)
D K c 0.2   pc cc h ( L + h )  
AT A
955
D DR

957 H = ambient temperature thermal capacity of the steel column, Btu/ ft
958 °F (W/kJ m K)
959 = 0.11W (0.46 W)
960 Kc = ambient temperature thermal conductivity of the concrete, Btu/hr
961 ft °F. (W/m K)
962 L = interior dimension of one side of a square concrete box protection,
963 in. (mm)
964 R = fire endurance at equilibrium moisture conditions, minutes
965 Ro = fire endurance at zero moisture content, minutes
966 m = equilibrium moisture content of the concrete by volume, percent
967 W = average weight of the column, lb/ft (kg/m)
969 cc = ambient temperature specific heat of concrete, Btu/lb °F (kJ/kg K)
a
tion
b

APP4-31
970 h = thickness of the concrete cover, measured between the exposed con-
971 crete and nearest outer surface of the encased steel column section,
972 in. (mm)
973 kc Kc = ambient temperature thermal conductivity of the concrete, Btu/hr
974 ft °F. (W/m K)
975 m = equilibrium moisture content of the concrete by volume, %
976 H = ambient temperature thermal capacity of the steel column, Btu/ ft
977 °F (W/kJ m K)
978 = 0.11W (0.46 W)
979 pc = concrete density, lb/ft3 (kg/m3)
980 cc = ambient temperature specific heat of concrete, Btu/lb °F (kJ/kg K)
981 L = interior dimension of one side of a square concrete box protection,
982 in. (mm)
983
984 When the inside perimeter of the concrete protection is not square, L
985 shall be taken as the average of its two rectangular side lengths (L1 and
986 L2). If the thickness of the concrete cover is not constant, h shall be
987 5, EW
taken as the average of h1 and h2.
21
988
989 User Note: The variables in these equations are illustrated in the figure.
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
990
991
AT A
D DR
992
993 (a) Precast concrete (b) Concrete encased (c) Concrete encased
994 column covers HSS wide-flange shape
995
996
997 For wide-flange columns completely encased in concrete with all reen-
998 trant spaces filled, the thermal capacity of the concrete within the reen-
999 trant spaces is permitted to be added to the ambient thermal capacity of
1000 the steel column, as follows:

APP4-32
pc 
1001 H = 0.11W +  c c  ( b f d − As ) (A-4-29)[a],[b]
 144 
 pc cc 
1002 H = 0.46W +   ( b f d − As ) (A-4-29M) [a]
 1, 000, 000 
1003
1004 where:
1005 As = area of the steel column, in.2 (mm2)
1006 bf = flange width of the column, in. (mm)
1007 d =depth of the column, in. (mm)
1008 As = area of the steel column, in.2 (mm2)
1009
1010 User Note: It is conservative to neglect this additional concrete term in
1011 the column fire resistance calculation.
1012
1013 In the absence of more specific data for the ambient properties of the
1014 concrete encasement, it is permitted to use the values provided in Table
1015 5, EW
A-4.3.2.
21
1016
Table A-4.3.2[c]
Y VI
20
Ambient Properties of Concrete Encasement
AR E
for Steel Column Fire Resistance

U IC R
Normal Weight Light Weight

Property
Concrete Concrete
0.95 Btu/hr-ft-°F 0.35 Btu/hr-ft-°F
Thermal conductivity, kcKc
BR BL
(1.64 W/m K) (0.61 W/m K)

Specific heat, cc 0.20 Btu/lb °F 0.20 Btu/lb °F
FE PU
(840 J/kg K) (840 J/kg K)

3
Density, pc 145 lb/ft 110 lb/ft3
3
(2300 kg/m ) (1800 kg/m3)
ED FT
Equilibrium (free) moisture con-

4% 5%
tent, (m), by volume Formatted: Font: Italic
AT A
1017
1018
D DR
1019 User Note: The estimated free moisture content of concrete given in
1020 Table A-4.3.2 may not be appropriate for all conditions, particularly for
1021 older concrete that has already been in service for a longer time. For
1022 these and similar situations of uncertainty, it is conservative to not rely
1023 on this beneficial effect of the free moisture and to assume the concrete
1024 is completely dry with m = 0 for fire resistance of R = Ro.
1025
1026 (d) 2.1.4 Noncomposite Columns Encased in Masonry Units of Concrete
1027 or Clay
1028
1029 The fire resistance of noncomposite columns protected by encasement
1030 with concrete masonry units or with clay masonry units is permitted to
1031 be determined from the following expression:
1032
a
tion
b
c

APP4-33
 Te1.6    ( As dmTe )  
0.7 0.8
W  
1033 R = 0.17   + 0.285 0.2  1.0 + 42.7   
D   K    ( 0.25 p + Te )  
  
0.8  Field Code Changed
W 
0.7
  T 1.6  ( Ag d mTe )  
1034 R = 0.17   +  0.285  e 0.2   1.0 + 42.7   
D   Kc     ( 0.25 p + Te )  
1035 (A-4-30) [a]
1036
.
. .
1037 𝑅 = 1.22 + 0.0027 . 1.0 + 1249
( . )
 T 1.6     ( Ag d mTe )  
0.7 0.8 Field Code Changed
W  
1038 R = 1.22   +  0.0027  e 0.2   1.0 + 1249   
D   K c     ( 0.25 p + Te )  
1039 (A-4-30M)
1040
5, EW
21
1041 where
1042 R = fire-resistance rating of column assembly, hours
Y VI
1043
1044
W
As
20
= average weight of column, lb/ft (kg/m)
= cross-sectional area of column, in.2 (mm2)
AR E
1045 D = heated perimeter of column, in. (mm)

U IC R
1046 Te = equivalent thickness of concrete or clay masonry unit,

1047 in accordance with ACI 216.1, in. (mm)
1048 Kc = thermal conductivity of concrete or clay masonry unit,
1049 Btu/hr-ft-°F (W/m K) (see Table A-4.3.3).
BR BL
1050 R = fire-resistance rating of column assembly, hours

1051 Te = equivalent thickness of concrete or clay masonry unit,
1052 in accordance with ACI 216.1, in. (mm)
FE PU
1053 W = average weight of column, lb/ft (kg/m)

1054 As = cross-sectional area of column, in.2 (mm2)
1055 dm = density of the concrete or clay masonry unit, lb/ft3 (kg/m3)
ED FT
1056 p = inner perimeter of concrete or clay masonry protection, in.

1057 (mm)
AT A
1058
1059 The thermal conductivity values given in Table A-4.3.3 as a function of
D DR
1060 the concrete or clay masonry unit density is permitted for use with this
1061 encasement protection formulation.
1062
1063 User Note: Equation A-4-30 is derived from Equation A-4-27 assum-
1064 ing m = 0, cc = 0.2 Btu/lb °F, h = Te, and L = p/4. The following cross-
1065 sections illustrate three different configurations for concrete masonry
1066 units or clay masonry unit encasement of steel columns, along with the
1067 applicable fire protection design variables.
1068
1069

APP4-34
1070
1071
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
1072
AR E
1073 W-shape column Pipe column HSS column

U IC R
1074
1075 d = depth of a wide flange column, outside diameter of pipe column,
1076 or outside dimension of hollow structural section column, in. (mm)
1077 tw = thickness of web of wide flange column, in. (mm)
BR BL
1078 w = width of flange of wide flange or hollow structural section, in.

1079 (mm)
FE PU
1080
1081
Table A-4.3.3[a]
ED FT
Thermal Conductivity of Masonry Units for

Steel Column Encasement
AT A
Unit Density, Unit Thermal Conductivity

D DR
dm, lb/ft3 (kg/m3) K, Btu/hr ft °F (W/m K)

Concrete Masonry Units
80 (12801300) 0.207 (0.36)(0.358)
85 (13601400) 0.228 (0.40)(0.395)
90 (14401400) 0.252 (0.44)(0.436)
95 (15201500) 0.278 (0.48)(0.481)
100 (1600) 0.308 (0.53)(0.533)
105 (16801700) 0.340 (0.59)(0.589)
110 (17601800) 0.376 (0.65)(0.651)
115 (18401800) 0.416 (0.72)(0.720)
120 (19201900) 0.459 (0.80)(0.795)
125 (2000) 0.508 (0.88)(0.879)
130 (20802100) 0.561 (0.97)(0.971)
135 (21602200) 0.620 (1.1)(1.07)
140 (22402200) 0.685 (1.2)(1.19)
145 (23202300) 0.758 (1.3)(1.31)
150 (2400) 0.837 (1.5)(1.45)
Clay Masonry Units
120 (19201900) 1.25 (2.2)(2.16)
130 (20802100) 2.25 (3.9)(3.89)
1082
a

APP4-35
1083
1084 2b. 2.2 Composite Steel-Concrete Columns
1085
1086 The fire resistance rating of columns acting compositely with concrete (con-
1087 crete-filled or encased) is permitted to be based on the size of the composite
1088 member and concrete protection in accordance with this section.
1089
1090 (a) 2.2.1 Concrete-Filled Columns
1091
1092 The fire resistance rating of hollow structural section (HSS) columns
1093 filled with unreinforced normal weight concrete, steel-fiber-reinforced
1094 normal weight concrete or bar-reinforced normal weight concrete is per-
1095 mitted to be determined in accordance with the following expressions:
1096 Equation A-4-31 or A-4-31M.
1097
1098 The application of these equations shall be limited by all of the follow-
1099 ing conditions:
1100
5, EW
1. The required fire resistance rating R shall be less than or equal to
21
1101 the limits specified in Tables A-4.3.5 or A-4.3.5M.
1102 2. The specified compressive strength of concrete, f′c , the column
Y VI
1103 effective length, Lc, the dimension D, the concrete reinforcement
20
1104 ratio, and the thickness of the concrete cover shall be within the
AR E
1105 limits specified in Tables A-4.3.5 or A-4.3.5M.

1106 3. C shall not exceed the design strength of the concrete or the rein-
U IC R
1107 forced concrete core determined in accordance with this Specifi-

1108 cation.
1109 4. Two A minimum of two 1/2 in.(13 mm) diameter holes shall be
1110 placed opposite each other at the top and bottom of the column
BR BL
1111 and at maximum 12-ft (3.7-m) on center spacing along the column
1112 height. Each set of vent holes should be rotated 90° relative to the
FE PU
1113 adjacent set of holes to relieve steam pressure.

1114
0.5
D
0.58a ( f c′ + 2.9 ) D 2  
ED FT
1115 R= C (A-4-31)[a]

Lc − 3.28
AT A
0.5
D
D DR
a ( f c′ + 20 ) D 2  
1116 R= C (A-4-31M)[a]
60 ( Lc − 1, 000 )
1117
1118 C = compressive force due to unfactored dead load and live load,
1119 kips (kN)
1120 D = outside diameter for circular columns, in. (mm)
1121 = outside dimension for square columns, in. (mm)
1122 = least outside dimension for rectangular columns, in. (mm)
1123 Lc = column effective length, ft (mm)
1124 R = fire resistance rating in hours
1125 a = constant determined from Table A-4.3.4
1126 f′c = 28-day compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa)
1127 Lc = column effective length, ft (mm)
1128 D = outside diameter for circular columns, in. (mm)
a
ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire Protec-
tion

APP4-36
1129 = outside dimension for square columns, in. (mm)

1130 = least outside dimension for rectangular columns, in. (mm)
1131 C = compressive force due to unfactored dead load and live load,
1132 kips (kN)
1133
1134 The application of these equations shall be limited by all of the following
1135 conditions:
1136 1. The required fire resistance rating R shall be less than or equal to the
1137 limits specified in Tables A-4.3.5 or A-4.3.5M.
1138 2.1. The specified compressive strength of concrete, f′c , the column effec-
1139 tive length, Lc, the dimension D, the concrete reinforcement ratio, and
1140 the thickness of the concrete cover shall be within the limits specified
1141 in Tables A-4.3.5 or A-4.3.5M.
1142 3.1. C shall not exceed the design strength of the concrete or the reinforced
1143 concrete core determined in accordance with this Specification.
1144 4.1. Two minimum 1/2 in.(13 mm) diameter holes shall be placed opposite
1145 each other at the top and bottom of the column and at maximum 12-ft
1146 5, EW
(3.7-m) on center spacing along the column height. Each set of vent
21
1147 holes should be rotated 90° relative to the adjacent set of holes to re-
1148 lieve steam pressure.
Y VI
1149
20
1150 User Note: Concrete-filled hollow structural sections (HSS) can effec-
AR E
1151 tively sustain load during a fire exposure without benefit of any external
U IC R
1152 protection for the steel HSS. The concrete infill mass provides both an
1153 increased capacity for absorbing the heat caused by the fire and load-
1154 bearing strength to thereby extend the column fire resistance duration.
1155 Research conducted at the National Research Council of Canada has
BR BL
1156 provided a basis for establishing an empirical equation to predict the

1157 standard fire resistance of concrete-filled round and square HSS section
1158 for commonly used story heights and steel sections. This empirical
FE PU
1159 equation was derived from and can only be used within the allowable
1160 range of design variables, as given, and is not applicable to lightweight
1161 concrete infill.
ED FT
1162
1163 The fire performance of a concrete-filled HSS column is improved
AT A
1164 when heat absorption occurs as the moisture in the concrete is converted
1165 to steam. The heat absorbed during this phase change is significant,
D DR
1166 however the resulting steam must be released to prevent the adverse ef-
1167 fects of an internal pressure build-up within the HSS column. Thus, vent
1168 holes must be provided in the steel section, as indicated in the given
1169 limitation #4.
1170

APP4-37
1171
Table A-4.3.4
Values of Constant a for Normal Weight Concrete
a
Reinf.
Aggregate Concrete Fill
Ratio Square. or Rec-
Type Type Circular
(%) tangular.
Columns
Columns
siliceous unreinforced NA 0.070 0.060
steel-fiber-
siliceous 2 0.075 0.065
reinforced
steel-bar- 1.5 − 3 0.080 0.070
siliceous
reinforced 3−5 0.085 0.070
carbonate unreinforced NA 0.080 0.070
steel-fiber-
carbonate 2 0.085 0.075
reinforced
steel-bar- 1.5 − 3 0.090 0.080
carbonate
reinforced 3−5 0.095 0.085
1172
1173 5, EW
21
Table A-4.3.5
Y VI
20
Limits for the use of Equation A-4-31 Parameters
Parameter Concrete Fill Type
AR E
Unreinforced steel-fiber- steel-bar

reinforced reinforced
U IC R
R (hours) ≤2 ≤3 ≤3
fc’ (ksi) 2.9 − 5.8 2.9 − 8.0 2.9 − 8.0
Lc (ft) 6.5 − 13.0 6.5 − 15.0 6.5 − 15.0
D (round) (in.) 5.5 − 16.0 5.5 − 16.0 6.5 − 16.0
BR BL
D (sq. or rect.) (in.) 5.5 − 12.0 4.0 − 12.0 7.0 − 12.0

2% of concrete 1.5 − 5%
Reinf. (%) NA
mix by mass of section area
FE PU
Concrete cover (in.) NA NA ≥ 1.0

1174
1175
ED FT
Table A-4.3.5M
Limits for the use of Equation A-4-31M Parameters
AT A
Parameter Concrete Fill Type

unreinforced steel-fiber- steel-bar-
D DR
reinforced reinforced
R (hours) ≤2 ≤3 ≤3
fc’ (MPa) 20 − 40 20−55 20−55
Lc (mm) 2000 − 4000 2000−4500 2000−4500
D (round) (mm) 140 − 410 140 −410 165 − 410
D (sq. or rect.) (mm) 140 − 305 102−305 175 − 305
2% of concrete 1.5 − 5%
Reinf. (%) NA
mix by mass of section area
Concrete cover (mm) NA NA ≥ 25
1176

APP4-38
1177 (b) 2.2.2 Composite Columns Encased in Concrete

1178
1179 The fire resistance of composite columns fully encased within normal
1180 weight or lightweight concrete and with no unfilled spaces is permitted
1181 to be determined as the lesser of Equation A-4-30 and the values in Ta-
1182 ble A-4.3.6.
1183
Table A-4.3.6
Minimum Size and Concrete Cover Limits for
Fire Resistance of Composite Steel Columns
Encased in Concrete with No Unfilled Spaces
Fire Resistance Minimum Concrete Minimum Column
Rating, hrs Cover, h, in. (mm) Outside Dimension, in. (mm)
1 1 (25) 8 (200)
2 2 (50) 10 (250)
3 2 (50) 12 (300)
5, EW4 2 (50) 14 (350)
21
1184
1185 User Note: The fire resistance ratings and requirements in Table A-
Y VI
1186 4.3.7 were directly adapted from the ACI 216.1 provisions for conven-
20
1187 tional bar-reinforced concrete columns. Substitution of an embedded
AR E
1188 structural steel shape for steel bar reinforcement should not reduce the
1189 fire resistance of the loadbearing concrete parts of column, and the R
U IC R
1190 computed for the same but assumed non-composite steel column ac-
1191 cordingly verifies the fire resistance of the loadbearing steel shape. The
1192 concrete cover, h, is defined identical to that used for non-composite
1193 steel columns encased in concrete.
BR BL
1194
1195 2c. 2.3 Composite or Non-Composite Steel I-Shaped Beams and Girders
FE PU
1196
1197 The fire-resistance ratings of composite or non-composite beams and girders
1198 shall be based upon the size of the element and the type of protection pro-
ED FT
1199 vided in accordance with this section.

1200
1201 These procedures establish a basis for determining resistance of structural
AT A
1202 steel beams and girders that differ in size from that specified in approved
D DR
1203 fire-resistance-rated assemblies as a function of the thickness of fire-re-

1204 sistant material and the weight (W) and heated perimeter (D) of the beam or
1205 girder.
1206
1207 The beams provided in approved fire-resistance-rated assemblies shall be
1208 considered to be the minimum permissible size. Other beam or girder shapes
1209 is permitted to be substituted provided that the weight-to-heated-perimeter
1210 ratio (W/D) of the substitute beam is equal to or greater than that of the min-
1211 imum beam specified in the approved assembly.
1212
1213 User Note: In the past, the substitution of larger beams for the minimum
1214 required sizes has been permitted based upon the thickness of web and flange
1215 elements, W/D ratio, or the beam size designation. Extensive fire research
1216 has shown that the heat transfer to a protected steel beam or girder is actually
1217 a direct function of the W/D ratio. As a result, beam substitutions should be
1218 more directly based upon W/D ratios. The significance of the thickness of
1219 web and flange elements and beam size is inherently included in the deter-
1220 mination of W/D ratios.

APP4-39
1221 It is acceptable and conservative to protect a larger steel beam or girder,

1222 which has a greater W/D value than the W/D of the minimum member size
1223 specified in an approved assembly, with the thickness of fire protection ma-
1224 terial required for the minimum member size.
1225
1226 2.3.1 Sprayed and Intumescent/Mastic Fire-Resistant Materials
1227
1228 The provisions in this section apply to beams and girders protected with
1229 sprayed or intumescent/mastic fire-resistant materials.
1230
1231 Larger or smaller composite or non-composite beam and girder shapes pro-
1232 tected with sprayed fire-resistant materials are permitted to be substituted
1233 for beams specified in approved unrestrained or restrained fire-resistance-
1234 rated assemblies, provided that the thickness of the fire-resistant material is
1235 adjusted in accordance with the following expressionEquation A-4-32 or A-
1236 4-32M:
1237
1238 5, EW
The use of this Equationthese equations isshall be limited by all ofto the
21
1239 following conditions:
1240
Y VI
1241 1. 20
The weight-to-heated-perimeter ratio for the substitute beam or girder
1242 (W1/D1) shall be not less than 0.37 (customary units) or 0.022 (SI
AR E
1243 units).
U IC R
1244 2. The thickness of fire protection materials calculated for the substitute
1245 beam or girder (T1) shall be not less than 3/8 in. (10 mm).
1246 3. The unrestrained or restrained beam rating shall be not less than 1
1247 hour.
BR BL
1248 4. Where used to adjust the material thickness for a restrained beam, the
1249 use of this procedure is limited to sections classified as compact.
1250
FE PU
h1 (W1 D1 ) + 0.60
1251 h2 = (A-4-32)[a],[b]
(W2 D2 ) + 0.60
ED FT
h1 (W1 D1 ) + 0.036
1252 h2 = (A-4-32M) [a]
(W2 D2 ) + 0.036
AT A
D DR
1253
1254 where:
1255 D = heated perimeter of the beam, in. (mm)
1256 W = weight of the beam or girder, lb/ft (kg/m)
1257 h = thickness of sprayed fire-resistant material, in. (mm)
1258 W = weight of the beam or girder, lb/ft (kg/m)
1259 D = heated perimeter of the beam, in. (mm)
1260
1261 Subscript 1 refers to the substitute beam or girder and the required thickness
1262 of fire-resistant material.
1263 Subscript 2 refers to the beam and fire-resistant material thickness in the
1264 approved assembly.
1265
1266 The use of this Equation is limited to the following conditions:
1267
1268 1. The weight-to-heated-perimeter ratio for the substitute beam or girder
a
ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for Structural Fire Protec-
tion.
b

APP4-40
1269 (W1/D1) shall be not less than 0.37 (customary units) or 0.022 (SI
1270 units).
1271 2.1. The thickness of fire protection materials calculated for the substitute
1272 beam or girder (T1) shall be not less than 3/8 in. (10 mm).
1273 3.1. The unrestrained or restrained beam rating shall be not less than 1
1274 hour.
1275 4.1. Where used to adjust the material thickness for a restrained beam, the
1276 use of this procedure is limited to sections classified as compact.
1277
1278 User Note: This substitution equation based on W/D for beams protected
1279 with spray-applied fire resistive materials was developed by UL with the
1280 given limitations. The minimum W/D ratio of 0.37 prevents the use of this
1281 equation for determining the fire resistance of very small shapes that have
1282 not been tested. The 3/8-in. (10 mm) minimum thickness of protection is a
1283 practical application limit based upon the most commonly used spray-ap-
1284 plied fire protection materials.
1285
1286 5, EW
The fire resistance of composite or non-composite beams and girders pro-
21
1287 tected with intumescent or mastic fire-resistant coatings shall be determined
1288 on the basis of standard fire-resistance rated assemblies, and associated com-
Y VI
1289 20
putations and limits as provided in the applicable rated assemblies.
1290
AR E
1291 2d. Concrete-Encased Steel Beams and Girders

U IC R
1292
1293 The fire resistance rating of concrete-encased steel beams and girders is per-
1294 mitted to be determined in accordance with Items 2-1.1 or 2-1.2 of Table
1295 A-4.3.1.
BR BL
1296
1297
1298 2e.2.4 Trusses
FE PU
1299
1300 The fire resistance of trusses with members individually protected by fire-
1301 resistant materials applied onto each of the individual truss elements is per-
ED FT
1302 mitted to be determined for each member in accordance with the Appendix
1303 4, Section 4.3.1. The protection thickness of truss elements that can be sim-
AT A
1304 ultaneously exposed to fire on all sides shall be determined for the same
1305 weight-to-heated perimeter ratio, (W/D), as columns. The protection thick-
D DR
1306 ness of truss elements that directly support floor or roof assembly is permit-
1307 ted to be determined for the same weight-to-heated-perimeter ratio, (W/D),
1308 as for beams and girders.
1309
1310 User Note: For trusses, application of the column fire resistance equation is
1311 more technically correct than the beam equation, since truss members are
1312 predominantly axially loaded and will require larger protection thicknesses
1313 than beams. Also, most truss elements can be exposed to fire on all four sides
1314 simultaneously. As a result, the heated perimeter and protection thickness of
1315 most truss members should be determined in the same manner as for col-
1316 umns. However, an exception is included for top chord elements that directly
1317 support floor or roof construction. The heated perimeter and protection
1318 thickness of such elements may be determined in the same manner as for
1319 beams and girders, or they may be conservatively determined in the same
1320 manner as for columns.
1321
1322 2f.2.5 Concrete Floor Slabs on Steel Deck
1323

APP4-41
1324 For composite concrete floor slabs on trapezoidal steel decking wherein the
1325 upper width of the deck rib is equal to or greater than its bottom rib width,
1326 the fire resistance rating, based on the thermal insulation criterion for the
1327 unexposed surface temperature, shall be permitted to be calculated using the
1328 following equation:
R = a0 + a1h1 + a2 h2 + a3l2 + a4l3 + a5 m + a6 h12
+ a7 h1h2 + a8 h1l2 + a9 h1l3 + a10 h1m + a11h2l2
1329 + a12 h2l3 + a13h2 m + a14l2l3 + a15l2 m + a16l3m (A-4-33)
1330
1331
5, EW
21
1332 where
1333 R = fire resistance rating in minutes
Y VI
1334 h1 = concrete slab thickness above steel deck, in. (mm)
20
1335 h2 = depth of steel deck, in. (mm)
AR E
1336 l1 = largest upper width of deck rib, in. (mm)

1337 l2 = bottom width of deck rib, in (mm)
U IC R
1338 l3 = width of deck upper flange, in (mm)

1339 m = moisture content of the concrete slab. Range of applicability is be-
1340 tween 0% (0.0) and 10% (0.1).
1341
BR BL
1342 User Note: The slab dimensions in Equation A-4-33 are illustrated in
1343 the figure.
FE PU
1344
ED FT
AT A
D DR
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349 The coefficients 𝑎 to 𝑎 are shown given in Table A-4.3.7.
1350
1351
1352

APP4-42
1353
TABLE A-4.3.7 Coefficients 𝒂𝟎 to 𝒂𝟏𝟔 for use
with Equation A-4-33
Coefficient Value
Coefficient Normal-weight concrete Lightweight concrete
𝑎 38.6 min 68.7 min
𝑎 -5.08 min/in. (-0.2 min/mm) -36.58 min/in. (-1.44 min/mm)
𝑎 −1.45 min/in. (−0.057 min/mm) -2.79 min/in. (-0.11 min/mm)
𝑎 −3.30 min/in. (−0.13 min/mm) −12.70 min/in. (−0.5 min/mm)
𝑎 −2.08 min/in. (−0.082 min/mm) 20.07 min/in. (0.79 min/mm)
𝑎 -118.1 min -784.2 min
𝑎 5, EW 2
4.06 min/in. (0.0063 min/mm ) 2
8.84 min/in.2 (0.0137 min/mm2)
21
𝑎 1.48 min/in.2 (0.0023 min/mm2) 3.61 min/in.2 (0.0056 min/mm2)
Y VI
𝑎
20 1.87 min/in.2 (0.0029 min/mm2) 3.68 min/in.2 (0.0057 min/mm2)
AR E
𝑎 0 -2.39 min/in.2 (-0.0037 min/mm2)

U IC R
𝑎 263.1 min/in. (10.36 min/mm) 444.5 min/in. (17.5 min/mm)
𝑎 1.16 min/in.2 (0.0018 min/mm2) 2.06 min/in.2 (0.0032 min/mm2)
𝑎 0 -3.42 min/in.2 (-0.0053 min/mm2)

BR BL
𝑎 0 91.44 min/in. (3.6 min/mm)

FE PU
𝑎 -0.65 min/in.2 (-0.001 min/mm2) -0.97 min/in.2 (-0.0015 min/mm2)
𝑎 0 42.42 min/in. (1.67 min/mm)

ED FT
𝑎 0 -66.04 min/in. (-2.6 min/mm)
1354
AT A
1355 User Note: If moisture content values are not available, m = 4% can be used
D DR
1356 for normal-weight concrete, and m = 5% can be used for normal-weight con-
1357 crete and lightweight concrete, respectively, consistent with Annex D of Eu-
1358 rocode 4. Dry conditions (m = 0%) will yield the most conservative fire re-
1359 sistance rating.
1360
1361
1362 2g. 2.6 Composite Plate Shear Walls
1363
1364 For unprotected composite plate shear walls meeting the requirements of
1365 Chapter I, and satisfying the following conditions and Section 4.3.2.6, the
1366 fire resistance rating is shall be permitted to be determined in accordance
1367 with Equation A-4-34 or A-4-34M.
1368
1369 The use of Equation A-4-34 or A-4-34M shall be limited to walls satisfying
1370 all the following conditions:
1371 1. Wall slenderness ratio (L/tsc) is less than or equal to 20
1372 2. Axial load ratio (Pu/Pn) is less than or equal to 0.2
1373 3. Wall thickness, tsc, is greater than or equal to 8 in. (200 mm) between
1374 8 in. and 24 in. (200 mm and 600 mm)
1375

APP4-43
1376
  Lt 
0.24− sc  
  Pu   1.9tsc 
+ 15 
230 
1377 R =  −18.5   − 1 (A-4-34)
P
 n  8 
 
  Lt 
0.24− sc  
  Pu   1.9tsc 
+ 15 
230 
1378 R =  −18.5   − 1 (A-4-34M)
 Pn   200 
 
1379
1380
1381 where R is the fire rating in hours, Pu is the applied axial load in kips (kN),
1382 and L, tsc, and Pn are as defined in Chapter I.
1383
1384
1385 3. Restrained Construction
1386
1387 5, EW
For floor and roof assemblies and individual beams in buildings, a restrained
21
1388 condition exists when the surrounding or supporting structure is capable of
1389 resisting forces and accommodating deformations caused by thermal expan-
Y VI
1390
20
sion throughout the range of anticipated elevated temperatures. Cast-in-
1391 place or prefabricated concrete floor or roof construction secured to steel
AR E
1392 framing members, and individual steel beams and girders that are welded or
U IC R
1393 bolted to integral framing members shall be considered restrained construc-

1394 tion.
1395
1396 4. Unrestrained Construction
BR BL
1397
1398 Steel beams, girders and frames that do not support a concrete slab shall be
FE PU
1399 considered unrestrained unless the members are bolted or welded to sur-
1400 rounding construction that has been specifically designed and detailed to re-
1401 sist effects of elevated temperatures.
1402
ED FT
1403 A steel member bearing on a wall in a single span or at the end span of
1404 multiple spans shall be considered unrestrained unless the wall has been de-
AT A
1405 signed and detailed to resist effects of thermal expansion.

1406
D DR

APP5-1
1 APPENDIX 5
2 EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

3
4 This appendix applies to the evaluation of the strength and stiffness of existing struc-
5 tures by structural analysis, by load tests, or by a combination of structural analysis
6 and load tests when specified by the engineer of record or in the contract documents.
7 Load testing in accordance with this appendix applies to static vertical gravity load
8 effects.
9
10 The Appendix is organized as follows:
11
13 5.2. Material Properties
14 5.3. Evaluation by Structural Analysis
15 5.4. Evaluation by Load Tests
16 5.5. 5, EW
Evaluation Report
21
17
Y VI
19
20
AR E
20 These provisions shall be applicable when the evaluation of an existing steel

U IC R
21 structure is specified for (a) verification of a specific set of design loadings or

22 (b) determination of the available strength of a load-resisting member or sys-
23 tem. The evaluation shall be performed by structural analysis (Section 5.3), by
24 load tests (Section 5.4), or by a combination of structural analysis and load
BR BL
25 tests, when specified in the contract documents by the engineer of record

26 (EOR).
FE PU
27
28 5.2. MATERIAL PROPERTIES
29
ED FT
30 For evaluations in accordance with this appendix, steel grades other than those
31 listed in Section A3.1 are permitted.
AT A
32
D DR
33 1. Determination of Required Tests

34
35 The EOR shall determine the specific tests that are required from Sections 5.2.2
36 through 5.2.6 and specify the locations where they are required. The use of
37 applicable project records is permitted to reduce or eliminate the need for test-
38 ing.
39
40 2. Tensile Properties
41
42 Tensile properties of members shall be established for use in evaluation by
43 structural analysis (Section 5.3) or load tests (Section 5.4). Such properties shall
44 include the yield stress, tensile strength and percent elongation. Certified ma-
45 terial test reports or certified reports of tests made by the fabricator or a testing
46 laboratory in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M or A568/A568M, as applicable,
47 are permitted for this purpose. Otherwise, tensile tests shall be conducted in
48 accordance with ASTM A370 from samples taken from components of the
49 structure.
50
51 3. Chemical Composition
52

APP5-2
53 Where welding is anticipated for repair or modification of existing structures,

54 the chemical composition of the steel shall be determined for use in preparing
55 a welding procedure specification. Results from certified material test reports
56 or certified reports of tests made by the fabricator or a testing laboratory in
57 accordance with ASTM procedures are permitted for this purpose. Otherwise,
58 analyses shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM A751 from the samples
59 used to determine tensile properties or from samples taken from the same loca-
60 tions.
61
62 4. Base Metal Notch Toughness
63
64 Where welded tension splices in heavy shapes and plates as defined in Section
65 A3.1d are critical to the performance of the structure, the Charpy V-notch
66 toughness shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Section
67 A3.1d. If the notch toughness so determined does not meet the provisions of
68 Section A3.1d, the EOR shall determine if remedial actions are required.
69
70 5. Weld Metal
71
5, EW
21
72 Where structural performance is dependent on existing welded connections,
73 representative samples of weld metal shall be obtained. Chemical analysis and
Y VI
74
20
mechanical tests shall be made to characterize the weld metal. A determination
75 shall be made of the magnitude and consequences of imperfections. If the re-
AR E
76 quirements of Structural Welding Code—Steel, AWS D1.1/D1.1M, are not met,

U IC R
77 the EOR shall determine if remedial actions are required.

78
79 6. Bolts and Rivets
BR BL
80
81 Representative samples of bolts shall be visually inspected to determine mark-
82 ings and classifications. Where it is not possible to classify bolts by visual
FE PU
83 inspection, representative samples shall be taken and tested to determine ten-

84 sile strength in accordance with ASTM F606/F606M and the bolt classified
ED FT
85 accordingly. Alternatively, the assumption that the bolts are ASTM A307 is
86 permitted. Rivets shall be assumed to be ASTM A502 Grade 1 unless a higher
87 grade is established through documentation or testing.
AT A
88
D DR
89 5.3. EVALUATION BY STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

90
91 1. Dimensional Data
92
93 All dimensions used in the evaluation, such as spans, column heights, member
94 spacings, bracing locations, cross-section dimensions, thicknesses, and connec-
95 tion details, shall be determined from a field survey. Alternatively, it is permit-
96 ted to determine such dimensions from applicable project design or fabrication
97 documents with field verification of critical values.
98
99 2. Strength Evaluation
100
101 Forces (load effects) in members and connections shall be determined by struc-
102 tural analysis applicable to the type of structure evaluated. The load effects
103 shall be determined for the loads and factored load combinations stipulated in
104 Section B2.
105
106 The available strength of members and connections shall be determined from
107 applicable provisions of Chapters B through K and Appendix 5 of this Specifi-
108 cation.

APP5-3
109
110 2a. Rivets
111
112 The design tensile or shear strength, φRn, and the allowable tensile or shear
113 strength, Rn/Ω, of a driven rivet shall be determined according Section J3.6, and
114 driven rivets under combined tension and shear shall satisfy the requirements
115 of Section J3.7,
116
117 where
118 Ab = nominal body area of undriven rivet, in.2 (mm2)
119 Fnt = nominal tensile strength of the driven rivet from Table A-5.3.1, ksi
120 (MPa)
121 Fnv = nominal shear strength of the driven rivet from Table A-5.3.1, ksi
122 (MPa)
123
Table A-5.3.1
Design Strength of Rivets
5, EW Nominal Tensile Nominal Shear
21
Description of Strength, ksi Strength, ksi
Rivet (MPa) [a] (MPa) [b]
Y VI
20
A502, Grade 1, hot-
45 (310) 25 (170)
driven rivets
AR E
[a] Static loading only.

U IC R
[b] Refer to Note [b] of Table J3.2.
124
125 3. Serviceability Evaluation
BR BL
126
127 Where required, the deformations at service loads shall be calculated and re-
128 ported.
FE PU
129
130 5.4. EVALUATION BY LOAD TESTS
131
ED FT

133
AT A
134 This section applies only to static vertical gravity loads applied to existing roofs
D DR
135 or floors.
136
137 Where load tests are used, the EOR shall first analyze the structure, prepare a
138 testing plan, and develop a written procedure for the test. The plan shall con-
139 sider catastrophic collapse and/or excessive levels of permanent deformation,
140 as defined by the EOR, and shall include procedures to preclude either occur-
141 rence during testing.
142
143 2. Determination of Load Rating by Testing
144
145 To determine the load rating of an existing floor or roof structure by testing, a
146 test load shall be applied incrementally in accordance with the EOR's plan. The
147 structure shall be visually inspected for signs of distress or imminent failure at
148 each load level. Measures shall be taken to prevent collapse if these or any other
149 unusual conditions are encountered.
150
151 The tested strength of the structure shall be taken as the maximum applied test
152 load plus the in-situ dead load. The live load rating of a floor structure shall be
153 determined by setting the tested strength equal to 1.2D + 1.6L, where D is the

APP5-4
154 nominal dead load and L is the nominal live load rating for the structure. For
155 roof structures, Lr, S or R shall be substituted for L,
156
157 where
158 Lr = nominal roof live load
159 R = nominal load due to rainwater or snow, exclusive of the ponding contri-
160 bution
161 S = nominal snow load
162
163 More severe load combinations shall be used where required by the applicable
164 building codes.
165
166 Periodic unloading is permitted once the service load level is attained, and after
167 the onset of inelastic structural behavior is identified, to document the amount
168 of permanent set and the magnitude of the inelastic deformations. Deformations
169 of the structure, such as member deflections, shall be monitored at critical lo-
170 cations during the test, referenced to the initial position before loading. It shall
171 be demonstrated, while maintaining maximum test load for one hour, that the
172
5, EW
deformation of the structure does not increase by more than 10% above that at
21
173 the beginning of the holding period. It is permissible to repeat the test loading
174 sequence if necessary to demonstrate compliance.
Y VI
175
20
176 Deformations of the structure shall also be recorded 24 hours after the test load-
AR E
177 ing is removed to determine the amount of permanent set.

U IC R
178
179 Where it is not feasible to load test the entire structure, a segment or zone of
180 not less than one complete bay representative of the most critical condition shall
BR BL
181 be selected.
182
183 3. Serviceability Evaluation
FE PU
184
185 When load tests are prescribed, the structure shall be loaded incrementally to
ED FT
186 the service load level. The service test load shall be held for a period of one
187 hour, and deformations shall be recorded at the beginning and at the end of the
188 one-hour holding period.
AT A
189
D DR
190 5.5. EVALUATION REPORT

191
192 After the evaluation of an existing structure has been completed, the EOR shall
193 prepare a report documenting the evaluation. The report shall indicate whether
194 the evaluation was performed by structural analysis, by load testing, or by a
195 combination of structural analysis and load testing. Furthermore, when testing
196 is performed, the report shall include the loads and load combination used and
197 the load-deformation and time-deformation relationships observed. All relevant
198 information obtained from design documents, material test reports, and auxil-
199 iary material testing shall also be reported. The report shall indicate whether
200 the structure, including all members and connections, can withstand the load
201 effects.

APP6-1
1 APPENDIX 6
2 MEMBER STABILITY BRACING

3
4
5 This appendix addresses the minimum strength and stiffness necessary for bracing to
6 develop the required strength of a column, beam, or beam-column. The appendix is
7 organized as follows:
8
10 6.2. Column Bracing
11 6.3. Beam Bracing
12 6.4. Beam-Column Bracing
13
14 User Note: Stability requirements for lateral force-resisting systems are provided in
15 Chapter C. The provisions in this appendix apply to bracing that is not generally in-
16 5, EW
cluded in the analysis model of the overall structure, but is provided to stabilize indi-
21
17 vidual columns, beams and beam-columns. Guidance for applying these provisions
18 to stabilize trusses is provided in the Commentary.
Y VI
19
20
AR E
21
U IC R
22 Bracing systems shall have the strength and stiffness specified in this Appen-
23 dix, as applicable. Where such a system braces more than one member, the
24 strength and stiffness of the bracing shall be based on the sum of the required
BR BL
25 strengths of all members being braced, and shall consider the flexibility of all
26 components in the system. The evaluation of the stiffness furnished by the
27 bracing shall include the effects of connections and anchoring details.
FE PU
28
29 User Note: More detailed analyses for bracing strength and stiffness are pre-
ED FT
30 sented in the Commentary.

31
32 A panel brace (formerly referred to as a relative brace) limitscontrols the an-
AT A
33 gular deviation of a segment of the braced member between braced points (that
D DR
34 is, the lateral displacement of one end of the segment relative to the other). A
35 point brace (formerly referred to as a nodal brace) limits controls the move-
36 ment at the braced point without direct interaction with adjacent braced points.
37 A continuous bracing system consists of bracing that is attached along the en-
38 tire member length.
39
40 The available strength and stiffness of the bracing members and connections
41 shall equal or exceed the required strength and stiffness, respectively, unless
42 analysis indicates that smaller values are justified.
43
44 Columns, beams, and beam-columns with end and intermediate braced points
45 designed to meet the requirements in Sections 6.2, 6.3, and 6.4, as applicable,
46 are permitted to be designed based on lengths Lc and Lb, as defined in Chapters
47 E and F, taken equal to the distance between the braced points.
48
49 In lieu of the requirements of Sections 6.2, 6.3, and 6.4,
50
51 (a) The required brace strength and stiffness can be obtained using a second-
52 order analysis that satisfies the provisions of Chapter C or Appendix 1, as
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings ####, 2022

APP6-2
53 appropriate, and includes brace points displaced from their nominal loca-
54 tions in a pattern that provides for the greatest demand on the bracing.
55 (b) The required bracing stiffness can be obtained as 2/φ (LRFD) or 2Ω
56 (ASD) times the ideal bracing stiffness determined from a buckling anal-
57 ysis. The required brace strength can be determined using the provisions
58 of Sections 6.2, 6.3, and 6.4, as applicable.
59 (c) For either of the above analysis methods, members with end or interme-
60 diate braced points meeting these requirements may be designed based on
61 effective lengths, Lc and Lb, taken less than the distance between braced
62 points.
63
64 User Note: The stability bracing requirements in Sections 6.2, 6.3, and 6.4
65 are based on buckling analysis models involving idealizations of common
66 bracing conditions. Computational analysis methods may be used for greater
67 generality, accuracy, and efficiency for more complex bracing conditions. The
68 Commentary to Section 6.1 provides guidance on these considerations.
69
70 6.2. COLUMN BRACING
71 5, EW
21
72 It is permitted to laterally brace an individual column at end and intermediate
73 points along its length using either panel or point bracing.
Y VI
74
20
75 User Note: This section provides requirements only for lateral bracing. Col-
AR E
76 umn lateral bracing is assumed to be located at the shear center of the column.
U IC R
77 When lateral bracing does not prevent limit twist, the column is susceptible to
78 torsional buckling, as addressed in Section E4. When the lateral bracing is
79 offset from the shear center, the column is susceptible to constrained-axis tor-
BR BL
80 sional buckling, which is also addressed in the commentary to Section E4 and

81 its accompanying Commentary.
FE PU
82
83 1. Panel Bracing
84
ED FT
85 The panel bracing system shall have the strength and stiffness specified in this
86 section. The connection of the bracing system to the column shall have the
87 strength specified in Section 6.2.2 for a point brace at that location.
AT A
88
D DR
89 User Note: If the stiffness of the connection to the panel bracing system is
90 comparable to the stiffness of the panel bracing system itself, the panel bracing
91 system and its connection to the column function as a panel and point bracing
92 system arranged in series. Such cases may be evaluated using the alternative
93 analysis methods listed in Section 6.1.
94
95 In the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the column, the re-
96 quired shear strength of the bracing system is:
97
98 Vbr = 0.005Pr (A-6-1)
99
100 and, the required shear stiffness of the bracing system is:
101
1  2P 
102 βbr =  r  (LRFD) (A-6-2a)
φ  Lbr 
103
 2P 
104 βbr = Ω  r  (ASD) (A-6-2b)
 Lbr 

APP6-3
105
106 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
107
108 where
109 Lbr = unbraced length within the panel under consideration, in. (mm)
110 Pr = required axial strength of the column within the panel under consid-
111 eration, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kips (N)
112
113 2. Point Bracing
114
115 In the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the column, the re-
116 quired strength of end and intermediate point braces is
117
118 Pbr = 0.01Pr (A-6-3)
119
120 and, the required stiffness of the brace is
121
1  8P 
122 5, EW βbr =  r  (LRFD) (A-6-4a)
21
φ  Lbr 
 8P 
Y VI
123
20 βbr = Ω  r  (ASD) (A-6-4b)
 Lbr 
AR E
124
U IC R
125 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)

126
127 where
BR BL
128 Lbr = unbraced length adjacent to the point brace, in. (mm)
129 Pr = largest of the required axial strengths of the column within the unbraced
FE PU
130 lengths adjacent to the point brace using LRFD or ASD load combina-
131 tions, kips (N)
132
ED FT
133 When the unbraced lengths adjacent to a point brace have different Pr Lbr val-
134 ues, the larger value shall be used to determine the required brace stiffness.
AT A
135
D DR
136 For intermediate point bracing of an individual column, Lbr in Equations A-6-
137 4a or A-6-4b need not be taken less than the maximum effective length, Lc,
138 permitted for the column based upon the required axial strength, Pr.
139
140 6.3. BEAM BRACING
141
142 Beams shall be restrained against rotation about their longitudinal axis at points
143 of support. When a braced point is assumed in the design between points of
144 support, lateral bracing, torsional bracing, or a combination of the two shall be
145 provided to prevent limit the relative displacement of the top and bottom
146 flanges (i.e., to prevent resist twist). In members subject to double curvature
147 bending, the inflection point shall not be considered a braced point unless brac-
148 ing is provided at that location.
149
150 The requirements of this section shall apply to bracing of doubly and singly
151 symmetric I-shaped members subjected to flexure within a plane of symmetry
152 and zero net axial force.
153
154 1. Lateral Bracing
155

APP6-4
156 Lateral bracing shall be attached at or near the beam compression flange, except
157 as follows:
158
159 (a) At the free end of a cantilevered beam, lateral bracing shall be attached at
160 or near the top (tension) flange.
161 (b) For braced beams subject to double curvature bending, bracing shall be
162 attached at or near both flanges at the braced point nearest the inflection
163 point.
164
165 It is permitted to use either panel or point bracing to provide lateral bracing for
166 beams.
167
168 1a. Panel Bracing
169
170 The panel bracing system shall have the strength and stiffness specified in this
171 section. The connection of the bracing system to the member shall have the
172 strength specified in Section 6.3.1b for a point brace at that location.
173
174
5, EW
User Note: The stiffness contribution of the connection to the panel bracing
21
175 system should be assessed as provided in the User Note to Section 6.2.1.
176
Y VI
177
20
The required shear strength of the bracing system is
178
AR E
M C 
U IC R
179 Vbr = 0.01 r d  (A-6-5)

 ho 
180
181 and, the required shear stiffness of the bracing system is
BR BL
182
1  4 M r Cd 
FE PU
183 βbr =   (LRFD) (A-6-6a)

φ  Lbr ho 
184
ED FT
 4M r Cd 
185 βbr = Ω   (ASD) (A-6-6b)
 Lbr ho 
AT A
D DR
186
187
188 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω = 2.00 (ASD)
189
190 where
191 Cd = 1.0, except in the following case:
192 = 2.0 for the brace closest to the inflection point in a beam subject to
193 double curvature bending
194 Lbr = unbraced length within the panel under consideration, in. (mm)
195 Mr = required flexural strength of the beam within the panel under consid-
196 eration, using LRFD or ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
197 ho = distance between flange centroids, in. (mm)
198
199 1b. Point Bracing
200
201 In the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the beam, the required
202 strength of end and intermediate point braces is
203
M C 
204 Pbr = 0.02  r d  (A-6-7)
 ho 

APP6-5
205
206 and, the required stiffness of the brace is
207
1  10 M r Cd 
208 βbr = (LRFD) (A-6-8a)
φ  Lbr ho 
 10 M r Cd 
209 βbr = Ω   (ASD) (A-6-8b)
 Lbr ho 
210
211 φ = 0.75 (LRFD) Ω= 2.00 (ASD)
212
213 where
215 M r = largest of the required flexural strengths of the beam within the un-
216 braced lengths adjacent to the point brace using LRFD or ASD load
218
219
5, EW
When the unbraced lengths adjacent to a point brace have different M r Lbr
21
220 values, the larger value shall be used to determine the required brace stiffness.
221
Y VI
222
20
For intermediate point bracing of an individual beam, Lbr in Equations A-6-
AR E
223 8a or A-6-8b need not be taken less than the maximum effective length, Lb ,
U IC R
224 permitted for the beam based upon the required flexural strength, M r .
225
226 2. Torsional Bracing
227
BR BL
228 It is permitted to attach torsional bracing at any cross-section location, and it

229 need not be attached near the compression flange.
FE PU
230
231 User Note: Torsional bracing can be provided as point bracing, such as cross-
232 frames, moment-connected beams or vertical diaphragm elements, or as con-
ED FT
233 tinuous bracing, such as slabs or decks.

234
AT A
235 2a. Point Bracing

D DR
236
237 About the longitudinal axis of the beam, the required flexural strength of the
238 brace is:
239
0.024M r L 0.024M r L
240 M br = M br =
nCb Lb nCb Lbr
241 (A-6-9)
242
243 and, the required flexural stiffness of the brace is:
244
βT
245 βbr = (A-6-10)
 βT 
1 − β 
 sec 
246
247 where
2
1 2.4 L  Mr 
248 βT =   (LRFD) (A-6-11a)
φ nEI yeff  Cb 

APP6-6
2
2.4 L  Mr 
249 βT = Ω   (ASD) (A-6-11b)
nEI yeff  Cb 
3.3E  1.5ho tw3 tst bs3 
250 βsec =  +  (A-6-12)
ho  12 12 
251 and
252
253 φ = 0.75 (LRFD); Ω = 3.00 (ASD)
254
2
255 User Note: Ω = 1.5 φ = 3.00 in Equations A-6-11a or A-6-11b, because the
256 moment term is squared.
257
258 βsec can be taken equal to infinity, and β br = βT , when a cross-frame is at-
259 tached near both flanges or a vertical diaphragm element is used that is approx-
260 imately the same depth as the beam being braced.
261
262 5, EW
E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi (200 000 MPa)
21
263 Iyeff = effective out-of-plane moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4)
264 = Iyc + (t/c)Iyt
Y VI
265
20
I yc = moment of inertia of the compression flange about the y-axis, in.4
AR E
266 (mm4)
U IC R
267 I yt = moment of inertia of the tension flange about the y-axis, in.4 (mm4)
268 L = length of span, in. (mm)
270 M r = largest of the required flexural strengths of the beam within the
BR BL
271 unbraced lengths adjacent to the point brace, using LRFD or ASD
272 load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
FE PU
273
Mr
274 = maximum value of the required flexural strength of the beam di-
ED FT
Cb
275 vided by the moment gradient factor, within the unbraced lengths
AT A
276 adjacent to the point brace, using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
D DR
277 kip-in. (N-mm)

278 bs = stiffener width for one-sided stiffeners, in. (mm)
279 = twice the individual stiffener width for pairs of stiffeners, in. (mm)
280 c = distance from the neutral axis to the extreme compressive fibers, in.
281 (mm)
282 n = number of braced points within the span
283 t = distance from the neutral axis to the extreme tensile fibers, in. (mm)
284 tw = thickness of beam web, in. (mm)
285 tst = thickness of web stiffener, in. (mm)
286 βT = overall brace system required stiffness, kip-in./rad (N-mm/rad)
287 βsec = web distortional stiffness, including the effect of web transverse
288 stiffeners, if any, kip-in./rad (N-mm/rad)
289
290 User Note: If βsec < βT, Equation A-6-10 is negative, which indicates that
291 torsional beam bracing will not be effective due to inadequate web distortional
292 stiffness.
293
294 User Note: For doubly symmetric members, c = t and Iyeff = out-of-plane mo-
295 ment of inertia, Iy, in.4 (mm4).
296

APP6-7
297 When required, a web stiffener shall extend the full depth of the braced mem-
298 ber and shall be attached to the flange if the torsional brace is also attached to
299 the flange. Alternatively, it is permissible to stop the stiffener short by a dis-
300 tance equal to 4tw from any beam flange that is not directly attached to the
301 torsional brace.
302
303 In Equation A-6-9, Lbr need not be taken less than the maximum unbraced
304 length permitted for the beam based upon the required flexural strength, Mr.
305
306 2b. Continuous Bracing
307
308 For continuous torsional bracing:
309
310 (a) The brace strength requirement per unit length along the beam shall be
311 taken as Equation A-6-9 divided by the maximum unbraced length per-
312 mitted for the beam based upon the required flexural strength, Mr. The
313 required flexural strength, Mr, shall be taken as the maximum value
314 throughout the beam span.
315
5, EW
(b) The brace stiffness requirement per unit length shall be given by Equations
21
316 A-6-10 and A-6-11 with L n = 1.0.
317 (c) The web distortional stiffness shall be taken as:
Y VI
318
20
AR E
3.3 Et w3
319 β sec = (A-6-13)
U IC R
12 ho
320
321 6.4. BEAM-COLUMN BRACING
322
BR BL
323 For bracing of beam-columns, the required strength and stiffness for the axial
324 force shall be determined as specified in Section 6.2, and the required strength
FE PU
325 and stiffness for flexure shall be determined as specified in Section 6.3. The
326 values so determined shall be combined as follows:
327
ED FT
328 (a) When panel bracing is used, the required strength shall be taken as the
329 sum of the values determined using Equations A-6-1 and A-6-5, and the
AT A
330 required stiffness shall be taken as the sum of the values determined using
D DR
331 Equations A-6-2 and A-6-6.

332
333 (b) When point bracing is used, the required strength shall be taken as the sum
334 of the values determined using Equations A-6-3 and A-6-7, and the re-
335 quired stiffness shall be taken as the sum of the values determined using
336 Equations A-6-4 and A-6-8. In Equations A-6-4 and A-6-8, Lbr for beam-
337 columns shall be taken as the actual unbraced length; the provisions in
338 Sections 6.2.2 and 6.3.1b, that Lbr need not be taken less than the maxi-
339 mum permitted effective length based upon Pr and M r , shall not be ap-
340 plied.
341
342 (c) When torsional bracing is provided for flexure in combination with panel
343 or point bracing for the axial force, the required strength and stiffness shall
344 be combined or distributed in a manner that is consistent with the re-
345 sistance provided by the element(s) of the actual bracing details.
346
347 (d) When the combined stress effect from axial force and flexure results in
348 compression to both flanges, either lateral bracing shall be added to both

APP6-8
349 flanges or both flanges shall be laterally restrained by a combination of

350 lateral and torsional bracing.
351
352 User Note: For case (d), additional guidelines are provided in the Commen-
353 tary.
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR

APP7-1
1 APPENDIX 7
2 ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF DESIGN FOR

3 STABILITY
4
5
6 This appendix presents alternatives to the direct analysis method of design for stabil-
7 ity defined in Chapter C. The two alternative methods covered are the effective length
8 method and the first-order analysis method.
9
11
12 7.1. General Stability Requirements
13 7.2. Effective Length Method
14 7.3. First-Order Analysis Method
15
16 7.1. 5, EW
GENERAL STABILITY REQUIREMENTS
21
17
Y VI
18 20
The general requirements of Section C1 shall apply. As an alternative to the
19 direct analysis method (defined in Sections C1 and C2), it is permissible to
AR E
20 design structures for stability in accordance with either the effective length
U IC R
21 method, specified in Section 7.2, or the first-order analysis method, specified

22 in Section 7.3, subject to the limitations indicated in those sections.
23
24 7.2. EFFECTIVE LENGTH METHOD
BR BL
25
26 1. Limitations
FE PU
27
28 When using the effective length method, the following conditions shall be met:
29
ED FT
30 (a) The structure supports gravity loads primarily through nominally vertical
31 columns, walls or frames.
AT A
32
D DR
33 (b) The ratio of maximum second-order drift to maximum first-order drift

34 (both determined for load and resistance factor design (LRFD) load com-
35 binations or 1.6 times allowable strength design (ASD) load combina-
36 tions, with stiffness not adjusted as specified in Section C2.3) in all stories
37 is equal to or less than 1.5.
38
39 User Note: The ratio of second-order drift to first-order drift in a story
40 may be taken as the B2 multiplier, calculated as specified in Appendix 8.
41
42 2. Required Strengths
43
44 The required strengths of components shall be determined from an elastic anal-
45 ysis conforming to the requirements of Section C2.1, except that the stiffness
46 reduction indicated in Section C2.1(a) shall not be applied; the nominal stiff-
47 nesses of all structural steel components shall be used. Notional loads shall be
48 applied in the analysis in accordance with Section C2.2b.
49
50 User Note: Since the condition specified in Section C2.2b(d) will be satisfied
51 in all cases where the effective length method is applicable, the notional load
52 need only be applied in gravity-only load cases.

APP7-2
53
54 3. Available Strengths
55
56 The available strengths of members and connections shall be calculated in ac-
57 cordance with the provisions of Chapters D through K, as applicable.
58
59 For flexural buckling, the effective length, Lc, of members subject to compres-
60 sion shall be taken as KL, where K is as specified in (a) or (b), in the following,
61 as applicable, and L is the laterally unbraced length of the member.
62
63 (a) In braced-frame systems, shear-wall systems, and other structural systems
64 where lateral stability and resistance to lateral loads does not rely on the
65 flexural stiffness of columns, the effective length factor, K, of members
66 subject to compression shall be taken as unity unless a smaller value is
67 justified by rational analysis.
68
69 (b) In moment-frame systems and other structural systems in which the flex-
70 ural stiffnesses of columns are considered to contribute to lateral stability
71
5, EW
and resistance to lateral loads, the effective length factor, K, or elastic crit-
21
72 ical buckling stress, Fe, of those columns whose flexural stiffnesses are
73 considered to contribute to lateral stability and resistance to lateral loads
Y VI
74
20
shall be determined from a sidesway buckling analysis of the structure; K
75 shall be taken as 1.0 for columns whose flexural stiffnesses are not con-
AR E
76 sidered to contribute to lateral stability and resistance to lateral loads.

U IC R
77
78 Exception: It is permitted to use K = 1.0 in the design of all columns if
79 the ratio of maximum second-order drift to maximum first-order drift
BR BL
80 (both determined for LRFD load combinations or 1.6 times ASD load
81 combinations) in all stories is equal to or less than 1.1.
82
FE PU
83 User Note: Methods of calculating the effective length factor, K, are dis-
84 cussed in the Commentary.
ED FT
85
86 Bracing intended to define the unbraced lengths of members shall have suffi-
87 cient stiffness and strength to control limit member movement at the braced
AT A
88 points.
D DR
89
90 User Note: Methods of satisfying the bracing requirement are provided in
91 Appendix 6. The requirements of Appendix 6 are not applicable to bracing
92 that is included in the design of the lateral force-resisting system of the over-
93 all structure.
94
95 7.3. FIRST-ORDER ANALYSIS METHOD
96
97 1. Limitations
98
99 When using the first-order analysis method, the following conditions shall be
100 met:
101
102 (a) The structure supports gravity loads primarily through nominally vertical
103 columns, walls or frames.
104
105 (b) The axial forces in nominally horizontal members in moment frames are
106 not larger than 10% of the elastic critical buckling strength of the member
107 in the plane of bending, Pe1, given by Equation A-8-5, with EI* taken as

APP7-3
108 0.8EI and 0.1FeAg with Lc1 taken as the unbraced length of the member (K
109 = 1).
110
111 (c) The ratio of maximum second-order drift to maximum first-order drift
112 (both determined for LRFD load combinations or 1.6 times ASD load
113 combinations, with stiffness not adjusted as specified in Section C2.3) in
114 all stories is equal to or less than 1.5.
115
116 User Note: The ratio of second-order drift to first-order drift in a story
117 may be taken as the B2 multiplier, calculated as specified in Appendix 8.
118
119 (d) The required axial compressive strengths of all members whose flexural
120 stiffnesses are considered to contribute to the lateral stability of the struc-
121 ture satisfy the limitation:
122
123 α Pr ≤ 0.5 Pns (A-7-1)
124
125 where
126 5, EW
α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
21
127 Pr = required axial compressive strength under LRFD or ASD load
Y VI
129
20
Pns = cross-section compressive strength; for nonslender-element sec-
AR E
130 tions, Pns = Fy Ag , and for slender-element sections,

U IC R
131 Pns = Fy Ae , where Ae is as defined in Section E7, with Fn = Fy,

132 kips (N)
133
BR BL
134 2. Required Strengths

135
136 The required strengths of components shall be determined from a first-order
FE PU
137 analysis, with additional requirements (a) and (b) given in the following. The
138 analysis shall consider flexural, shear and axial member deformations, and all
139 other deformations that contribute to displacements of the structure.
ED FT
140
141 (a) All load combinations shall include an additional lateral load, Ni, applied
AT A
142 in combination with other loads at each level of the structure:

D DR
143
144 N i = 2.1α( Δ L)Yi ≥ 0.0042Yi (A-7-2)
145
146 where
147 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
148 Yi = gravity load applied at level i from the LRFD load combina-
149 tion or ASD load combination, as applicable, kips (N)
150 Δ L = maximum ratio of Δ to L for all stories in the structure
151 Δ = first-order interstory drift due to the LRFD or ASD load com-
152 bination, as applicable, in. (mm). Where Δ varies over the
153 plan area of the structure, Δ shall be the average drift
154 weighted in proportion to vertical load or, alternatively, the
155 maximum drift.
156 L = height of story, in. (mm)
157
158 The additional lateral load at any level, Ni, shall be distributed over that
159 level in the same manner as the gravity load at the level. The additional
160 lateral loads shall be applied in the direction that provides the greatest de-
161 stabilizing effect.

APP7-4
162
163 User Note: For most building structures, the requirement regarding the
164 direction of Ni may be satisfied as follows: (a) For load combinations that
165 do not include lateral loading, consider two alternative orthogonal direc-
166 tions for the additional lateral load in a positive and a negative sense in
167 each of the two directions, same direction at all levels; (b) for load com-
168 binations that include lateral loading, apply all the additional lateral loads
169 in the direction of the resultant of all lateral loads in the combination.
170
171 (b) The nonsway amplification of beam-column moments shall be included
172 by applying the B1 amplifier of Appendix 8 to the total member moments.
173
174 User Note: Since there is no second-order analysis involved in the first-order
175 analysis method for design by ASD, it is not necessary to amplify ASD load
176 combinations by 1.6 before performing the analysis, as required in the direct
177 analysis method and the effective length method.
178
179 3. Available Strengths
180
5, EW
21
181 The available strengths of members and connections shall be calculated in ac-
182 cordance with the provisions of Chapters D through K, as applicable.
Y VI
183
20
184 The effective length for flexural buckling of all members shall be taken as the
AR E
185 unbraced length unless a smaller value is justified by rational analysis.

U IC R
186
187 Bracing intended to define the unbraced lengths of members shall have suffi-
188 cient stiffness and strength to control limit member movement at the braced
BR BL
189 points.
190
191 User Note: Methods of satisfying this requirement are provided in Appendix
FE PU
192 6. The requirements of Appendix 6 are not applicable to bracing that is in-
193 cluded in the analysis of the overall structure as part of the overall force-resist-
ED FT
194 ing system.

AT A
D DR

APP8-1
1 APPENDIX 8
2 APPROXIMATE ANALYSIS
3
4
5 This appendix provides approximate analysis procedures for determining the required
6 strength of structural members and connections.
8
9 8.1. Approximate Second-Order Elastic Analysis
10 8.2. Approximate Inelastic Moment Redistribution
11
12 8.1. APPROXIMATE SECOND-ORDER ELASTIC ANALYIS
13
14 Second-order effects in structures may be approximated by amplifying the re-
15 quired strengths determined by two first-order elastic analyses. The use of this
16 5, EW
procedure is limited to structures that support gravity loads primarily through
21
17 nominally vertical columns, walls or frames, except that it is permissible to use
18 the procedure specified for determining P-δ effects for any individual com-
Y VI
19
20
pression member. This method is not permitted for design by advanced analy-
AR E
20 sis using the provisions of Appendix 1.

21
U IC R
22 1. Calculation Procedure
23
24 The required second-order flexural strength, Mr, and axial strength,
BR BL
25 Pr, of all members shall be determined as:

26
FE PU
27 Mr = B1Mnt + B2Mlt (A-8-1)

28
29 Pr = Pnt + B2Plt (A-8-2)
ED FT
30
31 where
AT A
32 B1 = multiplier to account for P-δ effects, determined for

D DR
33 each member subject to compression and flexure, and

34 each direction of bending of the member in accordance
35 with Appendix 8, Section 8.1.2. B1 shall be taken as 1.0
36 for members not subject to compression.
37 B2 = multiplier to account for P-Δ effects, determined for
38 each story of the structure and each direction of lateral
39 translation of the story in accordance with Appendix 8,
40 Section 8.1.3.
41 Mlt = first-order moment using LRFD or ASD load combina-
42 tions, due to lateral translation of the structure only, kip-
43 in. (N-mm)
44 Mnt = first-order moment using LRFD or ASD load combina-
45 tions, with the structure restrained against lateral trans-
46 lation, kip-in. (N-mm)
47 Mr = required second-order flexural strength using LRFD or
48 ASD load combinations, kip-in. (N-mm)
49 Plt = first-order axial force using LRFD or ASD load combi-
50 nations, due to lateral translation of the structure only,
51 kips (N)
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ##, 2022

APP8-2
52 Pnt = first-order axial force using LRFD or ASD load combi-

53 nations, with the structure restrained against lateral
54 translation, kips (N)
55 Pr = required second-order axial strength using LRFD or
56 ASD load combinations, kips (N)
57
58 User Note: Equations A-8-1 and A-8-2 are applicable to all members in all
59 structures. Note, however, that B1 values other than unity apply only to mo-
60 ments in beam-columns; B2 applies to moments and axial forces in components
61 of the lateral force-resisting system (including columns, beams, bracing mem-
62 bers, and shear walls). See the Commentary for more on the application of
63 Equations A-8-1 and A-8-2.
64
65 2. Multiplier B1 for P-δ Effects
66
67 The B1 multiplier for each member subject to compression and each direction
68 of bending of the member is calculated as:
69
70 5, EW B1 =
Cm
≥1 (A-8-3)
21
1 − αPr Pe1
71 where
Y VI
72
20
α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
AR E
73 Cm = equivalent uniform moment factor, assuming no relative translation

U IC R
74 of the member ends, determined as follows:

75
76 (a) For beam-columns not subject to transverse loading between
77 supports in the plane of bending
BR BL
78
79 Cm = 0.6 − 0.4 ( M1 M 2 ) (A-8-4)
FE PU
80
81 where M1 and M2, calculated from a first-order analysis, are the
ED FT
82 smaller and larger moments, respectively, at the ends of that

83 portion of the member unbraced in the plane of bending under
AT A
84 consideration. M 1 M 2 is positive when the member is bent in

D DR
85 reverse curvature, and negative when bent in single curvature.

86
87 (b) For beam-columns subject to transverse loading between sup-
88 ports, the value of Cm shall be determined either by analysis or
89 conservatively taken as 1.0 for all cases.
90
91 Pe1 = elastic critical buckling strength of the member in the plane of
92 bending, calculated based on the assumption of no lateral transla-
93 tion at the member ends, kips (N)
π2 EI *
94 = (A-8-5)
( Lc1 )2
95 where
96 EI* = flexural rigidity required to be used in the analysis (=
97 0.8τbEI when used in the direct analysis method, where
98 τb is as defined in Chapter C; = EI for the effective length
99 and first-order analysis methods)
101 I = moment of inertia in the plane of bending, in.4 (mm4)

APP8-3
102 Lc1 = effective length in the plane of bending, calculated based

103 on the assumption of no lateral translation at the member
104 ends, set equal to the laterally unbraced length of the
105 member unless analysis justifies a smaller value, in.
106 (mm)
107
108 It is permitted to use the first-order estimate of Pr (i.e., Pr = Pnt + Plt ) in Equa-
109 tion A-8-3.
110
111 3. Multiplier B2 for P-Δ Effects
112
113 The B2 multiplier for each story and each direction of lateral translation is cal-
114 culated as:
115
1
116 B2 = ≥1 (A-8-6)
αPstory
1−
Pe story
117 where 5, EW
21
118 α = 1.0 (LRFD); α = 1.6 (ASD)
119 Pstory = total vertical load supported by the story using LRFD or ASD
Y VI
120
20 load combinations, as applicable, including loads in columns
AR E
121 that are not part of the lateral force-resisting system, kips (N)
U IC R
122 Pe story = elastic critical buckling strength for the story in the direction
123 of translation being considered, kips (N), determined by side-
124 sway buckling analysis or as:
H L
BR BL
125 = RM (A-8-7)
ΔH
FE PU
126 and
127 H = total story shear, in the direction of translation being consid-
128 ered, produced by the lateral forces used to compute ΔH, kips
ED FT
129 (N)
130 L = height of story, in. (mm)
AT A
131 RM = 1 – 0.15 (Pmf /Pstory) (A-8-8)

132 Pmf = total vertical load in columns in the story that are part of mo-
D DR
133 ment frames, if any, in the direction of translation being con-

134 sidered (= 0 for braced-frame systems), kips (N)
135 ΔH = first-order interstory drift, in the direction of translation be-
136 ing considered, due to lateral forces, in. (mm), computed using
137 the stiffness required to be used in the analysis. (When the di-
138 rect analysis method is used, stiffness is reduced according to
139 Section C2.3.) Where ΔH varies over the plan area of the struc-
140 ture, it shall be the average drift weighted in proportion to ver-
141 tical load or, alternatively, the maximum drift.
142
143 User Note: RM can be taken as 0.85 as a lower bound value for stories
144 that include moment frames, and RM = 1 if there are no moment
145 frames in the story. H and ΔH in Equation A-8-7 may be based on
146 any lateral loading that provides a representative value of story lateral
147 stiffness, H /ΔH.
148
149 8.2. APPROXIMATE INELASTIC MOMENT REDISTRIBUTION
150

APP8-4
151 The required flexural strength of indeterminate beams comprised of compact

152 sections, as defined in Section B4.1, carrying gravity loads only, and satisfying
153 the unbraced length requirements provided below in this Section, is permitted
154 to be taken as nine-tenths of the negative moments at the points of support,
155 produced by the gravity loading and determined by an elastic analysis satisfy-
156 ing the requirements of Chapter C, provided that the maximum positive mo-
157 ment is increased by one-tenth of the average negative moment determined by
158 an elastic analysis. This moment redistribution is not permitted for moments
159 in members with Fy exceeding 65 ksi (450 MPa), for moments produced by
160 loading on cantilevers, for design using partially restrained (PR) moment con-
161 nections, or for design by inelastic analysis using the provisions of Appendix
162 1.32. This moment redistribution is permitted for design according to Section
163 B3.1 (LRFD) and for design according to Section B3.2 (ASD). The required
164 axial strength shall not exceed 0.15φcFyAg for LRFD or 0.15FyAg/Ωc for ASD,
165 where φc and Ωc are determined from Section E1, Ag = gross area of member,
166 in.2 (mm2), and Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi (MPa).
167
168 The laterally unbraced length, Lb, of the compression flange adjacent to the
169 5, EW
redistributed end moment locations shall not exceed Lm determined as follows.
21
170
171 (a) For doubly symmetric and singly symmetric I-shaped beams with the Iyc
Y VI
172
20
of the compression flange equal to or larger than the Iyt of the tension
173 flange loaded in the plane of the web
AR E
174
U IC R
  M   E 
175 Lm = 0.12 + 0.076  1     ry (A-8-9)
  M 2    Fy 
BR BL
176
177 (b) For solid rectangular bars and for rectangular HSS and symmetric
FE PU
178 box beams bent about their major axis

179
  M   E   E 
180 Lm = 0.17 + 0.10  1     ry ≥ 0.10   ry (A-8-10)
ED FT
  M 2    Fy   Fy 
181
AT A
182 where
D DR
183 Fy =specified minimum yield stress of the compression flange, ksi (MPa)
184 M1 = smaller moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm)
185 M2 = larger moment at end of unbraced length, kip-in. (N-mm)
187 ( M1 M2 ) is positive when moments cause reverse curvature and negative
188 for single curvature
189
190 There is no limit on Lb for members with round or square cross sections or for
191 any beam bent about its minor axis.
192
193

APP X-1
1 APPENDIX X
2 DESIGN OF FILLED COMPOSITE MEMBERS WITH
3 HIGH-STRENGTH MATERIA(HIGH-STRENGTH)LS
4
5
6 This appendix provides methods for calculating the design strength of filled
7 composite members with high-strength materialsconstructed from either one or both
8 materials (steel or concrete) with strengths above the limits noted in Section I1.3.
9 These provisions shall be used in lieu of Sections I1.2, I1.3, I1.4, I2, I3, and I5.
10 OtherAll other provisions of Chapter I shall apply.
11
12 X.1. RECTANGULAR FILLED COMPOSITE MEMBERS
13
14 1. Limitations
15
16 For rectangular filled composite members, the following limitations shall be
17 met:
18 5, EW
21
19 (a) The area of the steel section shall comprise at least 1% of the total
20 composite cross section.
Y VI
20
21 (b) Concrete shall be normal weight, and the specified compressive strength
AR E
22 of concrete, f′c, shall not exceed 15 ksi (103 MPa).

U IC R
23 (c) The specified minimum yield stress of steel, Fy, shall not exceed 100 ksi
24 (690 MPa).
BR BL
25 (d) The maximum permitted width-to-thickness ratio for compression steel

26 elements shall be limited to 5.00 E Fy .
FE PU
27 (e) Longitudinal reinforcement is not required. If longitudinal refinforcement

28 is provided, it shall not be considered in the calculation of available
ED FT
29 strength,. and the minimum reinforcement requirements of Sections I2.2a

30 and I3.4a shall apply.
AT A
31
32 2. Compressive Strength
D DR
33
34 The available compressive strength shall be determined in accordance with
35 Section I2.2b with the following modifications:
36

Public review Draft Dated February 5, 2021
APP X-2
37
38 Pno = Fn As + 0.85 fc′Ac (A-X-1)
39
40 Fn = (1.0 − 0.075λ ) Fy (A-X-2)
41
42 where
44 As = area of steel section, in.2 (mm2)
45 Fn = critical buckling stress for steel section of filled composite members,
46 kips (N)
48 effects, kips (N)
49 λ = largest maximum width-to-thickness ratio of compression steel
50 elements
51
52 3. Flexural Strength
53
54 5, EW
The available flexural strength shall be determined as follows:
21
55
56 φb = 0.90 (LRFD) Ωb = 1.67 (ASD)
Y VI
57
20
AR E
58 The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be determined as 90% of the moment
59 corresponding to a plastic stress distribution over the composite cross section
U IC R
60 assuming that steel components have reached a stress of either Fy in tension or

61 and Fcr Fn in compression, where Fcr Fn is calculated using Equation A-X-2,
62 and concrete components in compression have reached a stress of 0.85 fc′ ,
BR BL
63 where fc′ is the specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (MPa).

FE PU
64
65
66 4. Combined Flexure and Axial Force
ED FT
67
68 The interaction of flexure and compression shall be limited by Equations I5-1a
AT A
69 and I5-1b where the term cp is determined using Equation A-X-3 and cm is
70 determined using Equation A-X-4.
D DR
0.075  0.3   fc′ 

71 c p = 0.175 − + λ   (A-X-3)
B H  Pn Pno   Fy 
2
  Fy  f c' 
max
 P  B
72 cm = 0.6 + 0.3  n  + 0.6λ    
  Fy 
 Pno  H   Fy  
2
 P  B   Fy ,max  f c′ 
73 cm = 0.6 + 0.3  n  + 0.6λ    
   (A-X-4)
P
 no  H   Fy   Fy 
74

APP X-3
75 where
76 B = flange width of rectangular cross section, in. (mm)
77 H = web depth of rectangular cross section, in. (mm)
78 Fy,maxmax = maximum permitted yield stress of steel = 100 ksi (690 MPa)
79 Pn = nominal axial strength calculated in accordance with Section X.1.12,
80 kips (N)
82 effects calculated in accordance with Section X.1.2, kips (N)
83 t = flange thickness, in. (mm)
84
5, EW
21
Y VI
20
AR E
U IC R
BR BL
FE PU
ED FT
AT A
D DR


AISC 360 - Draft - 2021 02 05

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AISC 360 - Draft - 2021 02 05

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AISC 360 - Draft - 2021 02 05

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AISC 360-xx

NOTE: The tracked revisions in this

Supersedes the Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION

American Institute of Steel Construction

Printed in the United States of America

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, xxxx,2022

21 Ae Effective net area as defined in Section D3, in.2(mm2) ........................J4.1

26 Afc Area of compression flange, in.2 (mm2) ............................................. G2.2

32 Ag Gross area of angle, in.2 (mm2) ...................................................... F10.2

35 Ag Gross area of composite member, in.2 (mm2) .................................... I2.1a

36 Agv Gross area subject to shear, in.2 (mm2) ................................................J4.2

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

78 .................................................................................. App. 4.3.2b

82 Cm Equivalent uniform moment factor assuming no relative translation of

84 Cr Reduction factor for shear rupture on pin-connected members ......... D5.1

88 C1 Coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of encased composite com-

90 C2 Edge distance increment, in. (mm) ........................................... Table J3.5

91 C3 Coefficient for calculation of effective rigidity of filled composite com-

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

131 Fe Elastic buckling stress, ksi (MPa) ..........................................................E3

133 elastic local buckling analysis, ksi (MPa) .......................................... E7.1

137 limit states apply, ksi (MPa) ............................................................... F4.2

139 (MPa)…. ............................................................................................ I2.2b

146 ......................................................................................... App. 5.3.2a

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

165 Fu Specified minimum tensile strength of the connected material, ksi

195 H Ambient temperature thermal capacity of the steel column, Btu/ft °F

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

243 L Length of span, in. (mm) ........................................................ App. 6.3.2a

256 the cross section, in. (mm) ................................................................ F11.2

258 in. (mm) .............................................................................................J10.4

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

311 Mn Nominal flexural strength due to yielding at ambient temperature deter-

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

331 Mr Required flexural strength, determined in accordance with Section I1.5,

354 mm) .................................................................................. App. 4.2.4e

364 in. (N-mm) .............................................................................. App. 1.3.2c

366 ............................................................................ F13.5App. 1.3.2c

368 ............................................................................ F13.5App. 1.3.2c

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

419 Pp Plastic axial compressive strength, kips (N) ...................................... I2.2b

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

442 ........................................................................................................... I6.2a

465 kips (N) .............................................................................................. I3.2d

469 Qrv Required shear strength, kips (N) ...................................................... I8.3c

472 R Fire-resistance rating of column assembly, hours .................. App. 4.3.2a

475 Ra Required strength using ASD load combinations ............................. B3.2

477 ..................................................................................................... App. 3.3

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

498 RPJP Reduction factor for reinforced or nonreinforced transverse partial-joint-

520 .......................................................................................................... F13.1

531 Tc Available torsional strength, φTn or Tn/Ω, determined in accordance with

533 Tcr Critical temperature in °F (°C)................................................ App. 4.2.4e

535 in accordance with ACI 216.1, in. (mm)................................. App. 4.3.2a

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ####

553 Vc2 Available shear buckling strength, kips (N)....................................... G2.4

575 allel to the direction of force, in. (mm) .............................................. D5.1

582 nents F4.2